• Select one of the modules presented in the instructions below.
• Provide accurate and appropriate responses to the five worksheet questions associated with the module’s case study.
• Explain your answers using critical thinking and research.
• Please let me know if the links to the worksheets doesn’t work for you

Ethics
and
Public Health:
Model
Curriculum
Editors:
Bruce Jennings, MA
The Hastings Center
Jeffrey Kahn, PhD, MPH
University of Minnesota
Anna Mastroianni, JD, MPH
University of Washington
Lisa S. Parker, PhD
University of Pittsburgh
Ethics and Public Health:
Model Curriculum
Editors:
Bruce Jennings, MA Jeffrey Kahn, PhD, MPH
The Hastings Center University of Minnesota
Anna Mastroianni, JD, MPH Lisa S. Parker, PhD
University of Washington University of Pittsburgh
This project was supported under a cooperative agreement from the Health Resources and Services
Administration (HRSA) through the Association of Schools of Public Health (ASPH). Grant Number 1D-
38AH10001-05. The contents of this report are solely the responsibility of the authors and do not
necessarily represent the official views of HRSA or ASPH.
v
Preface
There is a growing interest in the ethical, legal, and social aspects of public health policy and practice.
This interest no doubt has been fueled by the threat of bioterrorism after 9/11. But it had been growing
for some time before that in the wake of various infectious disease outbreaks and with the growing
recognition that public health issues are inseparable from issues of human rights and social justice,
problems of cultural and behavioral change, and environmental issues on a global scale. With this
growing interest in ethics in public health comes a demand for the teaching of ethics and for resource
materials to support it. Ethics education is needed both in pre-professional degree and certificate
programs, and in settings of continuing professional education. This model curriculum for Ethics in
Public Health is intended as a resource to enhance and encourage thoughtful, well informed, and
critical discussions of ethical issues in the field.
Ethics in Public Health: A Model Curriculum grew out of a series of meetings and discussions by
leading researchers and educators in public health beginning with a meeting convened in Washington
DC in May 2000. This meeting was sponsored by the Association of Schools of Public Health (ASPH)
and the Health Resources and Service Administration (HRSA). It brought together teachers of ethics
from nearly every school of public health, other experts in ethics and public health, and representatives
of the government and public health practice communities. One of the clearest recommendations to
come out of that meeting was that educational materials and resources should be developed to enhance
curricular and continuing professional education offerings. HRSA generously agreed to fund the
development of a collection of modules, through their Cooperative Agreement with ASPH.
In June 2001 a special advisory group was formed and met in Washington to plan the new curriculum.
During this period The Hastings Center was working on a project funded by the Robert Wood Johnson
Foundation to promote the discussion of ethical issues within public health. This effort converged so
well with the HRSA/ASPH effort that the two groups joined forces and their collaboration began with
the advisory meeting. At that meeting it was agreed that the curriculum would take the form of several
self-contained units or modules, each written by a leading expert on the topic in question, and each
containing the same types of resources for classroom use—an analysis of the ethical question, several
case studies with commentary for discussion, resources for further study and research, and the like.
Shortly after the June 2001 advisory group meeting experts in ethics and public health were recruited to
write the modules, with the understanding that they would work closely with local members of the
public health practice community to be sure that concerns and issues from the practice community were
well represented. The input of the practice community was critical to the quality and credibility of the
modules, and we thank these consultants for their generous participation.
During the period in which the modules were being developed, meetings and workshops continued the
discussion begun in Washington. These included a working group on ethics and public health at The
Hastings Center, a summer workshop on ethics and public health co-sponsored by the University of
Minnesota Center for Bioethics and The Hastings Center, and conference workshops on teaching ethics
in public health at annual meetings of both the American Public Health Association and the American
Society for Bioethics and Humanities.
We trust that this collection will serve as the springboard for many discussions of public health ethics in
classrooms and workshops, and we hope that the curriculum development discussion continues as well.
vi
Since the modules exist in electronic form, we see them as continuing works in progress. To that end,
we hope that those who use these materials will provide us with feedback about what works, what needs
improvement, and what additional information and topics might be added to future editions of this
curriculum. You can e-mail your comments to either Jeff Kahn at kahnx009@umn.edu, or Bruce
Jennings at publichealthcurriculum@thehastingscenter.org and please type “public health ethics
modules” in the subject line.
The development of this curriculum was made possible by the support of HRSA and the Robert Wood
Johnson Foundation, and through the cooperation of ASPH, the University of Minnesota Center for
Bioethics, and The Hastings Center.
Finally, the entire project could not have been completed without the staff at ASPH, who included
Wendy Katz, Sandra Maldague, and Monica Stadtler. We thank them, along with all those who
participated in the many workshops and conferences for their input and insights. Lastly, we offer our
sincere thanks to the modules’ authors who enthusiastically undertook the task of creating this valuable
resource for the public health community.
Bruce Jennings
Jeffrey Kahn
Anna Mastroianni
Lisa Parker
July 2003
vii
LIST OF CONTRIBUTORS
Hilary K. Alvarez
Dartmouth College
Ronald Bayer, PhD
Joseph L. Mailman School of Public Health, Columbia University
Ruth Gaare Bernheim, PhD
Institute for Practical Ethics, University of Virginia
Richard Bonnie, LLB
School of Law, University of Virginia
Michael Garland, D.Sc.Rel.
Department of Public Health and Preventive Medicine, Oregon Health & Science University
Lawrence O. Gostin, J.D., LL.D (Hon.)
Georgetown University Law Center
Elizabeth Heitman, PhD
University of Mississippi Medical Center, Jackson, Mississippi and
University of Texas School of Public Health, Houston, Texas
Bruce Jennings, MA
The Hastings Center
Jeffrey Kahn, PhD, MPH
Center for Bioethics, University of Minnesota
Patricia A. Marshall, PhD
Department of Bioethics, Case Western Reserve University
Anna C. Mastroianni, JD, MPH
University of Washington School of Law and Institute for Public Health Genetics
Laura C. McKieran, DrPH
El Centro del Barrio, San Antonio, Texas
viii
Phillip Nieburg, MD, MPH
Center for Biomedical Ethics, University of Virginia
Lisa S. Parker, PhD
Center for Bioethics and Health Law, University of Pittsburgh
Kristin Shrader-Frechette, PhD
Department of Biological Sciences and Department of Philosophy, University of Notre Dame
John Stull, MD, MPH
Department of Public Health and Preventive Medicine, Oregon Health & Science University
James Thomas, MPH, PhD
School of Public Health, University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill
Stephen Thomas, PhD
School of Public Health, University of Pittsburgh
ix
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Module 1:
Tradition, Profession, and Values in Public Health
Lawrence O. Gostin, J.D., LL.D (Hon.) ……………………………………………………………..Page 13
Module 2:
The Legacy of the Tuskegee Syphilis Study
Lisa S. Parker, PhD; Hilary K. Alvarez; Stephen Thomas, PhD ………………………………..Page 37
Introduction to Modules 3 and 4:
Research Ethics in Public Health
James Thomas, MPH, PhD …………………………………………………………………………….Page 75
Module 3:
Public Health Research and Practice in International Settings: Special
Ethical Concerns
Patricia A. Marshall, PhD………………………………………………………………………………Page 85
Module 4:
Community-Based Practice and Research: Collaboration and Sharing Power
Elizabeth Heitman, PhD; Laura C. McKieran, DrPH……………………………………………..Page 103
Module 5:
Ethics and Infectious Disease Control: STDs, HIV, TB
Ronald Bayer, PhD ………………………………………………………………………………………Page 133
Module 6:
Ethics of Health Promotion and Disease Prevention
Ronald Bayer, PhD ………………………………………………………………………………………Page 147
Module 7:
Ethical Issues in Environmental and Occupational Health
Kristin Shrader-Frechette, PhD ……………………………………………………………………….Page 159
Module 8:
Public Health Genetics: Screening Programs and Individual Testing/Counseling
Ruth Gaare Bernheim, PhD; Richard Bonnie, LLB; Phillip Nieburg, MD, MPH……………Page 193
Module 9:
Public Health and Health System Reform: Access, Priority Setting, and
Allocation of Resources
Michael Garland, D.Sc.Rel.; John Stull, MD, MPH ………………………………………………Page 241
Introduction
1
INTRODUCTION:
A Strategy for Discussing Ethical Issues in Public Health
Bruce Jennings, M.A.
The Hastings Center
Yale School of Public Health
This is a general introduction and orientation to the ethics and public health curriculum. It explains the
goals and strategy for ethics education and training and provides guidance about the skills of facilitating
an ethics discussion with adult learners.
Why This Curriculum Was Created
Public health policy and interventions are always the product of controversy, and often remain
surrounded by controversy as they are implemented. Routinely in public health, scientific considerations
blend with political and ethical conflicts, and questions of autonomy, individual rights, coercion,
justice, community, the common good, the norms of research, and multi-cultural values are central. In
public health today several different types of political and moral theory overlap, converge, and contend
with one another, including libertarian liberalism, egalitarian liberalism, utilitarianism, human rights
frameworks, and communitarianism. This curriculum will explore the “application” of ethics to a broad
range of contemporary public health issues. It is intended for use both in pre-service educational
programs at the undergraduate and graduate level, and for in-service continuing professional education
settings in public health agencies and related organizations.
This curriculum and facilitator’s guide offers a planned approach to the discussion of ethical and values
issues in public health. It is designed to help you identify appropriate topics and issues for discussion—
issues that are pertinent to the public health practitioner and policymaker, and issues that lend
themselves to an in-depth discussion of the often-conflicting values and ethical dilemmas raised by
current public health knowledge and its applications.
Ethical issues are rarely neat, tidy, or cut-and dried. The questions of genetics, international and
community based research, the control of infectious disease, and others that have been selected for this
program are particularly difficult. They pose ethical “dilemmas” rather than black and white moral
questions. They involve quandaries about which well-informed persons of good will can reasonably
disagree.
For this reason, these materials will not offer clear-cut answers to many of the ethical issues raised. The
best and most responsible thing an educational program can do in the face of these moral and social
dilemmas is to provide public health practitioners with many perspectives on the issues, and to guide
their own reasoning processes toward conclusions with which not everyone will necessarily agree, but
which can stand up under close scrutiny and open dialogue with others.
Introduction
2
What is Ethics?
Terms like “ethics,” “morals,” “morality,” and “values” will occur frequently in this curriculum. It would
be helpful to define them clearly and succinctly at the outset. Unfortunately, however, this is not easy or
even possible to do.
Ethics and morals are most often used interchangeably, so that the sentence “He acted ethically,” and
the sentence “He acted morally,” mean the same thing. Sometimes, though, morality (or morals) is
defined as the beliefs and standards of good and bad, right and wrong, that people actually do and
should follow in a society, while ethics is defined as the systematic study of morality. Ethics, in other
words, is the theory and morality is the practice; morality is what people do and believe, ethics gives a
philosophical account of justified behavior and belief.
Moral values are those things that people should prize and promote. Values are names for states of
affairs that conform to what is ethically right and that further the human good (or the good of all
beings).
Understood as the systematic study of morality, ethics is often divided into two subfields, metaethics
and normative ethics. The relationship between them may be compared to the relationship between the
philosophy of science, on the one hand, and science itself, on the other. Metaethics tries to clarify the
rational standards and methods for the study of ethics, much as philosophy of science tries to clarify the
nature and method of scientific inquiry. Normative ethics is where the substance of ethics resides. It
develops ethical principles, rules, and ideals that spell out standards of good and bad, right and wrong.
Normative ethics tries to offer a substantive, albeit general answer to the questions, What should I do?
And How ought I to live? And it tries to spell out reasons why a rational person ought to accept the
answer it gives.
Bioethics is normative ethics applied to decisionmaking and public policy in the domains of biology,
medicine, and health care. It is concerned with matters of basic scientific research and with the social
applications of biological knowledge and biomedical technology. Medical ethics, the ethics of the
physician’s role, is as old as medicine itself. But bioethics is a newer, broader field of study that has
arisen largely during the past twenty to thirty years as new powers, new choices, and new dilemmas have
been opened up by the biological revolution.
Public health ethics, in turn, has arisen along side bioethics and the two fields of applied ethics have
many strong affinities and connections. Just as the perspective and focus of public health often differs
from that of clinical medicine, however, so too are there important differences between bioethics and
medical ethics, on the one hand, and public health ethics on the other. In a nutshell, the difference can
be characterized by the individualistic orientation of clinical medicine and the social or population
based perspective of public health. Public health deals with patterns of disease, the social determinants
of disease, and collective and institutional solutions to alleviate the risk or burden of disease in a
population and to affect the distribution of health benefit and disease burden in a society, or globally.
Nonetheless, public health should not overlook the rights, interests, and freedom of the individual.
Whenever possible, public health goals should be reconciled with the promotion of human rights and
the protection of civil liberties. If there is an inevitable clash between public health and civil liberties,
then the situation must be open to public debate, the elements of the conflict should be made explicit,
Introduction
3
and rigorous, critical reasoning should be brought to bear on the relative benefits and burdens of a
particular policy or intervention.
A Strategy for Ethics Education
Many teachers or facilitators find group discussions of ethics and values frustrating and difficult because
such discussions tend to jump all over the place. They may seem to have no rhyme or reason, no logical
order or sequence of information to discover and points to consider. Ethics discussions seem to have
no starting point, no sense of progress and forward movement, and, worst of all, no satisfying
resolution or conclusion.
Ethics discussions need not be like this; they need not be an educator’s nightmare. They can—and
should—follow an orderly progression of steps. And they can end, if not always with firm, agreed-upon
conclusions, then at least with the feeling that something has been clarified—people have been led to
think.
As with any education program, regardless of the subject matter, achieving these results when
discussing public health ethics requires careful planning and some background preparation by the
discussion leader or facilitator. If you have a good grasp of the issues on all sides of a question (which
is not the same thing as having strong personal convictions on one side or another), then you will be in
a position to guide the class discussion so that the participants are led to discover and express these
issues themselves and to think thoroughly about the pros and cons. Much of the material in this
instructor’s guide is designed to provide the background information and ideas that will assist
facilitators in this way.
Moreover, to keep the participant’s thinking about ethical questions focused and moving forward, you
need to devise a strategy for analyzing ethical questions in concrete cases or situations. A strategy for
guiding discussion and learning gives you an overview of what a good ethics discussion should contain
and where it should lead.
The strategy we recommend for use with these educational materials and case studies consists of the
following six steps or tasks to complete during each module. Completing these tasks is one way to
provide a structure for discussion and to keep it focused. Completing these tasks is also one way to
ensure that the participants are given a thorough exposure to the ethical issues in each unit.
Identify the ethical problem(s) germane to the decision. What has to be decided, by whom, and
what ethical problem(s) does this decision seem to raise? In complex cases this problem identification
step will actually be only a “first cut”; the identification of the problem will be refined and revised as the
situation is understood more deeply and as the ethical values and concepts that explain why the
problem is a problem are articulated.
Assess the factual information available to the decisionmaker(s). Of all the facts that are known
now, which are relevant to the ethical problem, and which are not relevant? For example, the fact that a
pregnant woman has brown hair is not relevant to the ethical question of genetic screening, while the
fact that she has a history of cystic fibrosis in her family is. Equally important, what is not known that
should be known before a decision is made, and how can that information be obtained? Finally, how
Introduction
4
reliable is the information we have, and what type of information is it? How can we separate fact from
hearsay or opinion? How can we assess probabilistic information in making ethical decisions?
Identify the “stakeholders” in the decision. Who will be affected by the decision, and in what ways?
How directly will they be affected—if they will be harmed is the harm justified by greater benefit to
others? Is the harm intended by the decision-maker or is it merely foreseeable? Have they placed
themselves in a position to be harmed voluntarily and with appropriate information and understanding
of the risks involved? Or are they “innocent bystanders”? How do all these factors affect the weighing of
benefits and harms involved in the decision?
Identify the values at stake in the decision. Values are those things that have significance or worth
relative to some state of affairs, such as human well-being, respect for persons, or fairness that is taken
to be good or desirable in itself. In this step the values that seem relevant to the situation should be
identified and discussed. Here the instructor can provide a kind of common vocabulary of concepts to
assist with the discussion, for participants will often grasp the concept without having the commonly
used word or label to express it. Freedom, truth telling, protecting another from harm, fairness, respect
for other people, empathy, altruism, the growth of scientific knowledge—these are a few of the values
that are typically presented by cases in public health ethics.
Identify the options available to the decisionmaker. At first glance, many ethical cases seem to pose
very stark moral choices, even tragic choices where no outcome is without significant human cost. There
are tragic choices in life, it is true, and it is important for participants to be able to face that fact and
consider how they will learn to live with the decision they had to make. But it is equally important not to
give the impression that all moral choices are tragic choices. Part of the skill of thinking analytically
about moral decisionmaking is to see beyond artificially narrow options and forced choices. Insightful
moral reasoning is often a process of resisting forced choice, and wiggling out of a moral dead end in
order to find some more acceptable alternative. Would more information enable us to see more options
here? Can we wait until that information is available? Is some compromise or middle way possible that
will respect a broader range of values and more stakeholders’ interests than any other option? Ethical
decisionmaking is akin to creative problem solving, and seeking the Yes-Yes or Win-Win solution.
Consider the process for making the decision and the values that pertain to the process. A few
such values would be authority, legitimacy, participation, and due process rights to be heard and to
appeal. These topics may appear legalistic, but they apply in virtually any decisionmaking situation to
some extent, in families no less than in bureaucratic or legal settings. Should I be the one making this
decision? To what extent and in what ways should I involve others in the decision? Will the outcome of
my decision be shaped by the cooperation of others with the decision I have made, and will their
willingness to cooperate be shaped by whether or not they view my decision as fair and legitimate? If the
ethical justification of my decision hinges on a good outcome I expect, but if that good outcome
assumes the cooperation of others, then ethically I also have to take steps to assure that cooperation
beforehand. So what I decide is only half of the ethical equation. How I decide is also important.
What Should You Try To Accomplish?: Learning Objectives
The goals of ethics education at various developmental levels remains a subject of considerable
controversy. Our program does not assume that the teaching of ethics will automatically produce
professionals who are more ethical in their personal choices and behavior than they would be without
Introduction
5
the instruction proposed by the program. That goal demands too much—clearly there are many more
important sources of moral belief and motivation in their lives than a few hours of discussion in a
classroom or a conference room. But, in another way, that goal also demands too little—for the
teaching of ethics is concerned not only with how people behave but also with the reasons they have for
behaving as they do.
There are five general goals of ethics education that have guided the development of these materials
and that facilitators should bear in mind when using them.

1. Stimulating the Moral Imagination. Ethics education should produce a blend of cognitive and
   affective components. Ethical thinking, judgment, and sensibility are neither matters of pure, abstract
   intellect nor of unreflective “gut feelings” and prejudices. Regardless of the specific subject matter
   under discussion, guiding your participants or colleagues through the components of ethical reasoning
   can help them gain a better appreciation of the fact that human beings live their lives in a web of moral
   relationships. It will also show them that moral conflicts, which are frequently inevitable and difficult,
   involve high stakes in the lives of real people. Stimulating the moral imagination involves the ability to
   gain a feel for the lives of others, some sense of the motions and the feelings that are provoked by
   difficult ethical choices, and some insight into how moral viewpoints influence the way individuals live
   their lives. And the goal is not simply to stimulate but also to broaden the moral imagination—to begin
   with what people at first feel to be right or good, but then to deepen and sometimes to challenge and
   change those feelings by transforming them into more reflective judgments and more sophisticated and
   well-informed convictions.
2. Recognizing Ethical Issues. Ethics education is not unlike scientific education in one respect: it
   involves a certain structuring of perception, a certain kind of “seeing as.” To see a certain state of affairs
   or decision as a moral issue is to see that it raises considerations of human value, and that it has
   significant implications for harms or benefits human beings experience. To see something as a moral
   issue is also to see that it involves questions of human freedom and choice, that it could be different
   from what it is, and that the way the choice it permits is made significantly affects the rights and wellbeing
   of individuals involved in or affected by the choice.
3. Developing Analytical Skills. Ethical analysis involves the use of a certain set of prescriptive and
   evaluative categories, such as rights, duties, virtue, justice, responsibility, freedom, respect, dignity, and
   well being. These categories comprise the basic moral vocabulary of our society. However, they are
   difficult to define and their meaning is never determined once and for all, but is worked out instead in a
   process of dialogue, moral disagreement and debate. Participants need to acquire the ability to use
   these concepts in constructing arguments that are logical, consistent, and defensible in the face of
   reasoned disagreement and challenge. Analytical skills also involve the ability to make conceptual
   distinctions so that ethical claims are not unduly broad and undiscriminating. Finally, the ability to
   detach oneself from personal interests and parochial perspectives is an analytical ability that must be
   practiced and learned. During the course of discussion it is a good idea to check for the presence of
   this detachment from time to time. If a participant states or agrees with a moral rule that would limit the
   freedom of others, ask if he or she would be willing to have the rule applied to his or her behavior too.
4. Eliciting a Sense of Moral Obligation and Responsibility. Ethics discussions usually start with
   simple assumptions and beliefs, challenge them, and replace them with more nuanced thinking. In this
   way, ethical analysis sometimes makes moral choice more, not less, difficult and complex. And properly
   Introduction
   6
   so. On the other hand, in ethics teaching you should be careful not to paralyze or intimidate the
   participant with such hard cases or dilemmas that ethics seems hopeless. The point is to enable them to
   make better, more thoughtful choices, not to make choices seem impossible or simply arbitrary, like a
   coin toss. The goal is to enable participants to see when and how their own actions and choices do
   make a difference in the lives of others as well as in their own life. It is to motivate them to take action
   in accordance with ethical commitments and to assume a sense of responsibility for their own conduct,
   as well as for the effects of their conduct on others.
5. Coping with Moral Ambiguity. It is simply a fact of life that we must learn to tolerate
   disagreements and to accept the inevitable ambiguities that arise when examining ethical problems.
   Many ethical issues admit of no final, clear resolution. Reasonable persons of good will may disagree on
   the course of action that ethical considerations require. Yet while we must tolerate disagreement and
   ambiguity, we must also attempt to locate and clarify the sources of disagreement, to resolve
   ambiguities as far as possible, and to see if ways can be found to overcome differences of moral
   viewpoint and belief. Group discussion built around the ethics modules in this curriculum can model
   these goals. Through directed group discussion you can demonstrate that progress can be made in
   reducing disagreement, and in gaining a narrower, and perhaps more manageable, area of
   disagreement. It is important not to simply assert this but to show how it can happen. Participants
   should be led to understand that there are general standards by which to judge the quality of ethical
   arguments, that disagreements are inevitable but can be reduced, and that ethical perspectives can be
   detached from pure subjectivity or self-interest. Questions of right and wrong, good and bad may finally
   admit of no single or final answer, but this does not mean that the answers we do and must give are
   simply matters of taste.
   Leading Ethics Discussions
   It is perfectly natural to feel uncomfortable with the subject matter of public health ethics and with the
   special challenges of “teaching ethics.” Most public health professionals who will be using these
   materials will not have any formal training in philosophy or ethics.
   Make no mistake: the key to any successful group discussion of ethical questions lies in the skill of the
   facilitator who guides the discussion and in the curiosity and engagement of the participants. They must
   open their minds to unfamiliar ideas and learn to see connections between decision, actions, and their
   consequences for the person, for others, and for society as whole. Curriculum materials can’t do the
   work of good teaching. Drawing on the strengths that public health professionals can bring to the
   task—maturity of judgment, logical reasoning and analytic skills, and mastery of the scientific subject
   matter—we believe that these materials will provide you with the tools you need to handle ethical and
   value questions in a constructive, thoughtful fashion with your participants.
   You won’t be preaching to them. You won’t be giving them the definitive answers or imposing your own
   personal moral beliefs on them. Nor will you be presiding over a session in which everyone simply
   makes personal statements of their “values” without engaging in genuine dialogue or without being
   called on to give reasons in support of their beliefs.
   You will be helping participants and colleagues think more consistently and completely through
   problems that they will have to face soon—or are facing now—in their own careers in public health.
   Introduction
   7
   Each of the ethical topics in the program raises questions of choice—understanding the options one
   has—and questions of responsibility—what values are at stake in one’s choices and what moral
   principles, rights, and obligations should guide those choices. Eliciting a sense of responsibility on the
   part of the participant is one important objective of all ethics teaching, and especially in health care,
   where so many of the issues do in fact involve decisions that individuals will probably have to make
   sometime in their lives, be it reproduction, medical care for a child or a loved one, or choices as
   consumers and as citizens that affect the environment.
   Before a discussion of ethics can get off the ground, two pervasive feelings, which are probably
   widespread even among advanced students and public health professionals, must be overcome. The first
   is a sense of powerlessness and alienation–the feeling that nothing one does as an individual really
   makes any difference. When you feel helpless you are not prone to accept the idea that you have
   responsibility for what happens to you or for what goes on in society. Of course, this perception is not
   simply to be dismissed; there is a large kernel of truth in it. But it should not be allowed to lead to
   apathy and the denial of the participant’s own moral agency and responsibility. The trick is to make
   connections between the “big issues” and more tangible, controllable aspects of personal life, and to
   lead the discussion beyond the classroom by considering ways participants can get involved in
   community activities that address some of the problems discussed in class. These materials have been
   organized in a way that will help make those connections and provide some type of follow up.
   The second obstacle to overcome is the feeling of invulnerability—the belief that these issues affect the
   interests and lives of others, but won’t touch my family or me. Here too eliciting a sense of
   responsibility is coupled with good factual information and with the connection-making capacity that is
   inherent in what we have called the moral imagination. However comforting it may be, the notion of
   personal invulnerability is an illusion in contemporary society. The bad choices others make with the
   knowledge and technologies made available by the life sciences do affect us all.
   A large part of ethical analysis involves tracing the chain of consequences that follow from a given
   action as they ripple through the lives of other people. It involves estimating the probability or
   likelihood of various possible outcomes that are foreseeable at the time of the action, and evaluating
   those possible consequences as beneficial or harmful, good or bad, right or wrong, in terms of some
   background ideas of ethical principles, duties, and ideals of human freedom and well-being. Examining
   these consequences of action is one part of the process of giving reasons for or against the action, and
   it also has the side effect of enabling participants to perceive—perhaps for the first time—the
   interconnections between what they do and the lives of other people, as well as what other people do
   and their own lives. Blindness, not maliciousness, is often the source of harmful, irresponsible conduct.
   Ethics education may or may not be able to overcome bad character, but it can mitigate ethical and
   social misperception.
   To elicit a sense of responsibility and to chip away at feelings of powerlessness and invulnerability, the
   materials in this program have been set up to focus oftentimes on an analysis of ethical decisionmaking.
   This is only one approach to ethics, to be sure, since it is also important to look at large patterns of
   conduct, the shape and functioning of institutions, and broad social and historical forces that serve to
   limit the actions of individuals. To handle those issues that are in fact matters of collective choice and
   public policy rather than private, individual choices, the discussion can be framed as the
   decisionmaking of government policymakers (or corporate officials), or indeed as a question for society
   as a whole. The question: “How should I decide what to do morally in this situation?” is parallel to the
   Introduction
   8
   question “How should society (or decisionmakers acting on behalf of society) decide what to do morally
   in this situation?” The considerations that factor into each of these questions may be different and the
   answers may not be the same: at times it may be ethically appropriate for an individual to decide one
   thing and for society to decide another. But in this case you still have good food for thought in an
   ethics discussion because after the class has come to the conclusion that society’s answer should be
   different from the individual’s, you can go on to ask: What then should be done about this conflict or
   tension? How should the rights, freedom, and privacy of the individual be protected, and how should
   the interests of the individual be balanced against the interests of others and of society as a whole?
   One of the biggest single hurdles to overcome in leading an ethics discussion is to become willing to
   tolerate disagreement and ambiguity yourself. So much education today assumes that participants are
   containers into which the teacher pours facts, information, and authoritative opinion. And in science
   especially perhaps, the participants come to expect that there are right answers that they must learn to
   come to, and which the teacher possesses to give them if necessary. In public health ethics the right
   answers are not in the back of the book; and you won’t have them all either, because there are
   sometimes no definitive right answers, only answers that are more or less reasonable, more or less
   defensible and justifiable in the light of reflection, analysis, and dialogue. So an ethics session will take
   some adjustment of expectations on your part and on the part of your participants. Perhaps it is best to
   raise this very point with the participants right at the outset.
   In ethics things become clearer as you talk about them in group discussion. Initial ideas and feelings
   (philosophers call them moral intuitions) are not supposed to be flawless or complete at the beginning.
   Make the point that an ethics discussion is not a competition. (That is another habit of our schooling
   that ethics pedagogy must resist.) There is nothing wrong with expressing an idea that others will
   disagree with, and that the participant will modify as he or she goes along. Initial ideas and opinions
   must be put out on the table so the whole thing can get started. If you can create a non-threatening
   environment, most participants will present ideas on these ethical questions because they do have ideas
   and because it is gratifying for all of us to be in a situation where others want to hear our ideas and take
   them seriously, even if they disagree with them.
   Note, however, that a non-threatening environment does not mean a value-neutral or non-judgmental
   environment. This is one mistake that has been made by the so-called values clarification approach to
   ethics education. The ethics discussion should be open to many different ethical or value
   perspectives—indeed one key part of the exercise is to inventory the various and often conflicting
   values at stake. But openness is not value-neutrality or indifference. The teaching approach we
   recommend in these materials is very definitely and strongly affirming of several substantive educational
   values (which are also ethical values): namely, the values of clear and logical reasoning, empathetic
   imagination, tolerance and respect for others, decisionmaking on the basis of solid information, and a
   careful assessment of the consequences of the action on others.
   Gently, but firmly, the ideas, reasons, and arguments offered by the participants should be guided and
   redirected in accordance with those standards. False factual or scientific assumptions should be
   corrected, inconsistent beliefs and ideas should be exposed, faulty reasoning and logic should be
   pointed out and avoided, and the hidden assumptions and implications of ideas should be clarified and
   made explicit so that participants will more fully and deeply understand the nature and implications of
   the moral arguments they are making. A greater degree of self-consciousness about one’s moral beliefs
   is usually a more effective means of getting participants to rethink and refashion those beliefs than is
   Introduction
   9
   the authoritative imposition of the facilitator’s moral beliefs on the participant. This is the kind of moral
   learning that will last.
   As much as possible try to allow the give and take of class discussion to discover these standards of
   argument and analysis spontaneously. Be patient if things don’t move forward quickly; the discussion
   should be exploratory as well as task oriented. Try not to lecture or to do the analysis for the
   participants; instead, you can accomplish more when you play traffic cop and let participants express
   themselves for awhile and then intervene to summarize and clarify from time to time, fitting what has
   just been said into a framework: “Now, let’s pause for a minute to think about what John just said and
   how it relates to Nancy’s position. John is basically saying that Nancy can’t have it both ways,” and so
   on.
   This will have the added benefit of helping to deal with another common obstacle to a productive ethics
   discussion: the widespread ethical subjectivism and relativism of American culture. In a nutshell, ethical
   subjectivism is the idea that moral beliefs have no rational or interpersonal basis, they are only outward
   projections of subjective preference that may (and probably will) differ from one person to the next.
   Relativism, a closely related notion, is the view that there are no universal standards of right and wrong;
   what is right for one person, or society, is not necessarily right for another person or society. For both
   subjectivism and relativism the entire enterprise of having a reasoned discussion about ethics is suspect
   inasmuch as rational dialogue, persuasion, and agreement about ethics and values are impossible.
   Few people will articulate these positions in any elaborate way, but many will feel an uneasiness about
   having an ethics discussion. This uneasiness comes from relativism and subjectivism. Many may also
   associate ethics with the imposition of rules and restrictions by authority figures whom they consider
   arbitrary and illegitimate. Relativism and subjectivism tend to see all of ethics in this way and feed off of
   rebellion against such authority.
   In keeping with the goal of developing a sense of personal responsibility and empowerment, it is
   important to stress that “ethics” as it will be discussed in these sessions does not have primarily to do
   with the imposition of rules from above; it has to do instead with the creation of rules and standards
   from within each of us; it has to do with being a responsibly self-directing adult in a free society where
   individuals are allowed a fairly wide range of moral discretion and choice. But that freedom is possible
   only because reason and clear thinking do make a difference in ethics. We may often not know exactly
   what is right, but we can attempt to justify and give reasons for what we do, and we can be guided in
   our choices by what seem to be the best justifications and reasons we can come up with from our own
   thinking and with the help of others.
   The best response to ethical subjectivism and relativism as they are vaguely felt by participants is simply
   to plunge in and “do ethics.” To say, “It’s all right to be skeptical, but just put your doubts on hold for a
   while and let’s try this and see what happens.” Much of their wariness and skepticism will fade as they
   experience a sustained ethics discussion and discover what it is like to think hard and carefully about
   ethical and value questions in the company of a facilitator and fellow participants who are also trying to
   be serious and thoughtful.
   At the other extreme, some participants or colleagues may be ethical absolutists, who also do not see
   the point of an ethics discussion because they already know the right answer and do not wish to defend
   their beliefs by giving reasons or to make themselves open to other views. Obviously, it is important to
   Introduction
   10
   respect participant beliefs that are strongly held or are based in a religious perspective. In this case it is
   probably best to depersonalize the meaning of the exercise somewhat by pointing out that however
   secure a person may be in his or her own religious faith and belief, we still must live with others in a
   secular and pluralistic society where it is important to at least understand other people’s point of view,
   even if we don’t share it. And we must all learn to find some common ground and some shared ideas so
   that we can communicate with one another about matters of ethics and values. Just as an educated
   person must understand something about science and biology to cope with information and decisions in
   today’s society, so too must one comprehend a way of talking about ethics that is not directly tied to any
   particular faith tradition. You can reassure such participants or colleagues that the ethics sessions will
   not attack their faith or put it down, but will simply explore whether reason and dialogue will lead to the
   same conclusions or not.
   How To Use the Curriculum
   Nine modules are included in this program: (1) Tradition, Profession and Values in Public Health; (2)
   The Legacy of the Tuskegee Syphilis Study; (3) Public Health Research and Practice in International
   Settings; (4) Community Based Practice and Research; (5) Ethics and Infectious Disease Control; (6)
   Ethical Issues in Health Promotion and Disease Prevention; (7) Ethical Issues in Environmental and
   Occupational Health; (8) Public Health Genetics; (9) Public Health and Health System Reform.
   Each module addresses a particular area of public health where practices and policy are in a state of
   flux, where new knowledge is changing the way we understand what these practices can and should be,
   and where there are active ethical, social, and political debates taking place in society. Hence most
   participants will have some background exposure to these topics from the media and elsewhere. Thus
   you may find some pre-existing interest in these topics in your class, or else that interest can readily be
   stimulated by presenting a basic amount of factual information—for example, that it may soon be
   possible to test people for a genetic predisposition to alcoholism—and posing some questions for
   discussion.
   Clearly these units are interrelated in various ways, and the themes of choice, responsibility, taking
   risks, individual rights, and social welfare serve as connecting threads woven throughout the program.
   Nonetheless each unit has been designed so that it may stand alone and the material within it is selfcontained.
   The order in which the units are presented in this guide is arbitrary; the units are not
   sequential, and later units do not presuppose familiarity with earlier units. Therefore you have the
   flexibility to use any or all of these materials in many different ways and at many different times.
   We would make only one recommendation in this respect: do not attempt to cover the material in a
   module in less than one hour. Ideally, 90 minutes to two hours per unit would be better. If time is very
   limited, it would be advisable to cover one or two units in more depth than to skim over all of them.
   Most units have a common format and features:
6. Issue essay
   This is designed to provide background information on the history, social and cultural context, and
   factual elements of the issue(s) addressed by the module. It also provides a “state of the debate”
   discussion, summarizing the leading arguments surrounding the topic and proposed actions or policy
   initiatives germane to it.
   Introduction
   11
7. Fact Sheets
   A quick reference to significant study findings, health statistics or epidemiological data pertinent to the
   module issue, as well as key concepts. Suitable for use as a handout. Provides a common factual and
   terminological frame for the session. It notes areas of significant factual controversy. It may also note
   methodological problems in studying this topic.
8. Cases
   Each case is designed to be realistic and relevant, and to serve as a discussion vehicle for raising and
   discussing salient ethical or value issues. The events, actions, and decisions narrated by the case place
   ethics in a suitably complex context (in terms of either internal organizational structures, or external
   socio-political context). Suitable for use as handouts, these cases often reflect “real time” decision
   making in the presence of limited information. Some case studies reflect actual historical and current
   cases.
9. Analytic discussion of the cases
   Following each case there is an analysis that provides a framework or approach designed to assist the
   facilitator in leading a session on the case. While the participants themselves should bring up most of
   the important questions and issues on their own, if they do not, the facilitator may utilize discussion
   questions to initiate discussion. The case analyses are frequently organized around the key steps in a
   model ethical decision-making process and emphasize key questions, concepts, or issues introduced in
   the issue essay.
   In the case discussions, participants are encouraged to:
   (a) identify the ethical problem(s);
   (c) identify the information needed before a responsible decision can be made—what is this
   information and from whom should it come?
   (d) identify the stakeholders involved in the decision;
   (b) articulate the values relevant to this problem;
   (e) identify the available options and assess them in light of values served and in light of feasibility
   (e.g., financial, political, organizational constraints); and
   (f) discuss the process by which the decision should be made and who should be involved in
   making it.
10. Tools for best practice and policy assessment
    Having discussed cases, the next activity of the training module may be to apply the ideas generated by
    this discussion to actual agency policy and practice. The participants are asked to identify real issues
    that would lend themselves to such analysis, effectively creating a case study of their own. The product
    of the exercise would be to agree on action steps that could be taken by the agency, and to identify who
    should be part of the process.
    For Further Reading:
    M. Aroskar, Exploring Ethical Terrain in Public Health. 1999. Journal of Public Health Administration
    Management and Practice. 1(3):16-22.
    Introduction
    12
    M. Aroskar, Teaching ethics in health care administration: a course profile. 1993. Journal of Health
    Administration Education. Fall; 11(4): 601-608.
    M. Aroskar, Stuart D. Yoak, Ethics teaching in health administration programs: A report. 1996. Journal
    of Health Administration Education . Summer; 14(3): 355-363.
    D. Beauchamp and B. Steinbock, Eds. New Ethics for the Public’s Health
    New York: Oxford Press, 1999.
    P. Bradley and A. Burls, Ethics in Public and Community Health. New York: Routledge, 2000.
    Daniel Callahan and Sissela Bok, eds., Ethics Teaching in Higher Education. New York: Plenum Press,
    1980.
    Daniel Callahan and Bruce Jennings, “Ethics and Public Health: Forging a Strong Relationship,”
    American Journal of Public Health 92: 2 (February 2002), 169-176
    S. S. Coughlin, T. L. Beauchamp, eds., Ethics and Epidemiology, NY: Oxford University Press, 1996.
    C. Roland Christensen, Teaching and the Case Method. Boston: Harvard Business School Publishing
    Division, 1987.
    Howard B. Radest, Can We Teach Ethics? New York: Praeger Publishers, 1989.
    N. Stevens and T. McCormick, What are students thinking when we present ethics cases?: An example
    focusing on confidentiality and substance abuse. 1994. Journal of Medical Ethics . 20:112-117.
    The Teaching of Ethics in Higher Education: A Report by The Hastings Center. Hastings-on-Hudson,
    N.Y.: The Hastings Center, 1980.
    Module 1: Tradition, Profession, and Values in Public Health
    13
    MODULE 1
    Tradition, Profession, and Values in Public Health
    Lawrence O. Gostin, J.D., LL.D (Hon.)
    Georgetown University Law Center
    Issue Essay
    This module asks the difficult questions—what is public health? and what is public health ethics? The
    module also recognizes that even though public health and biomedical ethics overlap, they have distinct
    aspects. The module examines the unique population-based perspective of public health and how it can be
    distinguished from patient-centered biomedical ethics. Additionally, scholars and practitioners often use
    ethical analyses with other forms of reasoning, particularly law and human rights. The module, therefore,
    explores the relationship among public health ethics, public health law (notably the exercise of the state’s
    police power), and human rights. The various meanings of each form of reasoning are discussed, as well as
    the similarities and differences among them.
    What Is Public Health?
    In thinking about the application of ethical thought to problems in public health, it is important first to
    understand what we mean by public health. How is the field defined and what is its content—mission,
    functions, and services? Who engages in the practice of public health—government, the private sector,
    charities, community-based organizations? What are the principal methods or techniques of public health
    practitioners? In truth, finding answers to these fundamental questions is not easy because the field of
    public health is highly eclectic and conflicted.
    Definitions of public health vary widely, ranging from the utopian conception of the World Health
    Organization of an ideal state of physical and mental health to a more concrete listing of public health
    practices. The Institute of Medicine, in its seminal report on the Future of Public Health in 1988, proposed
    one of the most influential contemporary definitions: “Public health is what we, as a society, do collectively
    to assure the conditions for people to be healthy.” The IOM’s definition emphasizes the cooperative and
    mutually shared obligation (“we, as a society”). It reinforces the fact that collective entities such as
    governments and communities take responsibility for health. The goal of public health is the health of
    populations—rather than the health of individuals—and this goal is reached by a generally high level of
    health throughout society, rather than the best possible health for a few. The field of public health is
    concerned with health promotion and disease prevention throughout society. Consequently, public health is
    less interested in clinical interactions between health care professionals and patients, and more interested in
    devising broad strategies to prevent, or ameliorate, injury and disease.
    The State of Debate : Scholars and practitioners are conflicted about the “reach” or domain of public
    health. Some prefer a narrow focus on the proximal risk factors for injury and disease. The role of public
    health agencies, according to this perspective, is to identify risks or harms and intervene to prevent or
    ameliorate them. Others prefer a broad focus on the socio-cultural-economic foundations of health. Those
    Module 1: Tradition, Profession, and Values in Public Health
    14
    favoring this position see public health as interested in a more equitable distribution of social and economic
    resources because social status, race, and wealth are important influences on the health of populations.
    What are Public Health Ethics?
    If public health is what society does collectively to assure the conditions for healthy people, then what are
    public health ethics? Public health ethics may be defined as the principles and values that help guide actions
    designed to promote health and prevent injury and disease in the population. In thinking about this problem
    it will be helpful to distinguish public health ethics from biomedical ethics.
    The field of biomedical ethics has richly informed practice and policy in medicine and health care.
    Biomedical ethics has often stressed the importance of individual interests of patients, notably the right to
    autonomy, privacy, and liberty. Ethicists, however, at least until recently, have given insufficient attention to
    the equally strong values of partnership, citizenship, and community. As members of a society in which we
    all share a common bond, we also have an obligation to protect and defend the community against threats
    to health, safety, and security. There remains much work to do in public health ethics. Is the populationbased
    perspective of public health different from the patient-centered perspective of medicine? Is a public
    health ethic merely the aggregation of individual interests in a population? What is the moral standing that
    should be attached to the common good? Under what circumstances should individual interests yield to
    achieve a collective benefit for the population?
    Some scholars have thought about public health ethics in three overlapping ways: professional ethics (the
    values that help public health professionals to act in virtuous ways); applied ethics (the values that help to
    illuminate hard problems in public health policy and practice); and advocacy ethics (the overarching value of
    population health and social justice).
    Professional ethics are concerned with the ethical dimensions of professionalism and the moral trust that
    society bestows on public health professionals to act for the common welfare. This form of ethical discourse
    stresses the distinct history and traditions of the profession, seeking to create a culture of professionalism
    among public health students and practitioners. It instills in professionals a sense of public duty and trust.
    Professional ethics are role oriented, helping practitioners to act in virtuous ways as they undertake their
    functions. Currently, the Public Health Leadership Society is developing a Code of Public Health Ethics
    (available at www.publichealthlaw.net/reader).
    Applied public health ethics are concerned not so much with the character of professionals as with the
    ethical dimensions of the public health enterprise itself. Here, scholars study the philosophical knowledge
    and analytic reasoning necessary for careful thinking and decision making in creating and implementing
    public health policy. This kind of applied ethics is situation or case-oriented, seeking to understand morally
    appropriate decisions in concrete cases. Scholars can helpfully apply general ethical theory and detached
    analytical reasoning to the societal debates common in public health.
    In addition to “professional” and “applied” ethics, it is possible to think of an “advocacy” ethic informed by
    the single overriding value of a healthy community. Under this rationale, public health authorities think they
    know what is ethically appropriate, and their function is to advocate for that social goal. This populist ethic
    serves the interests of populations, particularly the powerless and oppressed, and its methods are
    principally pragmatic and political. Public health professionals strive to convince the public and its
    Module 1: Tradition, Profession, and Values in Public Health
    15
    representative political bodies that healthy populations, reduced inequalities, and social justice are the
    preferred societal responses.
    The State of Debate : Scholars and practitioners disagree on each of the three forms of public health
    ethics. First, many believe that a code of ethics, or at least a well-articulated values statement, could
    increase the status of the field and help clarify the distinctive ethical dilemmas faced by public health
    professionals. Others, however, point to the fact that no single public health profession exists, but rather a
    variety of different disciplines—e.g., epidemiologists, nurses, sanitary engineers, and public health
    educators. It would be difficult to find a single set of values that is relevant to each of these distinct groups.
    Second, many believe that the value of population health and safety should be salient. However, others
    criticize the public health model because it assumes that the appropriate mode of evaluating options is
    some form of cost-benefit calculation that appears to permit, or even require, that the most fundamental
    interests of individuals be sacrificed in order to produce the best overall outcome. Applied public health
    ethics draws from the traditions of utilitarianism, which is not always favored in modern philosophical
    scholarship. Third, many believe that the central role of public health is to advocate for community health
    and social justice. Public health advocates are supported by a body of literature demonstrating a
    relationship between socio-economic status and healthy populations. However, others believe that it is not
    self-evident that health and justice should always be the prevailing value. They also point to the fact that the
    redistributive agenda of public health is best reserved to the political branches of government.
    What is Public Health Law?
    Public health law differs from ethics in that it is concerned with a body of rules of action prescribed by
    controlling authority and having binding legal force. Law is found in constitutions, which empower
    governments to act and set limits on their power; statutes, which are enacted by legislative bodies and
    control the actions of individuals and businesses; regulations, which have similar effects as statutes but are
    usually promulgated by the executive branch; and court cases, which interpret the constitution, statutes and
    regulations, often setting binding precedent.
    Law is a primary means with which government creates the conditions for people to lead healthier and safer
    lives. Law creates a mission for public health authorities, assigns their functions, and specifies the manner
    in which they may exercise their authority. Law is a tool in public health work which is used to influence
    norms for healthy behavior, identify and respond to health threats, and set and enforce health and safety
    standards. The most important social debates about public health take place in legal fora—legislatures,
    courts, and administrative agencies—and in the law’s language of rights, duties, and justice.
    The police power is the most famous expression of the natural authority of sovereign governments to
    regulate private interests for the public good. The police power is the inherent authority of a state to
    protect, preserve and promote the health, safety, morals, and general welfare of the people. To achieve
    these communal benefits, the state retains the power to restrict, within constitutional limits, private
    interests–personal interests in autonomy, privacy, association, and liberty as well as economic interests in
    freedom to contract and use property.
    Law can be an effective tool to achieve the goal of improved health for the population. Statutes, regulations,
    and litigation, like other public health prevention strategies, intervene at a variety of levels, each designed
    to secure safer and healthier populations. First, government interventions are aimed at individual behavior
    Module 1: Tradition, Profession, and Values in Public Health
    16
    through education (e.g., health communication campaigns), incentives (e.g., taxing and spending powers),
    or deterrence (e.g., civil and criminal penalties for risky behaviors). Second, law regulates the agents of
    behavioral change by requiring safer product design (e.g., safety standards and indirect regulation through
    the tort system). Finally, law alters the informational (e.g., advertising restraints), physical (e.g., city
    planning and housing codes), or business (e.g., inspections and licenses) environment.
    The State of Debate : Not everyone believes that law is an appropriate way to protect and promote the
    community’s health, and when law is used in any of its manifestations it is bound to create controversy.
    Coercive interventions aimed at changing individual behavior are perhaps most contentious, such as
    infectious disease powers. Many people believe that government should rarely exercise coercive powers
    either because they are ineffective (e.g., it will “drive the epidemic underground”) or overly intrusive (e.g., it
    will undermine autonomy, privacy, or liberty). Regulation of products through the tort system is also
    controversial. Here, people argue that tort law often offers the wrong kind of incentives (e.g., deterring
    innovation for vaccines or pharmaceuticals) and is inefficient (e.g., devoting too many resources to lawyers).
    Finally, regulation of the informational or economic environment is controversial. Think about the disputes
    that arise from regulation of advertising of cigarettes (public health versus free speech) or the regulation of
    businesses through licenses and inspections (public health versus property rights).
    What is the Role of Human Rights in Public Health?
    The language of human rights is used in different, but overlapping, ways. Some use human rights language
    to mean a set of entitlements under international law, while others use human rights for its aspirational, or
    rhetorical, qualities. Depending on the way in which human rights is used, the field can have features that
    are quite similar to law or ethics.
    Legal scholars use human rights to refer to a body of international law that originated in response to the
    egregious affronts to peace and human dignity committed during World War II. The main source of human
    rights law within the United Nations system is the International Bill of Human Rights comprising the United
    Nations Charter, the Universal Declaration of Human Rights, and two International Covenants of Human
    Rights. Human rights are also protected under regional systems, including those in American, European,
    and African countries.
    Human rights are often divided between those that protect civil and political rights on the one hand and
    economic, social, and cultural rights on the other. Civil and political entitlements include the right to life,
    liberty, and security of person; the prohibition of slavery, torture, and cruel, inhuman, or degrading
    treatment; freedom from arbitrary interference with privacy, family, or home; and freedom of conscience,
    religion, expression, and association. Economic, social and cultural rights include the right to social
    security, education, and work, as well as the right to share in scientific advancement and its benefits.
    Notably, human rights instruments recognize the right of everyone to the highest attainable standard of
    physical and mental health, “including the right to a standard of living adequate for the health and wellbeing
    of himself and his family, including food, clothing, housing and medical care and necessary social
    services.”(Universal Declaration of Human Rights, Art. 25).
    The language of human rights is often used for its aspirational, or rhetorical, qualities. When “rights”
    language is invoked, it is intended to convey the fundamental importance of the claim. It expresses the idea
    that government should adhere to certain standards, or provide certain services, because it is right and just
    Module 1: Tradition, Profession, and Values in Public Health
    17
    to do so. Human rights as a symbol commands reverence and respect. Used in this aspirational sense,
    human rights need not be supported by text, precedent, or reasoning; they are self-evident and
    government’s responsibility simply is to conform.
    The State of Debate : Although human rights are supported by a body of international law and express an
    inspiring idea about personal dignity, they are often criticized for imprecision and lack of enforceability.
    Civil and political rights are perhaps the most precisely defined and carefully studied, but international
    agencies often fail to rigorously defend these rights in the real world. Economic, social and cultural rights
    are thought to be vague and unenforceable. For example, the conceptualization of health as a human right,
    and not simply a moral claim, suggests that states possess binding obligations to respect, defend, and
    promote that entitlement. Considerable disagreement, however, exists as to whether “health” is a
    meaningful, identifiable, operational, and enforceable right, or whether it is merely aspirational or
    rhetorical. To achieve the goal of greater clarity and enforceability, the United Nations Committee on
    Economic, Social, and Cultural Rights issued General Comment No. 14: The Right to the Highest Attainable
    Standard of Health (2000). This General Comment seeks to define the right to health and suggest ways in
    which it can be enforced.
    Tradeoffs Between the Collective Good and Individual Rights
    Public health law and ethics often require careful balancing between individual interests in personal (e.g.,
    autonomy, privacy, and liberty) and economic (e.g., contracts and property) freedoms on the one hand and
    collective interests in health safety and security on the other. Certainly, freedom and security can be
    mutually reinforcing. Affording individuals their rights can result in greater overall wellbeing by empowering
    people to safeguard their own health and safety. For example, if people do not fear loss of privacy or liberty,
    they are more likely to seek medical and public health services. Coercive powers can literally “drive
    epidemics underground.”
    Sometimes policy makers must make hard tradeoffs between individual and collective interests and, in these
    circumstances, they need to be guided by ethical values and attentive to legal procedures and norms. Public
    health laws and our courts have traditionally balanced the common good with individual civil liberties. As
    Justice John Marshall Harlan wrote in the seminal United States Supreme Court case of Jacobson v.
    Massachusetts , 197 U.S. 11 (1905), “the whole people covenants with each citizen, and each citizen with the
    whole people, that all shall be governed by certain laws for the ‘common good.’” Jacobson was a case that
    concerned compulsory vaccination, but the difficult tradeoffs between public and private interests can
    extend to many areas of public health concern ranging from infectious disease control powers (e.g., testing
    and screening, partner notification, and quarantine) to control of businesses (e.g., inspections and nuisance
    abatements) and the professions (e.g., licensing).
    How should society determine whether to intervene to protect the public’s health and safety when doing so
    will diminish a personal or economic interest? There is no sure way to know when interventions are
    necessary and appropriate, but here are some of the factors that need to be taken into consideration:
    Step One: Demonstrate Risk. Risk is a complex idea that involves several dimensions. First, what is the
    nature of the risk? Risks arise from numerous sources including physical, chemical, organic, environmental,
    and behavioral. Second, what is the duration of the risk? Risks may be imminent, distant, acute or chronic.
    Third, what is the probability that the risk will actually occur? Risks may be either highly likely or remote.
    Module 1: Tradition, Profession, and Values in Public Health
    18
    Finally, what is the severity of harm should the risk materialize? Harms can be catastrophic or relatively
    trivial if they do occur. They may affect individuals or populations, current or future generations, or people
    or the things that people value (e.g., plants, animals, or the environment).
    Step Two: Demonstrate the Intervention’s Effectiveness . The intervention should be reasonable likely to
    reduce the risk. Public health is primarily about prevention so one important measure is whether the
    intervention is reasonably like to work. This is a “means-ends” inquiry, which seeks to understand if the
    public health intervention will lead to effective risk reduction.
    Step Three: Assess the Economic Cost . The intervention should not only be capable of reducing the risk,
    but it should do so at a reasonable cost. Policy makers, therefore, should discover the costs to the
    regulatory agency and the subject of the regulation. Wherever possible, policy makers should prefer
    strategies that are least expensive and most effective. The reason is that government only has limited
    resources. If it spends money wastefully on an intervention, it will not have those resources available for
    another, potentially more effective, intervention. Thus, cost-ineffective measures have “lost opportunity”
    costs.
    The criterion to prefer cost-effective measures does not mean that society must wait until there is
    unassailable scientific evidence before it can intervene. Some advocates have argued for the adoption of a
    “precautionary principle.” The precautionary principle is not consistently defined but it means that public
    health authorities may act to prevent future harms to people and the environment even in the absence of
    conclusive proof that the harm is real or that the intervention will be effective.
    Step Four: Assess the Burdens on Human Rights. Sometimes even cost-effective policies should not be
    undertaken if they disproportionately burden human rights. Policy makers, therefore, should think about the
    invasiveness of the intervention, the frequency and scope of the infringement, and the duration of the
    infringement. Human rights do not always trump public health, but they certainly need to be weighed
    carefully.
    Step Five: Assess the Fairness of the Intervention. Policies should be formed and implemented in just ways.
    Thus, there should be a fair distribution of benefits and burdens. Ethicists examine fairness in a variety of
    different ways, but they often focus on need and risk. Benefits or public health services should often be
    distributed based on need. That is, those who have the greatest need should have some claim to the benefit
    or service. On the other hand, regulatory burdens should often be distributed on the basis of risks posed.
    That is, those who pose the greatest risks to the public or the environment should bear the costs and
    burdens of regulation. There are certainly other ways to evaluate the just allocation of benefits and burdens
    (e.g., principles of the most efficient distribution), but need and risk are two likely criteria.
    In summary, a public health intervention can be evaluated using several criteria: (i) the nature, probability,
    and severity of the risk; (ii) the likelihood that it will be effective in meeting its objectives; (iii) the economic
    costs entailed, including opportunity costs; (iv) the burdens on human rights, and (v) the fairness, including
    a just allocation of benefits and burdens.
    Module 1: Tradition, Profession, and Values in Public Health
    19
    Conclusion
    The field of public health is highly complex. What is the meaning of pivotally important abstract concepts
    that are common in public health: population, community, risk, harm, and benefit? How should society
    decide when it is necessary and appropriate to intervene to protect the public’s health? Are factors such as
    risk, effectiveness, cost, burdens, and fairness the best ways to evaluate public health interventions? How
    does the population perspective differ from the individual perspective? To what extent should social justice
    be an animating value in public health? Scholars and practitioners use various forms of reasoning in
    analyzing these problems, notably ethics, law, and human rights. Each form of reasoning has its own
    benefits and disadvantages. While each form of reasoning is distinct, all the forms overlap in important
    ways. One thing is certainly clear, there are no “correct” answers in public health. However, careful
    examination of principles and values taken from each of these fields can clarify thinking and, ultimately, lead
    to more effective and just policies and practices in public health.
    Further Readings in Public Health Law and Ethics
    Books
    Beauchamp DE, Steinbock B (eds.), New Ethics for the Public’s Health , New York: Oxford University Press,
    1999.
    Gostin LO (ed.), Public Health Law and Ethics: A Reader, Berkeley and New York: University of California
    Press and Milbank Memorial Fund, 2002.
    Gostin LO, Public Health Law: Power, Duty, Restraint, Berkeley and New York: University of California
    Press and Milbank Memorial Fund, 2000.
    Articles
    Callahan D, Jennings B, Ethics and Public Health: Forging a Strong Relationship, Am J Pub Health (2002):
    92:169-176.
    Childress JF, Faden, RR, Gaare RD, et al. , Public Health Ethics: Mapping the Terrain, J Law, Med & Ethics
    (2002) 30:170-178.
    Gostin LO, Sapsin JW, Teret SP, et al., The Model State Emergency Health Powers Act: Planning and
    Response to Bioterrorism and Naturally Occurring Infectious Diseases, JAMA (2002) 288:622-628.
    Gostin LO, Public Health, Ethics, and Human Rights: A Tribute to the Late Jonathan Mann, J Law, Med &
    Ethics (2001) 29: 121-130.
    Kass NE, An Ethics Framework for Public Health, Am J Pub Health (2001): 91:1776-1782.
    Roberts MJ, Reich MR, Ethical Analysis in Public Health, Lancet (2002) 359:1055-1059.
    Thomas JC, Sage M, Dillenberg J, Guillory VJ, A Code of Ethics for Public Health, Am J Pub Health (2002):
    92:1057-59.
    Internet Resources
    Web site of the Center for Law and the Public’s Health at Georgetown and Johns Hopkins University (CDC
    Collaborating Center Promoting Health Through Law): http://www.publichealthlaw.net
    Module 1: Tradition, Profession, and Values in Public Health
    20
    Web site accompanying the book, Gostin LO (ed.), Public Health Law and Ethics: A Reader, Berkeley
    and New York: University of California Press and Milbank Memorial Fund, 2002:
    http://www.publichealthlaw.net/reader
    Module 1: Tradition, Profession, and Values in Public Health
    21
    Fact Sheet: Tradition, Profession, and Values in Public Health
    This module explores the relationship between public health ethics, public health law (notably the exercise
    of the state’s police power), and human rights. The various meanings of each form of reasoning are
    discussed, as well as the similarities and differences among them.
    I. What Is Public Health?
    ???? Definitions of public health vary widely; however, a unifying theme is that public health is a mutuallyshared,
    societal obligation. Collective entities such as governments and communities must take
    responsibility for promoting the health of the public.
    ???? The Institute of Medicine defines public health as “what we, as a society, do collectively to assure the
    conditions for people to be healthy.” (Future of Public Health ,1988)
    ???? The focus of public health is the health of populations, rather than the health of individuals.
    ???? Public health is more concerned with broad strategies to prevent or ameliorate injury and disease than
    with clinical interactions between professionals and patients.
    ???? Scholars and practitioners are conflicted about the “reach” or domain of public health between 2 major
    foci:

• Narrow focus on the proximal risk factors for injury and disease; or
• Broad focus on the socio-cultural-economic foundations of health.
  II. What are Public Health Ethics?
  ???? Public health ethics are principles and values that guide actions to promote health and prevent injury
  and disease among the population.
  ???? Public health ethics should be distinguished from biomedical ethics.
• Biomedical ethics often stress the importance of individual interests of patients.
• Public health ethics emphasize partnership, citizenship, and community.
  ???? Some scholars have structured public health ethics in three overlapping ways:
• Professional ethics are concerned with ethical dimensions of professionalism.
• Applied ethics relate to dynamics of the public health enterprise itself.
• Advocacy ethics are informed by the single overriding value of a healthy community.
  ???? Scholars and practitioners disagree on each of the three forms of public health ethics.
• A code of ethics could clarify the field and provide guidance regarding ethical dilemmas.
• Some suggest that no single public health profession exists. It is difficult to find a single set of
  values that relates to all public health professionals.
  Module 1: Tradition, Profession, and Values in Public Health
  22
  III. What is Public Health Law?
  ???? Public health law refers to rules of action prescribed by controlling authority and having binding legal
  force. Law is found in constitutions, statutes, regulations, and court cases.
  ???? Law creates a mission for public health authorities, assigns their functions, and specifies the manner in
  which they may exercise their authority.
  ???? The most important public health debates occur in legal fora—legislatures, courts, and administrative
  agencies—and in the law’s language of rights, duties, and justice.
  ???? Police power is the inherent authority of a state to protect, preserve and promote the health, safety,
  morals, and general welfare of the people. The state may restrict individual interests within limits to
  achieve these communal benefits.
  ???? Law regulates behavior and alters the informational, physical, and business environment. However, the
  appropriate role of law in public health is controversial (e.g., coercive interventions aimed at changing
  individual behavior may unduly restrict liberty and foster resentment).
  IV. What is the Role of Human Rights in Public Health?
  ???? The language of human rights is used in different, but overlapping, ways in public health.
  ???? Human rights may refer to a set of entitlements under international law, or may be invoked for
  aspirational, or rhetorical, purposes.
  ???? Considerable disagreement exists as to whether “health” is a meaningful, identifiable, operational, and
  enforceable right, or whether it is merely aspirational or rhetorical.
  ???? Although human rights are supported by international law and express an inspiring idea about personal
  dignity, they are often criticized for imprecision and lack of enforceability.
  V. How to Evaluate Public Health Interventions
  ???? Policy makers should subject public health interventions to systematic evaluation.
• Demonstrate risk.
• Demonstrate effectiveness.
• Assess economic cost.
• Assess human rights burdens.
• Assess fairness.
  Module 1: Tradition, Profession, and Values in Public Health
  23
  Case Study 1: Legal and Ethical Implications of a Public Health Approach
  to Disability1
  Malik Johnson has been the Human Resources Manager of MedCentre, a hospital in West Virginia, for two
  years. Monday morning, Juanita Carlson, the Benefits Coordinator at MedCentre, informed Malik of the
  hospital’s plan to implement screening procedures to detect hepatitis B among prospective and incumbent
  employees.
  Viral hepatitis B can be transmitted when blood or bodily fluids from an infected individual enter the body
  of an individual who is not immune to the virus; e.g., from mother to unborn child or from partner to
  partner via unprotected sexual intercourse, blood transfusion, or sharing needles. Symptoms of hepatitis B
  include jaundice, fatigue, abdominal and/or joint pain, loss of appetite, and nausea. These symptoms are
  more common in adults than in children, yet approximately 30% of infected individuals will not experience
  any symptoms. In the absence of vaccination or treatment, death from chronic liver disease occurs among
  15-25% of hepatitis B infected individuals The hepatitis B vaccine, available since 1982, is the best
  protection against contracting the virus; however, other precautions are also advisable, such as condom use
  and/or refraining from injection drug use.
  Juanita stated that screening MedCentre employees for hepatitis B was necessary to (1) alert MedCentre’s
  HMO to potential elevated costs in its medical coverage, (2) notify the hospital’s administration that special
  accommodations may be needed (e.g., infection control and/or leaves of absence for seropositive
  individuals), and (3) protect the hospital’s patients and employees from the transmission of this contagious
  disease. Malik suspected that the screening plan was also influenced by the recent hepatitis B diagnosis of
  MedCentre’s chief cardiac surgeon, Michele Kim.
  MedCentre provided notification of the screening plan in a brief memorandum to current employees and to
  individuals who received an offer of employment from the hospital as of Monday afternoon. The plan was to
  become effective the following Friday, at which point all prospective and current employees were instructed
  to report to the hospital’s laboratory for screening.
  Malik is responsible for responding to employees’ questions about MedCentre’s screening plan. Juanita also
  assigned Malik the task of evaluating the plan in light of employees’ concerns in a confidential memorandum
  to MedCentre’s Board of Directors.
  Prospective Employees
  Paula Smith, a prospective employee in MedCentre’s maintenance department, called Malik on the
  telephone immediately after she read MedCentre’s notification memo on Tuesday morning. Ms. Smith was
  concerned that MedCentre would rescind its recent offer of employment once her seropositive status was
  discovered.
  Ms. Smith questioned why MedCentre needs to screen maintenance staff members at all. Ms. Smith does
  not understand how screening for hepatitis B status relates to the responsibilities or performance of her job.
  1 I thank James G. Hodge, Jr., and research students at the Georgetown University Law Center, for help in researching and
  drafting these case studies.
  Module 1: Tradition, Profession, and Values in Public Health
  24
  Because maintenance staff members have limited contact with patients and/or other MedCentre employees,
  Ms. Smith argued that the threat posed by infected maintenance staff members at the hospital is minimal.
  Although Ms. Smith agrees that the effects of hepatitis B may be debilitating and the costs of treatment may
  be considerable, she does not see why hepatitis B should be singled out from other diseases that impose a
  similar burden, such as syphilis.
  Malik thanked Ms. Smith for expressing her concerns, promised to research the answers to her questions,
  and told her he would return her telephone call in a couple of days.
  Current Employees
  After Malik ended his conversation with Ms. Smith, he received a second urgent telephone call. This time,
  the voice on the other side of the line belonged to Robert Jones, a loyal employee and respected orthopedic
  surgeon at MedCentre for fifteen years. Dr. Jones suspected that he contracted hepatitis B from a recent,
  unprotected homosexual encounter. Dr. Jones told Malik that he was keenly aware of the case of Dr. Kim,
  whose hepatitis B diagnosis last month prompted her leave of absence, contributed to the temporary
  rescission of her surgical privileges, and generated relentless gossip around the hospital.
  The prospect of sharing Dr. Kim’s fate terrified Dr. Jones. He is troubled that his homosexual orientation
  and his seropositive status could both be exposed to the detriment of his career at the conservative
  hospital. Dr. Jones is afraid that a hepatitis B diagnosis will quickly become a stigma, and that people will
  perceive him as incapable of performing his responsibilities as a surgeon. Dr. Jones needs assurance that he
  will not be discriminated against by MedCentre staff or patients on the basis of his serological status.
  Malik sympathized with Dr. Jones’ predicament and promised to address his concerns in a confidential
  meeting with him on Thursday morning.
  Disability Discrimination
  Tonya Perez, MedCentre’s general legal counsel, outlined the relevant disability law pertaining to the
  hospital’s screening plan. Ms. Perez told Malik that the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 (ADA)
  places certain limitations on employer-mandated medical examinations, including the screening of
  employees. Under the ADA, an employer can require the screening of prospective employees after an offer
  of employment has been made but before a prospective employee commences work. All prospective
  employees must be subjected to the same examination and the information collected must be maintained in
  a separate, confidential medical record. Furthermore, an employer can require the screening of current
  employees if such medical examinations are shown to be “job-related” or “consistent with business
  necessity.” Again, the results must be kept in a separate, confidential medical record. Prospective or current
  employees may not be discriminated against on the basis of their disabilities. Thus, qualified persons with a
  disability may not be terminated or adversely treated because of their disabilities. A “qualified” person with
  a disability must meet all the essential criteria for performing the job and must not pose a significant risk to
  himself or others.
  Ms. Perez noted that even if MedCentre’s screening plan is otherwise legally permissible, MedCentre must
  also avoid unlawful discrimination in violation of the ADA. Modern jurisprudence indicates that hepatitis B
  meets the criteria for a “disability” under the ADA since its taxing physiological manifestations may
  “substantially limit” the “major life activity” of working. For example, symptoms such as extreme nausea or
  Module 1: Tradition, Profession, and Values in Public Health
  25
  fatigue may constrain Paula Smith’s ability to perform the physical tasks associated with her position as a
  hospital maintenance staff member. Furthermore, the ADA protects individuals such as Robert Jones who
  are “regarded as” disabled, or who have a record of disability. However, the courts have been divided as to
  whether a person infected, but not yet symptomatic, is covered under the ADA as a person with a disability.
  Therefore, the question arises, from a perspective of law and ethics, can MedCentre use the information
  acquired from the screening to discriminate against seropositive individuals on the basis of their serological
  status? If we assume that seropositive individuals do have a disability, then MedCentre must neither
  manifest nor tolerate adverse treatment of an individual diagnosed with hepatitis B who is “otherwise
  qualified” for a hospital position, if “reasonable accommodations” or “modifications” can be made on his or
  her behalf (e.g., leaves of absence).
  A Public Health Approach
  You are Malik’s first choice for consultation regarding his assignment from MedCentre’s Board of Directors.
  Malik wants to adopt a public health perspective that addresses the human rights and ethical issues
  implicated in MedCentre’s screening plan. Malik’s memorandum must offer recommendations that are
  legally and ethically sound. Due to Malik’s time constraints, he has asked that you e-mail him responses to
  the following questions by tomorrow evening:
  ???? Should MedCentre screen all employees, or should it “target” or limit screening to employees
  whose jobs involve regular contact with hospital patients and employees, as Paula Smith suggested?
  Assuming that certain jobs are less likely to transmit infection via interpersonal contact, will general
  screening be perceived as paternalistic?
  ???? Should MedCentre obtain employees’ consent to the screening? If so, how can MedCentre ensure
  that the employees are sufficiently informed?
  ???? How should MedCentre document and store the records of screening results?
  ???? How should MedCentre notify employees of their serological status? Should or must MedCentre
  provide counseling?
  ???? What “reasonable accommodations” can or should MedCentre make for seropositive individuals? Is
  vaccination legally, ethically, or economically feasible?
  ???? What preventative procedures and/or programs can MedCentre implement to ensure that
  seropositive individuals are not discriminated against on the basis of their serological status?
  Module 1: Tradition, Profession, and Values in Public Health
  26
  Case Study 1: Discussion
  Ethical Problems
  This case study presents two sets of ethical dilemmas.
  Paula Smith, a prospective employee at MedCentre, raises concerns regarding the ethical implications of
  general versus targeted screening procedures. Assuming that certain jobs at MedCentre are less conducive
  to transmission of hepatitis B than others, is general screening of all employees unnecessary, inefficient,
  and/or paternalistic? Conversely, would targeted screening exclude seropositive individuals and/or alienate
  already marginalized individuals or groups? Also, how should MedCentre decide which employees to
  “target” for screening; e.g., by the level of risk associated with their employment positions (e.g., extent of
  interpersonal contact) or by the level of risk associated with their personal habits (e.g., intravenous drug
  use or promiscuous sexual behavior)? As Human Resources Manager of MedCentre, Malik Johnson must
  evaluate the costs and benefits, both economic and philosophical, of these two screening alternatives before
  writing his memorandum of recommendations to the Board of Directors.
  Second, Malik must address the concerns of Robert Jones, a current employee at MedCentre, regarding
  discrimination. What safeguards (e.g., educational or training programs) should MedCentre implement to
  ensure that seropositive individuals will not be discriminated against on the basis of their serological status?
  Malik must be attentive to the privacy and bodily integrity concerns of individuals who will be screened, yet
  he must also ensure effective screening procedures that will protect MedCentre’s patients and staff from
  transmission of hepatitis B.
  Relevant Values
  As the liaison between MedCentre’s staff and administration, Malik is aware that different values are
  motivating the perspectives of each “side.” For example, MedCentre employees subject to screening, such
  as Paula Smith and Robert Jones, have prioritized the values of bodily integrity, autonomy, liberty, and
  privacy; whereas MedCentre’s Board of Directors will likely prioritize the values of efficacy and efficiency,
  and MedCentre’s investors/patrons may prioritize the value of conservatism. Malik’s recommendations must
  be informed by each of these values, yet Malik must also acknowledge the value of compromise.
  Necessary Information
  An integral step in resolving these ethical dilemmas is for Malik to gather all information pertaining to
  MedCentre’s screening plan and to the individuals whom it will involve. For example, Malik should consult
  with other MedCentre officials to determine the source and extent of funding allocated for the screening
  procedure. This information may determine which type of screening is more feasible and/or appropriate
  (e.g., are sufficient funds available for general screening of all employees?) as well as which preventative
  measures or safeguards can be implemented to prevent discrimination subsequent to the screening (e.g.,
  are sufficient funds available for educational/training programs and/or for counseling?).
  Malik should also have several informal discussions with MedCentre’s administrators and employees about
  the screening plan. These talks will help Malik identify where sensitivities may lie and where compromises
  Module 1: Tradition, Profession, and Values in Public Health
  27
  may be made. They will also reinforce the values mentioned above and ensure that Malik’s recommendations
  to the Board of Directors are ethically sound.
  Finally, Malik should schedule another meeting with Tonya Perez, MedCentre’s general legal counsel, to
  ensure that his recommendations are legally valid. Malik will want to discover and avoid legal issues that
  surfaced in comparable screening programs in other medical centers. He will also want to ensure that Tonya
  is prepared to defend MedCentre’s screening plan against potential lawsuits.
  Stakeholders to the Decision
  Throughout the decision-making process, Malik must be respectful of and attentive to the many
  stakeholders to this decision. Malik’s recommendations to the Board of Directors must be informed by the
  interests, concerns, and values of MedCentre’s prospective employees, current employees, patients,
  administrators, and investors/patrons. As was noted in the above sections, each of these parties and entities
  has values and needs that may conflict with those of the others.
  Available Options
  Malik must carefully assess the values that each recommendation serves, as well as its financial, political,
  and organizational feasibility. A sample of the many potential recommendations that Malik can offer in his
  memorandum to MedCentre’s Board of Directors includes the following:
  ???? General screening of all employees to minimize stigma and/or alienation associated with targeted
  screening and to convey the message that everyone should be cognizant of the risks associated with
  hepatitis B
  ???? Confidential and professional screening procedures conducted by authorized medical personnel
  who are respectful and discreet
  ???? Notification of serological status via contact information provided directly by the employee who was
  subject to the screening, with provision of referrals and a free counseling session for seropositive
  individuals
  ???? Access to and disclosure of medical records limited to those with a legitimate need to know; e.g.,
  to medically treat the employee
  ???? Implementation of educational and training initiatives to prevent discrimination
  Decision Process
  Although the foregoing analysis is essential for Malik’s own decision process regarding recommendations to
  MedCentre’s Board of Directors, the “official” decision process that determines the fate of the screening
  plan will begin (or will recommence) when the Board receives Malik’s memorandum. It is hoped that the
  Board’s final decision on the plan will be influenced by the input of each of the stakeholders discussed
  above. However, to ensure that the plan continues to be responsive to the interests, needs, and values of
  these diverse stakeholders, perhaps Malik can suggest the formation of an Oversight Committee that
  contains a representative from each “side.”
  Module 1: Tradition, Profession, and Values in Public Health
  28
  Case Study 2: Protecting Health Information Privacy
  Dr. Sharon Smart is a senior genetics researcher for Genomatic, Inc., an emerging pharmaceutical company
  that researches and develops pharmacogenomic products. Dr. Smart was the lead researcher in a recent
  large-scale clinical study designed to test the efficacy of Alive , a new pharmaceutical. Alive is designed to
  successfully treat a terminal form of ovarian cancer that has common genetic links in a sizable portion of the
  general public. The study amassed considerable, longitudinal health data on thousands of research subjects.
  Genomatic’s shares recently soared on the NASDAQ stock exchange in expectation of potential approval of
  Alive through the Food and Drug Administration (FDA). Genomatic had sought final FDA approval after
  completing its clinical drug trials.
  Seeking FDA Approval
  As part of the approval process, the FDA requested copies of relevant medical records of individuals
  involved in the clinical drug trials for Alive . In its correspondence, the FDA said that it needed the data for
  review and examination pursuant to the approval process for Alive. In her laboratory in Rockville, Maryland,
  Dr. Smart assembled the personally identifiable data, including research subjects’ informed consent forms.
  Each of the research subjects had previously executed a general waiver for the release of his or her medical
  records to “federal authorities, including the FDA, for the purposes of conveying study results.”
  In the same letter, the FDA also asked for additional medical data about whether the research subjects
  involved in the Alive clinical trials had participated in other clinical trials at Genomatic. The FDA suggested
  that it wanted this data to confirm that Genomatic had not improperly recruited its research subjects for
  multiple trials, or provided incentives for their long-term participation in the company’s clinical trials
  programs. Another pharmaceutical company had recently engaged in a practice of soliciting clinical trial
  research subjects from community homeless shelters. These individuals became “career” research subjects,
  participating in dozens of trials and reaping sizeable financial incentives.
  Dr. Smart contacted an FDA official about the second request for information. She inquired as to whether
  the approval process for Alive was contingent upon forwarding the research subjects’ additional medical
  data. The official suggested that “while the approval process is independent of the request for the additional
  data, companies that fail to comply with all FDA information requests may see their products’ approval
  delayed.”
  Responding to Public Health Authorities
  That same afternoon, Dr. Smart received a telephone call from Dr. Needy at the state cancer registry.
  Operated as part of the state department of health, the cancer registry tracks a variety of cancer cases
  pursuant to state statutory authorization. Dr. Needy had recently learned about Genomatic’s drug trials for
  ovarian cancer. He asked Dr. Smart to provide the names of all of Genomatic’s clinical research subjects
  who had been diagnosed with ovarian cancer. Dr. Smart suggested that the names of these individuals
  would have already been provided by the subjects’ treating physicians or private laboratories that had tested
  tissue samples for cancer cells. Dr. Needy agreed, but responded that his office had recently uncovered a
  new type of ovarian cancer that did not typify existing forms of the disease. Specifically, he wanted Dr.
  Smart to provide the requested information so that the state cancer registry might confirm this potential
  new form of ovarian cancer tied to the genetic link.
  Module 1: Tradition, Profession, and Values in Public Health
  29
  Sharing with Academic Researchers
  Before Dr. Smart could respond to the state cancer registry’s request for her research subjects’ data, she
  opened an e-mail from her colleague at Genomatic, Dr. Duit, who worked in the company’s headquarters in
  Seattle. Dr. Duit was the chief information officer for Genomatic. He had recently received a request from
  the dean of the medical school at a major university that sought access to some of the company’s clinical
  trials databases. Researchers at the medical school thought that some of Genomatic’s information might
  further research on a joint pharmaceutical project between the university and Genomatic.
  Dr. Smart called Dr. Duit to question whether she could share the data without the specific informed
  consent of the subjects. Dr. Duit assured her, “I’ve spoken with our legal counsel, and he told me that there
  is no state law against sharing this data (at least in Washington state). We need this data, Sharon. Our CEO
  recently pledged monetary support to the university to broaden our information-sharing network. The
  university has some data we can use, and we have some data they can use.” Dr. Smart further questioned
  the use of the data, to which Dr. Duit responded, “Sharon, this is a mutually beneficial practice. Genomatic
  and the university may both benefit, but the public will benefit as well through improvements in medical
  science. There’s a strong need to collaborate to bring these medical advancements to the public. I’m as
  sensitive to the privacy issues as you are, but no one debates the value of using this data. Now, send me the
  data tomorrow.”
  Toward A Resolution of these Information Requests
  Dr. Smart is uncertain what to do regarding each of these requests for data. Each entity requesting the data
  seems to have a legitimate claim to the identifiable information. Yet, to share the data with each of these
  entities may compromise the research subjects’ interests in maintaining the privacy of their health
  information. Dr. Smart seeks your help in answering the following questions:
  ???? Should Dr. Smart provide the identifiable health data about her clinical research subjects to the
  FDA as part of the drug approval process for Alive ?
  ???? Must Dr. Smart provide additional identifiable health data to the FDA for its review of Genomatic’s
  recruitment of clinical research subjects?
  ???? Must Genomatic meet the state cancer registry’s request for data on those research subjects
  enrolled in the Alive trials?
  ???? Should Dr. Smart forward the requested data to the chief information officer at Genomatic if she
  knows the officer will share the data with outside researchers at the university medical school?
  Module 1: Tradition, Profession, and Values in Public Health
  30
  Case Study 2: Discussion
  Ethical Problems
  The four contexts in which Dr. Smart is asked to share identifiable health data about Genomatic research
  subjects enrolled in clinical trials for the cancer drug, Alive , implicate significant ethical issues.
  First, Dr. Smart must decide whether she can provide the information to the FDA for drug approval
  purposes. Federal health information privacy law clearly permits disclosure of health information where the
  FDA needs the data for approving or rejecting new or existing drugs. Although individuals may prefer to
  keep their health information private, there is strong public health support for the FDA’s role in approving
  pharmaceuticals to serve the public’s interests in safe and efficacious drugs.
  Second, Dr. Smart must consider whether she can share the information with the FDA for purposes of
  broadly monitoring enrollees in clinical drug trials. This issue raises the implied question of whether the
  research subjects have any claim to prevent Dr. Smart from disclosing their data to the FDA. If the FDA’s
  second request is not justified by existing informed consent, and assuming that obtaining further consent is
  impractical, Dr. Smart must determine whether a communal need to protect potential or actual human
  research subjects from exploitation or abuse may warrant the otherwise prohibited disclosure of
  information.
  Third, Dr. Smart must determine if the state cancer registry is entitled to the subjects’ health information
  for the purposes of identifying new cancer cases, or at least for verifying existing cases. State laws generally
  authorize state cancer registries to collect information on cancer prevalence through mandatory reporting
  requirements. These reporting requirements allow public health authorities to more accurately gauge the
  prevalence of cancer in the population, identify cancer trends, and take preventative measures to address
  avoidable incidences of cancer. Therefore, Dr. Smart’s response to this data request is contingent upon
  whether or not individual privacy rights to highly-sensitive cancer data outweigh communal goals of cancer
  reporting.
  Finally, Dr. Smart must decide if she can offer the information to Genomatic’s chief information officer, who
  plans to share the data with medical researchers at a university supported by the company. Federal privacy
  law and human subject research provisions may permit the sharing of identifiable health data for research
  purposes in some contexts. However, Dr. Smart must acknowledge that the monetary incentive underlying
  Genomatic’s corporate interests in sharing the data may complicate her ethical decision-making.
  Relevant Values
  The information requests above invoke a series of legal, ethical, and human rights values that center on the
  balance between respecting an individual’s right to health information privacy and promoting the use of
  identifiable data where needed to protect the public health or accomplish other communal goods.
  Individuals, such as the subjects in Genomatic’s clinical research trials, may put a premium on the value of
  privacy regarding their health information. Normative values of autonomy and justice strongly support the
  rights of persons to control the circumstances in which their identifiable health data are acquired, used,
  disclosed, or stored. Legal, ethical, and human rights principles also support some levels of individual
  control over identifiable health data, including limiting the access, use, or disclosure of this information.
  Module 1: Tradition, Profession, and Values in Public Health
  31
  Storage access prohibitions, use restrictions, and informed consent requirements are protections that derive
  from these privacy concerns.
  However, the value of individual privacy regarding health information is not absolute. Sharing identifiable
  health data may be justified where needed to promote various communal goods and values (e.g., public
  health, human research), or where necessary to prevent harms to others (e.g., duty to warn requirements).
  Particularly in the public health setting, the access, use, and disclosure of individual health data is needed
  to survey the population’s health and protect against actual or potential threats to community health. The
  ability to share data to accomplish the communal values or goals of public health is justified under the
  ethical theory of utilitarianism and the moral principle of paternalism.
  Necessary Information
  Dr. Smart must obtain more information before she can respond appropriately to each of the data requests.
  First, Dr. Smart must determine the scope of Genomatic subjects’ informed consent. The original informed
  consent language suggests that the release of a subject’s research record shall be made to “federal
  authorities, including the FDA, for the purposes of conveying study results.” This language seems to
  authorize the FDA’s initial request for such data pursuant to the approval process for Alive . However, even
  if each subject did provide informed consent, Dr. Smart must assess whether his or her consent is
  sufficiently broad to release data to the FDA for purposes of confirming that Genomatic did not improperly
  recruit the research subjects for multiple trials, or provide incentives for their long-term participation.
  It may also be necessary to determine whether the subjects’ informed consent was obtained under duress.
  For example, many of the Genomatic subjects enrolled in the study may suffer from a terminal form of
  ovarian cancer. If Alive represents the only available treatment option, the agreement of the subjects to
  enroll in the study and release their data to the FDA may not be truly informed consent. It will therefore be
  important for Dr. Smart to examine exactly what the subjects understood from the language and context of
  the consent. Alternatively, Dr. Smart may want to determine if it is feasible to obtain further consent from
  the subjects.
  Second, Dr. Smart will want to carefully review the state reporting requirements and privacy laws, perhaps
  with the guidance of an attorney. These laws may set the parameters of Dr. Smart’s responses to the data
  requests.
  Finally, Dr. Smart should ensure that Genomatic officials support her decisions before she offers them to
  the individuals who requested the data. Perhaps company policy and the input of company officials will
  facilitate Dr. Smart’s decision-making.
  Stakeholders to the Decision
  In this scenario, there are several stakeholders to Dr. Smart’s decisions regarding the release of Genomatic
  subjects’ health information. For example, individuals and/or entities with a vested interest in the outcome
  of Dr. Smart’s deliberations include: Genomatic, Genomatic’s research subjects, the FDA, the state cancer
  registry, the university, and perhaps all past, present, and future subjects in clinical research trials
  (assuming that Dr. Smart’s decisions may set a standard or precedent for Genomatic, if not for other
  pharmaceutical companies).
  Module 1: Tradition, Profession, and Values in Public Health
  32
  Available Options
  Dr. Smart may choose to explore the following options, assuming they are compatible with the further
  investigations that were recommended above:
  ???? Obtain further informed consent from Genomatic subjects
  ???? Release all health information requested by each individual/entity
  ???? Limit disclosure to that which is clearly authorized by state privacy and reporting laws
  ???? Defer to Genomatic company policy and/or input from company officials
  Decision Process
  Dr. Smart’s decision process will be influenced by each of the steps, individuals, and entities outlined
  above. To ensure that Dr. Smart’s responses to the data requests are responsible as well as legally and
  ethically sound, she will want to involve as many knowledgeable people as possible in her decision-making
  process. Perhaps Dr. Smart should summarize her planned responses to the data requests in a
  memorandum to Genomatic officials. Dr. Smart can then schedule a meeting with the Genomatic officials to
  discuss the legal, ethical, and human rights issues implicated in this scenario, and reach a consensus
  regarding the extent of permissible disclosure.
  Module 1: Tradition, Profession, and Values in Public Health
  33
  Case Study 3: Legal and Ethical Implications of a Public Health Approach
  to Funding Cancer Research and Treatment
  Barry Fine is the Chief Financial Officer of BioTech, a Fortune 500 company that makes generous annual
  contributions to promote biomedical research in national laboratories and medical centers. Barry is
  responsible for ensuring that BioTech’s resources and reputation are well-served by its charitable
  contribution. He has carefully evaluated the funding requests of dozens of worthwhile organizations. After
  weeks of indecision, Barry has determined two potential recipients for this year’s gift.
  Center for Lung Cancer Research
  The appeal from the director of the Center for Lung Cancer Research (CLCR), a governmental public health
  agency in Washington, D.C., resonated with Barry. The letter explained that CLCR desperately needed
  BioTech’s funds to develop new methods of screening for lung cancer. For nearly two decades, CLCR had
  advocated chest X-Rays for screening purposes. CLCR now sought alternative screening methodologies
  after findings from the Mayo Lung Project indicated that chest X-Rays were not necessarily efficient means
  of tracking the cancer. (National Institute of Health, Press Release, Aug. 15, 2000). To date, no alternative
  screening method for lung cancer has been shown to significantly improve survival rates.
  CLCR hoped to reduce the “false positive” problems associated with chest X-Ray screenings (e.g., exposure
  of non-malignant tumors) by refining its spiral computed tomography (CT) technology. CLCR scientists
  were on the brink of developing a modified CT scan that was better able to locate abnormal, malignant
  growths on the lungs, but additional financial support was needed to continue their work.
  The CLCR letter characterized lung cancer as the most common and fatal, yet least well-funded, form of
  cancer, with approximately 170,000 new cases diagnosed each year. The American Cancer Society reported
  in 2001 that lung cancer kills more Americans than breast, prostate, and colorectal cancers combined, with
  dramatic increases in the number of new diagnoses of lung cancer among women. Although most causes of
  lung cancer are related to the use of tobacco, lung cancer can also be caused by radon or asbestos exposure
  and lung diseases, including tuberculosis. Early detection of lung cancer when it is localized (e.g., before
  the cancer spreads to other organs in the body) greatly increases the five-year survival rate. By helping to
  improve measures of early detection of lung cancer, CLCR’s proposal concluded that BioTech can prolong,
  if not save, countless lives.
  BioLogics
  Next to CLCR’s letter on Barry’s desk was a fax from the chief executive officer of BioLogics, a small
  medical research center in Florida. BioLogics’ plea for BioTech’s funds was also compelling. The CEO
  confided that based on blood and urine tests and a bone marrow biopsy, he had recently been diagnosed
  with Waldenström’s Macroglobulinemia (WM), a rare, chronic form of cancer classified as a low-grade
  lymphoma. This disease causes abnormal plasma cells to multiply out of control, invading bone marrow,
  lymph nodes, and the spleen and producing excessive amounts of IgM, an antibody that causes thickening
  of the blood. In extreme cases, the increased concentration of IgM in the blood can lead to heart failure,
  typically within five to seven years.
  BioLogics’ fax stated that approximately five out of 1,000,000 people are diagnosed with WM each year.
  The disease usually affects people who are over the age of sixty-five; however, it can also be found in
  Module 1: Tradition, Profession, and Values in Public Health
  34
  younger people. Cancer registries in the United States indicate that this cancer is more common among
  men than women and among Caucasians than African-Americans. Some patients do not report any
  symptoms prior to diagnosis. Other patients experience enlarged lymph nodes or spleen, as well as fatigue,
  headaches, weight loss, a tendency to bleed easily, visual problems, confusion, dizziness, and loss of
  coordination. The CEO of BioLogics was told that these symptoms are due to the thickening of his blood
  from the IgM. Unfortunately, WM has an unknown cause and no known cure. Many hematologists have
  never seen a single case of this form of cancer, hence its nickname as an “orphan” disease.
  A lack of satisfactory treatment of WM inspired the CEO of BioLogics to send BioTech the request for
  funds. Because WM is such a rare disease, there is no government-approved course of treatment. Current
  treatment methodologies are determined by the thickness of the patient’s blood, and may include
  chemotherapy, plasmapheresis, and/or biological therapy. The main goal of treatment is to reduce the
  amount of abnormal blood cells, bone marrow cells, and protein in the blood.
  Consistent with its reputation as an “innovative” or “cutting-edge” research center- and with its compassion
  for its CEO- BioLogics has prioritized research of new treatment methodologies for WM, and seeks
  BioTech’s financial backing for this endeavor.
  A Public Health Approach to Funding Decisions
  After reviewing the proposals extensively, Barry concluded that both projects would be worthwhile
  investments for BioTech, yet each had distinct benefits and disadvantages. Funding for lung cancer research
  was clearly needed and could lead to significant improvements in early detection and treatment for this
  common, fatal disease. Alternatively, funding for WM could directly benefit the CEO of BioLogics and could
  bring much needed attention and resources to this rare disease.
  Barry needs guidance on the legal, ethical, and human rights implications of this important decision.
  Specifically, Barry requests your professional opinion on the following issues:
  ???? What criteria should Barry use to make the funding decision; e.g., how will legal, ethical, practical,
  and financial issues contribute to BioTech’s decision-making process?
  ???? Should Barry, and BioTech by extension, adopt a public health perspective or a clinical approach
  regarding the implications of this decision?
  ???? What influence should the demographics of the two diseases have on the decision?
  Module 1: Tradition, Profession, and Values in Public Health
  35
  Case Study 3: Discussion
  Ethical Problems
  This case study presents Barry Fine, the Chief Financial Officer of BioTech, with the ethical dilemma of
  choosing between the Center for Lung Cancer Research (CLCR), a governmental public health agency in
  Washington, D.C., and BioLogics, a private medical research center in Florida, as potential recipients of
  BioTech’s annual contribution to promote biomedical research.
  Barry must consider the ethical implications of this important decision. The framework for Barry’s ethical
  analysis will be shaped by his conception of cancer as either a clinical matter or as a public health issue.
  The demographics of the two diseases may influence BioTech’s funding decision. For example, should the
  tendency of WM to disproportionately affect older, Caucasian men disincline Barry to support its funding,
  in favor of a more “equal opportunity” disease, such as lung cancer? The answer to that question will
  depend on whether Barry wants to use the BioTech funds to directly address clinical cases (e.g., helping the
  CEO of BioLogics treat his WM) or to convey a more general, population-oriented message (e.g.,
  highlighting the public health problem of tobacco use by exposing lung cancer as one of its long-term
  consequences).
  Relevant Values
  Barry’s decision will be influenced by several important values. First, Barry must consider the values of
  BioTech, a conservative, prestigious organization that will want to preserve its reputation as such. Second,
  Barry must consider BioTech’s like-minded investors, who want to ensure that BioTech retains its status as
  a Fortune 500 company. Third, Barry will be influenced by his own values, such as integrity and
  psychological and/or financial security. Finally, Barry must carefully weigh the values of CLCR and
  BioLogics, and determine if their values are compatible with those of the other people and entities involved
  in this decision.
  Necessary Information
  Before selecting the recipient organization, Barry must gather more information.
  First, Barry should consult with other executives at BioTech regarding whether the funds can be split
  between CLCR and BioLogics. If dividing the funds is not an option, Barry should inquire as to which
  organization is preferable- and why. Perhaps Barry can schedule a meeting with BioTech’s Board of
  Directors to discuss the benefits and disadvantages associated with each organization.
  Second, Barry must obtain more detailed information regarding exactly how CLCR and BioLogics plan to
  use the BioTech funds. For example, it may be important to discover whether these organizations anticipate
  short-term or long-term results; e.g., whether they will use the funds to support further academic research,
  clinical trials, and/or technological development and innovation. Barry may request that CLCR and
  BioLogics send him proposals that elaborate on their specific intentions. This additional information would
  also enhance Barry’s presentation to BioTech’s Board of Directors, enabling a more thoughtful and
  informed decision.
  Module 1: Tradition, Profession, and Values in Public Health
  36
  Finally, Barry should review past funding decisions and reevaluate the criteria that BioTech used to make
  those decisions. Perhaps certain patterns or organizational profiles will emerge that would simplify Barry’s
  decision process.
  Stakeholders to the Decision
  There are various stakeholders to BioTech’s funding decision, including: BioTech, BioTech’s investors,
  Barry Fine (in his capacity as Chief Financial Officer of BioTech),
  CLCR, BioLogics, and all current and future patients diagnosed with lung cancer or WM.
  Available Options
  Depending on the outcome of the above investigations, Barry may have the following options regarding the
  BioTech funding decision:
  ???? Divide the BioTech funds equally (or as otherwise needed) between CLCR and BioLogics
  ???? Choose CLCR since BioTech’s funds will likely reach more people due to the prevalence of lung
  cancer in the general population
  ???? Choose BioLogics since WM is arguably more in need of attention and resources
  ???? Choose another worthy recipient from among the dozens of funding requests that BioTech received
  ???? Defer to BioTech’s Board of Directors to make the final decision
  Decision Process
  Barry’s decision process will be influenced and informed by each of the stakeholders listed above. The final
  funding decision will also reflect the considerations and values that have been mentioned. Perhaps a formal
  meeting involving Barry Fine, BioTech’s Board of Directors, the director of CLCR, and the CEO of
  BioLogics is the most appropriate forum for the final decision process. Attention to each of these factors,
  individuals, and entities is essential to making an ethical decision that will promote the public health and
  serve the private interests involved.
  Module 2: The Legacy of the Tuskegee Syphilis Study
  37
  MODULE 2
  The Legacy of the Tuskegee Syphilis Study
  Lisa S. Parker, PhD
  University of Pittsburgh
  Hilary K. Alvarez
  Dartmouth College
  in consultation with
  Stephen Thomas, PhD
  University of Pittsburgh
  Introduction
  Any consideration of ethics in public health research and practice must acknowledge the legacy of what
  has come to be called the Tuskegee Syphilis Study. Indeed, all public health research is conducted in
  the shadow of the actual study and the cultural icon that it has become. In some contexts and
  communities, mere reference to “Tuskegee” conjures images and reflects ideas that public health
  workers need to confront, as a practical matter, in order to provide services and conduct research. This
  following issue essay discusses the history of the Tuskegee Study of Untreated Syphilis, its legacy, and
  the way in which it functions as both a cultural icon and a framework for consideration of ethical
  concerns in public health.
  What does it mean to say that a public health study has become a “cultural icon,” indeed a symbol of
  what it means to conduct unethical research on human beings? The charge that something is “just like
  Tuskegee” summons emotionally charged meanings for researchers, the American public in general, and
  African-Americans in particular. “Just like Tuskegee” has rhetorical force: it immediately suggests a set
  of ethical concerns that warrant attention. However, the rhetoric surrounding “Tuskegee” can cloud
  careful and accurate analysis of what is actually at stake. With respect to the three cases following the
  issue essay, readers are invited to consider the ways in which the cases really are, or are not, just like
  Tuskegee. Such an initial analysis provides a starting point for deeper consideration of the ethics of
  research that appears to involve issues of race and racism, vulnerability of particular communities or
  populations, power, deception, exploitation, and questions about consent, appropriate study design and
  research hypotheses, distinctions between research and treatment, and standard of care—all issues
  raised by the original Tuskegee Syphilis Study.
  Two initial issues of ethical relevance must be raised before the essay can commence. These are issues
  of terminology that have more than typical semantic importance. First, what should the Study be called?
  The official title of the study was “The Tuskegee Study of Untreated Syphilis in the Negro Male,” but
  those with various interests have argued that other appellations would actually be more historically
  accurate. One commentator suggests the “US Public Health Service Study of Untreated Syphilis in the
  Negro Male” (Brawley 1998), while a Public Health Service (PHS) spokesman termed it a cooperative
  project of the PHS, the Tuskegee Institute, the Tuskegee Medical Society, and the Macon County
  Health Department in Alabama (Jones 1993, p. 7). Some contend that referring to it as the Tuskegee
  Module 2: The Legacy of the Tuskegee Syphilis Study
  38
  Syphilis Study unfairly marks the Tuskegee Institute and taints its good name (Brawley 1998), when it
  could be argued that the Institute was manipulated into its institutional participation almost to the same
  degree as the individual men who were convinced to participate in the study. Unfortunate as it may be
  that the Institute is probably most widely known for this study, and unfair as it may be to single out the
  Institute for its participation, nevertheless it is important to refer to the Study by its common—indeed
  almost iconographical—name, for it is not just the history of the Study, but its cultural legacy that
  concerns us. For this reason, we shall refer to it as the Tuskegee Study of Untreated Syphilis or the
  TSUS. In addition, some refer to the TSUS as “the Tuskegee Syphilis Experiment,” presumably to
  emphasize that the men enrolled in the study were experimented upon, were treated as guinea pigs, and
  perhaps to emphasize that people have reason to be wary of such research.1 On the other hand, the
  TSUS was not an experiment in the sense that an intervention was tested. Its initial methodology
  involved collecting data to trace the course of a disease in members of a population and the prevalence
  of the disease in that population; it resembles an epidemiological study. Since penicillin eventually
  became widely available but was not given to men enrolled in the TSUS, the TSUS might be viewed as
  an “experiment in withholding treatment,” an experiment designed to discover what occurred under
  conditions of non-treatment. Nevertheless, we shall avoid ‘experiment’ as a less appropriate term.
  The second question is what the men enrolled in the study should be called. Current parlance suggests
  that those enrolled in research be called ‘participants’; however, this term suggests a far more
  collaborative interaction than the men enrolled in the TSUS actually experienced. At the same time, to
  refer to them as ‘subjects’ seems to perpetuate their status as people to whom things were done—
  subjects, subjugated and acted upon—rather than as agents in their own right. As the account below
  reflects, these images are perhaps the most accurate in describing how the men in the TSUS were
  treated. Nevertheless, to refer to them today as ‘subjects’, in light of both contemporary understanding
  of that term and historical understanding of the wrongs done to them may seem to perpetuate the lack
  of respect for their dignity and agency. Finally, although the men were certainly enrolled in the study,
  referring to them as ‘enrollees’ is misleading if it suggests the contemporary notion of individuals who
  enroll in research through a process of informed consent. Having raised these considerations, in the
  following discussion, we tend to refer to those enrolled in the TSUS as ‘the men in the study’ or as the
  study ‘enrollees’.
  Issue Essay
  Questions for Consideration
  In addition to its historical and cultural importance, one of the reasons for considering the Tuskegee
  Study of Untreated Syphilis (TSUS) is that it raises so many ethically rich questions. First, ethical
  concerns attach to the premise of the study, its research design, its use of deception and social
  pressures to enroll, and the lack of informed consent. Next, background questions can be raised about
  the appropriateness of conducting research with members of “vulnerable populations” (and how to
  define or identify such vulnerability), about research in the context of a lack of access to adequate
  health care, and about research conducted against the social backdrop of racism or other social
  injustice and prejudiced cultural attitudes. These background issues raise questions about the practical
  1 Research has shown that people have a more positive attitude toward a study that is described as being “research,” and are
  more wary when it is termed “an experiment.” ‘Research’ or a ‘research study’ seems to imply cutting edge and possibly
  beneficial interventions, while ‘experimentation’ suggests images of scientists using people as guinea pigs. See Sugarman et
  al. 1998.
  Module 2: The Legacy of the Tuskegee Syphilis Study
  39
  possibility of ensuring the voluntariness of participation in research, informed consent, and public trust
  in the conduct of research and the use of research results. That the TSUS’s inception predated, but its
  cessation postdated, the Nazi experiments and the Nuremberg Trials only intensifies questions about
  the adequacy of regulations to ensure ethical conduct of research. Finally, because the TSUS involved a
  traditionally exploited group—African-American men—who were also poor, rural, and uneducated,
  consideration of the TSUS raises a variety of questions for current and future research: How should the
  concept of ‘race’ be used in research? How will society respond to identification of disease risks (e.g.,
  dietary customs or genetic factors) associated with racially or ethnically defined populations? How
  should research on such questions be designed? How may research results be used to avoid further
  disadvantaging racially or ethnically defined groups? Finally, given the past and current structure of
  American society, how can social and economic factors (e.g., educational and economic background, or
  rural/urban environment) be meaningfully distinguished from racial categories in both the conduct and
  the reporting of research? In fact, particular features of the TSUS raise questions about the conceptual
  foundation and practical implementation of what may be considered the tools for best practice in
  conducting research with vulnerable populations or in minority communities.
  Brief History of Tuskegee Study
  In the 1920s, the medical and public health communities hypothesized that blacks and whites differed in
  their response to disease (King 1998, pp. 92-7). In Macon County, Alabama, where 35-40% of those
  tested were positive for syphilis, the PHS felt that it had an ideal opportunity to study the course of
  syphilis in blacks and to compare the course of the disease against a study on syphilis in whites, done
  several years earlier in Oslo, Norway. The impetus for the Tuskegee Study of Untreated Syphilis was
  rooted in earlier work by the US Public Health Service (PHS) in the rural south. In 1928, the PHS
  completed a study in Mississippi in which 25% of the sample (all black) tested positive for syphilis. With
  financial backing from the Julius Rosenwald Fund, the PHS planned to continue studies of syphilis in
  rural blacks and to provide treatment, which at the time was comprised of doses of arsenic, mercury,
  and bismuth. However, the beginning of the Depression in 1929 wiped out the finances for the project,
  and the PHS scaled down its plans and tried to salvage a much smaller-scale study (Thomas and Quinn
  1991).
  Nurse Eunice Rivers, a black woman who graduated from the Tuskegee Institute in 1922 and then
  worked for the state of Alabama on various public health projects, was hired as coordinator of the
  TSUS. She set up transportation, organized clinics, and generally served as the primary contact for the
  men enrolled in the study. With her help, the PHS was able to efficiently reach the men of Macon
  County, holding clinics in schools and churches and enlisting the enthusiasm of both leaders in the
  black community and white plantation owners, who had an interest in the health of their employees. The
  cooperation of the Tuskegee Institute—whose earlier involvement in syphilis treatment programs gave
  the appearance to the public that these efforts were being renewed—helped to set blacks at ease with
  the government doctors (Thomas and Quinn 1991). The Institute was persuaded to participate by
  promises of training and employment for its doctors and nurses, as well as credit for aiding an
  important scientific study (Jones 1993, p.102).
  The men in the study were told that they were being tested for “bad blood,” a Southern catchphrase for
  a variety of illnesses. They were not informed that they had syphilis or given information about what
  syphilis was, how it was transmitted, or how it could be treated. Originally, the study was to last only 6-
  12 months, not enough time to deliver a full course of treatment, but at the insistence of the Alabama
  state health officer involved in the study, enrolled men who tested positive for syphilis received a
  Module 2: The Legacy of the Tuskegee Syphilis Study
  40
  minimal course of treatment: eight doses of an arsenic compound and some mercury pills. This would
  not have been enough to cure the men, though it might have rendered them noninfectious (Jones 1993,
  p. 99). However, the study was soon extended in an attempt to examine the men periodically until their
  death, and then to perform an autopsy, to give the doctors a chance to track the complete course of
  syphilis left untreated (Jones 1993, p. 132). Nurse Rivers and area doctors encouraged dying men to
  enter the hospital, and after death Rivers would sit with the grieving families and eventually ask
  permission to perform an autopsy, carefully explaining that no one at the funeral would be able to tell
  that the body had been opened. After 1935, the Millbank Memorial Fund in New York provided $500
  each year to be given out as $50 burial stipends to each family in exchange for permission to perform
  the autopsy (Jones 1993, pp.153-4).
  It was not difficult to persuade enrollees to continue in the study past the original few months. The men
  were given iron and aspirin as placebo treatments, which did in fact improve the their general health
  and make them enthusiastic participants in the study (Jones 1993, pp.147-8). They were aware that they
  were receiving far more medical care than they could otherwise afford, just as today some uninsured
  Americans enroll in research studies to gain access to basic medical care. The illusion of treatment was
  carefully perpetuated by the researchers, who even advertised spinal taps—a painful and potentially
  debilitating procedure—as “special free treatment” in addition to the “great deal of treatment for bad
  blood” that the men had already received (Brandt 1978). The spinal taps had no therapeutic value
  whatsoever and were performed solely to gather information on the presence of neuro-syphilis.
  Soon, with awareness of venereal diseases rising, it was deemed important by those running the study
  that it not be compromised by enrollees’ receiving treatment. In the late 1930s and early 1940s, PHS
  clinics in the rural south were dispensing an accelerated, week-long course of an arsenic derivative and
  bismuth to those with syphilis. Nurse Rivers was assigned to coordinate with these clinics to ensure that
  the men in the study were not given treatment (Jones 1993, p. 162). In 1943, the PHS clinics began using
  penicillin to treat syphilis, and Alabama passed a law that all citizens between 14 and 50 be tested for
  venereal diseases and TB and that those testing positive be treated (Jones 1993, p. 178). TSUS enrollees
  were not tested or treated (Jones 1993, p. 178). During World War II, the PHS arranged with the draft
  board that draftees from the study population would not need to take the penicillin treatment given to
  all other drafted men diagnosed with syphilis (Thomas and Quinn 1991). The men, identified to local
  and state doctors on a list provided by the Tuskegee researchers, did not know enough about their
  condition to question being turned away. Accustomed to having no access to health care, with their
  enrollment in the study, the men believed that they were already receiving adequate medical care
  (Brandt 1978).
  In 1951, penicillin became the standard treatment for syphilis, but despite a full-scale review of the study
  by the PHS, and despite the new attention that was being cast on the ethics of research after the Nazi
  experiments were revealed, the study continued (Jones 1993, p. 181). Throughout this time, occasional
  papers on the study were given at conferences and published in medical journals with no ethical
  objections being raised (White 2000). Continued conduct of the TSUS was clearly unethical according
  to the guidelines set forth in the Nuremberg Code in response to the Nazi war crimes trials, which
  emphasized informed consent and the researcher’s duty to avoid causing harm to the subject. The Code
  was followed in 1964 by the World Health Organization’s Declaration of Helsinki, which also set out
  guidelines on human experimentation and insisted on a stringent informed consent process. In the late
  1960s and early 1970s, the PHS developed guidelines for clinical trials that it funded; these established
  the first structures for peer review at the investigators’ institutions—the forerunners of today’s
  Module 2: The Legacy of the Tuskegee Syphilis Study
  41
  institutional review boards (IRBs)—and eventually required that community members and those without
  scientific backgrounds sit on these panels. However, these guidelines were not applied to the PHS’ own
  studies like the TSUS (Jones 1993, p. 190).
  In 1964, an article was published about the last thirty years of the study. In response, Irwin Schatz, a
  Michigan doctor, wrote to the authors raising questions about the ethics of denying effective therapy for
  a potentially fatal disease, but the study continued (White 2000). In the late 1960s, Peter Buxton, a
  physician who worked for the PHS in San Francisco, began scrutinizing the study and voicing his
  concerns. Because of this attention, the PHS convened a blue ribbon panel to decide whether the study
  should continue. The panel was comprised entirely of white physicians, of whom all but one had
  previous knowledge of the study. The sole previously uninvolved member, Gene Stollerman, was the
  only panelist in favor of examining the men and providing appropriate treatment. The others, who
  wanted to continue the study without change in its protocol or provisions, emphasized the risks of
  penicillin treatment: it could cause adverse and allergic reactions, such as fibrillations and anaphylaxis,
  and in addition there was some evidence that penicillin cured syphilitic lesions but sometimes failed to
  kill the spirochetes that were the source of the disease. One panelist made the groundless assertion that
  the men would not accept treatment even if it were offered (Jones 1993, pp. 193-6).
  The panelists also determined that informed consent was impossible to obtain from men with so little
  education and social status, and decided to approach the Macon County Medical Society (MCMS) to
  ask for a sort of surrogate consent. The MCMS, which was mainly comprised of black doctors, agreed
  that the experiment could go forward and promised not to give anyone in the study antibiotics for
  syphilis or for other diseases. At this time, the PHS also increased its efforts to find men who had been
  lost to the study in the preceding years, going so far as to enlist the assistance of the assistant
  postmaster in Tuskegee and to hire a retail credit agency to locate the men (Jones 1993, p. 196-200).2
  Buxton finally told the story of the Tuskegee study to Associated Press reporter Jean Heller in 1972. Her
  article, entitled “Human guinea pigs: syphilis patients died untreated,” appeared in the Washington Star
  and alerted the nation and the world to the existence and details of the TSUS. The article and the
  reaction to it finally forced the study to end, forty years after its inception and nearly 20 years after
  penicillin had become standard treatment for syphilis (White 2000).
  The Legacy of the TSUS
  There are, in fact, multiple legacies of “Tuskegee.” Public and political attention focused on the TSUS
  led to regulatory changes regarding the conduct of research. African-Americans who became aware of
  the conduct of the TSUS were outraged, and the TSUS served to reinforce and magnify the mistrust
  many African-Americans feel toward the government, its services, and those in power in the
  “establishment,” including the medical establishment. Researchers must now confront this widespread
  and magnified mistrust, as well as fulfill the regulatory requirements spawned by Tuskegee and other
  research scandals and outrages (e.g., Nazi experimentation, viral hepatitis research at Willowbrook
  State School, cancer research at the Jewish Hospital for Chronic Diseases). Enrollment of members of
  minority groups in research studies is more difficult because of prevalent mistrust and lack of
  2 Thus it is not only since the events of September 11, 2001, that US government officials have proposed the use of public
  and private employees to track citizens for the sake of some supposed public good. While in the TSUS such employees were
  asked to locate study enrollees, in the 21st century “war on terrorism,” it was proposed that postal employees and meter
  readers be officially encouraged to report suspicious activities observed in their daily work.
  Module 2: The Legacy of the Tuskegee Syphilis Study
  42
  community-researcher collaboration, and therefore, members of these groups may fail to benefit
  maximally from research advances (e.g., drugs and other interventions) as these are developed without
  participation of people relevantly “like them” (Merton 1996, King 1998). (Moreover, such mistrust
  affects minority members’ seeking of health care services, especially preventive interventions, and their
  interactions with health care providers [e.g., Roberts 1996].)
  The regulatory legacy. In 1973, the Department of Health, Education and Welfare completely
  revamped regulations on human subjects protection. A class action suit was filed by TSUS enrollees and
  was settled out-of-court the next year; all of the participants or their families were compensated
  (Thomas and Quinn 1991). The total settlement amount of $10 million was distributed in amounts
  ranging from $5,000 to $37,500, according to whether the participants were still alive and whether they
  had been part of the syphilitic or control group (Jones 1993, p. 217). A task force was created in 1975 to
  consider whether injured research subjects should be entitled to compensation. In its 1977 report, it
  argued that just as military personnel who incur risks on behalf of society are compensated for servicerelated
  injuries, research subjects should be compensated for research-related harms suffered. No
  action was taken on the task force’s recommendation.
  In 1974, federal legislation created a national commission to oversee human subjects in research, and
  the National Research Act mandated the establishment of IRBs to review all federally funded grants
  involving human subjects (Corbie-Smith 1999). In 1991, the US Department of Health and Human
  Services (HHS) issued revised regulations on human subjects research. They have been accepted by
  almost all federal departments that fund such research, and have therefore come to be referred to as the
  Common Rule (Title 45 Code of Federal Regulations Par. 46 [45 CFR 46]). Many institutions not legally
  obligated to abide by the Common Rule have nevertheless adopted it, and many states have similar
  regulations. According to the regulations, in order for persons (or their legally authorized
  representatives) to give “legally effective informed consent,” the researchers seeking participation must
  disclose eight elements of information about the study:

1. a statement that the study involves research, and description of that research and its
   purposes;
2. a description of reasonably foreseeable risks;
3. a description of reasonably expected benefits;
4. a disclosure of appropriate alternatives;
5. a statement about maintenance of confidentiality;
6. an explanation of possible compensation in case of injury, if the study involves more than
   minimal risks;
7. information about how subjects can have questions answered;
8. and a statement that participation is voluntary.
   In some cases, participants must also be told about unforeseeable risks, circumstances under which
   their participation will be terminated, additional costs they might incur, consequences of a decision to
   withdraw, dissemination of findings during the study related to their willingness to continue, and the
   approximate number of total subjects. Some studies which involve no more than minimal risk to
   participants are eligible for expedited review, and some studies (e.g., many surveys, observations, or
   studies of existing data) are exempt from these informed consent requirements; however, it is the IRB—
   not the research investigators—who must determine whether a project is exempt or eligible for
   expedited review.
   Module 2: The Legacy of the Tuskegee Syphilis Study
   43
   Prospective review by an IRB offers several ethical advantages: IRB panelists examine the importance of
   the study question, the reasonableness of the risk-benefit ratio, and the provisions for informed
   consent. This process, in theory at least, prevents participants’ rights from being violated and ensures
   that participants incur the risks of research only for the sake of producing meaningful research results.
   In contrast, outside of the research context, when informed consent to treatment is lacking, criticism
   only emerges after the intervention has taken place. More stringent requirements for informed consent
   are considered necessary in a research context, as opposed to a purely therapeutic context. In the
   therapeutic relationship, doctor and patient typically share the same goal of the patient’s good health or
   personal benefit. In research, the researcher and subject have at least some divergent goals, and the risk
   is that the subject’s interests could be sacrificed for what the scientist or society considers the greater
   good served by the experiment (Berg et al. 2001, pp. 279-84).
   Despite its important advantages, there are several limitations to prospective IRB review. IRBs are often
   staffed by volunteers or appointees who are not compensated for their time, yet appropriate review of
   research protocols is time-consuming and demands substantial commitment and expertise or education
   on the part of IRB members. Moreover, after an IRB has deemed a study design to be ethically
   acceptable, moral complacency—on the part of researchers, or IRBs in their overseer capacities—can
   set in. Finally, IRB review is subject to factual and ethical error, and in practice often focuses more on
   the completeness of the consent form the researchers plan to use than on the overall design of the study
   (Berg et al. 2001, pp. 259-66).
   Members of some communities or study populations—so-called special or vulnerable populations—
   have additional reasons to worry that compliance with research regulations and award of IRB approval
   are inadequate to ensure that their participation is non-exploitive and even advantageous. The notion of
   “vulnerability” in the context of research is employed to describe groups of potential research subjects
   who may be more than usually susceptible to exploitation in the process of research, either because they
   may be more likely to be pressured to participate, or may be more likely to fail to understand the full
   implications of participation and may therefore be misled into participation.
   The regulations in the Common Rule identify the following as “vulnerable populations” in the context of
   human subjects research: children, prisoners, pregnant women, mentally disabled persons, or
   economically or educationally disadvantaged persons” (45 CFR 46 §111[b]). These regulations provide
   for IRBs to appoint consent auditors and provide special regulatory protections of fetuses and pregnant
   women, children, and prisoners (45 CFR 46, Subparts B, C, and D).
   Of course, in reality, a variety of individuals may be rendered vulnerable in virtue of various situational
   or persistent social factors. People who are sick or in pain, frightened, or overwhelmed by information
   or “bad news” may be vulnerable in virtue of these situational factors. Those who lack the education,
   emotional maturity, or language and communication skills to understand and appreciate what is
   disclosed to them during an informed consent process may also be vulnerable to inappropriate pressure
   to participate (or, instead, to reject precipitously the option of research participation that might benefit
   them). Those who feel disempowered in virtue of the social roles they occupy, or who lack economic
   resources to investigate the proposed research or alternatives to it, may not feel free to refuse
   participation. With respect to research risks, protection of competent adults who are economically or
   educationally disadvantaged has proved complicated and highlights concerns about both respecting
   autonomy and achieving social justice (Berg, et al. 2001, pp. 271-2; Kahn, et al. 1998).
   Module 2: The Legacy of the Tuskegee Syphilis Study
   44
   After the TSUS, heightened sensitivity to the use of vulnerable populations in research resulted in many
   studies completely excluding these populations. Minority members and women were simply not
   recruited for trials, which protected them from the research-associated risks, but also meant that they
   were less likely to share in any benefits, both during the study and later when results were generalized
   to populations in which the interventions had not been studied (Corbie-Smith 1999, DeBruin 1994,
   Dresser 1992, Merton 1996, Kass 1998, King 1998). In addition, conditions more prevalent among, or
   disproportionately affecting, minority group members or women simply went unstudied (e.g., Faden et
   al . 1996). Finally, in 1993, the National Institutes of Health Revitalization Act mandated proportional
   representation of minorities and women as subjects in all research projects, unless there was a
   compelling reason to exclude them (Corbie-Smith 1999), and researchers are recognizing advantages
   with respect to funding priorities of studying conditions affecting minority members and women.
   The legacy of mistrust among minority community members. Despite strict regulations on research,
   requirements of informed consent, and requirements that they be adequately and appropriately
   represented in study populations, minority populations often distrust both the government and the
   medical community. This mistrust is largely due to past injustices, such as the TSUS, which still plays a
   great role in African-Americans’ reluctance to participate in research (Richardson 1997, Freimuth et al.
   2001, Thomas and Quinn 1991, Corbie-Smith et al. 1999, Corbie-Smith 1999, King 1998). This prevalent
   mistrust is particularly harmful in light of the AIDS crisis, which affects so many blacks and other
   marginalized populations, such as gay men and intravenous drug users (IDUs). A phone survey on
   medical research and the TSUS revealed that 9% of 500 black households believed that HIV and AIDS
   were part of a plot to kill blacks. Only 1% those in a survey of the general population responded
   similarly (Richardson 1997).3
   The history of mistrust carries over to the very informed consent process designed to protect research
   participants, with a substantial number of African-Americans viewing informed consent as primarily a
   legal protection for physicians and researchers and considering their signing a consent form as a
   relinquishment of their rights (Corbie-Smith et al. 1999).4 Increasing African-Americans’ understanding
   3 Again terminology carries important ethical and social implications. To contrast African-Americans and “the general
   population” in reporting the survey results conveys the message that African-Americans are not part of the general
   population. To take a similar example, talking about different levels of risk of HIV among urban gay men and in “the general
   population,” marks gay men as being outside the general population. The “us vs. them” message implicitly conveyed has
   been shown to undermine HIV risk reduction education efforts, for example, and perpetuates the disenfranchisement of
   already marginalized groups (Grover 1988, Treichler 1998). The term ‘subpopulation’, rather than conveying that, for
   example, African-Americans or gay men constitute a group within a larger group, is often considered to emphasize the “sub”
   or lower status of the included group and to reinforce its subjugation.
   4 In focus-group interviews with African-Americans, researchers have discovered many misconceptions about the informed
   consent process (Freimuth et al. 2001, Corbie-Smith et al. 1999). Many participants believed that signing a consent form
   meant that they were waiving their rights, including those to sue if something went wrong, and that the primary purpose of a
   consent form is to protect doctors and hospitals from legal liability. In addition, they stated that the forms were often
   incomprehensible to them, and it was therefore impossible to fully understand what they were agreeing to. The process of
   informed consent itself could be improved most radically by providing information, both written and spoken, in terms that
   can be understood by laypersons. This is particularly important for members of minority groups, who may be disadvantaged
   educationally (Freimuth et al. 2001, Corbie-Smith 1999). Those who sign consent documents should be given copies of those
   documents to keep (Corbie-Smith 1999). Focus group participants also stated that they wished to have time to make a
   decision about participation in research, so that they could consult family members and do some research on their own
   about what they were being asked to do. They suggested it was important to have information from several different points of
   view (Corbie-Smith 1999).
   Module 2: The Legacy of the Tuskegee Syphilis Study
   45
   of and trust in the informed consent process will be necessary to encourage their increased participation
   in research. Yet investigators who have studied the reluctance of African-Americans to join studies
   identify reason for African-Americans to be wary of recent policies that permit a waiver of consent for
   some types of research (specifically, emergency research) (Corbie-Smith et al. 1999). They are also
   concerned that incentives to participate in research could be unintentionally coercive (Freimuth et al.
   2001). Since community ties are often particularly strong in minority groups, some form of community
   consent—in addition to individual consent—has been advocated as an important and valuable addition
   to the consent process (Corbie-Smith et al. 1999; Freimuth et al. 2001). Studies have also revealed that
   many African-Americans—indeed many Americans—do not understand the process and purpose of
   human subjects research (Berg et al. 2001, pp. 288-95). Gaining greater understanding of the purpose
   and process of research could allay many fears about participation. Education, both in schools and in
   the wider community, should seek to define the vocabulary of research and to explain its procedures
   and purpose (Freimuth et al. 2001, Corbie-Smith 1999). It should also address head-on the realities of
   and the misconceptions and myths surrounding the TSUS and other research controversies (Freimuth et
   al. 2001).
   Responding to this legacy: steps to restore trust. In 1997, President Clinton took a major, at least
   symbolic step, toward addressing the realities of the TSUS and enabling productive confrontation of its
   cultural legacy. President Clinton apologized for the government’s involvement in the Tuskegee study
   and introduced several initiatives to make amends, including establishment of a memorial and
   scholarships for minority bioethics students (http://clinton4.nara.gov/textonly/New/Remarks/Fri/
   19970516-898.html).
   It may seem unlikely, or trivializing of a serious wrong, to suggest that the offer of a formal apology for
   wrongs as great as those committed in “Tuskegee” could provide grounds for the restoration of trust.
   Apologies—even or perhaps especially formal official ones—may seem more a matter of manners than
   of substantive ethics. Nevertheless, showing courtesy—or in this case specifically, offering an
   apology—is a means of showing respect, of demonstrating directly that the person to whom the
   courtesy or apology is paid is a person worthy of respect (Buss 1999). Although in most instances doing
   the right thing is more important than, after the fact, saying the correct thing—“I/we am sorry; we
   apologize for having done wrong”—the apology most directly acknowledges that the wronged parties
   were worthy of better treatment, were worthy of having their rights and their dignity respected. Such
   direct acknowledgment, if followed by attempts at both restitution or atonement, and appropriate future
   action, may constitute an initial step toward restoration of the trust of those previously wronged. In
   contrast, apology coupled with uncorrected action in the future would seem hollow, false, disrespectful,
   and manipulative. An apology not coupled with “follow through,” i.e., with appropriate future action and
   with attempts to restore those wronged in the past or to atone for past wrongs, would further erode
   conditions of trust.
   The establishment of the memorial and scholarship fund, the payment of some monetary compensation
   to study enrollees or their descendents, as well as the implementation of research regulations to prevent
   future similar wrongs, suggest that the Presidential Apology is not mere rhetoric, but instead is a formal
   statement of assumption of responsibility, recognition of wrongdoing, and acknowledgment of the moral
   standing of those wronged. Coupled with action, the Apology may indeed help to rebuild trust between
   African-Americans and the government and researchers.
   Module 2: The Legacy of the Tuskegee Syphilis Study
   46
   In recent years, the important role of trust in morality has gained the attention of a number of moral
   philosophers, especially Annette Baier (1986). They observe that whatever ethical system is adopted—
   e.g., a set of principles and rules, a social agreement or contract about how to live, or a system of
   duties—that system relies on trust. Trust grounds a person’s reliance on another to fulfill his duty or to
   follow established rules or abide by terms of a social contract. Morality requires trust in order to thrive
   (Baier 1986, p. 232). Indeed, trust is a necessary condition for many important human activities;
   because we need the assistance of others to accomplish what we care about, we must trust others with
   what we value in ways that make us vulnerable. We assume some risks—for example, the baring of our
   bodies before our physicians and the sharing of intimate details about our lives with friends—in order
   to seek benefits we cannot achieve without incurring such vulnerability. “We must allow many other
   people to get into positions where they can, if they choose, injure what we care about [e.g., our bodies,
   reputations, or confidences], since those are the same positions that they must be in in order to help us
   take care of what we care about [e.g., by treating our symptoms or sharing our dreams]” (Baier 1986, p.
   236).
   Health, aspirations, friendship, education, promise-making, secret-sharing—all of these goods flourish
   within an environment of trust. Of course, much that is negative and immoral may flourish when trust is
   misplaced and betrayed, including ridicule, exploitation, and conspiracy. “Trust alters power positions,
   and both the position one is in without a given form of trust and the position one has within a relation
   of trust need to be considered before one can judge whether that form of trust is sensible and morally
   decent” (Baier 1986 p. 240). Thus Baier suggests that when the parties to a possible trust-relationship
   occupy very different positions of power (e.g., teacher-student, researcher-study participant, doctorpatient,
   employer-employee), the terms of an appropriate trust-relationship must be different than if the
   parties were in a position of relative equality (e.g., classmates, buddies). Of course, contextual and
   structural factors can render apparent equals vastly unequal in power. Pain of injury can make one team
   member quite dependent on her fellow athletes. Persistent sex inequalities can make one parent (Mom)
   a less powerful wage-earner than her co-parent (Dad). An appropriate trust-relationship must not rely
   on or exploit these underlying power differences.
   What are conditions of appropriate, morally decent trust? Baier proposes an expressibility test to
   determine whether a situation is one of morally decent (non-exploitive) trust: a trust relationship is
   morally decent if the maintenance of trust need not rely “on successful threats held over the trusted, or
   on her successful cover-up of breaches of trust” (1986, p. 255). Trust is appropriate only if the reasons
   for each party’s confident reliance on the other could in principle be expressed openly without
   deterioration of either party’s reliance. “To the extent that mutual reliance can be accompanied by
   mutual knowledge of the conditions for that reliance, trust is above suspicion” (Baier 1986, p. 259).
   Clearly, the men in the TSUS did not have appropriate trust in the PHS researchers and Nurse Rivers.
   Had they had known that they were not being treated for their “bad blood,” if they had known what
   researchers meant by “bad blood,” or if they had known that the researchers’ actions were undertaken
   primarily for the benefit of others, they would probably not have entrusted their bodies for spinal taps
   and other examinations. The researchers relied on “successful cover-ups of breaches of trust” to
   maintain the trust of study enrollees. They were successful in their exploitation because of the lack of
   educational and economic power of the men they enrolled and because those factors and racism
   combined to render those men more complaint with authority figures than others were likely to be.
   Module 2: The Legacy of the Tuskegee Syphilis Study
   47
   It remains to be seen whether the regulatory steps taken to prevent future successful cover-ups of trust,
   future exploitation, coupled with the government’s admission of wrongdoing, its acts of compensation
   and atonement, and the formal seeking of forgiveness successfully restore public trust, particularly that
   of African-Americans and other vulnerable groups. Complicating both this restoration of trust and a
   sense that clear lessons from the TSUS have been learned is ongoing debate about the “facts” of the
   TSUS and about what ethical lessons should be learned from it.
   Debate about TSUS itself. Several authors have sought to show that the study’s original design was
   scientifically appropriate and ethical, and that even after penicillin became available, it was not wrong to
   deny it to TSUS enrollees. These arguments focus on the decision to examine untreated syphilis, and
   whether this study design can be justified. Benedeck and Erlen (1999) point out six potential
   justifications that were relevant at the study’s inception in 1930.
   First, syphilis was recognized as a major public health problem, worthy of study. Second, it was more
   prevalent in the black population, there was significant evidence that blacks and whites were affected by
   the condition differently, and because whites had already been studied in Oslo, it made sense to focus a
   study on a black population. Third, there was plenty of disagreement about how best to treat syphilis,
   with different doctors recommending different dosages and lengths of treatments with a variety of
   compounds, including mercury, bismuth, and arsenicals. No standard treatment had been established
   and proven. Fourth, all treatment courses were lengthy (months to years), painful (involving frequent
   injections), and potentially toxic. They were completed by a very low percentage of patients who began
   treatment. Fifth, a large proportion of those with syphilis never obtained treatment, or were treated but
   not sufficiently to cure the disease. Because of their race and socioeconomic class, the men in the
   Tuskegee study were not denied treatment that they would otherwise have had access to in the 1930s.
   And sixth, according to the Oslo study, a majority of syphilis cases were cured spontaneously, with no
   treatment, leading doctors to believe that denying treatment to the men in the study would not adversely
   affect most of them. Doctors hoped that the study would yield significant knowledge about syphilis: the
   effects of the heavy metals and arsenicals were so variable, as was the course of syphilis itself, that
   observation of a significant number of untreated patients would hopefully give a baseline against which
   to measure the efficacy of various treatments.
   White adds that in 1935 it was standard medical practice not to treat latent syphilis in men over fifty
   (White 2000, p. 587). Thirty percent of the men in the TSUS fell into this category, and 52% had had
   syphilis for more than fifteen years, making them ineligible for treatment in almost any medical
   institution in the 1930s and 1940s (p. 594). There was a study of untreated syphilis conducted at
   Stanford University, as well, with white subjects who were affluent enough that without the study, they
   would almost certainly have received the treatment to which rural blacks never would have had access.
   No one, White asserts, complains about this study (p. 595).
   Most of those who accept that the study was ethical at its inception view the introduction of penicillin
   and the study’s continuation—including attempts to prevent participants from being treated with
   penicillin even for other conditions besides syphilis—as the point at which the TSUS went wrong.
   However, some still argue that the doctors had no ethical obligation to provide penicillin to the men in
   the study and that they were looking out for the participants’ best interests when they decided not to
   offer penicillin. Though the “miracle drug” was first used to cure syphilis in 1943, penicillin was not
   without problems. As with the heavy metals and arsenicals before it, there was no set dosage, route of
   administration, or duration of treatment known to be effective, and administration varied widely. This
   Module 2: The Legacy of the Tuskegee Syphilis Study
   48
   was partly because new preparations were continually being invented, so none was the focus of the
   intense investigation that would have been necessary to determine the optimal course of treatment. At
   the beginning, the strength of the drug also varied, until techniques for its manufacture were
   standardized. And as with previous treatments, some people reacted to the drug or to the resulting
   buildup of dead spirochetes. As late as 1958, scientists were questioning penicillin’s efficacy and safety
   for those in the late stages of syphilis, the condition from which the men in the TSUS suffered (Benedek
   and Erlen 1999, p.18). Most doctors believed that a cure at such a late stage, after being infected for so
   many years, was highly unlikely (Benedek and Erlen 1999, p. 25).
   Even if failing to offer penicillin to TSUS participants could be justified on grounds that the men would
   not likely benefit from it, there is no question that the men in the TSUS never gave informed consent. In
   1972, the Tuskegee Syphilis Study Ad Hoc Advisory Panel was formed and charged with determining
   “whether the study was justified in 1932 and whether it should have continued when penicillin became
   generally available” (see King 1998). Focusing on the lack of informed consent, the panel concluded that
   “in retrospect” the study was unjustified in 1932. The panel failed to consider whether the study would
   have been justified had the enrollees consented, and many commentators suggest that the panel’s focus
   on the absence of consent obscured underlying issues of the justice of conducting the study in the
   environment of racism and racial segregation, poverty, and lack of education that characterized the
   TSUS enrollees’ situation (King 1998).
   Benedek and Erlen admonish against succumbing to “presentism”; the concept of informed consent was
   not formulated until 1957, and the doctor-patient relationship before that time was extremely
   paternalistic and often secretive (p. 24). In response, however, it should be argued that the TSUS
   involved timeless putative ethical wrongs. Deception, telling less than the whole truth, causing pain to
   some for the benefit of others, taking advantage of other’s trust, treating others as one would not want
   to be treated oneself—all of these actions have raised ethical suspicions for centuries. It is those who
   would seek to employ them with impunity in a particular context (e.g., research) who must provide a
   justification for doing so. That no specific regulation, or specific social practice like informed consent,
   prohibited what the TSUS researchers undertook in 1932 does not provide such justification.
   The legacy of race as a variable in research. A final thread of the legacies of the TSUS deserves
   particular attention: race. Assumptions about race and racial difference provided the scientific
   justification (such as it was) for the TSUS. In two senses, the men enrolled in the TSUS were enrolled
   because they were black: first, because syphilis in blacks was the study question; second, because if they
   had been white, they probably could not have been enrolled and retained in the study. This second
   claim is contestable. One of the physician-researchers involved in the TSUS, in fact, responded in an
   interview that he believes non-blacks could have been convinced to enroll (ABC News 1992). He
   suggests, for example, that “hillbillies” could have been enrolled instead, if only they had possessed the
   medical and quasi-scientific features of interest to the scientists. The social features that he considered
   critical to enrollment in the study—relative isolation and lack of education and sophistication—were
   not race-dependent. However, such socially-disempowering features did attach almost uniformly to
   blacks in the 1930s in the rural south.
   But what of “race” as a non-social, scientific concept? Whether ‘race’ is a meaningful concept in any
   scientific sense, with relevance for public health care and medical interventions, or whether it is merely
   a social construct (and an often pernicious one at that), is the topic of much current scholarship
   (Bradby 1996, Graves 2002, King 1998). We have made progress since the days when African slaves
   Module 2: The Legacy of the Tuskegee Syphilis Study
   49
   were diagnosed with a peculiar disease that manifested itself in the symptom of their absconding from
   the service of their masters (i.e., Drapetomania; Cartwright in Caplan et al . 1981), yet experience with
   sickle cell screening programs and other interventions targeting African-Americans suggests the need to
   increase conceptual and scientific clarity and to employ these accurate understandings to combat
   persistent prejudice (Seton Hall Law Rev. 1997).
   Yet controversy surrounds the use of racial categories for research, for offering appropriate health care,
   and for understanding and addressing health disparities across various populations (King 1998, Roberts
   1996, Epstein and Ayanian 2002, Laveist 1993, Daniels et al. 1999). With growing attention to both
   social determinants of health and advances in understanding genetic components of disease, the
   relevance of ‘race’ as a variable in research will garner greater attention. As one of the lawyers for the
   men seeking compensation for the TSUS wrote: “the Human Genome Project will bring to the forefront
   of human consciousness awareness of the range of variability not only among individuals but among
   groups. To acknowledge those differences, while insisting on their irrelevance to respect for individual
   dignity and equality of right, is a challenge we shall have to face” (Edgar 1992, p. 25). In this essay, we
   can only identify, but not fully or resolve what may be called the “dilemma of difference”: “If…racial
   difference is ignored and all groups or persons are treated similarly, unintended harm may result from
   the failure to recognize racially correlated factors. Conversely, if differences among groups or persons
   are recognized and attempts are made to respond to past injustices or special burdens, the effort is
   likely to reinforce existing negative stereotypes that contributed to the racial differences in the first
   place” (King 1992, p. 35). Awareness of these pitfalls and open discussion of steps to avoid them may
   help to avoid at least the most flagrant abuses of trust, greatest injustices, and serious harms.
   Rhetorical Advantages and Analytical Disadvantages to Being “Just Like Tuskegee”
   Since the details of the TSUS became public, several subsequent research studies have been accused of
   being “just like Tuskegee.” (The TSUS legacy extends beyond the borders and context of the United
   States; one commentator on an ethically suspect oncology study in New Zealand entitled her paper
   “New Zealand’s ‘Tuskegee’? Some Comparisons between the Tuskegee Syphilis Study and a Study at
   National Women’s Hospital” (Crosthwaite 1995).)
   Assessing whether this claim is strictly accurate may be less important than, asking, initially, whether
   “Tuskegee” provides a useful framework for considering the ethical issues raised in a particular case,
   and then more importantly, carefully analyzing the present ethical concerns. The following three cases
   may be considered in light of the legacy of and considerations raised by Tuskegee. The cases involve
   study of a needle exchange program in Alaska, a study of different lead abatement efforts and their
   effects on blood lead levels in children, and various studies to prevent the transmission of HIV/AIDS. In
   each case somewhat inflammatory emotional rhetoric reflecting the legacy of Tuskegee directs public
   attention to the cases. The legacy of Tuskegee also, very directly and practically, creates (or
   perpetuates) some of the attitudes, social conditions, and problems of trust and communication that
   give rise to ethical concern.
   Module 2: The Legacy of the Tuskegee Syphilis Study
   50
   References
   ABC News. (February 2, 1992). The Tuskegee Study. Primetime Live.
   AHRP. (August 24, 2001). John’s Hopkins University Experiment on Lead Paint Puts Children in
   Danger. Retrieved May 10, 2002 from the World Wide Web:
   http://www.researchprotection.org/children/HopkinsEndangers.html.
   Angell, M. (1997). The Ethics of Clinical Research in the Third World. New England Journal of
   Medicine 337 (12), 847-849.
   Baier, A. (January, 1986). Trust and Antitrust. Ethics (96), 231-260.
   Benedek, T. G. & Erlen J. (1999). The Scientific Environment of the Tuskegee Study of Syphilis, 1920-
9. Perspectives in Biology and Medicine 43 (1), 1-30.
   Benowitz, S. (1997). Politics Polarizing Issues in Needle-Exchange Study. Retrieved May 10, 2002 from
   the World Wide Web: http://www.the scientist.com/yr1997/feb/benowitz_pl_970203.html.
   Berg, J. W., Appelbaum, P. S., Lidz, C. W., & Parker, L.S. Informed Consent: Legal Theory and Clinical
   Practice . New York: Oxford University Press, 2001.
   Bradby, H. (1996). Genetics and Racism. In The Troubled Helix: Social and Psychological Implications
   of the New Human Genetics. T. Marteau, M. Richards (eds.), 295-316.
   Brandt, A. M. (1978). Racism and Research: The Case of the Tuskegee Syphilis Study. Hastings Center
   Report December, 21-29.
   Brawley, O. W. (1998). The Study of Untreated Syphilis in the Negro Male. International Journal of
   Radiation Oncology Biology Physics 40 (1), 5-8.
   Brody, B. A., The Ethics of Biomedical Research: An International Perspective. New York: Oxford
   University Press, 1998.
   Caplan, A., & Annas, G. J. (July 2, 1999). Tuskegee As Metaphor. Science 285 (5424), 47.
   Caplan, A. L., & Annas, G. (1997, 11 February). Washington Post.
   Cartwright, S. A. (1981). Report on the Diseases and Physical Peculiarities of the Negro Race. In
   Concept of Health and Disease: Interdisciplinary Perspectives. A. L. Caplan, H. T. Engelhardt Jr., J. J.
   McCartney (eds.), 305-325.
   Corbie-Smith, G. (1999a). The Continuing Legacy of the Tuskegee Syphilis Study: Considerations for
   Clinical Investigation. American Journal of Medical Science 317 (1), 5-8.
   Corbie-Smith, G. (July 2, 1999b). Tuskegee As Metaphor. Science 285 (5424) , 47.
   Corbie-Smith, G., Thomas, S. B., Williams, M. V., & Moody-Ayers, S. (1999). JGIM 14, 537-546.
   Council for International Organizations of Medical Sciences (CIOMS). (1993). International Ethical
   Guidelines for Biomedical Research Involving Human Subjects. In The Ethics of Biomedical Research:
   An International Perspective. Appendix 1.8, 233-236.
   Crosthwaite, J. (1995). “New Zealand’s ‘Tuskegee’? Some Comparisons between the Tuskegee Syphilis
   Study and a Study at National Women’s Hospital.” Presentation, Center for Medical Ethics, University of
   Pittsburgh, December 14.
   Module 2: The Legacy of the Tuskegee Syphilis Study
   51
   Daniels, N., Kennedy, P., & Kawachi I. (1999). Why Justice is Good for Our Health: The Social
   Determinants of Health Inequalities. Daedalus 128(4), 215-251.
   DeBruin, D.A. (1994). Justice and the Inclusion of Women in Clinical Studies: An Argument for Further
   Reform. Kennedy Institute of Ethics Journal 4 (2), 117-146.
   Dresser, R. (January-February, 1992). Wanted: Single, White Male for Medical Research. Hastings
   Center Report 22, 21-29.
   Edgar, H. (1992). Outside the Community. Hastings Center Report 22 (6) , 32-35.
   Epstein, A. M., & Ayanian, J. Z. (May 10, 2001). Racial Disparities in Medical Care. New England
   Journal of Medicine 344(19), 1471-1473.
   Faden, R., Kass, N., & McGraw, D. (1996). Women as Vessels and Vectors: Lessons from the HIV
   Epidemic. In Feminism & Bioethics: Beyond Reproduction, S. Wolf (ed.), 252-281.
   Fairchild, A. L., & Bayer, R. (July 2, 1999a). Tuskegee As Metaphor. Science 285 (5424), 47.
   Fairchild, A. L., & Bayer, R. (May 7 1999b). Uses and Abuses of Tuskegee. Science 284 (5416), 919-921.
   Foster, M. W., Sharp, R. R., Freeman, W. L., Chino, M., Bernstein, D. & Carter, T. H. (1999). The Role
   of Community Review in Evaluating the Risks of Human Genetic Variation Research. American Journal
   of Human Genetics 64, 1719-1727.
   Freimuth, V. S., Quinn, S. C., Thomas, S. B., Cole, G., Zook, E., & Duncan, T. (2001). African
   Americans’ Views on Research and the Tuskegee Syphilis Study. Social Science and Medicine 52 , 797-
   808.
   Glantz, L. H. (2002). Nontherapeutic Research with Children: Grimes v Kennedy Krieger Institute.
   American Journal of Public Health 92 (7), 1070-1073.
   Graves, J. L. (2002). Scylla and Charybdis: Adaptationism, Reductionism, and the Fallacy of Equating
   Race with Disease. In Mutating Concepts, Evolving Disciplines: Genetics, Medicine and Society, L. S.
   Parker & R. A. Ankeny (eds.), 143-164.
   Green, L. W., & Mercer, S. L. (December, 2001). Can Public Health Researchers and Agencies
   Reconcile the Push From Funding Bodies and the Pull From Communities? American Journal of Public
   Health 91(12), 1926-1929.
   Grover, J. Z. (1991). Keywords. In AIDS: Cultural Analysis, Cultural Activism, D. Crimp (ed.), 17-30.
   Jones, J. H. Bad Blood: The Tuskegee Syphilis Experiment. New York: The Free Press, 1993.
   Juengst, E. T. (1998). Human Genetics ’98: Ethical Issues in Genetics-Group Identity and Human
   Diversity: Keeping Biology Straight from Culture. American Journal of Human Genetics 63, 673-677.
   Kahn, J. P., Mastroianni, A. C., & Sugarman, J. (eds.). Beyond Consent: Seeking Justice in Research.
   New York: Oxford University Press, 1998.
   Kass, N. (1998). Gender and Research. In Beyond Consent: Seeking Justice in Research, J. Kahn, A. C.
   Mastroianni, J. Sugarman (eds.), 67-87.
   King, P. A. (1998). Race, Justice, and Research. In Beyond Consent: Seeking Justice in Research, J.
   Kahn, A. C. Mastroianni, J. Sugarman (eds.), 88-110.
   King, P. A. (1992). The Dangers of Difference. Hastings Center Report 22(6), 35-38.
   Module 2: The Legacy of the Tuskegee Syphilis Study
   52
   Laveist, T. A. (1993). Segregation, Poverty, and Empowerment: Health Consequences for African
   Americans. The Milbank Quarterly 71(1), 41-64.
   Kitman J.L. (2000) The Secret History of Lead. The Nation March 20: pp. 11-14, 16-22, 24-28, 30-40,
   42-22.
   Lurie, P., & Wolfe, S. (July 2, 1999). Tuskegee As Metaphor. Science 285 (5424), 47.
   Lurie, P, & Wolfe, S. (1997). Unethical Trials of Interventions to Reduce Perinatal Transmission of the
   Human Immunodeficiency Virus in Developing Countries. New England Journal of Medicine 337 (12) ,
   853-856.
   Mastroianni, A. C. and Kahn, J. P. (2002). Risk and Responsibility: Ethics, Grimes v Kennedy Krieger,
   and Public Health Research Involving Children. American Journal of Public Health 92 (7), 1073-1076.
   Merton, V. (1996). Ethical Obstacles to the Participation of Women in Biomedical Research. In
   Feminism & Bioethics: Beyond Reproduction, S. Wolf (ed.), 216-251.
   Recer, P. (1996). NIH Head Backs Needle Exchange. Retrieved May 10, 2002 from the World Wide
   Web: http://www.aegis.com/news/ap/1996/AP961222.html.
   Richardson, L. (1997, April 21). An Old Experiment’s Legacy: Distrust of AIDS Treatment. New York
   Times, p A1+.
   Roberts, D. E. (1996) Reconstructing the Patient: Starting with Women of Color. In Feminism &
   Bioethics: Beyond Reproduction, S. Wolf (ed.), 116-143.
   Sharp, R. R., & Foster, M. W. (2000). Involving Study Populations in the Review of Genetic Research.
   Journal of Law, Medicine & Ethics 28, 41-51.
   Strauss, R. P., Sengupta, S., Quinn, S. C., Goeppinger, J., Spaulding, C., Kegeles, S. M., & Millett, G.
   (December, 2001). The Role of Community Advisory Boards: Involving Communities in the Informed
   Consent Process. American Journal of Public Health 91(12), 1938-1943.
   Sugarman, J., Kass, N. E., Goodman, S. N., et al. (1998) What Patients Say About Medical Research.
   IRB: A Review of Human Subjects Research 20(4), 106.
   The Fifth Annual Health Law Symposium. (1997). Communities of Color and Genetic Testing: Purpose,
   Voice & Values. Seton Hall Law Review 27, 887-979.
   Thomas, S. B., Quinn, S. C. (1991) The Tuskegee Syphilis Study, 1932 to 1972: Implications for HIV
   Education and AIDS Risk Education Programs in the Black Community. American Journal of Public
   Health 81 (11) , 1498-1505.
   Treichler, P.A. (1991). AIDS, Homophobia, and Biomedical Discourse: An Epidemic of Signification. In
   AIDS: Cultural Analysis, Cultural Activism, D. Crimp (ed.), 31-70.
   Varmus, H, & Satcher, D. (1997). Ethical Complexities of Conducting Research in Developing
   Countries. New England Journal of Medicine 337 (14), 1003-1005.
   Weijer, C., & Emanuel, E. J. (August 18, 2000). Protecting Communities in Biomedical Research.
   Science 289(5482), 1142-1144.
   White, R. (2000). Unraveling the Tuskegee Study of Untreated Syphilis. Archives of Internal Medicine
   160, 585-598.
   Module 2: The Legacy of the Tuskegee Syphilis Study
   53
   Wolf, S. (1995). Beyond Genetic Discrimination: Toward the Broader Harm of Geneticism. Journal of
   Law, Medicine & Ethics 23, 345-353.
   World Medical Association (WMA), Declaration of Helsinki. (1964, 1983, 1989, 1996).
   Recommendations Guiding Physicians in Biomedical Research Involving Human Subjects. In The Ethics
   of Biomedical Research: An International Perspective, Appendix 1.2, 214-216.
   Additional Resources
   Tuskegee Syphilis Study
   The Least of My Brothers. a self-contained, Web-based module on the ethics of research with human
   subjects that uses a dramatization of the TSUS, http://poynter.indiana.edu/sas/lb/
   Benedek, T.G. (1977). The Tuskegee Study of Syphilis: Analysis of Moral versus Methodologic Aspects.
   Journal of Chronic Disease 1978, vol 31, 35-50.
   Bowman, J. (July 2, 1999). Tuskegee As Metaphor. Science, 285 (5424) , 47.
   Cave, V.G. (1975). Proper Uses and Abuses of the Health Care Delivery System for Minorities with
   Special Reference to the Tuskegee Syphilis Study. Journal of the National Medical Association , 67 (1),
   82-84.
   Cobb, W.M. (1973). The Tuskegee Syphilis Study. Journal of the National Medical Association , July
   1973, 345-348.
   Cox, J. (1998). Paternalism, Informed Consent and Tuskegee. International Journal of Radiation
   Oncology Biology Physics 40 (1), 1-2.
   Curran, W.J. (1973). The Tuskegee Syphilis Study. New England Journal of Medicine, 289 (14), 730-731.
   Des Jarlais, D.C., & Stepherson, B. (1991). History, Ethics, and Politics in AIDS Prevention Research.
   American Journal of Public Health 81(11), 1393-1394.
   Jones, J.H. (1992). The Tuskegee Legacy: AIDS and the Black Community. Hastings Center Report
   22(6), 38-40.
   Kampmeier, R.H. (1974). Final Report on the “Tuskegee Syphilis Study.” Southern Medical Journal 67
   (11), 1349-1353.
   Lally, J., & Barber, B. (1974). ‘The Compassionate Physician’: Frequency and Social Determinants of
   Physician-Investigator Concern for Human Subjects. Social Forces 53 (2), 289-296.
   Reverby, S. M., ed. (2000) Tuskegee’s Truths: Rethinking the Tuskegee Syphilis Study . Chapel Hill:
   University of North Carolina Press.
   Rothman, D.J. (1982). Were Tuskegee & Willowbrook ‘Studies in Nature’? Hastings Center Report April
   1982, 5-7.
   Talone, P. (1998). Establishing Trust After Tuskegee. International Journal of Radiation Oncology
   Biology Physics 40 (1), 3-4.
   Thomas, S., & Curran, J.W. (1999). Tuskegee: From Science to Conspiracy to Metaphor. American
   Journal of the Medical Sciences 317 (1) , 1-4.
   Yoon, C.K. Families Emerge as Silent Victims of Tuskegee Syphilis Experiments. (1997, May 12). New
   York Times, p. A1+.
   Module 2: The Legacy of the Tuskegee Syphilis Study
   54
   Fact Sheet: AIDS Clinical Trials in Developing Countries
   ???? Approximately 1600 HIV-infected infants are born each day, or over one half million annually
   (Fowler 2000). In the US in the late 1990s, there were approximately 280-370 cases of maternalfetal
   HIV transmission annually.
   ???? AIDS Clinical Trial Group Study 076 interim results released in 1994 showed a 25.5% mother-tochild
   transmission rate in the placebo group and a 8.3% transmission rate in the group receiving
   zidovudine, which led a US PHS Task Force to recommend that zidovudine be offered to all HIVinfected
   pregnant women and their newborns (MMWR 1994). The original 076 protocol enrolled
   women with only early or mild HIV infection. It is not known whether administration of zidovudine
   during the later stages of pregnancy may reduce the drug’s future effectiveness thus limiting the
   woman’s treatment options when her own disease progresses.
   ???? The incidence of HIV infection in babies born to HIV-infected women who do not breastfeed is
   approximately 25%, and the majority of infection seems to occur at the time of delivery not in utero .
   Cesarean delivery (under standard surgical conditions of developed nations) reduces the risk of
   transmission to approximately 10% without zidovudine treatment.
   ???? Parents are generally allowed to refuse, on behalf of their already born children, a burdensome
   therapy with only a 10% chance of benefit.
   ???? The long-term risks of using zidovudine in newborns is unknown.
   ???? Zidovudine (ZDV) is also known as Azidovudine (AZT).

---

Fowler, MG. (2000).”Prevention of Perinatal HIV Infection: What Do We Know? Where Should Future Research Go?” Annals
of the New York Academy of Science 918:45-52.
“Recommendations of the US Public Health Service Task Force on the Use of Zidovudine to Reduce Perinatal Transmission
of Human Immunodeficiency Virus.” Morbidity and Mortality Weekly Report 43.RR11 (August 1994):1-20.
Module 2: The Legacy of the Tuskegee Syphilis Study
55
Fact Sheet: Kennedy Krieger Institute Lead Abatement Study
Lead levels. Elevated blood lead levels are dangerous for adults, contributing to hypertension and
cardiovascular disease, but are particularly harmful to children (Kitman 15). Children are 4-5 times more
susceptible to lead than adults because their digestive systems absorb 40-50 percent of lead ingested as
opposed to 10-15 percent for adults (Kitman 38). Young children in particular are often exposed to more
lead than their elders because they frequently put in their mouths objects on which airborne lead has
settled (Kitman 38). Even low exposures of lead can lead to reduced IQ, behavioral problems, reading
and learning disabilities, and hyperactivity (Kitman 16, 38). Pregnant women are also very susceptible to
miscarriages and their fetuses to poor development if there is excessive lead exposure (Kitman 16).
These problems are due to the fact that lead both retards neuro-anatomical development and degrades
neurotransmitters (Masters 15).
There is no “safe” level of lead in the blood, but levels of 10 or more mcg/dl (micrograms per deciliter)
is generally considered the threshold for concern, since at this point intelligence, behavior, and
development can be adversely affected (http://www.cdc.gov/nceh/lead/lead.htm). When a child’s blood
lead level is between 10 and 20 mcg/dl, parents and communities should begin making changes to
reduce lead exposure, such as more careful housecleaning and handwashing, and better nutrition to
support the body’s recovery. When the blood lead level is 20 or more mcg/dl, oral medication—
chelation therapy—is considered, particularly if the child is showing symptoms. These medications bind
to lead so that it will be excreted in the urine. Such therapy is always instituted (as standard care) at
levels above 45. A reading of 70 or more mcg/dl is deemed a life-threatening emergency
(http://www.keepkidshealthy.com/welcome/lead/leadtreatment.html).

---

Kitman JL. “The Secret History of Lead,” The Nation pp 11-14, 16-22, 24-28, 30-40, 42-22 (March 20, 2000).
Masters RD, Hone BT and Doshi S. Environmental pollution, neurotoxicity and criminal violence. RJ Rose (ed) Aspects of
Environmental Toxicology . London: Gordon and Breach, 1997, pp. 132-148.
Module 2: The Legacy of the Tuskegee Syphilis Study
56
Fact Sheet: Research with children, from the “Common Rule,” 45 CFR.
§46.404 Research not involving greater than minimal risk [see below].
DHHS will conduct or fund research in which the IRB finds that no greater than minimal risk to
children is presented, only if the IRB finds that adequate provisions are made for soliciting the
assent of the children and the permission of their parents or guardians, as set forth in §46.408.
§46.405 Research involving greater than minimal risk but presenting the prospect of direct
benefit to the individual subjects.
DHHS will conduct or fund research in which the IRB finds that more than minimal risk to
children is presented by an intervention or procedure that holds out the prospect of direct
benefit for the individual subject, or by a monitoring procedure that is likely to contribute to the
subject’s well-being, only if the IRB finds that:
(a) the risk is justified by the anticipated benefit to the subjects;
(b) the relation of the anticipated benefit to the risk is at least as favorable to the subjects
as that presented by available alternative approaches; and
(c) adequate provisions are made for soliciting the assent of the children and permission of
their parents or guardians, as set forth in §46.408.
§46.406 Research involving greater than minimal risk and no prospect of direct benefit to
individual subjects, but likely to yield generalizable knowledge about the subject’s disorder or
condition.
DHHS [Department of Health and Human Services] will conduct or fund research in which the
IRB finds that more than minimal risk to children is presented by an intervention or procedure
that does not hold out the prospect of direct benefit for the individual subject, or by a
monitoring procedure which is not likely to contribute to the well-being of the subject, only if
the IRB finds that:
(a) the risk represents a minor increase over minimal risk;
(b) the intervention or procedure presents experiences to subjects that are reasonably
commensurate with those inherent in their actual or expected medical, dental,
psychological, social, or educational situations;
(c) the intervention or procedure is likely to yield generalizable knowledge about the
subjects’ disorder or condition which is of vital importance for the understanding or
amelioration of the subjects’ disorder or condition; and
(d) adequate provisions are made for soliciting assent of the children and permission of
their parents or guardians, as set forth in ∋46.408.
§46.407 Research not otherwise approvable which presents an opportunity to understand,
prevent, or alleviate a serious problem affecting the health or welfare of children.
DHHS will conduct or fund research that the IRB does not believe meets the requirements of
§46.404, ∋46.405, or §46.406 only if:
(a) the IRB finds that the research presents a reasonable opportunity to further the
understanding, prevention, or alleviation of a serious problem affecting the health or
welfare of children; and
(b) the Secretary, after consultation with a panel of experts in pertinent disciplines (for
example: science, medicine, education, ethics, law) finds
Module 2: The Legacy of the Tuskegee Syphilis Study
57
(1) that the research in fact satisfies the conditions of §46.404,
§46.405, or §46.406, as applicable, or
(2) the following:
(i) the research presents a reasonable opportunity to further the
understanding, prevention, or alleviation of a serious problem
affecting the health or welfare of children;
(ii) the research will be conducted in accordance with sound ethical
principles;
(iii) adequate provisions are made for soliciting the assent of children and
the permission of their parents or guardians, as set forth in §46.408.
Module 2: The Legacy of the Tuskegee Syphilis Study
58
Fact Sheet: Anchorage Needle Exchange Program (and Kennedy Krieger
Institute Study)
From the Common Rule, 45 CFR:
§46.102 Definitions.
(i) Minimal risk means that the probability and magnitude of harm or discomfort
anticipated in the research are not greater in and of themselves than those ordinarily
encountered in daily life or during the performance of routine physical or psychological
examinations or tests.
Module 2: The Legacy of the Tuskegee Syphilis Study
59
Case Study 1: AIDS Clinical Trials in Developing Countries
In 1994, AIDS Clinical Trial Group Study 076, conducted in the United States and France, showed that
a regimen of zidovudine administered to pregnant mothers and newborns decreased the likelihood of
HIV transmission from mother to child. At that point, the ACTG 076 regimen became the standard of
care in the developed world for the treatment of HIV-positive pregnant women. However, the regimen is
expensive and intensive, and as a consequence, is not generally available for use in the developing
countries of Asia and Africa. Therefore, several trials in the mid-1990s sought to determine whether
reduced regimens of drugs, or other methods of treatment, would decrease transmission. These trials
were funded by the US and other governments, or by international AIDS organizations, since the
developing countries where they were carried out did not have the financial resources or public health
infrastructure to fund and conduct the studies themselves.
According to 1993 World Health Organization (WHO) guidelines on human-subjects research, “the
ethical standards applied [to a study in a host country] should be no less exacting than they would be in
the case of research carried out in [the sponsoring] country” (CIOMS 1993, see Brody 1998, pp. 36,
App. 1.8). Earlier, the WHO, in its Declaration of Helsinki IV, had decreed that “in any medical study,
every patient—including those of a control group, if any—should be assured of the best proven
diagnostic and therapeutic method” (WHO 1989, see Brody 1998, App. 1.2). According to these
guidelines, because of the efficacy of the ACTG 076 regimen and its demonstrated superiority to no
care at all, the control group of any study within or funded by the United States would have to receive
the 076 regimen rather than a placebo. However, 15 of the 16 trials in developing countries begun after
the ACTG study was completed involved a control arm in which participants were not provided with any
antiretroviral drugs (Lurie and Wolfe 1997).
Module 2: The Legacy of the Tuskegee Syphilis Study
60
Case Study 1: Discussion
Opponents of these trials—including Peter Lurie, MD, MPH, and Sidney Wolfe, MD, of the Public
Citizen’s Health Research Group, and Marcia Angell, MD, former editor of the New England Journal of
Medicine—claim that equivalency studies (which compare investigative interventions to a proven
treatment), rather than placebo-controlled trials, are the best and most ethical way to assess less
expensive interventions. They argue that researchers should search for a regimen that equals the 076
regimen in efficacy, rather than trying to determine whether various treatments are better than nothing.
In addition, these opponents respond to claims that no care is the standard of care in developing
countries by insisting that “standard of care” is a medical term that indicates a scientifically-determined
effective level of care, which is not dependent on social context. The lack of treatment to prevent
maternal-fetal transmission of HIV in the developing world is due to economic and social constraints
rather than scientific knowledge, and therefore cannot be termed a “standard of care” (Angell 1997,
Lurie and Wolfe 1997). Furthermore, these critics of placebo-controlled trials point out that
manufacturers make drugs available for free for use in clinical trials, so money, at least in the
experimental stages, should not be a barrier to the use of zidovudine (Lurie and Wolfe 1997). In
addition, the number of trial participants and length of time necessary to do an active-controlled trial
rather than a placebo-controlled trial are not prohibitively larger (Lurie and Wolfe 1997).
Marcia Angell condemned placebo-controlled trials in Africa, pointing out that “only when there is no
known effective treatment is it ethical to compare a potential new treatment with a placebo” (Angell
1997). She claims that justifications for the use of placebos with women in the third world are similar to
those used to justify the Tuskegee study: the women, without the study, would not receive treatment
anyway, and the placebo-controlled studies are the fastest way to get information that will be useful in
developing countries. Lurie and Wolfe outlined these points of comparison:
We invoked the Tuskegee study analogy in the perinatal AZT trials because (i) both
were prospective studies in which participants were denied known effective treatments;
(ii) both were conducted or funded by the U.S. Public Health Service; (iii) both involved
people of color; (iv) both included violations of informed consent; (v) both were
justified by claiming that this was the only appropriate study design; (vi) both were
defended by positing differences between previous and present study populations; (vii)
both were justified by asserting that study participants would not have been treated
anyway; and (viii) both were terminated only after exposure in the lay press. (Lurie and
Wolfe 1999)
Amy Fairchild, PhD, MPH, and Ronald Bayer, PhD, respond, “Of the eight criteria Lurie and Wolfe list,
four might apply to any ethical, well-designed, publicly funded study involving people of color”
(Fairchild and Bayer 1999a). The argue that “for Tuskegee to serve as a useful analogy for illuminating
research abused, the challenged study must meet some reasonable, general criteria. It must involve
deception regarding the nature and very existence of the research study, it must capitalize on social
deprivation or vulnerability, and not only must it fail to provide the best available effective therapy but it
must also contrive to keep individuals from receiving such therapy” (Fairchild and Bayer 1999b).
Harold Varmus, MD, and David Satcher, MD, PhD, of the National Institutes of Health (NIH) answered
critics of placebo-controlled studies by attempting to explain the complexities of AIDS research in the
Module 2: The Legacy of the Tuskegee Syphilis Study
61
third world, where economic and social conditions make deviations from first-world standards necessary
(Varmus and Satcher 1997). They also pointed out, against Angell’s comparison to Tuskegee, that the
Tuskegee study did not test any intervention, whereas the purpose of all of the NIH-sponsored studies
was to find effective treatments for AIDS and to prevent HIV-transmission. The first point made by
Varmus and Satcher was that the ACTG 076 regimen is not feasible in most places in Asia and sub-
Saharan Africa, since it requires that women are tested and counseled early in pregnancy, take a long
course of oral zidovudine, have the drug administered intravenously during labor, refrain from breastfeeding,
and administer a six-week course of the drug to their newborns. Mother and infant also must
be carefully monitored for side effects. In the third world, women do not usually have early prenatal
care, if any, customarily do not deliver in the hospital, and rely on breastfeeding to nourish and protect
their children.
The second point emphasized by Varmus and Satcher was that in the developing world, where
delivering the 076 regimen is not feasible because of economic and social circumstances, comparing
other, more accessible treatments with it may not result in useful information for patients in those areas.
“If the affordable intervention is less effective than the 076 regimen—not an unlikely outcome—this
information will be of little use in a country where the more effective regimen is unavailable. Equally
important, it will still be unclear whether the affordable intervention is better than nothing and worth
the investment of scarce health care dollars.”
A final relevant point was raised by Edward Mbidde, chairman of the AIDS Research Committee of the
Uganda Cancer Institute. He reminds critics that, although funding originated with the NIH, “it is not
NIH conducting the studies in Uganda but Ugandans conducting their study on their people for the
good of their people” (Varmus and Satcher 1997). All of the studies in question have been developed
with the help and approval of doctors and organizations in the countries where they have been
conducted.
The placebo-controlled design would be considered unethical in the United States, where it is
economically possible to provide the best-known treatment both within and outside of the clinical trial
environment. Insistence on using the standards of the funding country is a protection designed to
prevent the governments and companies of first-world countries from exploiting the citizens of
developing countries, by enrolling them in studies and providing no treatment because no treatment is
the norm in the host country. However, the question of whether the study will be relevant and beneficial
for the people enrolled is an equally important one: if it is true that a placebo-controlled study has been
devised by African scientists as the most useful study for Africans, taking into account the
circumstances in those nations, then placebo-controlled studies may be the most ethical way to proceed
if the goal is to find workable solutions to the African AIDS epidemic. In the Tuskegee study, the
intervention that was denied was a series of doses of penicillin over a fairly short period of time, which
could have been easily transported to affected populations in the United States and efficiently
administered using existing public health infrastructures. In contrast, to provide the best-known
treatment to prevent the transmission of HIV in the trials in question would have involved an intense
regimen of very expensive drugs over a long period of time, requiring resources and facilities not
currently available in sub-Saharan Africa and requiring the introduction of an entire health care
infrastructure. Perhaps developed nations are ethically obligated to assist developing countries in
creating this infrastructure, but doing so is generally considered beyond the scope of the individual
studies.
Module 2: The Legacy of the Tuskegee Syphilis Study
62
Unlike the Tuskegee Study, the protocols for the placebo-controlled HIV/AIDS trials were developed by
members of the population targeted for study. However, despite their common racial and ethnic
background, those who proposed the study were generally more economically and educationally
advantaged than those who enrolled as subjects. Also unlike Tuskegee, deception was not an integral
part of the participant recruitment plan, and the studies sought to test interventions rather than to
observe the natural progression of disease. Complicating this positive picture of the HIV/AIDS trials,
however, are questions about whether the participants and similarly situated residents of the host
countries would benefit from the findings of the studies, or whether those societies would lack
resources and political commitment to provide treatment following the end of the trials. Might the study
results be used instead in developed countries to argue for providing a less expensive, and probably
somewhat less effective course of treatment to poor residents in developed nations who could not
themselves afford the more expensive standard of care? In addition, investigation of what participants—
especially those in the placebo-control arms—actually understood about the HIV/AIDS trials suggested
that the informed consent process had not been effective in enabling them to make an informed,
voluntary decision about study participation, nor in some cases were social structures conducive to their
participation in the very Western or Anglo-American practice of obtaining informed consent. Some
participants lived in cultures where deference to authority figures or elders, or where non-individual
decision making was the cultural norm.
Questions for Additional Discussion
???? Is it always better to do something than nothing; in other words, is it better to conduct the trials
described above with the intention of developing some at least partially effective, potentially
affordable intervention now, rather than waiting for broad social changes that would enable
delivery of what is standard of care in the developed world? On the other hand, does permitting
such studies and the eventual implementation of inferior (but better than nothing) therapy in
developing nations reduce pressure to do more, e.g., to develop the public health infrastructure
and political will to provide care more closely approximating that of the developed world? Susan
Wolf makes this argument about current efforts to address genetic discrimination in the US; she
argues that an anti-discrimination approach in health insurance, for example, “blunts any
challenge to the rating system itself by suggesting that the problem is adequately handled by
prohibiting disadvantage based on … genetic information” (195, p. 348). In what other areas of
health policy and research do you recognize a similar concern that by doing something rather
than nothing, people undertaking these “band-aid measures” relieve pressure to address the
problem more fully?
???? What role should individual researchers play in the development of another country’s public
health infrastructure? What are the elements of such an infrastructure? Are there communities in
the US—geographically defined or defined in other terms—that could similarly benefit from
researchers’ efforts?
???? If an investigator undertakes a “non-intervention” epidemiological study—for example, a study
of the prevalence of disease x—in a developing country, what responsibilities might that
investigator incur and toward whom? Can an argument be made that all studies, even
observational studies or assessments of disease prevalence, are in some sense interventions in
the community studied? Which responsibilities of researchers are connected to the researchers’
Module 2: The Legacy of the Tuskegee Syphilis Study
63
awareness of a problem and which are attached to the researchers’ intervention to study the
problem?
???? Of the criteria offered by Lurie and Wolf, and by Fairchild and Bayer, for being relevantly “like
Tuskegee,” which do you think are the most salient criteria? Why does it matter whether the
AIDS trials are “just like Tuskegee” or not?
Additional Resources
Ho, D. (1997, September 29). It’s AIDS, Not Tuskegee. Time,
http://www.time.com/time/magazine/1997/dom/970929/viewpoint.its_aids_not_.html
London, L. (2002). Ethical Oversight of Public Health Research: Can Rules and IRBs Make a Difference
in Developing Countries? American Journal of Public Health 92 (7), 1079-1084.
Module 2: The Legacy of the Tuskegee Syphilis Study
64
Case Study 2: Kennedy Krieger Institute Lead Abatement Study
In 1993-1995, the Kennedy Krieger Institute (KKI), an affiliate of Johns Hopkins University (JHU),
conducted the Lead Poisoning Prevention Study in Baltimore, Maryland, to determine the effectiveness
of various levels of lead removal (“abatement”) from housing. Identification of the minimal effective
level of lead abatement was deemed a socially and scientifically valuable goal because of both the health
risks of lead and the need to maintain the availability of low-rent housing in Baltimore.
There were five study arms, involving 108 houses and their residents. The first group of homes received
about $1650 worth of repairs such as lead paint scraping, the second about $3500 worth, and the third
about $6500 worth. Abatement became increasingly more extensive and more nearly complete with the
additional increments of cost. Group four homes received the most extensive abatement possible, and
finally group five consisted of houses built after 1978 that presumably were free of lead paint although
located in neighborhoods known to have many houses with lead paint. All the houses in the study, even
the ones repaired “minimally,” were freer of lead than about 95% of housing stock in Baltimore, and the
lowest level of repair reduced lead dust by 80%. The repairs were paid for through a loan program from
the Maryland Department of Housing and Development, and probably would not have occurred without
such a program, because of the high cost of lead abatement measures in relation to the value of the
housing stock that needed it. The owners of the properties were given assistance in obtaining the loans
by KKI. Landlords were also strongly encouraged to rent to tenants with small children; the study design
called for enrolling families with young children in the study and testing the children’s blood for lead
levels.
All children enrolled in the study received blood lead testing four to five times per year during the twoyear
duration of the study, and the houses, soil, and drinking water of each property were tested
immediately after abatement was completed and then 1, 3, 6, 12, 18, and 24 months later. Participants
were paid $15 for completing a questionnaire “about other potential sources of lead exposure in your
home and activities which relate to exposure” every six months, and were given free transportation to
the KKI clinic for blood testing. The study’s consent form promised that “we would provide you with
specific blood lead results. We would contact you to discuss a summary of house test results and steps
that you could take to reduce any risks of exposure” (Clinical Investigation Consent Form).
Two mothers residing in houses that received less than full abatement later sued KKI, alleging that they
had not been informed in a timely manner that their children’s lead levels were elevated, that they had
not been adequately warned about the risks of lead exposure and risks of the study, and that the study
design placed their children at unnecessary risk. (Grimes v. Kennedy Krieger Institute 2001; Mastroianni
and Kahn 2002). Their suits received a great deal of media attention, perhaps in part because KKI’s
insurance lawyers initially responded by claiming that the Institute had “no legal duty” to report lead
levels to families.
Module 2: The Legacy of the Tuskegee Syphilis Study
65
Case Study 2: Discussion
KKI’s rather hard-hearted and legalistic response, coupled with reports that at least one plaintiff was a
minority member on pubic assistance, fueled concerns that poor minority families may have been
exploited or mistreated by the more powerful university-affiliated institute. After a Maryland trial court
refused to hear the suits, Judge Dale Cathell of the Maryland Court of Appeals not only declared that
the cases should go to trial, but severely condemned the study itself. He likened the lead study to Nazi
experimentation and the Tuskegee Syphilis Study, and held that parents and guardians could not
consent to nontherapeutic research in which there was any risk to the child, a far more stringent
standard than the nationally accepted one of minimal risk in research involving children. His ruling, if it
had stood, would have resulted in shutting down much research on childhood vaccines and diseases in
Maryland, and may have set a crippling, albeit not legally binding precedent,5 nationally for research
involving not only children, but also mentally disabled or demented patients, who are subject to the
same research protections as minors (AHRP 2001). Two months after offering its initial decision, the
court clarified that it had not intended the “no risk” standard to apply to nontherapeutic pediatric
research studies and that it endorsed the federal regulations in this regard (see Fact Sheet).
Several children in the study suffered effects of lead poisoning and had elevated blood lead levels.
Three more families have since filed charges against KKI, but none of the cases have yet gone to trial.
Because the legal cases are ongoing, it is likely that many relevant facts remain to be discovered.
Readers are cautioned about engaging in ethical analysis on the basis of an incomplete set of facts.
Nevertheless, ethical criticisms and comparisons to the Tuskegee Syphilis Study focused on several
aspects of the design and execution of the study about which enough is known that some preliminary
discussion may take place. First, the subjects were children, a vulnerable population due to their
inability to understand and consent personally and their particular susceptibility to toxins in the
environment. Second, it was alleged that the study encouraged families to live in dwellings where lead,
a known toxin, was present. Third, the scientists may have downplayed or failed to mention all of the
risks of participation in the study to the children’s parents, and failed to disclose in a timely fashion
elevated blood lead results that would have indicated that children were at risk of lead poisoning.
Similarly, in Tuskegee, the poor, uneducated black enrollees were vulnerable to exploitation, and were
not informed of their syphilis, of what could be done to prevent its transmission or to cure it, or of the
risks of participating in the study, including undergoing such invasive procedures as spinal taps.
Although we cannot possibly reach any conclusions about the actual legal charges and arguments being
made, for the purpose of discussion, we can identify two distinct sets of issues concerning the ethics of
the KKI study: questions concerning the basic design of the study, and concerns about how the study
was conducted. In the first category are questions such as, should children have been used for this
study? Children are more susceptible to lead poisoning than adults, but that fact also makes it more
important that ways are found to lessen their exposure (Kitman 2000). The researchers knew that some
of the children in the study were being exposed to more lead than others, but every house in the study
had far less lead than most dwellings available for similar rental costs in the city. This meant that that
the children in the study were generally better off in terms of lead exposure through their living
environment by participating in the study, although it is conceivable that a family could have moved
5 Although individual state court decisions are not binding on citizens or courts of other states, in the relatively uncharted
terrain of human subject protections, researchers and funding agencies could be justifiably reluctant to undertake practices
deemed wrong in such strong terms at a state appellate level.
Module 2: The Legacy of the Tuskegee Syphilis Study
66
from a more highly abated house to one with more lead present. The only way to have determined
whether individual families (children) were better or worse off in virtue of their study participation
decision would have been to have traced every family and determine the relative levels of lead in their
previous and study dwellings.
The second set of questions focuses on the conduct of the study, including the provisions for informed
consent, which could have been inadequate even if the basic design of the study was appropriate. The
design met the approval of the JHU IRB, but did the researchers fully explain the study and the risks to
the parents? In the consent form, the purpose of the study was explained as follows:
As you may know, lead poisoning in children is a problem in Baltimore City and other
communities across the country. Lead in paint, house dust and outside soil are major
sources of lead exposure for children. Children can also be exposed to lead in drinking
water and other sources. We understand that your house is going to have special repairs
done in order to reduce exposure to lead in paint and dust. On a random basis, homes
will receive one of two levels of repair. We are interested in finding out how well the
two levels of repair work. The repairs are not intended, or expected, to completely
remove exposure to lead.
We are now doing a study to learn about how well different practices work for reducing
exposure to lead in paint and dust….This study is intended to monitor the effects of the
repairs and is not intended to replace the regular medical care your family obtains.
The form then explains that the study will sample lead levels in and around the dwellings and in
children’s blood, only hinting at the fact that the children’s blood lead levels were to be used as
indicators of the efficacy of the lead abatement procedures. The form also fails to explain the symptoms
or effects of lead poisoning (see accompanying Fact sheet). Further, the consent form refers to “two
levels of repair work,” when there were actually five different levels of lead abatement (or lead-freeness)
involved in the study. Although a consent form should be used only to guide and to document the
process of informed consent, it is troubling when the information contained in the form is confusing,
inaccurate, or incomplete. In addition, it appears that researchers did not follow through on the benefits
or protections promised in the consent form. In at least one of the cases now slated for trial, the results
of dust collection in a home was not reported to the family for nine months, and then only after the
child’s blood showed elevated levels of lead (Mastroianni and Kahn 2002).
A further interesting topic for ethical discussion was raised by Judge Cathell’s initial decision that
children could not take part in any nontherapeutic research that posited any risk to the child, rather than
the existing “minimal risk” standard (see Fact Sheet). Though this judicial opinion was later
reinterpreted, it highlights the conflict between protecting vulnerable populations and undertaking
research that could benefit people like them (although not the participants themselves). This echoes
similar debates over the inclusion of other vulnerable populations in research. Indeed, after recounting
research abuses including the TSUS, Nazi experiments in concentration camps, and Japanese military
“disease bomb” experiments in World War II, Judge Cathell claimed that “in the present case, children,
especially young children, living in lower economic circumstances, albeit not as vulnerable as the other
examples, are nonetheless, vulnerable as well.” (http://www.claimrep.com/laws/cases/
Md/caseMDGrimes.htm)
Module 2: The Legacy of the Tuskegee Syphilis Study
67
Because few health care interventions have been tested for use with pediatric patients, it would seem
critical to encourage such pediatric studies, particularly drug testing. However, if the individual child’s
best interest is to be the overriding standard as the initial decision in Grimes suggested, then parents
and guardians cannot be expected (or allowed) to consent to the participation of their children in
research that is not designed to afford their children direct therapeutic benefit. Most important for
public health research, no currently healthy child could be placed at potential risk in a study of
preventive interventions for the sake of other children. Similar arguments could be made for others who
cannot consent for themselves, e.g., the mentally disabled or “never competent,” senile demented
elderly and other “previously competent” people.
Questions for Additional Discussion
???? In what ways does this study resemble features of the TSUS, and in what ways is it dissimilar?
???? Could this study have been done, as a practical matter, if the families enrolled in the study were
more affluent, for example, affluent enough to live in lead-free homes or to hire private leadtesting
of their properties?
???? What is the relevance for the ethical assessment of this study of the “current reality” that
landlords would simply abandon their properties if the highest, most effective, and most costly
lead abatement measures were required in order for them to rent their properties? How can the
reality of this assumed “current reality” be determined? Would it be relevant to the assessment
of this study if it could be predicted that landlords would generally be willing to invest, for
example, $1700 per property for lead abatement? How is the “current reality” of housing
economics in Baltimore similar or dissimilar to the “current reality” of the lack of public health
infrastructure and funding for HIV treatment in developing nations?
???? Is it relevant to the ethical evaluation of this study that most, indeed almost all, of the
participants probably benefited, i.e., most lived in houses more free from lead than they
otherwise would have? Did the KKI researchers rely on the “background level” of risk of lead
poisoning to justify offering less than maximally effective interventions in the course of the
study? How, if at all, did this justification differ from that made by Tuskegee researchers?
???? How, if at all, was the design of the study faulty? Would the study have been unethical even if
the researchers had reported testing results to parents in a timely fashion? What other
measures, if any, should the researchers be required to undertake to protect the enrolled
children from dangerous lead levels? At what blood lead level should such measures be
undertaken (refer to Fact Sheet)?
???? The appeals court held that in nontherapeutic research studies in which subjects are
compensated in any amount or form, a contract is created between the researcher and subject
which creates legally binding obligations for the researchers, such as a duty to warn of
impending harm (Glantz 2002). Should researchers be held to obligations other than those
stated in the consent document and discussed in the informed consent process?
???? Is the informed consent document revealing enough? What information should researchers be
obligated to disclose in this study? Although regulations govern the elements of disclosure in
Module 2: The Legacy of the Tuskegee Syphilis Study
68
the research context is there other information that should be disclosed to prospective research
participants? What would a “reasonable person,” or a typical parent in this situation, want to
know? How should researchers respond if a prospective participant expresses the desire for
more information? In the therapeutic context this would be called a request for disclosure
according to a subjective (or individualized) standard. Is this appropriate in research?
???? Nontherapeutic research on children can be carried out if the risk presented is “no greater than
minimal risk,” where ‘minimal risk’ “means that the probability and magnitude of harm or
discomfort anticipated in the research are not greater in and of themselves than those ordinarily
encountered in daily life or during the performance of routine physical or psychological
examinations or tests” (45 CFR §46.102(i); see Glantz 2002). However, children living in
different environments have very different daily exposures to risk. Should the acceptable risk be
greater for inner-city Baltimore children than suburban New York children, and if not, which
group’s daily life should be chosen as the standard?
Additional Resources
Keiger, D. and De Pasquale, S. (2002). Trials and Tribulation. Johns Hopkins Magazine Feb 2002.
Accessed at http://www.jhu.edu/~jhumag/0202web/trials.html on 13 March 2002.
Kopelman, L.M. (2002). Pediatric Research Regulations under Legal Scrutiny: Grimes Narrows their
Interpretation. Journal of Law, medicine & Ethics 30(1), 38-49.
Putney, S.B. and Gruskin, S. (2002). Time, Place, and Consciousness: Three Dimensions of Meaning
for US Institutional Review Boards. American Journal of Public Health 92 (7), 1067-1070.
Module 2: The Legacy of the Tuskegee Syphilis Study
69
Case Study 3: Anchorage Needle Exchange Program
An NIH sponsored study in Anchorage, Alaska was designed to determine whether over-the-counter
sale of sterile drug injection equipment was more effective than needle exchange programs (NEPs). The
study randomly assigned 600 intravenous drug users (IDUs) and 500 former IDUs to one of two arms:
those in one arm were enrolled in a needle exchange program, and those in the other were given a map
of pharmacies in Anchorage that sold syringes. Researchers also sought to determine which method of
needle distribution was more effective in preventing infectious diseases such as hepatitis and HIV,
which are transmitted by shared needles. To this end, subjects were tested for hepatitis and HIV before
and after the study period, with the number of new cases of those diseases indicating which method was
preferable. Researchers additionally wanted to determine whether the availability of clean needles would
cause a relapse in recovered users. Hepatitis B vaccination vouchers were provided to all participants.
The conclusion of the researchers was that NEPs do not increase IV drug use.
Module 2: The Legacy of the Tuskegee Syphilis Study
70
Case Study 3: Discussion
Many ethical objections to this study were raised. Sidney Wolfe, MD, director of Public Citizen’s Health
Research Group, opposed the study on the grounds that it was unnecessary since the study questions
have already been answered by other experiments (Caplan and Annas 1999). Art Caplan, PhD, and
George Annas, JD, MPH, add that the study would be unethical regardless of whether or not it was
redundant: “the ethical argument invoked in defense of this morally repugnant design was that the
knowledge to be gained could not be gained by any other methods and was of such value as to justify
the design. This, of course, is precisely the justification some defenders of the Tuskegee trial argued at
the time the study was being challenged as unethical” (Caplan and Annas 1999).
The most frequent objection centers on the fact that one group of study participants was deprived of the
option of obtaining free needles and was thereby at increased risk of contracting hepatitis or HIV. Drug
users assigned to the pharmacy arm might be prevented from buying needles due to poverty, lack of
transportation, or denial by pharmacists (Recer 1996). “The clinical trial at issue was constructed so as
to leave subjects open to preventable infection by a serious disease by limiting their knowledge and
their options” (Caplan and Annas 1999). Further criticisms focused on the use of the incidence of
hepatitis B and HIV as endpoints of the study. George Annas believes that the use of Hepatitis B (for
which there is a vaccine) as an end point of the study is in violation of the 1947 Nuremberg Code, under
which “no human experiment is to be conducted that could induce life-threatening—and preventable—
harm” (in Benowitz 1997). However, the question of whether the experiment can be considered to
“induce” hepatitis B is also a subject of debate. Nonetheless, in response to such claims, the NIH added
the provision that participants be given vouchers for Hepatitis B vaccines. However, some critics argue
that the vaccines themselves, and not just vouchers, should have been given (Recer 1996). Caplan and
Annas argue that the study allowed researchers to “stand by and observe as their subjects develop
devastating diseases that could be prevented.” (1997). Others suggested that “treatment of the
underlying medical condition and the social context were not addressed by the intervention, leaving the
subjects persistently vulnerable to the possibility of disease. The disconnect between the researchers’
agenda and the needs of the community under study parallels the Tuskegee study” (Corbie-Smith
1999b). Finally, the study was criticized for encouraging participants to break the law: “drug injectors in
the study…are also instructed how to talk and dress in order to convince a pharmacist to sell them a
syringe, a violation of local Anchorage law” (Lurie and Wolfe 1999).
Other commentators seek to justify the Anchorage study in its own terms and to distinguish it from the
Tuskegee study. “Whereas in Tuskegee the PHS used the social circumstances of poor African-
American men to manipulate them into a study that would deprive them of treatment, proposals to
provide sterile injection equipment seek to address the vulnerable situation of those exposed to HIV by
offering a potentially life-saving intervention….Only insofar as the original study failed to offer hepatitis
B vaccination to participants did it arguably involve an ethical lapse—a lapse addressed by the NIH
despite the recommendations of its ethical review panel” (Fairchild and Bayer 1999b). Needle exchange
programs didn’t exist in Anchorage before the study, so drug addicts were not deprived of a service that
they had grown used to—their access either improved or stayed the same. Like the men in the Tuskegee
Study, some of the participants in the Anchorage trial were actively denied one type of intervention:
they were refused access to the NEP. In addition, none of the men were offered counseling or assistance
in treating their addiction, just as the Tuskegee men were not told how to prevent the transmission of
syphilis. However, the Anchorage participants were not prohibited from entering drug rehabilitation if
Module 2: The Legacy of the Tuskegee Syphilis Study
71
they so chose, while at least some TSUS enrollees were actively prevented from seeking treatment for
syphilis. Entrance into the Anchorage study was voluntary, and none were deceived.
Questions for Additional Discussion
???? What aspects of the Anchorage study, if any, make it unethical? Would it make a difference if
the research question had already been answered satisfactorily elsewhere, or if a NEP had been
operating in the area previously and had been open to all, or if the pharmacy arm participants
hadn’t been instructed in breaking the law? Does the inclusion of former IV drug users in the
study, in a situation in which they might be tempted into a relapse by the easy availability of
sterile needles, raise any ethical problems?
???? As in the TSUS, the AIDS perinatal studies, and the KKI lead study, in the Anchorage study the
development of disease was used as one of the study’s endpoints. Under what conditions, is the
transmission or development of disease an appropriate endpoint?
???? What is the level of risk that participants in this study might justifiably be asked to incur? Why?
Is the Common Rule’s definition of ‘minimal risk’ relevant in this study (see Fact Sheet)? Does
the actual level of risk faced in daily life by the current and former IDUs enrolled in this study
differ?
???? The Anchorage study was an NIH-sponsored study conducted by non-IDUs. To what extent is it
ethically beneficial or ethically problematic that the study was conducted by “outsiders” to the
community being studied (i.e., the drug-using community). Would it have been appropriate, for
example, for former IDUs to have been recruited to work with researchers to recruit current
IDUs as participants in the Anchorage study? In what ways would they have played a role like
that of Nurse Rivers in the TSUS?
???? Imagine yourself as a researcher hoping to enlist the support of African-American community
leaders in a large urban setting for a pilot needle exchange project targeting African-American
IDUs. First, who, or what sorts of leaders, would you approach? What would you anticipate
their response would be to your proposed project? How would your plans differ if you were
approaching another minority community in your area, and how might leaders of that
community respond?
???? How would you respond if African-American community leaders charged that you were pursuing
a NEP as a cheap alternative to providing effective drug treatment and that such NEPs are in
reality part of a genocidal conspiracy to eliminate poor African-Americans, just like the
Tuskegee project was (see Fairchild and Bayer 1999b)?
Additional Resources
Fisher, D. (2000). Does Needle Exchange Cause an Increase in Drug Use? Presented at APHA meeting,
abstract online at http://apha.confex.com/apha/128am/techprogram/paper_1914.htm.
Fisher, D. (2002). Selection effect of needle exchange in Anchorage, Alaska. Journal of Urban Health
Mar 2002, 79 (1), 128-35.
Module 2: The Legacy of the Tuskegee Syphilis Study
72
Tools for Best Practice
Community consultation has been proposed as a tool with multiple benefits for public health research
and practice. It is suggested that if researchers and public health practitioners were encouraged, or even
required, to consult with members of the communities in which they conduct research and offer
interventions, their research questions and health services might better fit the actual needs of
community members (Strauss et al. 2001, Green and Mercer 2001). Such consultation might help to
restore trust and promote a collaborative relationship between researchers or service providers and
members of the public. And, depending on the degree of influence that community members exerted
(or were recognized to have), community consultation could reinforce the goals of the process of
obtaining individual informed consent—namely, the protection of well-being and the promotion of selfdetermination.
As module 4 discusses, some commentators suggest that communities have interests,
just as individuals do, that these interests are distinct from those of individuals, and that community
consultation (or even a process of obtaining community consent) is necessary to protect those
community interests. This perspective is the subject of much debate (e.g., see Foster et al . 1998,
Juengst 1998, Sharp and Foster 2000, Weijer and Emanuel 2000).
In relation to the Tuskegee Syphilis Study, however, one issue is interesting to consider. The PHS
officials conducting the TSUS might be thought to have engaged in a form of community consultation at
various stages of the study, and it may be argued such consultation did little to promote the enrollees’
autonomy, protect their welfare, or protect the interests of the rural and African-American community
which they formed. (Others might suggest that the TSUS did bring more health care to Macon County
Alabama than it had ever experienced before, or otherwise would have, and therefore that the TSUS did
serve some community interests.) Nurse Rivers was in some ways a member of the African-American
community of Macon County, although she was more educated and more affluent than the men she
enrolled in the study. Was she a representative of the research community (the PHS) or of the African-
American men she enrolled and treated? Can one person be a representative of both “communities?”
The Macon County Medical Society (MCMS) was consulted to provide a form of surrogate consent,
presumably because its members were geographically and racially of the same community as the study
population, and the Tuskegee Institute itself was approached for its initial involvement in part because
of its ties to the African-American public in the area. Were these consultations and collaborations
duplicitous and co-opting of those consulted, or were they appropriate attempts to consult
representatives of, or at least people more similar to, those being studied? One commentator notes that
during the history of the study, fourteen articles about it were published in nine medical journals, and
the peer-review process and readership failed to discern ethical problems with the methodology of the
study; moreover, black physicians were an integral part of the study and never raised ethical concerns,
even after the project’s focus changed from its initial commitment to treatment into a strictly
observational study (White 2000). Given the conditions of racism and segregation that constitute the
context of the TSUS, perhaps no appropriate community consultation could have been conducted, or
could have resulted in redesign of the TSUS as an ethical study.
What about today? Consult Module 4, “Community-Based Practice and Research: Collaboration and
Sharing Power.” In light of the methods it suggests and the potential ethical pitfalls discussed above,
Module 2: The Legacy of the Tuskegee Syphilis Study
73
design a process of community consultation to implement a (hypothetical) research study or
community-based intervention. Here are some ideas that you might study or implement:
???? A program to increase the activity level of low-income elderly
???? A program to assess whether school lunch programs address nutritional needs
???? A study to determine whether, in an effort to improve diet among African-American heads of
household, group-based education or individual mentoring is more effective
???? A study to assess the effectiveness of various media messages to encourage use of car seats
???? A study to increase enrollment of minority group members in cancer screening programs,
including prostate and breast cancer
???? A study of a program to reduce the presence of firearms in various neighborhoods through a
“buy back” system
???? A study to compare the effectiveness of programs that “buy back” firearms for cash and those
that trade firearms for gift vouchers at local stores
???? How do you identify the relevant communities in which to conduct your work? Are these
“vulnerable” communities, and if so, in what ways? Does their vulnerability relate to the
voluntariness of the community members’ participation, their ability to be adequately informed
about participating in your study or program, or some other factors?
???? Who are the community representatives or leaders? What do you anticipate their concerns will
be? How will your approach them? How will you approach members of the community, beyond
these leaders? What role will community input into your study or program have and at what
stages (e.g., study design or data analysis)? What risks are there of community leaders being (or
being perceived) as being co-opted by you? What is the likelihood that you would be co-opted
by them to serve interests that are not really your own (i.e., the interests of promoting public
health)?
???? How does the process of community consultation that you design resemble what was done in
the TSUS? How does it help to avoid some of the ethical problems raised about the TSUS?
If possible (and appropriate within the framework of your educational program), conduct your
hypothetical community consultation (as an individual, small group, or class). You will need to be clear
that your objective is to learn about the process of consulting members of the public who come from
and perhaps represent different communities. You will need to express your appreciation to those who
are willing to talk with you, and you should invite their critique of the process you propose and stress
that your goal is to learn from them. At the same time, you should be prepared to discuss the process
of conducting research and providing public health services, and you should be prepared to
productively confront the multiple legacies of Tuskegee in your discussions of your education, future
work, and current hypothetical project.
74
Introduction to Modules 3 and 4
75
INTRODUCTION TO MODULES 3 and 4:
Research Ethics in Public Health
James Thomas, MPH, PhD
This introduction to research ethics in public health describes types of research, with an emphasis on
studies involving humans; the elements of public health that are unique to research; basic ethical
considerations in public health research; and standard processes for ensuring the ethical conduct of
research.
Types of Public Health Research
Research is an integral component of public health. If there is an obligation to protect the health of the
community, then there is also an obligation to learn how best to do that. This entails collecting
information to: identify the causes of disease; identify factors affecting the distribution of disease; and
evaluate approaches to protect or promote health. Research is defined in the Code of Federal
Regulations as “a systematic investigation, including research development, testing and evaluation,
designed to develop or contribute to generalizable knowledge” (45 CFR 46).
Public health research includes the study of: inanimate substances such as water and air quality;
biological processes not involving humans (e.g., the natural history of arthropods that are disease
vectors) and questions that involve humans. There are ethical concerns in each of these types of
research, but the majority of ethical deliberation is about research involving humans.
In some studies, the research questions pertain to the health, experiences, behaviors, or other aspects
of individuals. In these studies, individual people are the unit of analysis. Other units of analysis are:
pairs of people (e.g., couples); families; social networks; agencies and institutions; and communities or
other populations. Generally, there are two ways to quantify characteristics of a group or population.
Measures on individuals in the group (e.g., annual income) can be presented in an aggregate, such as a
mean. Other factors more or less affect everyone in a group equally and cannot be measured by
obtaining information from each person. Examples include climate, air quality, and whether a town is
located on an interstate highway. The ethical concerns in a study will vary according to the population
being studied. For example, the process of informed consent will be different in a study with
communities than it will be with a study of individuals.
Studies also vary by the degree of participation they offer to those being studied. Some feel the ideal of
observational research is to conduct a study as if it weren’t really happening; to know what people
would be doing in the absence of the study. In many instances, such deception in research is unethical
or cannot be achieved. Most typically, the researchers need to interact with participants to pose
questions or obtain biological specimens (e.g., a blood sample). In many instances, experiments or
intervention studies require that the individual participants agree to follow a regimen, such as a
particular diet, dictated by the researchers. In the examples given so far, however, the participants play
a small role at best in the collection of data and have little say in how a study is conducted. In some
types of participatory action research, the participants are regarded as research collaborators. They can
determine what will be studied and how the study will be conducted, collect some or all of the data, and
contribute to the data analysis. Advocates of this type of research argue that research that excludes the
Introduction to Modules 3 and 4
76
participants from active participation can yield irrelevant and inaccurate data, and can disempower
those studied (Israel, 1998). The principle of participation is one that is central to public health.1
The Elements of Public Health that are Unique to Research
Public health often distinguishes itself from medicine by stating that it is concerned principally with
populations rather than individuals and with prevention rather than cures. While many in public health
agencies work directly with individuals and offer them treatments, claims that the dominant interests in
public health are in populations and prevention remain valid. These two emphases bring a number of
ethical concerns to the forefront in public health research.
In many instances, the best interests of a population or community as a whole are at odds with the
preferences of some members of the community. Less frequently, the good of the community stands in
contrast to the recognized rights of individuals. For example, the right to privacy may be abrogated
when some people need to know that a person they’ve been in contact with is infectious with a sexually
transmitted disease. More generally, it is often stated that any risk to participants in a study is to be
weighed against the benefits that the study will bring to greater society (see, for example, the Belmont
Report, part C, section 2). This would apply to many studies in public health, but there are perhaps
additional ethical dilemmas in studies where populations are the unit of analysis.
Basic Ethical Considerations in Research on Humans
Philosophers, policy makers and others first turned their attention to the ethical practice of research
after the atrocities of medical experiments during World War II were revealed. Since then, much of the
agenda in the field of ethics has been driven by the dilemmas presented by advances in medical
technology and by research on human subjects. In response, ethics discussions have focused on a
number of key issues: informed consent; research in vulnerable populations; and balancing the risks and
benefits of research. Contemporary conventions regarding these issues have been guided by three
ethical principles.
These three principles, articulated by the National Commission for the Protection of Human Subjects of
Biomedical and Behavioral Research in their document known as the Belmont Report, are respect for
persons, beneficence, and justice.
Informed consent
The main idea of informed consent is ensuring that each person participating in a study has agreed to
do so of their own volition and with full knowledge of the risks and possible benefits to them. The
principle was first articulated for studies with individuals as the unit of analysis. There is a need,
however, to incorporate respect for and attention to communities in the principles that guide protection
of research subjects in public health. Some ethicists have gone as far as recommending that the
principle of community ought to be added to the other three identified in the Belmont Report (Weijer,
2000). There are instances, particularly in research conducted by westerners in developing countries,
1 This and other values that are inherent to a public health perspective are enumerated in a document that accompanies the
code of ethics adopted by the American Public Health Association, found on the internet at
http://www.apha.org/codeofethics.
Introduction to Modules 3 and 4
77
when it is appropriate to seek the permission of a tribal chief or village elder to conduct a study in their
community. But this is generally not understood to be a substitute for also requiring the informed
consent of each individual in the study, when individuals are the unit of analysis.
Extravagant benefits offered to a potential study participant are considered to work against voluntary
enrollment in a study because the benefits, which may be hard to resist, are seen as tantamount to
coercion. This is particularly a concern when conducting research on vulnerable populations, such as
children and prisoners. The principle would also apply to those who are extremely poor. For example, a
woman living in an undeveloped country, subsisting on an income of a dollar a day, would find it very
hard to turn down $20 paid as reimbursement for a study procedure despite of being informed of the
risks.
Extra precautions are taken when the research participants are considered to be vulnerable. Types of
vulnerability include: cognitive or communicative (e.g., young children), institutional (e.g.,
imprisonment); deferential (i.e., cognitively able to consent, but subject to the authority of someone
else); medical (e.g., having a serious condition for which there is no satisfactory treatment); economic;
and social (i.e., members of undervalued social groups) (National Bioethics Advisory Commission,
2001). Typically, the parents of minors are required to give consent for their child to participate in a
study. If the child is old enough to understand the risks and benefits of their participation in the study,
it usually required that they give their assent in addition to the consent of their parent(s). Furthermore,
there are limits to the level of risk to which a parent can give consent. In the case of prisoners,
researchers must take precautions not to give the impression that participation or the refusal to
participate in a study will in any way affect the duration of the prisoner’s incarceration.
A major concern in every instance of obtaining informed consent is the ability of the potential study
participant to truly understand the study and the risks and benefits they may experience; that is, to be
truly informed. This concern is heightened when a study is being conducted in a culture where studies
are not common or where western scientific thinking is not dominant. In such instances, researchers
need to expend an extra effort to understand: the culture of the study participants; what their
motivations might be for participating in a study; how best to communicate with them about the study.
The researchers also need to enable the potential study participants to understand the culture of the
researchers, especially as it pertains to scientific inquiry.
Risks and benefits of research
The risks to a participant of a study vary according to the type of study. Examples include: physical harm
from a procedure performed on the participant; illness from a medication; emotional trauma from
interactions with the researchers; loss of a relationship or a job because the researchers failed to keep
confidential information given to them; and social stigma or embarrassment from loss of privacy. The
confidentiality of information, which is one of the most important ethical considerations of research,
means that the researchers know who gave the information but they will not tell anyone else. This is
contrasted with anonymous data in which even the researchers are unable to identify to which person
the information pertains.
In contrast to the obligation to keep some information confidential, researchers have another obligation
to share the findings of their research. Research findings, however, are typically presented as
aggregated data that do not reveal the identities of the individual participants. There is an obligation to
share the findings with the larger society because the information is potentially useful, even if the
Introduction to Modules 3 and 4
78
results are negative. An increasing number of investigators are also perceiving an obligation to share
the study results with the participants because they helped contribute to the study.
Oversight of research
The mechanism that ensures that a researcher adheres to these principles of ethical research is the
institutional review board (IRB) for research involving human subjects. The roles of an IRB are to:
review study proposals; inform investigators when their study protocols fall short of conventional ethical
standards; approve ethically sound protocols; and monitor studies over their duration to ensure that
ethical standards are adhered to throughout the course of the study. For an institution, such as a
university, to receive funding for research from most funding agencies, it must have an IRB registered
with the federal Office for Human Research Protections (OHRP). Many professional journals in which
study findings are published also require that a manuscript submitted for publication indicate that an
IRB approved the study. An IRB is typically composed of other researchers at the same institution and a
number of “community” or lay members from outside the institution.
Surveillance and Research
Research was defined at the beginning of this paper as “a systematic investigation . . . . designed to
develop or contribute to generalizable knowledge.” In some instances, public health surveillance
activities can fit this definition. Yet, most researchers and public health agencies have not regarded
surveillance as research; thus it has not been subject to the scrutiny of an IRB. To better understand the
distinctions and similarities between surveillance and research, we will describe in this section how
surveillance works and the criteria used by the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC) for
distinguishing between surveillance and research.
Perhaps the best known public health surveillance system is the National Notifiable Disease Surveillance
System (NNDSS). This system requires physicians to report certain diseases, such as tuberculosis and
some sexually transmitted diseases when they are diagnosed. When a physician diagnoses gonorrhea,
for example, he or she is to fill out a brief report form with information on the patient, including: name,
age, sex, race and ethnicity, residential address, the diagnosed disease, the date of diagnosis, and the
reporting physician. The form (often a card) is then usually mailed to the local health department. They
may use the information to follow-up with an interview to learn the names and addresses of sexual
partners and then visit them to notify them of their potential exposure to infection. In some instances,
the sexual contacts will be taken to the health department for treatment of an infection.
The local health department will send a copy of the reported infections to the state health department.
They will use them to monitor the rates of infection throughout the state and to allocate resources for
disease control. In a similar fashion and for similar purposes, the state health department will send its
reports to the CDC. The data forwarded to the CDC often does not include personal identifiers for each
case. Instead, the state will report the numbers of cases of a particular disease by age group, sex,
race/ethnicity, and county.
The system described is “passive” in that the local health department relies on physicians to report
without prompting from the health department. In some instances, the health department will
proactively call physicians’ offices to ask if they have identified any cases of a particular condition.
Because this “active” surveillance is more expensive than passive surveillance, it is typically reserved for
relatively infrequent but important infections or events. The diseases of importance vary regionally. In
Introduction to Modules 3 and 4
79
California one such disease is Kawasaki syndrome, a rare and fatal disease of unknown cause that most
often affects children. Also, the information sought on cases for which there is active surveillance is
usually more detailed than the cursory information required for passive surveillance. Active surveillance
is used in some instances because the disease is not well understood and the surveillance system
provides a means to collect information that may help identify the causes or risk factors for the disease.
Sentinel surveillance is a type of active surveillance in which a sample of physicians are contacted
regularly to learn about any diagnosed cases.
Other situations in which data are collected systematically in a public health system include disease
registries, program evaluations, and emergency responses. As with active surveillance, a disease registry
collects thorough information on individuals with a particular condition (for example a cancer registry
would include information on the primary site and morphology of the cancer). A registry usually aims to
collect information on every case occurring within some geographical area. Diagnosing physicians are
not required by law to report diagnoses to registries; instead, registry personnel identify cases through
hospital record reviews. The purpose of a registry is to gather information that may advance the
scientific understanding of a disease.
When a public health program has been implemented, such as seat belt laws or an anti-smoking
campaign, data are often collected to evaluate the efficacy (whether the program can work in a single
instance), effectiveness (whether the program works more generally in many settings), efficiency (e.g.,
whether the program is economical), and other characteristics of the program. Public health programs
are typically implemented in non-emergency situations. In an emergency, such as an acute disease
outbreak, data may be collected on each case in order to guide the emergency response.
Each of the data collection processes named—surveillance, registries, evaluation, and emergency
responses—entails the systematic collection of data and may, in some situations, meet the criteria for
research. When those criteria are met, and when the data are collected on human subjects, the data
collection needs to be reviewed by an IRB. The key consideration for distinguishing routine data
collection inherent to the daily functioning of public health systems from research is the intent of the
data collection. The primary intent of research is to generate generalizable knowledge. The CDC does
not consider as research data collection in which the primary intent is the prevention or control of a
disease, or the improvement of a particular program (Snider, 1999). To generalize means to infer the
findings from the analysis of one data set to other settings or populations where the data were not
collected. In contrast, non-research is typically concerned with one specific situation.
Standard disease reporting, such as in the NNDSS, is not considered research; it is used to guide the
management of public health programs and the allocation of resources for disease control and
prevention. Standard data collection in such a system is limited to information on the specific health
condition or disease, demographic information, and accepted, known risk factors. When the data
collected extend significantly beyond these standard data, it is usually for the purpose of studying the
etiology of the disease or injury in which case it is research. Thus, disease registries are often regarded
as research and are subject to review by an IRB. Their purposes may be dual in nature, to guide public
health responses and to elucidate the etiology. Regardless of other intents, where research on human
subjects is involved, the data collection must be approved by an IRB.
On occasion, surveillance data are subsequently used for research purposes. The use of surveillance in
this way must be preceded by the review of an IRB. The publication of findings based on surveillance
Introduction to Modules 3 and 4
80
data, however, is not necessarily an indication that the data have been used for research purposes. For
example, with the publication of disease trends by state in the United States, the intent of the article
may be to inform public health practitioners of disease trends in the country and how their state figures
into the bigger picture. This is an intent that is consistent with the management of public health
programs rather than elucidation of the causes of the disease patterns. Similarly, data collected for an
emergency response, such as an outbreak investigation, are used to inform that one response, thus the
process is not considered research. A disease outbreak may be published and even used as a teaching
tool, but it would not be considered research unless extra data were collected in order to further
elucidate the etiology of the infection or identify new mechanisms of transmission.
Program evaluation is also typically concerned with management of a particular program. This is
especially so when it is a program shown by prior research to be efficacious. Evaluation data are then
used to adjust the program components to achieve the maximum benefit for a given cost. If a program is
new, however, and has not been tested before, then the purpose of the evaluation is to establish
whether the program is efficacious. By the CDC standards, this is considered research (Snider, 1999).
Data Confidentiality
Information about a person can be used for their benefit or can harm them either intentionally or
unintentionally. Some information carries a particularly strong possibility of resulting in harm. For
example, in a study of sexually transmitted diseases, researchers may ask a study participant the number
of people with whom he or she had sex in the last month. If the number is greater than zero, that piece
of information could lead to retribution, such as physical abuse or the termination of a relationship, if it
were to be made known inadvertently to a parent or a sexual partner. Other types of information can
lead to unemployment or loss of health insurance if it falls into the hands of a person who can make
such decisions, and social stigmatization or psychological distress.
The first step in avoiding deliberate or inadvertent breeches of confidentiality is to inform the study
participant of the potential risk to him or her if information is not properly guarded by the researcher.
The complementary step, of course, is to actually guard the information properly. The precautions to be
taken depend on the type of study and the potential benefits to study participants from the information
they provide. For example, some epidemiologic studies require information on each study participant at
two points in time (i.e., longitudinal or follow-up studies). If the information collected initially lacks
identifiers, there will be no way to associate it with information collected on the same person at a later
date. Without the ability to link initial and follow-up data, there is no means to calculate risk (i.e., the
proportion of study participants who experienced a particular outcome by the end of the study). This
formal calculation of risk is a basic measure in epidemiology; losing this tool would greatly limit the
benefits to be gained by epidemiologic research. One should not assume that the risk of participating in
a study can or must be completely eliminated, particularly when the value of otherwise beneficial
research may be significantly compromised. It is important not only to assess the likelihood that
identifiable, private information obtained or generated in the course of research could be
inappropriately disclosed, but also the probability and magnitude of the harms that could realistically
result if such disclosure were to occur.
There are several levels of identification or anonymity of samples or data. A data set that includes for
each participant a personal identifier, such as the name or patient number, along with other information
on the person is called directly identified data. The utility of the identifiers for linking information to
Introduction to Modules 3 and 4
81
other datasets or information collected on the same person at other times can be maintained while
decreasing the risk of revealing the identity of study participants by replacing the identifiers with a code.
This is done by creating another data set that lists the code and identifiers for each study participant.
Access to this coded data set is restricted to the minimum number of people (perhaps just the lead
investigator) and it is further protected by a password or by keeping it locked in a file cabinet or safe.
The next step towards enhancing confidentiality is removing the link between a code and personal
identifiers. These data are then referred to as unlinked or “anonymized.” Data or samples for which
identifiable information was either never collected or was not maintained and cannot be retrieved are
termed unidentified or anonymous. By using anonymous data or rendering it anonymous, it is difficult,
though not necessarily impossible, to identify the person associated with the information. Genetic data
are difficult to anonymize because, at least in theory, they can be linked to another biological sample
with genetic information and identifiers. Also, although identifying information such as names and
patient numbers can be removed from data or samples, the remaining data needed for the analysis may
point to one or a small number of individuals. This is referred to as deductive identification. For
example, in the case of a dataset pertaining to people in a particular town or city section, information
on the gender, age, race, occupation, and street block of residence of a study participant, could be used
to deduce who the person is.
Some studies cannot be done with anonymous data, however, particularly when a researcher needs
identifiers to link one record to another. This can be the case when merging datasets from two different
sources or in a longitudinal study with measurements taken from the same person at several points in
time. The data can often be anonymized once the study is over, but the risks of failed confidentiality
persist for the duration of the study.
We have mentioned that the benefits of research often accrue to society as a whole. Likewise, the harms
from research can be experienced by a group of people; they need not be only to individuals. Thus,
even with anonymous data, and short of deductive identification, the way in which study findings are
reported can have the effect of stigmatizing either a particular subset of study participants or the people
they are intended to represent in the community. This can occur, for example, when a particular group
is singled out and only negative study findings are used to characterize them. Alternatively, when a
community is the unit of study, particular communities can be damaged by the study findings when the
community is identified. For example, new industries may choose not to locate in a town based on
information from a study that paints the town in a negative light.
Introduction to Modules 3 and 4
82
Definitions and Concepts
Anonymous data Data or samples for which identifying information, such as name, social
security number, or address was either never collected or was not
maintained and cannot be retrieved. Such data are referred to as
“unidentified” by the National Bioethics Advisory Commission (NBAC,
2000). When a data set has been made anonymous by the removal of
identifiers and any hope of making a connection back to identifying
information it is called an “anonymized” data set (or “unlinked” by NBAC).
Coded data
A data set that lacks explicit identifiers of study participants, such as
name, social security number, or address, but contains a code that links
each observation to another data set with identifiers. Access to the code
that links the data sets is limited to the smallest number of people feasible
to aid in the protection of confidentiality.
Community
advisory board
A group of people from a community under study who advise researchers
on the design, conduct, or other aspects of the study, especially as it
pertains to interactions with the community.
Confidential data A data set containing information identifying study participants;
information which the researchers are to conceal from others.
Deductive
identification
The use of information other than a direct identifier, such as a name or
social security number, to deduce the identity of a study participant; for
example, the age, gender, race, and street block of residence may point to
just one or two people who fit all the criteria.
Evaluation The systematic application of scientific and statistical procedures for
measuring program conceptualization, design, implementation, and utility;
making comparisons based on these measurements; and the use of the
resulting information to optimize program outcomes (Rossi and Freeman,
1993; Fink, 1993).
Informed consent A potential study participant’s voluntary consent to participate in research
after having been adequately informed of the relevant risks and benefits of
the research in a way that is understandable to the potential participant.
Institutional
review board
(IRB)
A group of people, often affiliated with a research institution, who review
scientific protocols for research involving humans and who decide whether
the proposed study design is ethical. Also known as a human subjects
review committee. More detail on IRB purposes and procedures can be
found in the Code of Federal Regulations (CFR), Title 45, Part 46.
Program
evaluation
An essential organizational practice in public health using a systematic
approach, including data collection and analysis, to improve and account
for public health actions (Snider, 1999).
Introduction to Modules 3 and 4
83
Research A systematic investigation, including research development, testing and
evaluation, designed to develop or contribute to generalizable knowledge.
(Code of Federal Regulations, Title 45, Part 46).
Risks and
benefits
Risks in a study are the harms that may be experienced by a participant
because of their participation. Examples are physical trauma and social
embarrassment. Examples of benefits from participating in a study are
improved health and contributing to the betterment of society through the
accrual of useful information.
Surveillance The ongoing, systematic collection, analysis, and interpretation of
outcome-specific data, closely integrated with the timely dissemination of
these data to those responsible for preventing and controlling disease or
injury (Thacker and Berkelman, 1988).
Introduction to Modules 3 and 4
84
References
Beauchamp TL, Childress JF. The Principles of Biomedical Ethics, 5th Ed. New York: Oxford University
Press, 2001.
Code of Federal Regulations, Title 45, Part 46. Accessible via the internet at
http://www.access.gpo.gov/nara/cfr/cfr-table-search.html.
National Bioethics Advisory Commission. Ethical and Policy Issues in Research Involving Human
Participants. Volume I. Report and Recommendations of the National Bioethics Advisory Commission.
Bethesda, Maryland; August 2001.
National Bioethics Advisory Commission. Research Involving Human Biological Materials: Ethical Issues
and Policy Guidance. Rockville, Maryland; August 1999.
National Commission for the Protection of Human Subjects of Biomedical and Behavioral Research. The
Belmont Report: Ethical Guidelines for the Protection of Human Subjects of Research. April, 1979.
Accessible via the internet at http://ohrp.osophs.dhhs.gov/humansubjects/guidance/belmont.htm.
Israel BA, Schulz AJ, Parker EA, Becker AB. Review of community-based research: Assessing
partnership approaches to improve public health. Annual Review of Public Health 1998;19:173-202.
Sandman PM. Session III: Ethical considerations and responsibilities when communicating health risk
information. Emerging communication responsibilities of epidemiologists. J Clin Epidemiol
1991;44:Suppl. I:41S-50S.
Snider D. Guidelines for defining public health research and public health non-research. Revised
October 4, 1999. http://www.cdc.gov/od/ads/opspoll1.htm.
Weijer C, Emanuel EJ. Protecting communities in biomedical research. Science 2000;289:1142-4.
Additional Resources
Coughlin SS, Beauchamp TL (Eds.). Ethics and Epidemiology. New York: Oxford University Press, 1996.
Coughlin SS, Soskolne CL, Goodman KW. Case Studies in Public Health Ethics. Washington, DC:
American Public Health Association, 1997.
Thacker SB, Berkelman RL. Public health surveillance in the United States. Epidemiologic Rev
1988;10:164-90.
Module 3: Public Health Research and Practice in International Settings: Special Ethical Concerns
85
MODULE 3
Public Health Research and Practice
in International Settings:
Special Ethical Concerns
Patricia A. Marshall, PhD
Case Western Reserve University
Issue Essay
Scientific and technological advances in biomedicine mark the beginning of a new era in public health
research. Now, more than ever before, public health research offers the promise of a greater
understanding of human disease and its expression in populations throughout the world. Public health
professionals working in international contexts face unique ethical dilemmas at all stages of research
design and implementation. A number of important questions are raised: How should U.S. regulations
for scientific research be applied in international settings? When there are disagreements about the
application of federal regulations governing research, who should decide—American officials or local
authorities? What is the meaning of “respect for cultural differences” in the context of international
public health research? How should requirements for informed consent—with their strong emphasis on
individual autonomy–be implemented in cultural settings that do not share this autonomy-oriented
perspective? How are standards of care applied in international studies? What are the fundamental
requirements for conducting ethically sound research with human subjects?
This module considers ethical issues in international public health research. This essay begins with a
brief review of ethical guidelines for research with human subjects. A discussion of respect for cultural
difference follows, describing notions of cultural relativism and ethical universalism. Ethical and social
issues surrounding informed consent in public health research are also explored. Particular attention is
given to challenges associated with comprehension, language barriers and beliefs about who should
provide consent. The application of culturally specific standards of care and the meaning of “best
proven therapeutic method” are discussed, drawing on controversial cases such as the recent AZT trials
with pregnant women in developing countries to illustrate the myriad problems that confront public
health researchers working in international settings. Particular attention will be given to the use of
placebos in clinical trials. Finally, requirements for ethical conduct in research are outlined
Ethical Guidelines for International Health Research
International concerns with ethical issues surrounding human experimentation were heightened by the
Nuremberg War Crime Trials following World War II. These proceedings judged medical experiments
conducted by Nazis on prisoners of concentration camps. The Nuremberg Code, the first international
code of ethics for research involving human subjects, was issued in 1947. The Nuremberg Code
outlined a strong commitment to the informed and voluntary consent of research participants. The
World Medical Association’s Declaration of Helsinki, adopted in 1964 and revised most recently in
2000, reiterated the importance of voluntary and informed consent to research. In the United States, in
1979, the Belmont Report was published by the National Commission for the Protection of Human
Module 3: Public Health Research and Practice in International Settings: Special Ethical Concerns
86
Subjects of Biomedical and Behavioral Research.1 The Belmont Report outlines ethical principles
underlying research with human subjects, and emphasizes informed consent, consideration of risks and
benefits associated with scientific research, and the protection of vulnerable populations. Final
regulations concerning policies governing research on human subjects were issued in 1981 by the U.S.
Department of Health and Human Service and reissued a decade later. The federal mandates, generally
referred to as The Common Rule, were clear: any research involving human subjects that is funded by a
Department agency, with certain exemptions, must be evaluated by an Institutional Review Board
(ORB). Eight criteria for IRB approval are listed, including documentation of informed consent and the
protection of privacy and confidentiality.
In 1982, the Council of International Organizations of Medical Sciences (CIOMS) and the World Health
Organization (WHO) published the Proposed International Guidelines for Biomedical Research
Involving Human Subjects.2 These guidelines were developed in response to concerns raised about the
particular circumstances surrounding the implementation of scientific research in developing countries.
In 1991, in collaboration with WHO, CIOMS prepared a separate document addressing public health and
epidemiological research (International Guidelines for Ethical Review of Epidemiological Studies ). The
International Guidelines for Biomedical Research Involving Human Subjects , revised in 1993, were
endorsed by the WHO Global Advisory Committee on Health Research and the Executive Committee of
CIOMS. The CIOMS guidelines consist of a description of general ethical principles and fifteen
recommendations with commentary. As with the original guidelines, contributors to the revision were
particularly concerned with the application of ethical standards and the establishment of mechanisms for
ethical review of human subjects research in developing countries where local standards for scientific
conduct may differ from those in western industrialized nations.
In recent years, reports of misconduct associated with international biomedical investigations have
called into question research practices and the application of study results in medical care and health
policy, particularly in resource poor nations. These controversies have influenced debates over the
recent revision of the Declaration of Helsinki (2000) and discussions to finalize revisions of the CIOMS
Guidelines.
In 2002, the Nuffield Council on Bioethics published the Ethics of Research Related to Healthcare in
Developing Countries.3 This document provides specific recommendations for ethical issues related to
standards of care, informed consent, obligations of researchers to individuals and communities, and
independent ethical review.
Official international policies governing human subjects research such as the CIOMS Guidelines
encourage cultural sensitivity in implementing research in non-western settings (see also International
Harmonisation of Technical Requirements for Registration of Pharmaceuticals for Human Use,
Guidelines for Good Clinical Practice4). In his systematic review of the ethics of biomedical research in
international settings, Brody5 argues that policies such as those promulgated by CIOMS (1993)
strengthen a commitment to transcending cross-cultural differences by mandating that the same
standards be applied to research subjects from both developing and industrialized countries (e.g.,
research participants in any cultural setting should provide individual voluntary consent; research
participants in the developing world should be advised of everything that would be told to research
subjects in an industrialized country; research participants in any setting should be aware of their right
of refusal).
Module 3: Public Health Research and Practice in International Settings: Special Ethical Concerns
87
Respecting Cultural Difference
The problem of balancing universal and local standards for ethical conduct in public health research is
challenging for investigators facing the very real constraints of implementing a study in an area in which
traditional customs may be in conflict with international guidelines and policies. Currently, there are
ongoing debates over the importance of respecting cultural difference and simultaneously applying
universal ethical standards in international scientific research. These issues are particularly complex
when public health research is implemented in areas known for human rights violations. The situation is
exacerbated by the economic and social disparities that exist between resource rich nations—who
generally sponsor public health research—and resource poor nations—where the research may be
conducted. Public and professional debates concerning health research in international settings often
center around notions of cultural relativism and beliefs about ethical universalism.
Cultural relativism refers to the notion that because human social and psychological characteristics are
culturally produced, the diverse representation of these characteristics across human groups is relative
to cultural variability. From this perspective, the only normative judgment that is possible is one that
recognizes the equal worth of culturally different moral standards. Thus, transcultural standards for the
ethical assessment of cultural practices or human conduct are not objective or rationally valid, but
always represent the imposition of one set of cultural values on another. Indeed, the term ethical
imperialism has been used to refer to the application of western ethical standards in scientific research
implemented in developing nations with different cultural norms concerning ethical conduct in
research.6 Ethical relativism holds that the moral standards of different cultures cannot be rank ordered
in terms of a common criterion of comparison; such standards are “incommensurable” with one another.
Moreover, generalizations concerning human behavior may form a basis for ethical judgment within a
given culture (although even there such generalizations are often problematic and lacking in empirical
demonstration), but are so tenuous when made across different cultures that they cannot form the basis
for a rational ethical system.
On the other hand, the problem with ethical relativism, in its broadest conceptualization, is that it
seems to condone every permutation of human behavior, if the surrounding cultural context would also
condone it. So neither internal critique of a malfunctioning culture nor outside critique on the basis of
universal human standards–such as human rights—are possible if the theory of ethical relativism is
accepted. Genocide, racism, violence against women and children, war crimes, and the like are highly
problematic implications of the theory. There are certain situations in which an appeal of ethical
universals, such as notions of human rights, seems both appropriate and essential to the very integrity
of the international community.
At the heart of this debate over cultural relativism and ethical universals is the problem of empirical fact
vs. moral value. How can an empirical description of what “is” influence the formulation of statements
about what “ought” to be? In her recent book Against Relativism , Macklin argues for the existence of
overarching principles that could be used to determine the rightness or wrongness of specific cultural
beliefs and practices.7 Macklin’s articulation of a strong version of anti-relativism is based upon her
adherence to the universalizing discourse of moral fundamentalism–the idea that certain ethical
principles are applicable cross-culturally. However, Macklin acknowledges that, in some cases, it might
be appropriate to consider cultural difference in the application of ethical standards, noting that
flexibility in the application of ethical rules can be consistent with adherence to more fundamental
ethical principles.7
Module 3: Public Health Research and Practice in International Settings: Special Ethical Concerns
88
What is especially troubling for investigators concerned about human rights is the reliance on cultural
or ethical relativism to justify or in some way dignify social and political practices that condone the
systematic oppression of individuals and groups based on their gender, ethnicity, religion or political
affiliation.
Arguing from an autonomy perspective, Macklin is clearly committed to the notion of basic human
rights and their global applicability.7 In his exploration of international bioethics, Baker offers instead a
model for negotiating value differences relevant to science and health in a multicultural world.8,9
Thomasma takes a slightly different approach in his discussion of bioethics and international human
rights.10 Rather than rely on the language of rights and the importance of autonomy and individual
freedom, Thomasma proposes that we consider, alternatively, notions of the “common good” as a
foundation for human rights.10 Thomasma distinguishes between procedural and substantive rules that
could form the basis of an international multicultural bioethics.10
An important question concerns the way in which conflicts are resolved when there are disagreements
about the ethical appropriateness of conducting particular public health studies. In these cases, the
fundamental issue might be framed as: Who decides? Should it be local authorities, an international
body, or the government represented by the funding agency? International guidelines provide sound
advice for investigators, but often the guidelines are difficult to apply to specific contexts. Moreover,
they are not legally binding. In some cases, the research sponsor imposes special requirements for
ethical conduct. For example, all international research funded by the U.S. federal government is
required to undergo review by an independent ethics committee constituted in the host country to
insure that certain standards are met in the implementation research in international settings. Of
particular concern is that the study design and procedures respect the welfare and rights of individuals
participating in the study, and that participation is voluntary.
While public health researchers should be sensitive to local customs, they are never authorized to
conduct research without regard to potential risks and without attempts to seek individual consent from
potential study participants. In particular, public health researchers working in international settings
must avoid the exploitation of non-western populations in research that would not be allowed in the
investigator’s home country. As the debates over cultural difference and ethical standards for research
continue, it is likely that there will be further revisions to the existing guidelines for ethical conduct in
international research, and greater efforts made to negotiate the more difficult obstacles to reaching
consensus.
Informed Consent
National and international guidelines for ethical conduct in scientific research identify specific
requirements for informed consent. These requirements include the following three key elements:
provision of information, comprehension of information, and voluntariness. Informed consent describes
a process in which an individual voluntarily agrees to participate in a research study after the purpose,
procedures, risks, benefits and alternatives have been thoroughly described. Informed consent is based
upon the notion that individuals are autonomous agents with the capacity for expressing a selfdetermined
choice.
Module 3: Public Health Research and Practice in International Settings: Special Ethical Concerns
89
Offers of excessive financial compensation, bribes, or unrealistic promises to potential research
participants in public health research can undermine autonomy and voluntary consent as much as lying
or coercive threats do. Consent is truly voluntary only when the option reasonably exists to withhold
consent. Additionally, the voluntary nature of participation in research is influenced significantly by the
implicit or explicit power of investigators and the institutions they represent.
In international settings, particularly resource poor nations, individuals and communities involved in
public health studies may be vulnerable to coercion because of their poverty and high rates of illiteracy.
Moreover, challenges associated with implementing informed consent may be heightened because of
language barriers that diminish effective communication, particularly regarding the translation of
scientific or medical concepts, and because of differences in beliefs about who may provide consent to
participate in research.11,12
The following discussion of these factors and their influence on the process of informed consent is
organized around three issues: 1) comprehension of information; 2) language barriers; and 3) location
of decisional authority to provide consent to research.
Comprehension of information : Investigators often must explain sophisticated scientific concepts in
international public health research, particularly in complex trials involving the use of placebos or
randomization. Yet, studies have shown repeatedly that information included in informed consent
documents is difficult for potential research participants or patients to understand. In the United States,
most consent forms are written for someone educated at the college or graduate school level, although
the average reading ability is significantly lower. Even when consent documents are simplified, higher
rates of illiteracy in many resource poor nations contribute to problems associated with comprehension
of informed consent documents. For example, in a study of informed consent for an influenza vaccine
for children in The Gambia, although 90% of the 189 consenting parents knew the purpose of the
vaccine was to prevent disease, only 10% understood the placebo control design.13
In addition to the length and complexity of consent forms, difficulties surrounding comprehension may
also be associated with requirements for written consent, particularly among people who cannot read or
write. The challenges of meeting U.S. requirements for written documentation of informed consent in
international public health studies is particularly problematic when study participants are reluctant to
formalize a document with their signature or thumbprint because of previous experiences that resulted
in their victimization including the loss of personal property or land, when “legal” documents were used
against them.
Language barriers : There are two dimensions of language that are relevant for informed consent. One
dimension concerns the choice of words–the specific language that will be employed in the consent
discussion. The second dimension concerns the language used to express concepts related to the
research itself and concepts related to informed consent such as “voluntary participation” or
“confidentiality.”
Misunderstandings and miscommunication about scientific research are more likely to occur when
investigators and participants speak different languages and when informed consent documents must be
translated, especially when there are no equivalent expressions for particular biomedical concepts or
when the notion of informed consent is unfamiliar. For example, in Marshall’s case study of informed
consent in genetic epidemiological research in Nigeria, investigators interviewed discussed problems
Module 3: Public Health Research and Practice in International Settings: Special Ethical Concerns
90
associated with back translation (translating a document from one language to another and then having
an independent native speaker back translate the document into the original language).13 Several
investigators reported an incident that occurred in which an English consent form was translated into
Yoruba, and then back translated by language experts at the local university. Yet, when the final
document was used with potential subjects in the field, individuals had difficulty understanding it. The
investigators were required to revise the consent once more so that it could be used effectively.
Although the use of an interpreter may reduce linguistical barriers, potential problems remain.
Translators are often portrayed as straightforward interpreters of information exchanged between health
providers or researchers and patients. However, the translator must negotiate not only language, but
also cultural and contextual factors. A broad range of problems are associated with medical
interpretation: The inability to translate equivalent expressions across languages; paraphrasing language
that results in omissions or erroneous substitutions of terms; different levels of comprehension among
participants in the interaction; and the influence of conflicting cultural beliefs and values among
participants.
Cultural norms governing the structure and content of discourse in medical encounters are vitally
important to effective communication. Beliefs and expectations regarding what is considered to be
“appropriate” discourse in medical interactions vary considerably across cultures and are affected by
social factors that reinforce differences in the relative power experienced and expressed by the
individuals involved in the interaction. For example, in cultural environments where women are
subordinate to their husbands, fathers, or male heads of households, women might be expected to
remain quiet and allow a male family representative to respond to questions or to ask them. Under these
conditions, obtaining voluntary consent may be compromised if a woman does not believe she is able to
make inquiries or if she believes she must acquiesce to the authority of the health care investigator and
her husband, father or brother. Her voice is silenced in these communications, not necessarily because
she cannot understand the “language” of the consent discussion, but because of normative behavior
associated with “appropriate” discourse in medical interactions.
Public health investigators working in international settings must ensure that the research community
and the individual participants understand clearly the nature of the research and its potential harms. The
absence of linguistically equivalent terms is never a justification for minimizing the importance of
communicating the essential aspects of a study and its implications for personal well-being; to do so
would seriously jeopardize the ability to obtain voluntary informed consent.
Autonomy and Locus of Decisional Authority : Notions of personhood, individual autonomy and
decisional capacity are embedded within the social and cultural patterns of family ties and community.
In the United States and other western industrialized countries where personal autonomy is
emphasized, individuals are expected to make decisions about medical treatments or research
participation for themselves or through designated surrogates. However, in many non-western settings,
religious or tribal leaders, or a patient’s extended family may play a significant role in decisions
concerning health care and medical research. Cultural differences regarding the nature of personhood
and the location of decisional authority for consent have been problematic for investigators conducting
international public health research.
In an early report on consent for smallpox vaccination research in five areas of West Africa,
investigators found that in certain regions, the strongest factor influencing a community’s receptivity to
Module 3: Public Health Research and Practice in International Settings: Special Ethical Concerns
91
the program was compliance with the decisions of tribal leaders.14 In her discussion of AIDS research in
Africa, Barry addressed the challenge of translating the concept of autonomy in areas where personhood
is defined by one’s tribe, village, or social group.15 Before obtaining consent from individuals in these
settings, tribal elders, community leaders, religious authorities or family members of the research
participant may need to be approached.
It is important to note the distinction between consulting community authorities before approaching the
individual and obtaining “approval” or “consent” only from community leaders. The former strategy is
not problematic for researchers, but the latter poses inherent conflicts for investigators. An individual
does not have a right to take part in research; she only has a right not to be forced to take part and a
right not to take part under ignorant or deceiving circumstances. The key moral point is that rights exist
even if the individual does not recognize or acknowledge those rights for himself.
More recently, Loue, Okello and Kawuma described the social context surrounding consent in Uganda.16
They note that according to Ugandan civil law an eighteen-year-old male living at home has the legal
right to make his own decisions. However, it is customary for the son to obtain his father’s consent
prior to entering into any obligation or contract, including participation in research. In addition,
Ugandan women often refuse to make a decision regarding their own or their child’s participation in
research without the consent of their partner. Loue and her associates describe the compromise
solution that was reached at a workshop held in Uganda to discuss the issue of family consent for
participation in research.16 Participants at the workshop suggested a waiting period of forty-eight hours
between the time individuals were approached about participation and the time they signed the consent
form. This would give them an opportunity to consult with family members if they chose before making
the final decision about their participation in a research project. The groups recommendation for a
delayed consent accommodates the cultural norms regarding family involvement in the decision making
process without diminishing the importance of respect for the individual.
The problem of balancing universal and local standards for ethical conduct in scientific research is
challenging for investigators facing the very real constraints of implementing a study in an area in which
traditional customs regarding decisional authority may be in conflict with international guidelines for
individual consent. Current recommendations (e.g., Nuffield Council on Bioethics3; National Bioethics
Advisory Commission17) suggest that a tribal chief, village elder, or community leader may express
approval of a research agenda, but sensitivity to cultural customs is secondary to honoring individual
choice. When consent is viewed as a process, not a single event, there is greater flexibility in devising
mechanisms that honor expressions of individual autonomy and cultural norms regarding the
involvement of others in decision making, including for example, family members or community elders.
Standard of care
An important concept in biomedical research is the notion of equipoise. Equipoise refers to the general
acceptance among scientists and health providers that patients or prospective research participants
should not be subjected to greater risk through research than they would be if they were receiving
standard therapy. Complex issues, however, surround interpretations of whether or not individuals
actually would be exposed to greater harms in research than if they received conventional medical
therapies; the pivotal question is: What is the force of the “if”? Does it mean that standard therapy is
available? Or does it just mean that it is hypothetically available? The fact that a given area does not
have financial resources or the clinical infrastructure to provide what might be considered standard
Module 3: Public Health Research and Practice in International Settings: Special Ethical Concerns
92
therapy never justifies subjecting individuals to experimental treatment without serious consideration of
the social and ethical challenges involved in the study. Standard of care refers to the level of care
provided to participants involved in biomedical clinical trials. There are two broad categories for
deciding the level of care: 1) a universal standard refers to the best possible treatments that are
available anywhere (any place in the world); and 2) a non-universal standard refers to the treatment that
is actually available in a specific region of the world.3
A fundamental ethical principle underlying the application of standards of care in health research with
human subjects is the avoidance of exploitation, particularly for individuals or communities who may be
vulnerable because of their poverty or ethnicity. The issue of what standard to apply is especially
complex when researchers conduct studies in international settings where health delivery systems are
compromised because of lack of medical resources, including drugs, equipment, and personnel.
Debates over the meaning and application of standard of care in international scientific experiments are
ongoing.18,19 International attention on this issue was heightened in 1997 as a result of the US-sponsored
research on the prevention of maternal-fetal HIV transmission.20,21,22 In this study, researchers in
Thailand, Uganda and other developing nations were criticized because control groups received a
placebo, which would not have been acceptable if the study had been conducted in the US. Extensive
discussion of this particular study, and its implications for other studies, has not resulted in a strong
consensus among health professionals, bioethicists, and policy makers throughout the world. Views
tend to be polarized—proponents of a universal standard argue strongly that anything less is inherently
exploitative, suggesting that it is only the poor of the world, and usually poor people of color, who are
placed at risk through their participation in studies. In sharp contrast, opponents argue that it is simply
not realistic to apply a universal standard in locations where the existing infrastructures for health care
delivery cannot support the “best proven therapy” for the local population. In the AZT study to prevent
maternal-fetal transmission of HIV, for example, opponents of the universal standard of care point out
that providing control groups with the placebo was, in fact, providing them with the locally available
standard of care. Moreover, opponents of a universal approach call attention to the fact that local
governments and health professionals were actively involved in reviewing and approving the study
design. There was, in fact, broad approval for the study by the World Health Organization; a panel
convened by WHO recommended that there was an urgent need to find less costly drug regimens for
preventing HIV maternal-fetal transmission, noting that randomized controlled trials would be the most
effective way to quickly produce scientifically valid results.
Determination of which approach to use for standard of care in clinical trials—universal or nonuniversal—
remains one of the most contentious ethical issues in international public health research.
The Declaration of Helsinki23 states: “The benefits, risks, burdens and effectiveness of a new method
should be tested against those of the best current prophylactic, diagnostic, and therapeutic
methods…This does not exclude the use of placebo, or no treatment, in studies where no proven
prophylactic, diagnostic, or therapeutic method exists” (paragraph 29). Recent recommendations
proposed by the Nuffield Council on Bioethics for health research in developing countries generally
agree with the revised Declaration of Helsinki.23 Members of the Working Party for the Nuffield Council
suggest that the appropriate standard of care for control groups can only be decided through
consultation with representatives of the country where the study will be conducted, that whenever
possible, control groups should be offered a universal standard of care, and that when it is not possible,
the best intervention currently available as part of the national health system should be provided.
Module 3: Public Health Research and Practice in International Settings: Special Ethical Concerns
93
The Nuffield Council on Bioethics offer specific criteria for determining what standard of care should be
used in international settings, acknowledging the complexities that exist in local contexts (e.g., available
treatment, sustainability of treatment following the trial, health services infrastructure).3 Factors to
consider include: a) the appropriate research design to answer the question; the severity of the disease
and the effect of proven treatments; c) the existence of a universal standard of care for the disease
being studied and the quality of the supporting evidence; d) the standards of care which can be afforded
by the host and the sponsoring country ; and e) the standard of care which can be sustained in the host
country.
Ethical Requirements for International Public Health Research
The promulgation of ethical guidelines for research, both nationally and internationally, provides
frameworks for consideration of appropriate conduct in the design and implementation of research,
including international research on public health issues. Recently, Emmanual, Wendler, and Grady,
outlined seven requirements for determining whether a research trial is ethical.24 Although the authors
focused their attention on biomedical clinical trials, their requirements have relevance for research in
general, and international public health investigations specifically. The seven ethical points these
authors consider are briefly outlined below:

1. Social or scientific value
   Consideration of the social and scientific value of the study requires that investigators evaluate the
   treatments or interventions proposed to determine that they will improve the health and well-being of
   the individuals and communities involved. This requirement is justified by ethical concerns related to
   the scarcity of resources and the importance of not exploiting the populations who participate in the
   research.
2. Scientific validity
   The requirement for scientific validity refers to the application of acceptable scientific principles and
   methodologies, including statistical techniques, in order to produce valid data. This requirement
   appeals to ethical concerns over the use of scarce resources and the importance of nonexploitation.
3. Fair subject selection
   Fairness in choosing individuals and communities who participate in research requires that stigmatized
   and vulnerable populations will not be exposed to risky research, and conversely, that rich and powerful
   individuals will not be selectively chosen for potentially beneficial research. Fairness in subject selection
   appeals to the ethical principle of justice.
4. Favorable risk-benefit ratio
   Consideration of a favorable risk-benefit ratio requires that investigators minimize risk and enhance
   benefits, and that risks for those who participate in research are proportionate to the benefits that may
   be derived for the subjects and for society. This requirement is justified by the ethical principles of
   nonmaleficence, beneficence, and nonexploitation.
5. Independent review
   The requirement for independent review refers to the importance of an ethical review of the study
   design, potential research participants, and the risk-benefit ratio by a group unaffiliated with the study.
   Module 3: Public Health Research and Practice in International Settings: Special Ethical Concerns
   94
   Independent ethical review is justified by the importance of public accountability and minimizing the
   influence of potential conflicts of interest.
6. Informed consent
   Informed consent refers to the provision of information to potential research participants (study goals,
   procedures, risks, benefits, alternatives) using an approach that insures comprehension and
   understanding so that individuals can make a voluntary decision about their participation and continued
   enrollment. This requirement is based on the ethical principle of respect for individual autonomy.
7. Respect for potential and enrolled subjects
   This requirement emphasizes respect for research participants by: a) permitting them to withdraw from
   the study; b) protecting privacy and confidentiality; c) providing information about newly discovered
   risks or benefits; d) providing feedback about the study results; and e) maintaining the welfare of study
   participants. This requirement is justified by the ethical principle of respect for persons.
   In any public health investigation, establishing a collaborative relationship with local investigators and
   the host community contributes to the successful implementation of a project and the potential for
   insuring that the study results may have a long-term impact. Ideally, collaboration might be
   implemented throughout the duration of the study, beginning with community assistance in deciding on
   the topic to be examined and its relevance and significance for the local population. This is not always
   possible, although in most cases, the establishment of a Community Advisory Board before the study
   begins will assist public health investigators in determining the most effective approaches for
   implementing the study and providing feedback to the community.
   Capacity building is an important aspect of instituting ethically sound international public health
   research. Capacity building refers to the efforts of investigators to provide assistance to host institutions
   and communities in establishing mechanisms and resources that promote the health and well-being of
   individuals. Educational programs designed to develop and enhance professional expertise, and
   financial support for technological resources, medical equipment, and administrative assistance
   represent various forms of capacity building that public health investigators might provide to the host
   community in international public health research.
   Conclusion
   The globalization of scientific and medical research has increased dramatically in recent years. Public
   and private sectors alike are engaged in multinational clinical trials, epidemiological community based
   research, and behavioral studies. The complexity of international politics and the economic disparities
   that exist between industrialized and “developing” nations create myriad challenges for public health
   investigators. In the future, institutional and governmental authorities will exercise greater authority
   over the regulation and management of public health research. While individuals and communities who
   participate in public health research may benefit from the stronger oversight, investigators may
   experience tighter regulations as administratively cumbersome and restrictive. Successful resolution of
   political and scientific challenges in international public health research will only occur when there is a
   solid foundation for the development of mutual trust. A vital measure of international cooperation will
   be the extent to which there is a strong commitment to capacity building and resource sharing among
   the various stakeholders involved in public health investigations, including governmental authorities,
   institutions, and individual researchers.
   Module 3: Public Health Research and Practice in International Settings: Special Ethical Concerns
   95
   Primary Sources
   Marshall P. 2001. The Relevance of Culture for Informed Consent in U.S. Funded International Health
   Research. In: Ethical and Policy Issues in International Research: Clinical Trials in Developing
   Countries, Volume II: Commissioned Papers and Staff Analysis. NBAC, Bethesda, MD: National
   Bioethics Advisory Commission, pp. C1-C38.
   Marshall P. 2001. Informed Consent in International Health Research, In: Biomedical Research Ethics:
   Updating International Guidelines: A Consultation . R. Levine, S. Gorovitz, J. Gallagher, eds., Geneva:
   Council for International Organization of Medical Sciences (WHO), pp. 101-134.
   References
   1 U.S. National Commission of the Protection of Human Subjects of Biomedical and Behavioral
   Research. 1978. The Belmont Report: Ethical Principles and Guidelines for the Protection of Human
   Subjects of Research. Washington, DC: U.S. Government Printing Office.
   2 World Health Organization and Council for International Organizations of Medical Sciences (WHOCIOMS).
8. International Ethical Guidelines for Biomedical Research Involving Human Subjects .
   WHO: Geneva.
   3 Nuffield Council on Bioethics. 2002. The Ethics of Research Related to Healthcare in Developing
   Countries . Nuffield Foundation: England.
   4 International Conference on Harmonisation of Technical Requirements for Registration of
   Pharmaceuticals for Human Use (ICH). 1997. Good Clinical Practice: Consolidated Guidance, 62
   Federal Register 25692.
   5 Brody BA. 1998. The Ethics Biomedical Research: An International Perspective, New York: Oxford
   University Press.
   6 Angell M. 1988. Ethical Imperialism? Ethics in International Collaborative Clinical Research. New
   England Journal of Medicine 319:1081-1083.
   7 Macklin R. 1999. Against Relativism: Cultural Diversity and the Search for Ethical Universals in
   Medicine. New York: Oxford.
   8 Baker R. 1998a. A Theory of International Bioethics: Multiculturalism, Postmodernism, and the
   Bankruptcy of Fundamentalism. Kennedy Institute of Ethics Journal 8(3):101-132.
   9 Baker R. 1998b. A Theory of International Bioethics: The Negotiable and the Non-negotiable. Kennedy
   Institute of Ethics Journal 8(3):233-274.
   10 Thomasma DC. 1997. Bioethics and International Human Rights. Journal of Law, Medicine & Ethics
   25:295-306.
   11 Marshall P. 2001. The Relevance of Culture for Informed Consent in U.S. Funded International Health Research.
   In: Ethical and Policy Issues in International Research: Clinical Trials in Developing Countries, Volume II:
   Commissioned Papers and Staff Analysis. NBAC, Bethesda, MD: National Bioethics Advisory Commission, pp.
   C1-C38.
   12 Marshall P. 2001. Informed Consent in International Health Research, In: Biomedical Research Ethics: Updating
   International Guidelines: A Consultation . R. Levine, S. Gorovitz, J. Gallagher, eds., Geneva: Council for
   International Organization of Medical Sciences (WHO), pp. 101-134.
   Module 3: Public Health Research and Practice in International Settings: Special Ethical Concerns
   96
   13 Leach A, Hilton S, Greenwood BM, Manneh E, Dibba B, Wilkins A, Mulholland EK. 1999. An
   Evaluation of the Informed Consent Procedures Used During a Trial of a Haemophilus Influenzae Type
   B Conjugate Vaccine Undertaken in the Gambia, West Africa. Social Science & Medicine 48:139-148.
   14 Henderson, et al. 1973. Assessment of Vaccination Coverage Vaccination Scar Rates and Smallpox
   Scarring in Five Areas of West Africa. Bulletin WHO 84:183-194.
   15 Barry M. 1988. Ethical Considerations of Human Investigation in Developing Countries: The AIDS
   Dilemma. New England Journal of Medicine 319:1083.
   16 Loue S, Okello D, & Kawuma M. 1996. Research Bioethics in the Ugandan Context: a Program
   Summary.” Journal of Law, Medicine & Ethics 24:47-53.
   17 National Bioethics Advisory Commission. 2001. Ethical and Policy Issues in International research:
   Clinical Trials in Developing Countries , Volumes I and II, NBAC, Bethesda, MD: National Bioethics
   Advisory Commission.
   18 Macklin R. 2001. After Helsinki: Unresolved Issues in International Research. Kennedy Institute of
   Ethics Journal 11(1):17-36.
   19 Levine R. 1999. The Need to Revise the Declaration of Helsinki. New England Journal of Medicine
   341:531-34.
   20 Angell M. 1997. The Ethics of Clinical Research in the Third World. New England Journal of Medicine
   337:847-849.
   21 Lurie P & Wolfe SM. 1997. Unethical Trials of Interventions to Reduce Perinatal Transmission of the
   Human Immunodeficiency Virus in Developing Countries. New England Journal of Medicine 337:853-
   856.
   22 Varmus H, Satcher D. 1997. Ethical Complexities of Conducing Research in Developing Countries.
   New England Journal of Medicine 337:10003-5.
   23 World Medical Association. 2000 [1964]. Declaration of Helsinki, as amended by the WMA 52nd
   General Assembly, Edinburgh, Scotland, October, 2000.
   24 Emmanuel E, Wendler D, Grady C. 2000. What makes clinical research ethical? JAMA 283(20):2701-
   2711.
   Module 3: Public Health Research and Practice in International Settings: Special Ethical Concerns
   97
   Case Study: Clinical Trials of AZT to Prevent Maternal-Infant Transmission
   of HIV in Resource Poor Nations
   The HIV/AIDS pandemic has been devastating for populations worldwide, particularly those in sub-
   Saharan Africa and Asia because of the personal and economic burdens for families and communities.
   Complex social and ethical issues surround the design and implementation of research on HIV/AIDS in
   any setting. However, transnational research on HIV/AIDS sponsored by resource rich countries and
   carried out in the developing world raise serious questions about the application of international
   guidelines for ethical conduct in biomedical studies regarding standards of care, placebo-controlled
   trials, informed consent, and the obligations of researchers to participants when a study has ended.
   In 1994, investigators in France and the U.S. reported conclusive evidence that an AZT drug regimen
   administered to HIV-positive pregnant women and their babies after birth reduced the transmission of
   HIV to the infant. The findings were impressive: the difference in transmission rate between those who
   received AZT and those who received the placebo was significant (8% versus 25%). The new regimen
   was known by its study name, AIDS Clinical Trials Group (ACTG) 076. Based on the study conclusions,
   the U.S. Public Health Service recommended the 076 regimen as the standard treatment for all HIVinfected
   pregnant women in the U.S. This regimen represented a great breakthrough for those women
   with access to the drug, primarily those in wealthy industrialized nations. HIV-infected women in the
   developing world, however, were less fortunate, and their numbers were growing. In areas such Uganda
   and South Africa, it was estimated that about 40% of pregnant women were HIV-positive and roughly
   one of every four or five children would be born infected with HIV.
   The spread of the HIV/AIDS epidemic was, and continues to be, devastating for the developing world.
   In 1998, for example, 5.8 million new cases of HIV infection were reported by United Nations AIDS
   officials (1.2 million from South and Southeast Asia and 4 million from sub-Saharan Africa).
   Combination drug therapies for the millions of people infected with HIV in resource poor nations are
   largely unavailable because of their expense and the lack of health care resources. Drug regimens for
   HIV/AIDS treatment cost roughly $15,000 per person each year in industrialized nations, a cost that far
   exceeds the annual income of most individuals in the developing world.
   The cost of the 076 treatment protocol—at $800-$1000 for the AZT alone—was prohibitive for
   developing countries. Other barriers to the successful implementation of the 076 regimen included the
   costs of screening for HIV and complications associated with administering the protocol. The 076
   regimen required five oral doses of AZT daily over approximately 12 weeks of pregnancy, intravenous
   AZT during labor and delivery, and six weeks of postpartum AZT for the infant. It was generally agreed
   that the 076 regimen was not a practical solution for areas such as sub-Saharan Africa where financial
   resources and the clinical infrastructure to manage the complicated protocol were not available.
   Moreover, women often did not seek prenatal care until their third trimester.
   Following the publication of the success of the 076 regimen, in 1994, the World Health Organization
   convened a panel of over fifty experts from around the world to consider global recommendations for
   the use of this regimen for pregnant women. This panel acknowledged the potential impact of 076 for
   reducing maternal-infant HIV transmission but noted the practical limitations of the regimen for the
   developing world. However, The WHO panel called for innovative research to consider less complicated
   and less expensive regimens that would have the same effect as 076. Moreover, the WHO panel
   Module 3: Public Health Research and Practice in International Settings: Special Ethical Concerns
   98
   recommended that the new research be coordinated at a global level to avoid duplication and to ensure
   that all aspects of the issue could be addressed in a robust and comprehensive manner.
   By 1995, the United Nations AIDS program and agencies in the U.S., Belgium, France, Denmark, and
   South Africa agreed to sponsor sixteen clinical trials in Cote d’Ivoire, Uganda, Tanzania, South Africa,
   Malawi, Ethiopia, Burkina Faso, Zimbabwe, Kenya, Thailand, and the Dominican Republic. The National
   Institutes of Health (NIH) and the Centers for Disease Control (CDC) sponsored nine of the studies.
   The specific goals of the studies varied. The effectiveness of shorter courses of AZT or other
   antiretroviral drugs were assessed in about half of the investigations. Other studies focused on the
   impact of much less complex interventions such as Vitamin A supplements or vaginal disinfection
   during labor. Except for one study, these investigations were placebo-controlled trials. In Thailand,
   researchers compared three short course regimens with a control group receiving a protocol similar to
   076.
   All studies had been carefully examined by ethical review committees in the sponsoring and host
   countries, all studies were determined to meet international ethical standards for biomedical research
   and, in every case, individuals from the host-countries were involved in the design and implementation
   of the projects.
   In February of 1998, the CDC reported the findings from a placebo controlled study in Thailand
   showing that the oral administration of AZT during the last four weeks of pregnancy as well as during
   labor, reduced maternal-infant transmission of HIV by fifty percent. A year later, the results of a placebo
   controlled trial conducted in three African nations (known as the PETRA trials) indicated that
   transmission rate was reduced by 37% at six weeks after birth when antiviral treatment drugs were
   administered at the time of delivery and continued for one week for both mother and infant. These
   results were heralded as a strong indication that alternative therapies—more practical and less
   expensive for women in developing countries—could be used to reduce maternal-infant transmission of
   HIV. Following the initial report of findings from the study in Thailand, the CDC suspended the placebo
   arm of the Thai investigation which was conducting equivalency trials to test the effect of reduced AZT
   therapy to prevent maternal-infant HIV transmission. Other clinical trials stopped recruiting women to
   placebo control groups.
   While these studies were on-going, a debate ensued over the ethical appropriateness of the
   investigations, specifically in relation to the use of placebo control groups. The primary charge from
   critics was that researchers gave priority to their own research goals over the lives of the women
   participating in the studies.
   Key Questions for Public Health Professionals
   ???? What ethical review processes should be deemed acceptable for the implementation of multinational
   clinical trials with vulnerable populations? Should the study move forward if host
   county researchers, along with other designated national and international review committees,
   approve the research for implementation, regardless of concerns raised by other individuals or
   groups (locally and internationally)? Whose views should be considered as the “final word”?
   ???? In multi-national trials, what standards of care should be applied if the local standard means
   that pregnant women will not receive any treatment?
   Module 3: Public Health Research and Practice in International Settings: Special Ethical Concerns
   99
   ???? What mechanisms ought to be considered to ensure that women in resource poor nations
   understand the nature and goals of the study and that consent to the research is voluntary?
   ???? What procedures can or should be considered to ensure that pregnant women have access to
   appropriate AZT treatment during their pregnancy? What responsibilities do the researchers
   have in relation to the provision of care for women at the completion of the study?
   Module 3: Public Health Research and Practice in International Settings: Special Ethical Concerns
   100
   Case Study: Analytical Discussion
   Ethical Problems and Relevant Values
   The collaborative international trials to investigate the effectiveness of alternatives to the 076 AZT
   protocol to reduce maternal-infant transmission of HIV resulted in heated debates among health
   professionals, ethicists, and policy makers worldwide. The primary ethical concern raised by critics was
   the use of placebo-controlled trials. Marcia Angell (1997), the editor of the New England Journal,
   suggested that the trials had the mark of the notorious Tuskegee study, a project funded by the U.S.
   Public Health Service to study the natural course of syphilis in poor African American men in the rural
   south. Angell believed that there was no need to compare shorter regimens of AZT with placebos. Lurie
   and Wolfe (1997) were equally harsh in their criticism of the studies. They argued that the research
   questions could be answered by equivalency studies in which the proven treatment was compared
   against alternative treatments and they also indicated that women and infants would die needlessly from
   HIV-infection if they were in the placebo control arms of the ongoing investigations.
   Harold Varmus, director of NIH, and David Satcher, director of the CDC, countered these charges,
   noting that placebo-controlled trials are the definitive standard for determining the safety and efficacy
   of interventions (1997). Proponents of the placebo-controlled trials argued that the answers to the
   questions raised in the studies were not yet clear and therefore resulted in a state of equipoise,
   requiring the rigorous application of a placebo arm in the investigations. Moreover, proponents said
   that equivalency studies would require additional time because of the need for larger sample sizes, and
   they would be less conclusive.
   Proponents and critics both evoked international guidelines for the ethical conduct of research with
   human subjects outlined in documents such as the Nuremburg Code, the Helsinki Declaration (being
   revised at the time of the debates), the Belmont Report, and the CIOMS International Ethical Guidelines
   for Biomedical Research Involving Human Subjects (also in revision) in stating their arguments.
   A fundamental issue in this case concerns the complexities surrounding the meaning of “best proven
   therapeutic method.” Should it refer to the highest attainable standard anywhere in the world, or the
   highest attainable and sustainable therapy in the country where a study will be conducted? Another
   important ethical issue in the AZT placebo control studies to prevent maternal-infant transmission of
   HIV concerns the obligations of researchers to consider the availability of therapeutic interventions for
   research participants and the community once a study is complete. The 1993 CIOMS International
   Ethical Guidelines for Biomedical Research Involving Human Subjects emphasizes that research carried
   out in developing nations must be responsive to the health care needs, concerns and priorities of the
   host country. The intention of the AZT trials for HIV-infected pregnant women was an attempt to
   respond directly to the devastating effects of the AIDS epidemic for poor women and children whose
   access to medical care and treatment is often severely compromised. Proponents of the trials have
   argued that it is vitally important to provide the highest level of therapy possible given the
   circumstances of the study in the host country and that if a therapeutic intervention is not sustainable,
   findings or products from clinical trials will not be applicable or available for the research participants
   and their communities.
   Critics of the studies charge that, even if the alternative interventions were successful, in most cases,
   the cost of providing treatment (even though it would be minimal) combined with the absence of
   Module 3: Public Health Research and Practice in International Settings: Special Ethical Concerns
   101
   clinical infrastructures would severely diminish the possibility for effective application of the research
   findings. Proponents, however, note that at least two of the countries where the trials were being
   conducted had the financial resources to provide short term AZT therapy if it proved effective, and that
   other resource-poor nations would be assisted by international agencies in securing and providing the
   drugs.
   Although placebo-controlled trials to reduce maternal-infant transmission of HIV have ended, the
   debate continues (see e.g. Levine 2001; Macklin 2001) In particular, the revision of the Declaration of
   Helsinki has become the focus of considerable controversy over the meaning, interpretation, and
   application of standard of care and the obligations of researchers to communities once a study has
   ended. The new wording of paragraphs 29 and 30 are especially contentious for those involved in the
   debate. Paragraph 29 now states: “The benefits, risk, burdens and effectiveness of a new method should
   be tested against those of the best current prophylactic, diagnostic, and therapeutic methods. This does
   not exclude the use of placebo, or no treatment, in studies where no proven prophylactic, diagnostic or
   therapeutic method exists.” Paragraph 30 is a new addition to the Declaration of Helsinki, “At the
   conclusion of the study, every patient entered into the study should be assured of access to the best
   proven prophylactic, diagnostic and therapeutic methods identified by the study.” Given the highly
   charged nature of the debates among health professionals, bioethicists, and policy makers
   internationally, it is unlikely that a general consensus on these issues will be reached in the near future.
   Necessary Information
   In this case, the necessary information to be considered in the decision-making process regarding
   implementation of placebo-controlled trials to reduce perinatal transmission of HIV include extensive
   examination of the scientific evidence available and a robust exploration of existing guidelines for
   ethical conduct in international biomedical research. Additionally, the investigators must involve
   researchers from host countries in the design and implementation of the study and initiate a
   comprehensive review of the issues among established ethical and scientific advisory panels at
   participating institutions, and with relevant national and international organizations. It is important to
   note that these activities were implemented by the investigators working on the placebo-controlled
   trials. Despite their efforts to systematically address the complicated dimensions of the studies,
   controversy arose over conflicting opinions about the ethical appropriateness of conducting the studies.
   Stakeholders to the Decision
   Public health professionals must be attentive to the views and concerns of the myriad stakeholders
   involved in the implementation of research such as the AZT trial to prevent maternal-infant
   transmission of HIV. The decision to go forward with the trial should be informed by the values and
   interests of: a) the pregnant women who would be directly effected by the study; b) the local community
   within which the study would be carried out; c) local researchers involved in the international
   collaboration; d) ethical review committees at the participating institutions, and if relevant, by national
   ethical advisory committees; and e) international advisory committees such as UNAIDS.
   Available Options
   Thoughtful consideration of the recommendations and concerns of all interested parties provides
   researchers with a range of potential plans of action. In this case, a number of alternatives were
   possible, including those outlined below:
   Module 3: Public Health Research and Practice in International Settings: Special Ethical Concerns
   102
   ???? Move forward with the placebo-controlled trials as originally planned, but only after intense
   review and approval by ethical boards at participating institutions, and national and
   international ethical advisory committees.
   ???? Design careful strategies to ensure that consent among the women was truly informed and
   voluntary.
   ???? Ensure careful oversight of the study by establishing an Advisory Board comprised of local
   researchers, community leaders, and international representatives.
   ???? Revise the study design in order to compare the full course of AZT with alternative treatments
   throughout the duration of the pregnancy and after the baby is born.
   ???? Postpone the implementation of the study until consensus is reached following a thorough
   debate among health professionals, ethicists, policy makers, and governmental authorities both
   nationally and internationally.
   Decision Process
   In this case, the placebo-controlled trials of the effect of AZT on the prevention of maternal-infant
   transmission of HIV were implemented. The intense public and professional debate that followed was,
   and continues to be, reported in the media and scholarly publications. Consensus regarding the ethical
   appropriateness of these studies and others like it may not be attainable given the complexity of the
   issues involved and, in some cases, the sharp differences of opinions among interested parties. An
   important outcome of this study has been increased attention to ethical issues surrounding the design
   and implementation of biomedical international research, particularly in settings where individuals are
   vulnerable because of their poverty and lack of access to medical treatment.
   References
   Angell M. 1997. The Ethics of Clinical Research in the Third World. New England Journal of Medicine
   337:847-849.
   Levine RJ. 2001. Some Recent Developments in the International Guidelines on the Ethics of Research
   Involving Human Subjects. Annals of New York Academy of Sciences 918:170-178.
   Lurie P & Wolfe SM. 1997. Unethical Trials of Interventions to Reduce Perinatal Transmission of the
   Human Immunodeficiency Virus in Developing Countries. New England Journal of Medicine 337:853-
   856.
   Macklin R. 2001. After Helsinki: Unresolved Issues in International Research. Kennedy Institute of
   Ethics Journal 11(1):17-36.
   Varmus H, Satcher D. 1997. Ethical Complexities of Conducing Research in Developing Countries. New
   England Journal of Medicine 337:10003-5.
   Module 4: Community-Based Practice and Research: Collaboration and Sharing Power
   103
   MODULE 4
   Community-Based Practice and Research:
   Collaboration and Sharing Power
   Elizabeth Heitman, PhD
   University of Mississippi Medical Center, Jackson, Mississippi and
   University of Texas School of Public Health, Houston, Texas
   Laura C. McKieran, DrPH
   El Centro del Barrio, San Antonio, Texas
   Contemporary public health is dedicated to a community orientation and the premise that communitybased
   activities are essential to sound practice and research. The central importance of community as a
   public health value is clearly reflected in the 2001 Public Health Code of Ethics and its accompanying
   statements. Five of the Code’s twelve principles and six of its eleven key assumptions address the nature
   of community, the interdependence of individuals and groups, the links between communities and the
   environment, and the role of communities in public discourse and collaboration with public health
   organizations.1 Defining public health as “what we, as a society, do collectively to assure the conditions
   for people to be healthy,”1 the authors of the Code declare that effective public health practice and
   research depend on informed community trust and participation.
   The practical ethical issues in community-based practice and research are as wide-ranging as
   community life itself. Many important ethical questions depend upon the meaning of community, but
   the word typically has no clear, consistent usage in public health, either as a social concept or as an
   ethical value. Moreover, identifying the key characteristics and rightful members of any particular
   community may raise ethical and political questions even before one considers the community’s
   appropriate roles in assessment and priority setting, research, intervention, or public health policy.
   This essay begins with an examination of some common definitions of community, community
   participation, and community representation, and considers the ethical presuppositions that lie behind
   the ways the terms are often used in public health. It then reviews how surveillance activities that focus
   on a given community may identify important public health problems and disparities within the larger
   population, and discusses the vital role of community members’ own views and health concerns in
   assessment and priority setting. Next the essay reviews the tensions inherent in community-based
   practice by considering the ideals and experience of community-oriented primary care. Finally, it will
   address the increased emphasis on community participation in research and the challenge of applying
   research findings to interventions and ongoing practice in the participant communities.
   Defining Community and Communities
   The term community comes from the Latin root for “common” or “shared”. The most general meaning of
   community is a group of people united by their common features. However, there is no agreement on
   precisely which common features create community, and the key features of even an established
   community may seem to vary when viewed by group members as opposed to outsiders.2
   Module 4: Community-Based Practice and Research: Collaboration and Sharing Power
   104
   The theoretical public health literature on community is generally based in sociology. Early sociological
   efforts to describe communities focused on the importance of shared values and shared experience.
   Sociologists typically define a community in terms of group norms, personal relationships, and
   members’ clear roles and expectations of each other. Health promotion researchers have identified six
   such aspects of community:3
   ???? membership (a sense of belonging and clarity of roles)
   ???? common symbol systems (language, religious rituals, national symbols)
   ???? shared values and norms (from shared experience or handed-down belief)
   ???? mutual influence of its members (based in communication)
   ???? shared emotional bonds (a sense of personal connectedness)
   ???? shared needs and a shared commitment to meeting them (a sense of “us” that transcends
   personal interests).
   This set of characteristics also has parallels in the concept of the religious community of faith, which is
   characterized by fellowship, shared values, spiritual and emotional bonds, and mutual support. Many
   social scientists and ethicists maintain that human beings naturally seek community and are eager to
   experience the meaning and personal fulfillment that true community offers.
   The use of the term community in public health practice often differs dramatically from the somewhat
   romanticized sociological notion seen in theoretical literature. Often the term is used to refer to a
   group of people from the same geographic location or catchment area (e.g., the westside community). It
   may also refer to a group with a common racial or ethnic background, socioeconomic status, religion,
   profession, health condition, or who share some other important experience (e.g., the African-American
   community, the indigent community, the Greek Orthodox community, the medical community, the
   HIV/AIDS community, or the women veterans’ community). Public health agencies and practitioners
   typically use the word to refer to individuals and groups linked by one or more characteristics that,
   however vaguely defined, give them recognizable common needs and interests of concern to public
   health.
   Often the intent of identifying a group as a community determines what features will be emphasized and
   who will be counted as a community member. Although self-defined communities figure prominently in
   the work of many public health agencies and professionals, many so-called communities are more
   rightly just “target populations”, constructs defined by the goals of a particular public health project or
   mandate (e.g., sexually active teenagers; households within 3 miles of a toxic waste site; the mentally ill
   homeless) rather than any natural social grouping. The description of a community targeted for public
   health practice or research may also be based on allegedly objective and readily measurable
   classifications, such as socioeconomic or demographic profiles, specific health conditions, or risk
   factors for disease. But because even these characteristics can be too complex to measure or verify,
   many projects define their communities of interest in terms of surrogate measures (i.e., income below
   200% of poverty level, families of children enrolled in the local school district) or by arbitrary
   geopolitical boundaries (zip code, county, tri-state area) established by governments’ or funders’
   priorities rather than characteristics that members of the resulting cohort would recognize as important
   to their identity.
   Even within a “true” sociological community, professionals’ views of the important relationships and
   commonalties among individuals and groups may be quite different from the views of the individuals
   Module 4: Community-Based Practice and Research: Collaboration and Sharing Power
   105
   and groups themselves. Insiders typically see important distinctions between themselves and others who
   public health professionals might link as a community. For example, similarities of linguistic and ethnic
   heritage may link Hispanics of many national backgrounds, but their differing political and economic
   interests and cultural differences can significantly affect the cohesion of the “Hispanic community” as
   viewed from the inside. Similarly, the “public health community” of practitioners, researchers, and
   academics may appear splintered to insiders who emphasize such differences as discipline, professional
   training, and area of work. A true community can be quite diverse, because people of vastly different
   backgrounds can often create and maintain a sense of community when they have a common cause or a
   common adversary against which to define themselves and their goals. However, as common goals are
   met or the perceived benefits of solidarity fade, such a community may become divided or even
   dissolve. Because of the many forces that can affect a group’s cohesiveness, community should be seen
   as a dynamic phenomenon in which change is both natural and expected.
   Many people may consider themselves members of more than one community, or may fall under
   definitions of membership in several communities of interest to public health. Beginning with
   membership in a household, individuals are often formal or informal members of self-identified
   communities based in professional activities and the workplace, religious or spiritual beliefs and
   practice, sexual orientation, political affiliations, civic and charitable service, athletic activities,
   academic institutions or experience, social organizations or hobbies. Many individuals’ community
   affiliations overlap and serve parallel interests. However, different communities’ values and their
   expectations of members may also conflict, challenging individuals with multiple loyalties to choose
   sides or live with unresolvable ethical tension. Conflicting loyalties can be a risk for public health
   professionals when the goals and methods of public health practice challenge the traditions or beliefs of
   their religious, ethnic, or other value-oriented community. However, public health professionals who
   can successfully reconcile these tensions in their own lives can be quite valuable as interpreters and
   change agents who can negotiate the conflicts and facilitate understanding where others cannot work
   effectively.
   Some uses of the term community in public health contexts are themselves ethically problematic. “The
   community” is often used as shorthand to refer to outsiders to public health — “them” in relation to
   public health professionals’ “us”. This phrase can serve as a useful reminder that public health activities
   always take place in a community context and that professionals must always be aware of the
   community’s response. However, it can also imply an adversarial or hierarchical relationship between
   public health professionals and the people they serve, a perspective that conflicts with the stated goal of
   collaborative, participatory public health. At times, it can also carry negative implications of the
   community’s ignorance, misunderstanding, and apathy as opposed to the professionals’ skills and
   knowledge and dedication to society’s welfare.4
   An even more ethically dangerous phenomenon is that public health practitioners and researchers may
   consciously or unconsciously use the concept of community as a marketing strategy to promote
   activities, perceptions, and goals to a target population. Referring to a cohort as a community can
   create the impression of underlying community values, norms, and expectations that hide “a giant
   reinforcement schedule.”5 Use of the term community and its accompanying sense of mutual values and
   responsibility to encourage behavior change or acceptance of certain health values has been criticized
   as being cynically manipulative when it substitutes marketing and implied peer pressure for real moral
   and psychological support.5
   Module 4: Community-Based Practice and Research: Collaboration and Sharing Power
   106
   Community as a Public Health Value: Communitarianism and Public Health Ethics
   The meaning of community as a central value in public health is at least as complex as its definition in
   practice. The preamble to the Public Health Code of Ethics states that one of the key principles “that
   follow from the distinctive characteristics of public health …is the interdependence of people … (which)
   is the essence of community.”1 Community is an essential value for public health because “the health of
   individuals is tied to their life in the community.”1 In this light, public health theorists and practitioners
   typically interpret the good of the community and the good of the individual as interdependent.
   Unfortunately, public health’s community orientation is often misunderstood by ethicists trained in the
   principle-based frameworks of bioethics, which presume a certain natural conflict between the needs,
   interests, and goals of individuals and those of society at large. In mainstream bioethics, the principle of
   respect for autonomy requires that health professionals recognize and honor the right of individual
   patients to be self-determining, unless respecting one individual’s rights would violate the rights of
   another. Many bioethicists likewise emphasize the need for health practitioners and policy makers to
   avoid unduly restricting the rights of individuals in the just distribution of health-related benefits and
   burdens across society. In this context, critics of policies that seek community-oriented goals mistakenly
   label public health as “utilitarian”, in reference to the ethical framework that promotes the goal of the
   “greatest good for the greatest number” with less concern for individual rights than for social benefit.
   While public health is not officially linked to any specific ethical theory or school of thought, its
   community orientation has many parallels to the philosophy of communitarianism. Communitarianism
   developed in the 1980s in response to a perceived overemphasis on individual rights.6 Like public
   health, communitarian theory maintains that individuals are ultimately inseparable from community life,
   and that no one person and no one community can ever be completely self-determining. In contrast to
   more familiar ethical frameworks’ presumption of a natural antagonism between individuals and
   society—and particularly the state—communitarianism recognizes that human beings need both
   autonomy and social relationships. Communitarians insist that while individuals make their own moral
   choices, their moral commitments and values are shaped by community norms and experiences.
   Traditional bioethics often interprets public health’s concern for community to be anti-individual, and
   its models for public health reflect a tension between individuals and society in which benefit is often a
   zero-sum game. For example, seatbelt legislation is often identified as a case in which the state enforces
   a paternalistic limitation of individual rights (to drive unrestrained) in pursuit of a greater social good
   (fewer collision-related injuries and lower related costs to society). In contrast, a communitarian
   approach to this issue focuses not only on the individual’s direct benefit from using seat belts, but also
   on the benefit that the individual enjoys as a member of a community that reduces driving-related
   injuries and deaths.7 Communitarian models of ethical analysis are still relatively new, but a
   communitarian perspective on human dignity, social relationships, and community values can also
   suggest new approaches and strategies for resolving ethical controversy in public health practice and
   research.
   Community Participation and Representation
   Ethical community-based practice and research depend not only upon a clear understanding of
   community and identification of the community’s interests but also on the way in which community
   participation and representation are understood. Community participation in public health appears both
   Module 4: Community-Based Practice and Research: Collaboration and Sharing Power
   107
   as a grass-roots phenomenon linked to political activism and as a practical organizational effort to
   involve individuals and communities in promoting and protecting their own health. Just as there is no
   standard definition of community, the meaning of participation is ambiguous in many contexts where
   the term is often used. Community participation is commonly understood as the involvement of the
   community in the planning, organization, operation, administration, financing, and control of a project
   or enterprise. However, the goal of grass-roots community participation is not simply involvement, but
   rather the redistribution of power that deliberately includes traditional “have-nots” in the sharing of
   information, setting of priorities and policies, allocation of resources, and distribution of benefits and
   services.5
   An early governmental step toward the promotion of community participation in public health programs
   came in the Economic Opportunity Act of 1964, which provided federal grants to state and local public
   and private non-profit agencies for community action projects, and which required “maximum feasible
   participation” by community members. Subsequent efforts to evaluate the effects of community
   participation in funded projects were frustrated by the wide variability in the definition, format, and
   implementation of relevant programs nationwide, and proponents of mandatory communication in
   federally funded activities were largely unable to respond when government requirements were cut back
   or eliminated. Moreover, the early efforts at engaging community participation in governmentally
   funded public health activities were criticized by grass-roots activists as mere tokenism that did not get
   the public very far up the “ladder of citizen participation,”8 and which permitted “maximum feasible
   manipulation” of lay people rather than promoting partnership or citizen control. 9
   The concept of partnership or shared governance has been increasingly important in the literature on
   community participation over the past decade. The fundamental ethical challenge of authentic
   partnership and true sharing of authority with community groups lies in overcoming the significant
   disparity in power between community members and public health professionals, who have specialized
   knowledge, technical skills, and institutional or governmental support. Establishing a partnership
   requires mutual trust, which is built only over time and after visible results have been achieved.
   Sustaining a partnership in which collaborators have significantly different degrees of access to power
   typically requires ongoing financial, political, and community support, reinforced by demonstrated
   positive outcomes from the collaborative project. Important characteristics of authentic collaboration
   include the six “R’s” of participation: recognition, respect, role, relationship, reward, and results.10
   Without these components, the community is likely to discount the professionals’ sincerity and
   disengage from the project.
   Because many communities of greatest interest to public health are precisely those whose members
   have limited technical skills, knowledge and access to power, promoting community participation in
   public health activities has necessarily involved professional efforts to empower individuals and the
   community at large. Empowerment relates to a person’s ability to affect his or her own situation.
   Individual, organizational, and community empowerment are interrelated in the development of social
   support and interpersonal, social, and political skills. Increasingly public health efforts to empower
   communities are also dedicated to capacity building, which typically involves the education,
   development, and support of community members who will then have the specialized knowledge, skills,
   and abilities to carry out the roles previously played by public health practitioners from outside the
   community. Capacity building creates a cadre of individuals who both understand the needs and values
   of the community as only members can and understand the theories and methods of public health that
   can help meet those community needs appropriately. The ethical advantage of capacity building is also
   Module 4: Community-Based Practice and Research: Collaboration and Sharing Power
   108
   an important practical strength, as community members are ultimately able to work effectively toward
   their own goals without the potentially overpowering presence of public health professionals.
   The effectiveness and ethical quality of community participation in any public health activity are also
   dependent upon the authenticity of the individuals and groups representing the community of interest.
   In theory, community representatives are able to provide insight into the norms, values, experiences,
   questions, objections, and appreciation of the community they represent, expanding, correcting, and
   ideally validating the approach taken by public health professionals in practice and research. Community
   representatives ideally serve as a bridge between their respective communities and the public health
   professionals with whom they work, representing the community to the professionals and the
   professionals back to their communities. However, in the same way that public health professionals
   often define communities based largely on the reason for engaging specific groups, professionals often
   identify community representatives in light of the purposes they are expected to serve. Even sincere
   efforts to include community representation in public health activities may result in tokenism if the
   primary purpose of inclusion is simply to satisfy external requirements for community participation or to
   secure the approval of proposed projects.
   Engaging community representatives in a public health project is subject to logistical and ethical
   problems similar to those described in defining a community. Public health professionals who seek
   input from “average” members of the communities they serve may not be able to recognize the
   significant differences among members of even a small community, especially if that group is unfamiliar
   to or quite different from the professionals themselves. In an effort to identify “authentic” community
   members, public health professionals often look for individuals who are recognized as leaders or
   spokespersons for their group. However even identifying these individuals requires both an
   understanding of how the community perceives its own essential characteristics and recognizes who
   speaks for the community in its interaction with others. It also requires understanding of the group’s
   organizational and power structures. In more than a few situations, the official leaders of a given
   community have only titular or symbolic positions while others hold the true power or command the real
   respect of its members.
   Similarly, an individual’s authority in one area of community affairs may not translate into authority in
   another, and an acknowledged community leader from an unrelated area may not provide the desired
   access to the group’s needs and views related to public health. Even powerful community leaders may
   be intimidated by health professionals whose work they may not fully understand and whose language
   and approach are unfamiliar. In order to maximize the effective participation of community
   representatives, it is essential for them to receive careful orientation to the project and to get to know
   its organizers. Ongoing education about the work in which they will be involved and its larger context
   can further empower community representatives, particularly when it is coupled with an active role for
   the community in defining its own needs and strengths, a process discussed below. Nonetheless, public
   health professionals should avoid the temptation to pick the most visible community members for
   multiple projects, as the repeated participation of a select few may not only exacerbate existing power
   differentials within a community, it may also create career community participants who are increasingly
   estranged from and resented by the group they are intended to represent.
   The potential barriers to the effective involvement of community representatives often make it appealing
   to find health professionals from specific backgrounds to interpret the needs of targeted communities.
   In many ways this practice can provide a natural bridge between the professionals and the groups they
   Module 4: Community-Based Practice and Research: Collaboration and Sharing Power
   109
   hope to serve. However, depending on the individual’s background and the nature of the project, the
   socialization of professional training and work experience may distance professional members of a
   targeted community from the group’s mainstream perspectives and even more so from its most
   vulnerable members. The difficulty of striking a balance in this regard argues for all but the smallest
   projects to include multiple representatives of any targeted community, in order to include a broader
   and ideally more representative spectrum of its voices. It also emphasizes the need for professionals to
   become more educated about the communities they serve in order to recognize important community
   characteristics and more easily overcome the barriers to community participation.
   Since the end of the 1990s, two initiatives intended to improve the access of an increasingly multiethnic
   population to effective health serves have also shown promise for increasing community
   participation in public health activities. The first is cultural competence education for professionals.
   Standards of cultural competence and related professional education are intended to improve public
   health professionals’ recognition and understanding of the role of culture in health-related activities and
   the history, beliefs, values, and practices of members of the communities they serve. Concern for
   cultural competence was originally directed toward ethnic, religious, and linguistic differences in direct
   patient care, but increasingly the concept is being extended into social and political action and the
   organizational development of services and programs that accommodate communities’ cultural
   differences.11
   The second initiative is based in new federal standards for language assistance for people who use
   governmentally funded health-related services. These standards are aimed at institutions and agencies
   that provide health services, directing them to provide various forms of language assistance to
   individuals whose limited proficiency in English may be a barrier to their effective care.12 The standards
   also apply in other settings where limited English proficiency affects some groups’ access to healthrelated
   services. By facilitating communication and improved mutual understanding, language assistance
   and cultural competency programs should foster public health professionals’ engagement of the diverse
   communities they serve and improve their ability to recognize changing community needs. Language
   assistance programs, in particular, should also expand many community groups’ awareness and
   understanding of public health activities and ability to participate in them more fully.
   Community Surveillance, Assessment, and Priority Setting
   Characterizing the health of the population through epidemiologic surveillance and identifying its health
   needs through formal assessment are essential public health activities that depend heavily on health
   professionals’ presuppositions about distinctions and similarities among communities. Basic health
   statistics can be significantly affected by whether and how the larger population is analyzed by
   subgroups. Interpreting the meaning of such statistics, and identifying appropriate public health
   responses to them can also be affected by whether the members of the subgroups share community
   values or experiences. For example, the high low birth weight and infant mortality rates for the United
   States as a whole are often regarded as an embarrassing puzzle in light of national expenditures on
   prenatal and perinatal medical care. When national rates are evaluated by racial/ethnic group,
   socioeconomic status (SES), and age, the problem can be seen to affect young African-Americans of
   lower SES most severely, but the rates for all groups of African-American women are disproportionately
   higher than for their counterparts’ from other racial/ethnic groups. In seeking to understand this
   disturbing phenomenon, public health researchers and women’s health advocates have recently
   emphasized such potential causes as the experience of institutionalized racism and its associated stress
   Module 4: Community-Based Practice and Research: Collaboration and Sharing Power
   110
   over possible biological or medical factors. Defining and measuring the experience of institutionalized
   racism and associated stress requires not only the observational and analytic skills of behavioral
   scientists and social epidemiologists, it demands the participation of the communities being studied
   and insight into community members’ interpretation of their experiences.13
   Community health professionals have long recognized that community members view health and illness
   and their respective causes differently than do practitioners and researchers. Even when community
   members and professionals identify the same health problems, needs, and resources, their emphases
   often differ. Professionals’ emphasis on organizations and the delivery of service typically contrasts with
   community members concern for social, economic, and interpersonal issues. Knowledge of community
   members’ subjective experience is considered essential for a comprehensive view of a community’s
   health status, both in terms of the lived meaning of surveillance data and the importance attributed to
   specific health problems in daily life. But because of difficulties in involving the community at large in
   assessment and the logistical and ethical difficulties of identifying and engaging community
   representatives in the process, community assessment may be left largely to professionals in all but
   major projects or when funding guidelines require community participation.
   In practice, community assessment and priority setting are twin components of health planning that
   inevitably affect each other. Formal assessment is typically based on an overview of a community’s
   strengths and needs that effectively establishes some general priorities before the evidence is gathered,
   but funding for community projects requires data to support their feasibility and likely community
   benefit. Community members who enter into the assessment and planning process are typically much
   less concerned with developing and analyzing comprehensive and well-documented data and much
   more interested in action, change, and the provision of services. Maintaining community involvement in
   planning and priority setting often requires public health planners to balance their professional
   responsibility to use sound research methods and the need to provide meaningful opportunities for
   community participation that will keep community members interested and active in the process.
   The best-known and most ambitious community-based priority-setting project in the United States, the
   Oregon Health Plan, illustrates both the ethical strengths and limitations of community involvement in
   planning for health services.14 The Oregon Health Plan was the result of Oregon’s 1989 revision of
   Medicaid in response to the state’s growing number of uninsured residents. Under the plan all state
   residents who met federal poverty guidelines were eligible for Medicaid coverage, but fewer conditions
   and fewer types of treatment were covered under the revised system. In order to clarify which conditions
   and interventions should be covered under the plan, the state created the eleven-member Oregon
   Health Services Commission to develop a prioritized list that would be the basic benefits package. The
   Health Services Commission was created in part in response to the efforts of Oregon Health Decisions,
   a civic organization responsible for grass-roots education and community outreach centered around
   health care rationing. Between 1983 and 1984, Oregon Health Decisions conducted 300 community
   forums and town hall meetings designed to raise awareness of the practical and ethical issues related to
   health care rationing. The process involved some 5000 Oregonians and led to the 1984 Citizen’s Health
   Care Parliament, which outlined the values that its participants believed essential to an acceptable
   rationing plan. In 1989 the Health Services Commission continued the community-based discussion in
   town hall meetings in every county across the state, discussing with participants how to allocate health
   care resources consistent with community values. The Commission subsequently used its findings to
   create a list of 709 condition-treatment pairs for which priority for coverage was based largely on the
   values and preferences expressed in the community forums.
   Module 4: Community-Based Practice and Research: Collaboration and Sharing Power
   111
   From the outset the Oregon Health Plan was both hailed and criticized from many directions, but
   analysis of the priority list and the way in which it was developed received particularly strong criticism
   from some ethicists and community advocates. In particular, they pointed out that the community values
   and preferences that informed the prioritizing of coverage were not necessarily the values and
   preferences of Oregon’s Medicaid-eligible population. The community forums and town meetings at
   which rationing, priorities, and values were discussed were typically attended by health care providers,
   and other educated, middle class Oregonians. Although organizations representing Medicaid patients
   took part in the discussions, only 5% of the participants were actual Medicaid recipients. Despite efforts
   to schedule sessions at convenient times for all community members and to publicize the meetings
   actively, members of the lower socioeconomic groups most affected by Medicaid’s restructuring did not
   participate. Questions about the community that the Plan was meant to serve, the willingness and ability
   of health professionals and educated citizens to speak for the poor, and how the Commission might
   have engaged more participation from members of Oregon’s lower socioeconomic groups continue to
   pose a serious challenge to health planners and the establishment of community-based practice.
   Community-based practice
   Community-based practice, particularly the delivery of health services, is distinguished by both
   logistical and ethical aspects. Logistically, community-based practice is rooted in a particular, defined
   community, whose needs and goals define the purpose and activities of the practice. Ethically,
   community-based practice is committed to honoring the values and culture of the defined community
   being served and to shared governance of the practice itself. Community-based practice in this sense
   means the strategic and sustained cooperation of public and private health and social service agencies,
   neighborhood associations, local funders, businesses, schools and universities, consumer advocacy
   groups, public officials, and public agencies, which provide the resources and key players needed to
   maintain a comprehensive approach, a community focus and shared control, an epidemiological
   understanding of the community’s health and well-being, and responsive and flexible interventions that
   recognize the importance of improving the health of both individuals and the community as a whole.
   While few practices achieve this combination of ideals, across the country, diverse broad-based
   community partnerships such as Healthy Cities/Communities, Healthy Start, Ryan White Planning
   Councils, comprehensive community initiatives, and community health worker/promotora programs have
   made some inroads.* One of the most successful models of community-based practice, communityoriented
   primary care (COPC), attempted to integrate community participation with clinical primary
   care and the basic features of public health. The history of COPC, which was quite popular in the
   United States in the 1980s, illustrates the ethical ideals as well as several ethical tensions inherent in
   community-based practice.
   COPC was originally developed in 1940s South Africa by Drs. Sidney and Emily Kark and further
   developed in Israel. COPC was based upon the idea that decision making for health needs to hinge on
   an epidemiological understanding of the principal factors influencing health, including social,
   biological, and cultural characteristics and the natural and man-made environment. The Karks taught
   that health interventions should target both the individual and the community as a whole, and that the
   community should be involved in the promotion of its own health. In 1982 a U.S. Institute of Medicine

• See Best Practices sheet for general references on such programs.
  Module 4: Community-Based Practice and Research: Collaboration and Sharing Power
  112
  (IOM)-sponsored conference on COPC defined the essential elements of COPC as (1) complementary
  use of epidemiology and clinical practice; (2) a defined target population, for whose health
  improvement COPC service takes responsibility; (3) defined health interventions based on
  epidemiological findings; (4) community involvement in its own health promotion; and (5) accessibility
  without financial, social, cultural, geographic, and other barriers to care.15 Attracted to this model
  because of its comprehensive, democratic approach, many practitioners worldwide introduced COPC
  into public health practice, particularly in clinics for the indigent.
  Over the past 20 years, however, COPC in the United States has come to be understood largely as a
  primary care medical practice with a geographically defined service area, where resource allocation and
  program design decisions are based at least in part on periodic health needs assessments. A few years
  after it defined a active role for communities in COPC, IOM reduced its definition of COPC to four key
  tasks performed by professionals: (1) defining and characterizing the community; (2) identifying the
  community’s health problems; (3) modifying programs in response to health needs; and (4) monitoring
  the program’s impact. Not surprisingly, today most U.S.-based COPC practices do not take a
  comprehensive approach to health that encompasses social, cultural, and environmental determinants,
  or target interventions to the health of the community as a whole (as compared to a large number of
  individuals). Similarly, although community health centers and other such practices may have consumer
  representation on advisory or governing boards, COPC practices today do not incorporate any
  significant degree of community involvement. Moreover, financial, geographic, cultural, and other
  barriers to access to health care continue to present tremendous challenges to indigent communities
  across the United States even where COPC programs exist.
  The shift in COPC’s ethical commitment to community participation and a holistic approach to
  community health may be the result of the persistent U.S. belief that health problems can be corrected
  by the delivery of professional health and social services and Americans’ dedication to medical experts
  and institutions. Moreover, the dominant biomedical model of health and illness still overlooks the
  importance of connections among individuals for both creating and solving health problems, and doubts
  the wisdom or feasibility of sharing authority or responsibility with a given community for the promotion
  of its own health. And, perhaps most importantly, as the U.S. population grows more diverse and more
  mobile, the concept of “community” remains difficult to define in theory or practice, making community
  engagement particularly difficult to achieve. The original vision of COPC might well be highly effective
  if implemented faithfully, but the interaction of practical and ethical restrictions on its goals makes such
  implementation unlikely for the near future.
  Community-Based Research
  The ethical issues in public health research, as in all human health-oriented research, relate primarily to
  the tensions between the real and potential benefits that research offers participants and the possible
  harms that the investigation may cause them.† Like epidemiologic surveillance, public health research
  attempts to answer questions related to the health of populations that may have markedly different
  answers for different communities. Nonetheless, presumptions about the similarities and differences
  between communities on which research agendas are built can pose ethical challenges for investigators
  and communities. The history of public health research is indelibly stained by the U.S. Public Health
  Service’s 40-year study of untreated syphilis among poor, uneducated African-American men in Macon
  † Module 3 addresses the ethics of public health research in more detail.
  Module 4: Community-Based Practice and Research: Collaboration and Sharing Power
  113
  County, Alabama, under the premise that the “Negro” biological response to syphilis was different from
  that of Caucasians.‡ Despite national ethical standards that required the informed consent of
  participants over the four decades of the trial, researchers in the Tuskeegee Syphilis Study betrayed the
  trust of the community and deceived individual participants by portraying the study as special medical
  attention.
  Since the late 1960s, regulatory authorities have sought to protect research participants from studyrelated
  harms by through reinforced standards of informed consent for individuals enrolled in research
  protocols. In the late 1980s, however, AIDS activists demanded greater access to the therapeutic
  options offered only in drug trials. Their claims began a shift in the interpretation of informed consent
  from a largely defensive right to refuse experimental intervention to a positive right to be involved in
  research protocols as an informed partner.16 Since the late 1990s federal regulations have reflected this
  new attitude, as evidenced by the substance and the language of new policies. Both governmental
  agencies and many researchers have abandoned use of the implicitly passive “research subject” in favor
  of the more active “research participant.”
  “Participatory research” has gained particular currency for community-based studies. In the mid-1990s,
  international AIDS researchers faced significant ethical conflict in reconciling U.S. standards of
  individual informed consent with the accepted paternalism of medicine in most developing countries.17
  Some proposed models of community consent in which community leaders were asked to speak on
  behalf targeted participants.18 Often the community members recruited for drug studies had no
  understanding of the western concept of self-determination and who respected the authority of
  community leaders to make important decisions in the group’s interests. For many ethicists this
  practice raised the crucial dilemma of how to respect individuals who do not believe in autonomy
  without supporting the potential exploitation use of vulnerable persons whose own interests might differ
  from those of their larger community. Although U.S. federal funding commits international research to
  U.S. ethical standards, the ethical controversy surrounding community consent remains largely
  unresolved, particularly with respect to privately funded drug studies.
  In the United States, communities have begun to seek partnership with researchers in addressing health
  problems that they both recognize. Researchers, in turn, have realized the benefits of community
  participation in defining important research questions, implementing protocols, and interpreting results.
  The National Institutes of Health has increasingly called for protocol design to be consistent with the
  goals of participatory research, and recommends that applicants for certain federal funding consult
  published guidelines from the University of British Columbia on participatory research.19 These
  guidelines highlight the importance of community involvement and partnership in health promotion
  research and define five basic categories for evaluating partnership and community participation:
  ???? the characteristics of the participant community of interest;
  ???? the origins of the research question and the community’s support for it;
  ???? whether the research will foster self-determination among community members and facilitate
  collaboration with external resources;
  ???? whether the community and the researchers can learn about each other during the process;
  and
  ???? whether the participant community will benefit from the research outcomes and how.
  ‡ Module 2 discusses the history and legacy of the U.S. Public Health Service’s Tuskegee Syphilis Study in detail.
  Module 4: Community-Based Practice and Research: Collaboration and Sharing Power
  114
  These criteria speak to the potential for researchers and communities to serve their mutual needs and
  link traditional concepts of research protection with new interpretations of collaborative trust.
  Conclusion
  New attention to community in theory and practice offers the promise for a public health that is of the
  people and by the people as well as for the people. Integrated community-based efforts at surveillance,
  intervention, and research close an important circle for health professionals by bringing a wider range
  of knowledge, skills, and resources to bear on complex public health concerns and deepening broad
  commitment to solutions by involving people in decisions that affect them. For community-base
  research and practice to be successful, however, public health professionals must be alert to its inherent
  tensions and use conflicts to gain a greater understanding of how to balance the many worldviews,
  goals, and strategies at play. A strong mutual commitment to power-sharing and the collaborative
  process, and honest approach, careful attention to relationship, ands the pursuit of “win-win” outcomes
  can go a long way to overcoming the may obstacles that remain.
  Module 4: Community-Based Practice and Research: Collaboration and Sharing Power
  115
  Fact Sheet: Community-Based Practice and Research: Collaboration and
  Sharing Power
  Regulations and Guidelines
  Legal mandates, professional guidelines, and organizational standards on community-based practice
  and research, including related ethical issues, are decentralized and generally not coordinated. Funders
  and contracting agencies often place program-specific conditions on use of grant or contract funds, or
  recommend that projects incorporate principles of community-based practice or research or related
  guidelines.
  For example, many federally legislated funding streams require community representation, in some
  cases with fairly specific representation formulas. Among many other examples, required vehicles for
  community representation include the community-level Planning Councils mandated by Ryan White
  CARE Act for local distribution of federal HIV/AIDS funding, the governing boards of Community
  Health Centers, and the planning and coordinating Community Consortia required of each local Healthy
  Start infant mortality initiative. In another vein, in partnership with a number of other public health
  agencies, the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention have drafted a set of Public Health
  Performance Standards for state health departments, local health departments, and governing bodies
  like Boards of Health. Among other purposes, the standards are intended to improve performance and
  increase accountability. As collaboration with the community is included in the draft standards, it is
  more likely than ever that all governmental public health agencies will be held accountable for
  community collaboration.
  With some exceptions that are related to new technologies, the ethical issues that arise in communitybased
  practice and research today are not new. Most relate to the difficulty in defining a community,
  identifying its leaders and appropriate representatives, and recognizing and addressing the tensions
  inherent in sharing power, knowledge, and responsibility in the pursuit of community health benefits. In
  practice, individual public health professionals may find themselves unable to conform to all relevant
  mandates. More commonly, unwritten organizational norms or individual job descriptions may conflict
  with the approaches and tasks necessary to interact successfully with the community.
  Common terms
  Capacity building: The provision and promotion of education and practical training within lowand
  unskilled communities, particularly with respect to essential health
  services. Capacity building is a strategy for community empowerment and
  fostering independence.
  Communitarianism: An ethical theory that recognizes the dual human need for autonomy and
  social relationships, and emphasizes the role of communities’ values and
  experiences in shaping individuals’ moral commitments. Communitarianism
  developed in the 1980s in response to liberalism’s emphasis on individual
  rights. Communitarians believe that individual rights must be balanced with
  communal responsibilities.
  Module 4: Community-Based Practice and Research: Collaboration and Sharing Power
  116
  Community: A population or group defined by its common characteristics or
  experiences, particularly location or geographic origin; physical, behavioral,
  or personal characteristics (e.g., race/ethnicity, gender, age, sexual
  orientation, disability); beliefs, values, interests, norms or goals.
  Community assessment: Evaluation of the strengths, abilities, needs and goals of a particular group,
  population, or geographic area, typically with the goal of intervention to
  improve services or minimize the harm caused by intervention elsewhere.
  Community governance: Shared authority between communities and either private or public
  organizations over long-term issues of importance to the community,
  secured by a mutually desired outcome, such as funding, that depends of
  full community partnership.
  Community health: The health of an identified group; organized practices intended to promote,
  protect, and preserve the health of one or more defined populations
  Community organizer: Lay or professional person who works with one or more specific
  communities to define members’ common goals, needs, problems and
  priorities, and design strategies and mobilize resources to achieve these
  goals and priorities.
  Community-oriented: An integrated system of clinical primary care and public health, primary
  care (COPC) which emphasizes continuity of care and focuses on the whole
  community and its subgroups in needs assessment, planning and providing
  services, and evaluating outcomes. COPC’s five essential features are: a
  clearly defined target population for surveillance, care, and evaluation;
  complementary roles of epidemiology and clinical care; defined programs
  based in epidemiologic assessment; involvement of the community in health
  planning and health promotion; and accessibility to services without
  geographic, financial, socio-cultural, or other barriers.
  Community participation: The active involvement of the members of a community in the planning,
  creation, operation, and control of an organization, project, or service
  activity intended to benefit that community.
  Community representative: An individual who participates in an organization, project, or service
  activity as a member of a specific identified group or population, both to
  provide the perspective and knowledge of the group to the organization or
  activity and to convey essential information about the organization or
  activity to the larger group.
  Culture: As used here, a system of shared beliefs, values and behaviors and practices
  common to a particular group or population that results from group
  experience interpreted in light of beliefs about the purpose and meaning of
  life. With regard to health and well-being, culture includes ideas about
  definitions and causes of health and illness; beliefs about how to protect
  Module 4: Community-Based Practice and Research: Collaboration and Sharing Power
  117
  and improve health; attitudes about when, how, and from whom to seek
  help; and appropriate ways of expressing (or not expressing) symptoms or
  suffering.
  Cultural competence: The knowledge, skills, and attitudes necessary to work effectively with
  persons from one or more cultures other than one’s own. Since the late
  1990s, many governmental and professional organizations have emphasized
  the need for cultural competence training to improve the ability of healthrelated
  organizations and individual health workers to provide high-quality
  services to diverse populations.
  Participatory research: Systematic inquiry with the active collaboration of the individuals or groups
  involved in or affected by the issue being studied, undertaken with the goal
  of education, intervention, and beneficial change.
  Oregon Health Plan: Oregon’s 1989 revision of Medicaid in which all state residents who met
  federal poverty guidelines were eligible for Medicaid coverage, but with
  fewer conditions and fewer types of treatment covered. A list of 700
  covered condition-treatment pairs and the priority for their coverage was
  based largely on values and preferences expressed by Oregon’s citizens in
  community forums and public opinion polls conducted over several years.
  Shared governance: Collaboration of a broad range of stakeholders—public, private,
  governmental, lay, and professional, individuals and organizations—who
  take long-term joint responsibility to address issues of importance to the
  community.
  1 http://www.apha.org/codeofethics/ethics.htm
  2 McQueen KM, McLellan E, Metzger DS, Kegeles S, Strauss RP, Blanchard L, Scotti R, Trotter RT. What is community? An
  evidence-based definition for participatory public health. American Journal of Public Health 2000; 91(12): 1929-1938.
  3 Israel BA, Checkoway B, Schultz A, Zimmerman M. Health education and community empowerment: conceptualizing and
  measuring perceptions of individual, organizational, and community control. Health Education Quarterly 1994; 21(2):149-170.
  4 Durant J. Hansen A, Bauer M. Public understanding of the new genetics. In: The Troubled Helix: Social and Psychological
  Implications of the New Human Genetics. T Marteau, M. Richards, eds. New York: Cambridge University Press, 1996, pp.
  236-238.
  5 Jonas S. The question of community control. American Journal of Public Health 1971ll 61 (10): 1934-1937
  6 The Communitarian Network, http://www.gwu.edu/~ccps
  7 Forster JL. A communitarian ethical model for public health interventions: An alternative to individual behavior change
  strategies. Journal of Public Health Policy 1982; .
  8 Arnstein SR. A ladder of citizen participation. Journal of the American Institute of Planners 1969; 35(4);15
  Module 4: Community-Based Practice and Research: Collaboration and Sharing Power
  118
  9 Arnstein S. Maximum feasible manipulation. City 1970 (Oct/Nov): page numbers unavailable.
  10 Wolff T, Kaye G (eds.) From the Ground Up: A Workbook on Coalition Building and Community Development. Amherst,
  MA: AHEC/Community Partners, 1995.
  11 National Association of Social Workers. NASW Standards for Cultural Competence in Social Work Practice. Washington,
  DC: NASW, 2001. http://www.naswpress.org/publications/standards/sta ndards_cultural_competence/s01.html
  12 Office for Civil Rights, U.S. Department of Health and Human Services. Title VI of the Civil rights Act of 1964; Policy
  Guidance Against National Origin Discrimination as it Affects Persons with Limited English Proficiency (65 Fed. Reg. 52762-
  52774).
  13 Reverby SM. More than fact and fiction: cultural memory and the Tuskegee Syphilis Study. Hastings Center Report 2001;
  31(Sept-Oct): 22-28.
  14 Bodenheimer T. The Oregon Health Plan — Lessons for the nation (first of two parts). New England Journal of Medicine
  1997; 337: 651-655; Crawshaw R. The Oregon Health Plan (letter). New England Journal of Medicine 1998; 338:395-396.
  15 Conner E., Mullin F, eds., Institute of Medicine. Community Oriented Primary Care: New Directions for Health Services
  Delivery. Washington, DC: National Academy Press, 1982.
  16 Arras JD. Noncompliance in AIDS research. Hastings Center Report 1990, 20(Sept/Oct): 24-32
  17 Levine RJ. Informed consent: Some challenges to the universal validity of the western model. Law, Medicine & Health Care
  1991; 19: 207-13.
  18 Weijer C, Goldsand G, Emanuel EJ. Protecting communities in research: current guidelines and limits of extrapolation.
  Nature Genetics 1999, 23: 275-280.
  19 University of British Columbia Institute for Health Promotion Research. Guidelines and categories for classifying
  participatory research projects in health promotion, in Participatory Research in Health Promotion in Canada . Ottawa,
  Ontario: Royal Society of Canada. www.ihpr.ubc.ca/guidelines.html
  Module 4: Community-Based Practice and Research: Collaboration and Sharing Power
  119
  Case Study 1: Providing Culturally Appropriate Services in a Changing
  Community
  Our Covenant Health Center is a 17-year old nonprofit clinic in an indigent, multi-ethnic
  neighborhood of a once-prosperous urban community. Our Covenant was founded as a free pediatric
  clinic by a consortium of churches after a sharp economic downturn left many area residents without
  jobs or health insurance. Through the leadership of a retired public health administrator and the
  volunteer efforts of other church members, the clinic grew steadily. After only a few years Our Covenant
  had expanded to provide a wide range of medical and social services for which patients paid on a
  sliding scale based on household income. By its 6th anniversary, Our Covenant had received funding
  from several private foundations and had hired a full-time administrator and several full- and part-time
  clinical staff. Our Covenant celebrated its 10th anniversary by moving into a renovated discount store
  building, which was donated by its owners to avoid a tax foreclosure.
  The mission of Our Covenant Health Center is to provide community-based primary care for area
  residents, and the neighborhood has long viewed the clinic and its staff as important community assets.
  The 10-person board of directors includes 3 long-time community residents, and the community
  advisory board meets monthly to review operations and take part in planning. Both boards and the
  administration consider community capacity building to be one of Our Covenant’s basic responsibilities.
  Two lay health workers were recruited from among neighborhood residents, and the veteran social
  worker/educator lives nearby. All three participate actively in the life of the community, visiting patients
  in their homes and conducting education and referral sessions.
  Changing demographics have complicated Our Covenant’s community-based efforts over the past few
  years. When the clinic was founded, the surrounding neighborhood and the clinic’s patient population
  were a roughly equal mix of African-American and white Anglo families; today it is about 95% African-
  American. About 6 years ago, an influx of Mexican and Central American immigrants to the city brought
  new populations to the clinic. Soon the clinic needed Spanish interpreters to care for the many patients
  with limited English proficiency (LEP) coming from across the city. The administrator obtained private
  funding for 2 half-time bilingual clerks, but the availability of language assistance drew more LEP
  patients to the clinic, and their need for language assistance soon overwhelmed the bilingual staff
  members’ abilities. To date the clinic has not had the money to hire additional interpreters or bilingual
  staff, and has relied instead on uncertified volunteers to translate.
  After a month in which almost 60% of the patients spoke little or no English, the administrator
  concludes that the staff must be reconfigured to meet the clinic’s current and projected need for
  bilingual services. She proposes that the social worker and one lay health workers each be made halftime,
  and that the clinic use the resulting salaries to hire a part-time bilingual social worker and a parttime
  Spanish-English interpreter. The board grudgingly agrees but the community advisory board
  objects. They insist that the social worker, an original member of Our Covenant’s staff and
  neighborhood resident, should not be penalized for not speaking Spanish. The community advisory
  board points out clinic statistics that show that the majority of LEP patients come from outside the
  clinic’s target population and that a growing number come from out of state. They propose that all
  patients from outside clinic’s designated service area should be referred to other facilities.
  Module 4: Community-Based Practice and Research: Collaboration and Sharing Power
  120
  ???? How should the board and administration respond to Our Covenant Health Center’s changing
  patient population and the language assistance needs of the new patients seeking care there?
  ???? How should new demand for services shape the clinic’s approach to its community and original
  mission?
  Module 4: Community-Based Practice and Research: Collaboration and Sharing Power
  121
  Case Study 1: Discussion
  This case addresses the dynamic nature of communities, the demographic and political variables used to
  define individual communities, and the how the need to tailor public health services to the cultural
  distinctions and differing needs of subgroups may affect an agency’s structure and function. Discussion
  should focus on 1) how a public health entity defines the community it intends to serve, including the
  role that community members have in establishing such definitions; 2) how an identified community may
  include significantly different subgroups with apparently conflicting values and needs; 3) the meaning of
  cultural competence, its benefits and limits, and the practical ethical challenges of operating in a multicultural
  environment; and 4) the nature and limits of mission statements and concepts of organizational
  ethics.
  Background
  No community organization can remain unchanged and be responsive to the needs of community
  dynamics. High rates of immigration have been a prominent feature of demographic change in the
  United States since the 1970s. Few areas of the country have been unaffected by the growth of Hispanic
  and Asian populations and the influx of immigrants with limited English proficiency (LEP). On a
  population level, this diversity has highlighted the role of culture in defining health needs and
  appropriate services, while on the individual level it has emphasized culture’s influence on appropriate
  diagnosis and treatment. Public health agencies and community-based providers are increasingly
  responsible for meeting standards of cultural competence in treating the groups they serve, and for
  providing language assistance to LEP clients and patients.
  Community organizations that serve growing immigrant populations may find their resources and
  identities strained as they attempt to meet immigrants’ vast needs while meeting their original
  community missions. Moreover, long-term community residents may resent immigrants’ use of already
  limited resources, straining the community relations essential to successful operations.
  Suggested Questions for Discussion
  ???? What is the purpose of a mission statement for a community organization? When should a
  mission statement be changed and through what process? What external factors, internal
  features, and potential future needs shape the definition of a community organization and its
  services? What role should an organization’s staff members play in defining, interpreting, and
  carrying out its stated mission?
  ???? Are there valid grounds for a private, nonprofit primary care clinic to accept only specific
  groups of people as patients? If so, on what ethical grounds might a clinic such as Our
  Covenant refuse to treat certain individuals or classes of people? If not , why must a clinic treat
  everyone who seeks care? What are the limits of either position?
  ???? Federal guidelines on language assistance call for health care providers to employ bilingual
  health professionals and/or certified interpreters. The guidelines insist that LEP patients’
  English-speaking family members should not be asked to translate for the patient and
  caregivers. What ethical and practical problems may use family members as translators cause? In
  addition to direct patient care, what other services and materials should available for LEP
  Module 4: Community-Based Practice and Research: Collaboration and Sharing Power
  122
  members of a service community? If a charitable organization or agency does not receive federal
  funding, how should it view federal standards and guidelines on quality of care?
  ???? How can public health organizations and health care providers encourage their employees to
  gain “cultural competence” without unintentionally promoting cultural stereotypes that may lead
  to discrimination? Can an individual be “culturally competent” with respect to a specific group
  without speaking or understanding the group’s primary language? Is being bilingual an adequate
  measure of cultural competence?
  Module 4: Community-Based Practice and Research: Collaboration and Sharing Power
  123
  Case Study 2: Community Representatives on the Institutional Ethics
  Committee
  Smith County Hospital is a 450-bed public hospital that serves a large multiethnic industrial town and
  the surrounding unincorporated area. The hospital draws patients from three outlying ambulatory clinics
  that the county operates, an active obstetrics service, and its emergency department, which maintains a
  Level I trauma center.
  Smith County Hospital is preparing for an upcoming site visit from the Joint Commission for the
  Accreditation of Healthcare Organizations (JCAHO). Since the early 1990s, JCAHO has called for
  hospitals to have a mechanism, process, or service such as an institutional ethics committee (IEC) that
  considers and helps to resolve ethical issues that arise in the care of patients, particularly in the area of
  terminal illness and care of the dying. At the last accreditation visit one JCAHO reviewer spent over an
  hour discussing the hospital’s new IEC and its policies and practices. The hospital was not cited for
  problems with its IEC, but the reviewer strongly recommended that the committee’s membership be
  made more multidisciplinary and more representative of the hospital’s constituents. Since then, the
  IEC’s chair, a general pediatrician, has recruited new members from almost every area and profession in
  the institution, as well as a lawyer from the Smith County Attorney’s office. However, the IEC chair, the
  hospital’s administrator, and the county attorney disagree about whether to include lay community
  representatives on the committee. They have put the issue on the today’s IEC meeting agenda for a vote.
  The IEC chair introduces the topic by reporting on the JCAHO reviewer’s comments from two years
  before that the IEC needed one or more people from the community to bring a lay perspective to the
  IEC’s discussion. The chair notes that, from his experience with the community advisory board of the
  county’s pediatric clinic, the hospital has contact with many knowledgeable and dedicated community
  people who would be interested in serving on the IEC.
  The administrator and the county attorney, however, draw a clear distinction between community
  advisory boards and the IEC. First, they argue, the IEC deals with complex information about individual
  patients and medical procedures that lay people don’t understand. They worry that it would slow
  discussion to have to explain all the detailed medical issues to community representatives. Second, the
  county attorney insists, the IEC discusses cases that involve extremely sensitive personal information.
  Lay people don’t have the ethical commitment to patient confidentiality that health professionals do, he
  claims, and there is no guarantee that community representatives won’t talk to their friends and family
  members about what they’ve heard, especially if they know the patient. Moreover, there is no guarantee
  that community members won’t go to the media if they learn about something that they think is
  unethical. Third, insists the administrator, many of the staff already on the IEC are members of the
  hospital’s community and have friends and family members who are patients in the county health care
  system. They can represent the community even better than someone from the outside because they
  understand the hospital as well as the community’s perspective. Finally, he points out, JCAHO does not
  require community representatives. He proposes that if this year’s site visitor asks they can simply
  report that the committee considered the idea and decided not to add community members at this time.
  ???? How should the members of the Smith County General Hospital ethics committee determine
  whether to include community representatives? If they choose to include community
  representatives on the IEC, how should such members be selected?
  Module 4: Community-Based Practice and Research: Collaboration and Sharing Power
  124
  Case Study 2: Discussion
  This case addresses the role of community representatives on decision-making bodies that affect the
  public welfare and in government organizations in particular. Discussion should focus on 1) how to
  define a lay persons’ qualifications to serve on a given specialty board or committee; 2) how to define
  what constitutes representativeness for any given community; 3) why professionals may fear lay
  participation in public health practice; and 4) how to maximize community representatives’ contribution
  to the overall goals of the groups they serve.
  Background
  The Joint Commission for the Accreditation of Healthcare Organizations (JCAHO) is a voluntary
  accreditation organization for hospitals and other in-patient health care facilities. JCAHO accreditation
  is required for such institutions to receive Medicare and Medicaid funding. Since the mid-1990s,
  JCAHO’s standards have called for institutions to have a functioning multidisciplinary institutional
  ethics committee (IEC) to address ethical issues in patient care. JCAHO standards do not require
  hospital IECs to have lay community members the way that federal funding standards require community
  clinics to have community advisory boards, but they recommend that community representatives be
  included to provide insight into patients’ perspectives on ethical issues.
  Hospital IECs typically address ethical issues involved in caring for seriously ill and dying patients.
  Since the 1980s, IECs have served successfully to prevent and resolve ethical conflict between health
  care professionals and patients and their families. IECs often provide ethics education for hospital staff.
  They often help to write hospital policy related to medical care at the end of life (the use of advance
  directives and do-not-resuscitate orders, and withholding or withdrawing life support). Their bestknown
  role, however, is in providing a setting for caregivers and patients and their families to work out
  controversial ethical issues in the care of specific patients. The IEC offers expert guidance on difficult
  ethical decisions, and most IECs provide an advisory opinion at the request of the person seeking
  consultation. Because many clinical ethical issues are highly personal and sometimes controversial, IECs
  observe strict guidelines on confidentiality. The qualifications for membership on IECs may vary
  between hospitals, but most members are chosen because of their clinical knowledge and professional
  dedication to good patient care.
  Suggested Questions for Discussion
  ???? Defining Smith County General Hospital’s community is essential for determining who might be
  a suitable community representative. Is it the entire population of people who live and work in
  Smith County? The population of indigent persons most likely to use the hospital? The Smith
  County residents whose taxes who support the hospital financially? The patients who currently
  use Smith County General Hospital or its affiliated clinics?
  ???? Which aspects of community life and which community perspectives might the IEC find useful in
  its consideration of ethical policy and practice? Given the size and multiethnic composition of
  Smith County, how many community representatives would be needed to represent the county’s
  diversity? Could the authoritativeness of their views be confirmed? If so, how; if not, why not?
  Module 4: Community-Based Practice and Research: Collaboration and Sharing Power
  125
  ???? What information and perspectives from the hospital might the IEC want community
  representatives to convey to the community? With which segments of the County’s population
  might the IEC particularly want community representatives to be contact? How many
  representatives would be needed to represent the hospital to these groups?
  ???? Can a health professional from a given community appropriately represent the interests and
  perspective of lay people from his or her community without being unduly influenced by
  professional attitudes and perspectives? If so, how can such professionals’ best serve as “culture
  brokers?” If not, in what fundamental ways does the experience of health professions education
  and practice change people?
  ???? What contributions might lay people make to the IEC beyond helping to satisfy JCAHO? What
  successful models of community representation might the IEC use in creating an effective
  system of lay membership? What institutional and interpersonal supports might certain lay
  members need to participate fully on the IEC?
  Module 4: Community-Based Practice and Research: Collaboration and Sharing Power
  126
  Case Study 3: Community Participation in Epidemiologic Surveillance and
  Research Design
  Stillwater Springs is a small town about 45-minutes from the state capital. The town thrived during the
  early twentieth century as the home of one of the United States’ most important lead mines, but the
  mine closed 30 years ago, and most of Stillwater Springs’ residents left shortly thereafter. Over the past
  decade, however, a population boom and housing shortage in the capital city has brought many young
  families and retirees to Stillwater Springs because of its affordable housing and more relaxed rural
  lifestyle. In the past 5 years developers have built 3 new subdivisions at the edge of Stillwater Springs,
  several new businesses have opened, and voters recently passed a bond election to build a new
  elementary school. The capital city’s newspaper has recently called Stillwater Springs one of the state’s
  most promising communities for the future.
  In the past several months, news reports about the end of an Environmental Protection Agency (EPA)
  Superfund cleanup at a lead mine in a nearby county have created controversy in Stillwater Springs.
  Many new residents have been surprised to learn that the town was an active lead-mining center for
  almost a century, and they worry that the nearby abandoned mine may expose them to health hazards.
  Most long-time residents can remember neighbors with seemingly unusual neurological conditions, but
  the town had no doctor for almost 20 years, and there is no county health department. Thus there are
  no central records detailing residents’ health problems. Many parents insist that chronic underfunding
  and substandard programs are to blame for the school’s poor academic ranking, but others privately
  suspect that chronic lead exposure may have resulted in mild mental retardation for some children.
  Although the mine is a frequent topic of conversation at community events, most residents don’t know
  how to find answers to their concerns.
  Brenda Curtis is a single mother of two young children and a resident of one of the town’s new
  subdivisions. In college Brenda lived in an East Coast city where lead paint in old buildings posed a
  known health hazard, and she had worked on a lead poisoning education campaign as a community
  service project. From an EPA website Brenda learns that several old lead mines have been linked to
  elevated levels of heavy metals in the ground water and soil, and that people exposed to contaminated
  soil and water near old mines have been found to have unsafe blood lead levels. After reading that the
  risks of lead poisoning in mining areas are particularly high for preschoolers who spend a lot of time
  outside, Brenda takes her children to the pediatrician in the capital city for blood tests. Both children
  have slightly elevated levels of lead in their systems, but have no obvious symptoms of lead poisoning.
  Armed with the children’s test results and a packet of readings on lead poisoning from the Internet,
  Brenda goes door-to-door in her neighborhood, gathering signatures on a letter to the state health
  department’s lead abatement program. The letter asks for an epidemiologic investigation of the
  community’s health risks from lead, including blood testing of as many residents as possible, soil and
  water sampling, surveillance for neurological and developmental problems in area residents, and the
  creation of a database of all residents with high blood lead levels and their proximity to the mine. When
  the county newspaper reports on her effort, Brenda receives unexpected criticism from area business
  owners and residents concerned about the town’s image and property values. The next week’s paper
  carries a story on the EPA’s 1985 decision that the Stillwater Springs mine did not meet the criteria to
  Module 4: Community-Based Practice and Research: Collaboration and Sharing Power
  127
  be placed on the National Priority List of environmentally hazardous sites eligible for Superfund
  cleanup. The mayor of Stillwater Springs, who is often credited with the community’s economic
  turnaround, is quoted in the article saying that the town is a safe and healthy place to raise a family.
  When the state’s lead abatement program director receives the letter signed by over 300 residents of
  Stillwater Springs, she is impressed with their initiative, but finds little reason to believe that the town is
  different from the many small mining towns across the state. She remembers vaguely hearing that in the
  mid-1980s EPA inspectors found no immediate health threat from the Stillwater Springs mine and gave
  it a better hazard ranking score than several other mines in the state. Still, as the letter points out, the
  recent construction may have stirred up lead-contaminated soil on previously unused property, creating
  a new risk of exposure.
  The lead abatement program director wants to be responsive to this community’s request for
  professional assistance in identifying a potential health threat that falls within her department’s
  expertise. However, she knows that such an evaluation may be opposed by town leaders and others with
  a financial stake in the community’s growth and prosperity, since the presence of toxic levels of lead will
  make Stillwater Springs an undesirable location. Moreover, the director knows that the environmental
  testing and epidemiologic work necessary to assess the potential health threat in Stillwater Springs will
  not be possible under the Health Department’s projected 5-year budget. Even if she can find funding in
  the future, beginning assessment and surveillance there may snowball into demand for similar projects
  in many other communities at a cost that the state cannot afford.
  ???? What steps should the lead abatement program director take in response to the letter from the
  Stillwater Springs residents?
  Module 4: Community-Based Practice and Research: Collaboration and Sharing Power
  128
  Case Study 3: Discussion
  This case deals with community perception of health risks and the responsibility of public health
  practitioners and agencies to address community members’ requests for assistance in identifying,
  assessing, and reducing threats to their welfare. Discussion should focus on 1) how public health
  agencies set priorities for research into health risks and the targets of epidemiologic studies, given
  limited resources; 2) how local, state, and federal agencies interact with each other and the
  communities they serve to evaluate and address multifaceted health problems; 3) how the interests of,
  and perception of risks and benefits to, any given community may differ among community members, as
  well as between community members and public health professionals; and 4) how to maximize effective
  interaction between communities and public health practitioners in designing and carrying out
  epidemiologic surveillance and research.
  Background
  Mining was an important industry in many parts of the United States in the 1800s through the mid-
  1900s. New mining technologies in the late 1800s permitted excavation of multilevel tunnels and
  extraction practices that resulted in environmental contamination not only at mine sites but also in
  surrounding areas. Water accumulated in mine shafts typically contains high levels of dissolved heavy
  metals. When active mines pumped out this water, it often contaminated local ground and surface
  water. The practice of crushing rock taken from mines, both to extract metal ore and to make gravel for
  road construction, often created clouds of heavy metal dust that the wind carried for miles. Because
  lead is an element that does not break down in the environment, water and soil contamination is
  common in many areas where mining ended a generation or more ago.
  Exposure to lead is a recognized health hazard, especially for children ages 1 to 5. In addition to the
  risk that small children will eat lead-based paint chips, young children’s frequent hand-to-mouth contact
  puts them at risk of ingesting lead dust. Most children with lead poisoning have had chronic, low-level
  exposure to lead that can cause developmental and behavioral problems, lower IQ, and learning
  disabilities. Adults chronically exposed to lead may have neurological problems. More rarely, high
  levels of lead can cause mental retardation, seizures, coma, and death. Pregnant women may pass lead
  through the placenta, affecting fetal neurological development and growth. Because chelation treatment
  for lead poisoning is difficult and cannot resolve previous neurological damage, prevention is
  emphasized over intervention. Many public health agencies have programs in lead poisoning prevention
  and lead abatement. Epidemiologic work related to lead poisoning is typically carried out by local,
  county, and state health departments and children’s clinics and hospitals. Its goals are usually to identify
  exposed individuals and groups at risk of poisoning, track the rates and health consequences of
  exposure, and locate sources of lead exposure for abatement and other prevention measures.
  The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) is a federal agency created in the l970s “to protect
  human health and to safeguard the natural environment — air, water, and land — upon which life
  depends.” EPA administers the Superfund Program, which was created by Congress in 1980 to identify,
  evaluate, and clean up the country’s worst sites of hazardous environmental contamination from various
  sources. Sites suggested for the National Priorities List (NPL) of hazards warranting federally funded
  clean-up are announced in the Federal Register for public comment; EPA investigators then visit the site
  Module 4: Community-Based Practice and Research: Collaboration and Sharing Power
  129
  to assess and score it under the Hazard Ranking System. High scoring sites may be targeted for
  immediate action to safeguard the health of the affected area’s residents. However, the NPL is intended
  to provide information to state and local agencies and the public about sites that appear to warrant
  clean-up, and does not assign responsibility for clean up or legal liability for any harm.
  Suggested Questions for Discussion
  ???? How do public health professionals’ views of health threats and evidence of harm typically differ
  from those of members of the communities they serve? How do these differences shape public
  health professionals’ interpretation of community concerns and requests for assistance? How
  are such discrepancies resolved in policy and practice? What responsibility do public health
  professionals have to community members to explain their conclusions and justify their actions?
  ???? How might a health department’s decision to conduct an epidemiologic survey create moral and
  legal obligations for governmental action far beyond the scope of the initial evaluation? How
  might internal interests affect an agency’s willingness to undertake even a pilot epidemiologic
  project?
  ???? How might external forces and interests influence a public health agency’s decision to undertake
  epidemiologic assessment of a possible environmental health problem? Why might a community
  prefer to live in ignorance of a potentially remediable environmental threat rather than identify
  the nature and extent of the potential problem? What actions can public health professionals
  take to foster cooperation among community members in order to achieve high-quality
  surveillance?
  ???? When several governmental agencies have jurisdiction over a broad-based public health
  problem, how is authority established among them? What response can the state health
  department’s lead abatement director expect from environmental health officials at the federal
  and county levels if she proceeds with an initial survey of lead contamination in Stillwater
  Springs?
  Module 4: Community-Based Practice and Research: Collaboration and Sharing Power
  130
  Tools for Best Practice and Policy Assessment in Community-Based
  Practice and Research
  The prescribed avenues for public health professionals to address the ethical issues in community-based
  practice and research vary widely. Nonetheless, for any project it is essential to identify and understand
  the written and unwritten ethical norms and values by addressing such questions as:
  ???? What community is the focus our attention for this project? What criteria have we (public health
  officials) used to define this group as a community? Do they see themselves as a community
  with common interests, needs, and values? What other affiliations or divisions may be important
  to them?
  ???? What previous experience do we have with community? Who among us has the best relationship
  with this group and what is it based on? In what other contexts do we interact with members of
  this community and how do those interactions affect the current project?
  ???? Who speaks for this community and how were these spokespeople identified? At what point did
  they first become involved in the project? What was their original role in the project? How often
  do we communicate with community representatives or other community members about this
  project? Are these means of communication formal, informal, or both? What are our respective
  goals in this communication? Do both the community representatives and we attempt to include
  a wide range of community perspectives in this communication?
  ???? What is the goal of our project and how was that goal identified? What role did members of this
  community have in defining that goal and the means of achieving it? What experience does the
  community have with this issue? How does this project relate to the community’s other health
  priorities? How could community members modify the project if they chose to do so?
  ???? How will participation in this project directly benefit the community and its individual members?
  How will the community and its individual members be empowered by participation in the
  project? How will the community’s ability to learn about and act on other health issues be
  affected by participation in the project?
  ???? Do we have a formal or informal agreement with the community about the ways in which
  knowledge gained from the project, including research data, may be used and how it may be
  disseminated?
  The extent to which legal mandates or “expert” guidelines address community-based practice and
  research is also quite variable. However, professional and community groups have published a wealth of
  material intended to guide or facilitate community-based practice and research, both in print and
  online. A selected list of these “best practice” resources follows.
  Selected Resources
  Campus-Community Partnerships for Health. Partnership Perspectives. San Francisco, CA:
  CCPH, 2000. http://futurehealth.ucsf.edu/ccph/html
  Module 4: Community-Based Practice and Research: Collaboration and Sharing Power
  131
  Centers for Disease Control and Prevention/ATSDR Committee on Community Engagement.
  Principles of Community Engagement. Atlanta, GA: Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, Public
  Health Practice Program Office, 1997.
  Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, Public Health Practice Program Office. National
  Public Health Performance Standards Program (draft). Atlanta, GA: CDC, 2000.
  Institute of Health Promotion Research, University of British Columbia and the British Columbia
  Consortium for Health Promotion Research. Guidelines and Categories for Classifying Participatory
  Research Projects in Health Promotion. Ottawa: Royal Society of Canada, 1995.
  Mattessich P, Monsey BR: Collaboration: What Makes It Work. A Review of Research
  Literature on Factors Influencing Successful Collaboration, 2d ed., Saint Paul, MN: Amherst H. Wilder
  Foundation, 2001.
  National Civic League Staff and the St. Louis County Department of Health. A Guide to a
  Community-Oriented Approach to Core Public Health Functions. Denver, CO: 2000.
  National Association of Social Workers, National Committee on Racial and Ethnic Diversity.
  NASW Standards for Cultural Competence in Social Work Practice. June 2001.
  http://www.naswdc.org/pubs/standards/cultural.htm
  132
  Module 5: Ethics and Infectious Disease Control: STDs, HIV, TB
  133
  MODULE 5
  Ethics and Infectious Disease Control:
  STDs, HIV, TB
  Ronald Bayer, PhD
  Columbia University
  In contemporary ethical theory, and biomedical ethics, strong emphasis is placed on the rights of the
  individual, on principles of autonomy and self-determination. But essential as those values are, the
  legitimacy of limiting them has long been recognized. When the exercise of one person’s freedom
  results in harm to another, the state may intervene. The “harm principle” provides a widely recognized
  justification of imposing limits on autonomy. Given its most potent expression by the 19th century
  philosopher John Stuart Mill, the principle states:
  The only purpose for which power can rightfully be exercised over any member of a civilized
  community, against his will, is to prevent harm to others. His own good, both the physical
  moral, is not sufficient warrant.1
  This principle clearly provides an ethical foundation for establishing public health programs designed to
  limit the threat of infectious disease.
  The public health authority to limit individual freedom when disease threatens has long been
  recognized in constitutional jurisprudence as well. Nearly 100 years ago in Jacobson v. Massachusetts, a
  case that centered on the question of compulsory vaccination, the Supreme Court held that the U.S.
  Constitution permits states to enact “such reasonable regulations [to] protect the public health and the
  public safety and” as long as such efforts did not “contravene the Constitution of United States, nor
  infringe any right guaranteed or secured by that instrument.”2 Jacobson also underscored the rule that
  courts should give deference to the government’s exercise of the police powers designed to protect the
  public. Such measures could be invalidated only if they had no real or substantial relation to their
  purported goal. That standard of constitutional review would in later years be viewed as the least
  protective of individual right. Capturing the enormous scope afforded to the state acting in the name of
  public health, a treatise on constitutional law in 1900 asserted that before the demands of public health
  “all constitutionally guaranteed rights must give way.”3
  This extraordinary deference to government action prevailed throughout much of the 20th century,
  persisting into the late 1960’s. The past three decades of constitutional development, however,
  particularly in the area of involuntary confinement of psychiatric patients, have seen increasing scrutiny
  of the exercise of the police powers of the state, raising questions about the constitutionality of statutes
  relating to communicable disease, many enacted before the profound shift in the balance between
  individual liberties and state authority.
  As important to the transformations in the view of the state’s authority has been the impact of the AIDS
  epidemic. In the early 1980’s when the United States like other democratic nations had to confront the
  public health challenge posed by the new epidemic, it was necessary to face a set of fundamental
  Module 5: Ethics and Infectious Disease Control: STDs, HIV, TB
  134
  questions: Did the history of responses to lethal infectious diseases provide lessons about how best to
  contain the spread of HIV itself, a lethal sexually transmitted and blood borne virus? If AIDS were not to
  be so treated, what would justify such differential policies?
  It was the specter of the most coercive of aspects of the public health tradition that concerned
  proponents of civil liberties and advocates of gay rights as they considered the potential direction of
  public health policy in the presence of AIDS. Would there be widespread compulsory testing? Would
  the names of the infected be recorded in central registries? Would such registries be used to restrict
  those with HIV infection? Would the power of quarantine be used, if not against all infected persons at
  least against those whose behavior could result in the transmission of infection?
  Although there were some public health traditionalists who pressed to have HIV infection brought
  under the broad statutory provisions established to control the spread of sexually transmitted and
  infectious diseases, they were in a distinct minority. In the first decade of the AIDS epidemic an alliance
  of gay leaders, civil libertarians, and public health officials began to shape policy for dealing with AIDS
  that reflected an “exceptionalist” perspective. That perspective entailed the commitment to rely on
  prevention measures that were not coercive, and respected the privacy and social rights of those who
  were at risk. Mass education, voluntary testing and counseling were the centerpiece of the public health
  strategy that sought to avoid interventions that might “drive the epidemic underground.” While the
  force of the exceptionalist perspective has waned since the 1990’s as AIDS had been “normalized” the
  issues posed by the challenge to conventional public health practice remain pertinent: how should the
  claims of communal well-being be balanced against the claims of privacy and individual rights?
  This module will center its discussion on the tension between the rights of the individual and claims of
  public health as they have surfaced in infectious disease control. The focus will be on: screening to
  uncover the presence of disease; surveillance and reporting of those with disease to public health
  registries; contact tracing; mandatory treatment of those with infectious conditions; vaccination of
  children to prevent the acquisition of disease; and quarantine or isolation of those whose biological
  condition or behavior pose a threat to the public health. Cases will be drawn from the AIDS epidemic,
  which provided an infectious disease threat to public health in the United States at a time when many
  had thought such challenges were all but relegated to history; resurgent tuberculosis in the late 1980’s
  and 1990’s, which compelled a contemporary reconsideration of practices which had served to lay the
  foundations of public health at the end of the 19th and the first decades of the 20th century; and
  mandatory vaccination policy, which at the end of the 20th century had begun to provoke renewed
  resistance echoing opposition that emerged a century earlier and set the stage for fundamental
  constitutional rulings on the scope of public health authority.
  Screening for Disease
  During the 20th-century, screening for the presence of disease and at times occult infection has been a
  central feature of public health practice. Often such screening was mandatory or imposed as a condition
  for undertaking a desired course of action. Screening for venereal disease prior to marriage was
  imposed as a way of protecting unsuspecting spouses from infection. Screening children for entry into
  public school was imposed to protect classmates. Screening of newborns for inborn errors of
  metabolism was enacted to assure that needed remedial actions, dietary or otherwise, was taken. And of
  course screening for tuberculosis by X-ray and skin test became widespread, in schools and workplaces.
  Module 5: Ethics and Infectious Disease Control: STDs, HIV, TB
  135
  In each of these instances the determination to impose screening represented judgment that the claims
  of bodily integrity could be subordinated to the claims of the public health. When the rights of the
  individual in the context of public health were less robustly defined than became the case in the last
  decades of the 20th century such screening generally went untested. When challenges did arise they
  typically involved claims that the putative threat to the public health was overstated. It was thus possible
  to claim that respecting the rights of privacy did not entail a threat to the safety and well-being of the
  community or of those in need of the community’s protection. At times determination could be made
  that screening programs that had served the public health were no longer warranted. For example, in
  recent decades premarital syphilis screening as a mandatory measure has all but vanished. Those who
  were getting married did not have syphilis and those with syphilis were not getting married.
  The complex and volatile the issue of screening is highlighted by the furious debate that has centered
  on the HIV test. While there was no objection to the mandatory screening of blood donations in order
  to protect recipients, conflict emerged over screening in other settings. There were some who argued
  for wide scale testing without consent, for mandatory prenatal testing, testing of health care workers,
  the testing of newborns. In each case they asserted that the claims of public health took precedence
  over the right to privacy.
  The insistence of public health officials, civil liberties advocates and AIDS activists fearful of how AIDS
  could provide the context for the deprivation of privacy rights led to a rejection of mandatory HIV
  testing, even as conservative political groups pressed for such measures. In lieu of such a course public
  health officials embraced the strategy of voluntary testing. Reflective of the impact HIV exceptionalism,
  testing was to be undertaken only after individuals had been fully informed of the risks and benefits of
  the HIV test and had given their explicit informed consent. With the advent of effective antiretroviral
  therapies in the 1990’s there was increased pressure “to return HIV testing to the mainstream” to permit
  physicians to test with the presumption of consent and without elaborate pre-test counseling. More
  striking were the moves towards mandatory testing, to protect newborns, “innocent victims.” Hence it
  was argued that pregnant women should be tested for HIV as they were tested for hepatitis B in order to
  permit interventions that could benefit and not yet born child.
  The transformation in the debate surrounding HIV screening reflected an attempt to shift the balance
  between privacy rights and public health. It underscored the extent to which justifications for recourse
  to compulsion in public health are affected by the prospects of effective intervention.
  In the end the ethical question posed by screening is: what prospect of effective public health
  intervention to protect the vulnerable, however defined, can justify the invasion of bodily integrity and
  privacy that is always involved in mandatory screening programs?
  The ethical challenges posed by screening programs are illustrated by a proposal made in the year 2000
  by the Institute of Medicine to require screening of some applicants for immigration the United States
  for latent TB infection.4 After an exhaustive analysis the IOM concluded that the elimination of
  tuberculosis in the United States would necessitate more than the identification and treatment of
  individuals with active disease. Such efforts designed to protect third parties posed few ethical
  challenges. But were ethical and legal principles that justified screening for active disease sufficiently
  robust to justify mandatory screening for latent infection, infection that could only pose a risk to others
  were it to progress to active disease?
  Module 5: Ethics and Infectious Disease Control: STDs, HIV, TB
  136
  Since individuals with latent infection developed active infectious TB in only about 10% of the cases, the
  issues posed by the IOM recommendation were stark: Is it ever appropriate to use compulsory public
  health powers when the threat posed by an individual is merely statistical? How grave and how likely
  must the risk be? Is voluntary testing more ethically defensible? The IOM predicated its call for
  mandatory screening on its determination that mandatory treatment for latent infection could be
  justified. For the IOM the social benefit of radically reducing the burden of tuberculosis justified
  mandatory prophylactic therapy of new immigrants and hence mandatory screening. Relying on an
  expansive view of the ethics of public health law, the committee cited approvingly an analysis by
  professor Larry Gostin, “While traditional public health law focus principally on present infections, there
  is no reason to limit the direct threat doctrine in this way.”5 From an ethical perspective, of course, the
  question remains how to define what counts as criteria for being “reasonably foreseeable”, so that it
  could provide Gostin with the justification for extending the direct warrant for intervention.
  Finally, a critical question posed by the IOM report centers on the issue of who should be subject to
  mandatory screening. Efforts that were over inclusive—those that extended screening beyond what
  could be justified by the epidemiological profile of risk—unfairly imposed burdensome intrusions on
  privacy. Programs that were under inclusive—focused on fewer individuals than were at risk—could be
  viewed as invidiously discriminatory. The IOM chose to target immigrants from nations with elevated
  background rates of tuberculosis and from those nations that experience revealed contributed
  substantially to the burden of tuberculosis in United States. In so targeting the proposal for mandatory
  screening, the IOM sought to balance the need to avoid stigmatization of the vulnerable against the well
  established principle that the predictive value of screening programs is determined by the extent to
  which they are directed at populations at risk.
  Decisions about how broadly to cast the net for screening are not, however, always dictated by
  epidemiological factors. When the Institute of Medicine itself issued a report on screening for HIV
  infection during pregnancy it recommended that voluntary screening be offered to all pregnant women
  in the United States despite the fact that HIV infection is found primarily among poor African-American
  and Latino women. That decision was in large measure dictated by concerns about how targeted
  screening could stigmatize the populations most at risk. Here then even in the context of a voluntary
  screening program we see a complex interplay of ethical concerns.
  Surveillance and Name Based Reporting
  If mandatory screening raises questions about the circumstances under which the public health can
  justify intrusions on the body, public health surveillance poses questions of the tension between privacy,
  confidentiality and the public good. When does the state have the right to require physicians and health
  care institutions to report, by name, those with certain conditions? Do such requirements violate the
  confidentiality that serves as a foundation of the clinical relationship?
  It was not until the late 19th century that systematic reporting of infectious diseases began. Since
  surveillance was undertaken not only to track patterns of morbidity and mortality but to initiate other
  restrictive measures, e.g. compulsory treatment, and quarantine, it provoked public and professional
  concern. Hence, physicians, on occasion, challenged the authority of the public health authorities to
  abridge the sanctity of the doctor-patient relationship in the name of surveillance. In New York City, for
  example, physicians opposed mandatory tuberculosis reporting and as a consequence it was necessary
  Module 5: Ethics and Infectious Disease Control: STDs, HIV, TB
  137
  to rely upon a voluntary reporting system in which doctors withheld the names of their private patients
  and reported only the names of the poor dispensary cases.
  Eventually, despite such opposition, name based reporting was extended to a host of other conditions
  practically without any sign of protest. Recognizing that resistance could undermine their efforts, public
  health officials began to develop the legal and organizational capacity for protecting the confidentiality
  of names reported to health departments. But what appeared to be a matter of settled practice would
  become the subject of acrimony at the end of the 20th century. The AIDS epidemic provided the
  occasion for a furious extended debate on the logic and ethics of name based reporting, dramatizing
  the ways in which competing notions of privacy and public health could continue to affect public policy.
  Soon after the first cases of AIDS were reported by the Centers for Disease Control in 1981, state health
  departments began to require that physicians and hospitals report by name those with the new disease.
  It is remarkable that given the intensity of the opposition that would emerge in the case of HIV
  reporting just a few short years later, little protest to the privacy-limiting act of name based reporting
  for AIDS emerged.
  Once the capacity to test for the presence of the antibody to HIV became possible in 1985 it was only a
  matter of time before some public health officials sought to extend to such findings the reporting
  requirement that were in place for AIDS. Those who pressed for name-based HIV reporting asserted
  that reporting would alert public health officials to the presence of individuals infected with a lethal
  infection, would allow them to counsel such individuals about what they need to do to prevent further
  transmission, and would permit the authorities to monitor the incidence and prevalence of infection.
  Aware of concerns about privacy and confidentiality, the proponents of reporting underscored the
  existence of administrative, regulatory, and statutory protections of public health registries. There was
  no reason to believe, they argued, that state health departments would fail to protect the identities of
  those with HIV when they had protected those with AIDS, tuberculosis and other reportable infections.
  The antagonists of name based reporting retorted that HIV was different. Social hostility and HIV
  related hysteria could lead to changes in policy, legislatively imposed, that would permit breaches which
  never occurred with other conditions. If that happened, those whose names were in registries would
  face the prospect of losing their jobs, their housing and perhaps their liberty. Aware of such opposition,
  many health officials in states with relatively large AIDS caseloads resisted HIV reporting. They believed
  that reporting would counterproductively drive people away from the testing and counseling essential to
  AIDS control in the United States. It did not matter that public health departments had an exemplary
  record in protecting name based reports. If those most at risk for HIV had fears about what could
  happen to them, that was all that mattered.
  As therapeutic advances began to emerge in the late 1980’s a number of public health officials began to
  argue that the time was right to extend to HIV the policies that existed with regard to AIDS itself. Most
  critically the CDC began to press for name-based reporting of HIV cases, as did the Council of State
  and Territorial Epidemiologists. Nevertheless, the resistance on the part of AIDS activist organizations
  and their political allies persisted. As a consequence HIV cases typically became reportable by name
  only in states that did not have large cosmopolitan communities, well organized AIDS constituencies or
  high AIDS caseloads.
  Module 5: Ethics and Infectious Disease Control: STDs, HIV, TB
  138
  It is striking feature of the opposition to reporting of HIV that it centered on the extent to which those
  whose names would be reported would be exposed to the possibility of great harms, acts of injustice,
  discrimination and stigmatization. By esting opposition to reporting on such possibilities—remote
  given the history of public health registries—a strategic determination was made that invoking the
  prospects of such danger would serve to effectively mobilize the communities most affected by HIV. An
  alternative would have been to underscore the fact that even were no harms to befall individuals whose
  names were reported to registries, they would nevertheless have suffered the injury of having their
  privacy violated.
  As powerful new therapies emerged in the mid-1990s that fundamentally transformed the nature of
  HIV/AIDS, the effectiveness of the resistance to HIV reporting all but crumbled. While most states,
  including New York, adopted name-based HIV reporting, a few, including California and Maryland,
  chose to rely on coded unique identifiers. In so doing, they sought to meet the challenge of surveillance
  while protecting the privacy of those with HIV.
  To those states that have chosen to use names, the history of public health surveillance and the
  contemporary experience with reporting—in cancer, occupational disease, and vaccine registries—
  suggested that there was no justification for treating HIV differently. For those states that had chosen to
  employ unique identifiers in lieu of names, the fears and concerns of those who had HIV provided a
  warrant for going beyond historical experience and convention.
  In examining the possibility of alternatives to the use of name based reporting, it was necessary to
  consider the question of whether practices that emerged in an earlier era when concerns about privacy
  were more circumscribed needed to be rethought. Was it possible to merge the necessities of
  surveillance with contemporary conceptions of privacy? If the use of coded identifiers imposed
  additional costs, were these justified in the name of privacy? If surveillance that relied on coded
  identifiers was less effective than relying on names, was it nevertheless good enough given the value of
  privacy? Finally, the debate over HIV reporting surfaced questions about how public health officials
  should take into account the concerns of those whose privacy would be violated in the name of
  surveillance.
  Contact Tracing
  Case-based surveillance serves not only to monitor epidemiological patterns of disease but as a trigger
  for contact tracing. In programs designed to treat and control sexually transmitted diseases (STDs),
  contact tracing has played a central role for more than five decades. Patients diagnosed with STD are
  urged to reveal the names of their sexual partners so that they may be examined and, if infected,
  treated. Contact tracing thus serves two functions: case finding and interrupting the chain of
  transmission. To encourage individuals to provide the names of their partners, a guarantee of absolute
  anonymity is provided: those who are notified are never informed of the identity of the person who
  provided their name. In this way, contact tracing has always been voluntary and has always rested on the
  foundation of confidentiality.
  In the early years of the AIDS epidemic, contact tracing programs designed to reach sexual partners
  who unknowingly may have been placed at risk were greeted with protest. Despite the long history of
  such programs for STDs, proposals to initiate them were deemed coercive. They were viewed as an
  intrusion on the privacy of the notified partner. In the absence of a therapy for HIV infection, the
  Module 5: Ethics and Infectious Disease Control: STDs, HIV, TB
  139
  information provided by the public-health official was considered an unwelcome burden (Bayer and
  Toomey, 1992).
  By the end of the first decade of the AIDS epidemic, most of the principled opposition to contact
  tracing had vanished, and public-health departments began to devote greater resources to such
  programs.
  The issues raised by contact tracing are fundamentally different from those posed to the physician faced
  with an infected patient who makes clear the intention not to inform sexual partners of that fact. Does
  the duty to protect confidentiality take precedence over the obligation to protect unsuspecting partners?
  (Dickens, 1990). If a duty to protect exists, it requires that the clinician act despite the preferences of
  the patient. It may require that the identity of the threatening patient be revealed to the endangered
  party. Thus, the duty to warn is in all fundamental respects different from voluntary contact tracing.
  As clinicians and public-health officials confronted this issue, they were faced with a dilemma that was
  starkly presented in the landmark Tarasoff case, in which the California Supreme Court held that a
  psychotherapist had a duty to protect or warn the potential victims of a violent patient. If it became
  known that under some circumstances clinicians would breach confidentiality, would this inhibit patient
  candor? Would such a reduction in candor, if it occurred, deprive clinicians of the capacity to affect
  patients’ behavior? In short, might the duty to warn ultimately subvert the very good it was designed to
  achieve—enhanced public safety?
  Faced with this complex situation in the context of the AIDS epidemic, many state legislatures opted to
  grant physicians a “privilege to disclose,” thus freeing them from Tarasoff-like liability if they did not
  warn, as well as from liability for breaching confidentiality if they did warn. In a striking reflection of the
  concerns about privacy provoked by the AIDS epidemic, a number of states have prohibited physicians
  who do warn third parties from revealing the patient’s identity to those being notified.
  Monitoring treatment: The case of directly observed therapy
  In the face of infectious disease threats, public health departments have at times been involved in
  attempting to certify that those who could spread disease had undergone appropriate treatment.
  Treatment in this instance had to be understood as serving both the interest of the individual as patient
  and the broader community that would be protected from the transmission of disease . As the example
  discussed below will demonstrate, however, treating those whose conditions were infectious might not
  be sufficient.
  In the late 1980’s and early 1990’s, the resurgence of tuberculosis in the United States and the pattern
  of drug-resistance made it clear to public health officials that strategies for managing the disease had
  failed. Those who began treatment but did not complete their therapy not only ran the risk of
  reactivating their disease but of developing resistance that could be very costly to treat and, in the case
  of those with compromised immune systems, could prove fatal. And, of course, drug-resistant disease
  could be transmitted to others.
  Among the strategies designed to enhance patient compliance with treatment is directly observed
  therapy, a practice that involves having the patient take his or her medication in the presence of health
  care providers or other responsible parties. First proposed for individuals with poor records of
  Module 5: Ethics and Infectious Disease Control: STDs, HIV, TB
  140
  treatment adherence and for those whose demographic or psychological profile suggested a higher
  prospect of failure, directly observed therapy (DOT) has emerged as the standard of care for all
  tuberculosis patients.
  From an ethical, legal, and constitutional perspective, the important question posed by DOT is not who
  should be offered the support provided by such supervision but whether such monitoring can be
  imposed. And if DOT were to be imposed, how broadly should such requirements be extended? To the
  extent that DOT was selectively imposed, what procedures, guided by what standards of evidence,
  should be used? While there were many who argued for the selective use of DOT in the case of those
  likely to be nonadherent, in the early 1990s such a posture was increasingly viewed as inadequate to the
  challenges posed by tuberculosis. There was no evidence that physicians or other health care workers
  could predict which of their patients could be trusted to complete their treatment. Efforts to distinguish
  among patients, using social or demographic factors, not only were unsuccessful, they ran the risk of
  being invidiously discriminating. As a consequence the argument for universal DOT gained increasing
  support. Three veterans of public health work in TB thus wrote:
  We believe it is time for entirely intermittent directly observed treatment programs … to be
  used for all patients. Some argue that it will be impossible to treat every patient with directly
  observed therapy and that many people with tuberculosis do comply with treatment and would
  be offended by having to submit to direct observation while they swallow medications.
  Unfortunately, the literature is replete with studies demonstrating that professionals are not
  able to distinguish the compliant from the noncompliant.6
  Given the price of failure in morbidity, mortality and the cost of treating resistant strains of TB, they
  concluded, “We cannot afford not to try it.”7
  Calls for universal directly observed therapy provoked sharp opposition. First, it was argued that such
  an effort would entail an enormous waste of scarce resources. Funds that could best be used to provide
  services to those most in need would be diverted by the provision of service to those who would be
  compliant on their own. But most critically, universal directly observed therapy was challenged as an
  unethical intrusion upon autonomy, as ” gratuitously annoying,” as a violation of the constitutional
  requirement that the least restrictive alternative be used, and as contrary to requirements of the
  Americans with Disabilities Act that decisions involving restrictions on those with disabilities be based
  on an individualized assessment. One opponent thus stated,
  I cannot see how mandatory directly observed therapy can be reconciled with the principle of
  the least restrictive alternative in the exercise of governmental power since it would require the
  imposition of the coercive treatment regime on a class of people without any showing that they,
  as individuals, will fail voluntarily to follow course of medical treatment. Nor does it comport
  with basic constitutional due process principles which require individualized determination
  when state sanctions are imposed. 8
  Legal commentators have generally rejected mandatory DOT as overly broad and as violative of
  constitutional principles. However this opposition to universal DOT should not be construed as a
  rejection of a mandatory DOT in all cases. The advocates of patients’ civil liberties accept mandatory,
  court ordered DOT in cases of clear noncompliance, especially when the alternative appears to be
  involuntary confinement.
  Module 5: Ethics and Infectious Disease Control: STDs, HIV, TB
  141
  The issue posed here, therefore, is not whether tuberculosis patients should have a choice about
  whether or not to undergo therapy—there is universal agreement that the threat posed to public health
  necessitates that all patients with infectious TB be treated. Nor is the issue whether tuberculosis
  patients who are no longer infectious should be required to undergo treatment until cured of their
  infection. There is universal agreement that the threat to the public health justifies that imposition as
  well. What is at the center of controversy is the nature and scope of the mechanism that should be
  employed to assure that those who are in treatment adhere to the course of therapy required for their
  own good and that of the community. As we turn to the issue of quarantine we will have an opportunity
  to explore the question of the context within which the state may exercise the authority to deprive
  someone of liberty because of noncompliance with their treatment.
  Quarantines
  Ethical, legal, and constitutional principles have long recognized the authority of the state to confine
  individuals with dangerous infectious diseases because of the threat they posed to others. This power to
  deprive an individual of his or her liberty in the name of public health has vested public health officials
  with an authority that, from the perspective of the individual, may seem indistinguishable from that
  wielded by the criminal justice system. Yet, until relatively recently, the protections accorded to
  defendants in criminal prosecutions have not been extended to those viewed as a threat to the public
  health. As late as 1966 a California appellate court upheld the confinement of a TB patient pursuant to a
  statute that provided virtually no procedural protections for the patient. In its ruling, the court stated
  that regulations “enacted by the state under its police power and providing even drastic measures for
  the elimination of disease … in a general way are not affected by provisions” of state or national
  constitutions.9
  This broad deference to the legislature and to the exercise of public health powers would come to look
  archaic just a few years later as the jurisprudence of confinement underwent a radical revision in the
  wake of a series of far-reaching constitutional challenges to the power of the state to confine patients
  with psychiatric disorders. These cases, although framed in the language of law, embody important
  ethical considerations. In 1979 the Chief Justice of the Supreme Court would state in Addington v.
  Texas,
  This Court has repeatedly recognized that [confinement] for any purpose constitutes a
  significant deprivation of liberty and requires due process protection. Moreover it is
  indisputable that involuntary commitment to a mental hospital… can engender adverse social
  consequences to the individual. Whether we label this phenomena “stigma” or choose to call it
  something else is less important than that we recognize that it does occur and [has] a very
  significant impact on the individual.10
  In 1980 in the first reported appellate court decision upholding the procedural rights of tuberculosis
  patients, the Supreme Court of Appeals in West Virginia articulated a standard reflective of the U.S.
  Supreme Court’s standards. The state’s Tuberculosis Control Act was ruled unconstitutional because it
  did not guarantee the right to counsel, did not provide the right cross-examine, confront and present
  witnesses, and failed to hold the state to the stringent “clear and convincing” standard of proof required
  by the Supreme Court.
  Module 5: Ethics and Infectious Disease Control: STDs, HIV, TB
  142
  In 1993 when the Advisory Council on the Elimination of Tuberculosis recommended changes in state
  tuberculosis control laws it declared that commitment proceedings had to afford those who might be
  confined because of TB with a full range of procedural protections. Furthermore, in recognition of the
  liberty-depriving nature of compulsory hospitalization, the council asserted the importance of viewing
  such measures as a last resort after all less restrictive approaches had failed.
  The council’s incorporation of both procedural due process protections and the doctrine of the least
  restrictive alternative into its recommendations were specially crucial because it was calling for the
  expansion of existing tuberculosis laws to permit the involuntary isolation and detention of
  noninfectious patients who could not or would not adhere to regimens or to complete their TB therapy.
  This expansion in the conception of who posed a threat to the public health was driven by concerns
  about multi-drug-resistant tuberculosis and presented a move of great significance. No longer did the
  person to be to confined have to represent an immediate threat of transmission, rather it was the
  prospect of reactivation and the prospect of the development of drug-resistance that provided the
  grounds for state intervention. Just as was the case with the IOM’s call for mandatory prophylactic
  treatment of immigrants with latent TB infection, the concept of threat employed here was informed by
  population-based concerns. It was concern about the collective consequences permitting many
  individuals to conduct themselves in a way that posed some threat that motivated the extension of
  public health powers. This was a calculus far different from one that would center on the potential risk
  posed by a given individual.
  In New York City, which confronted an outbreak of multi drug resistant tuberculosis (MDR-TB), the
  health department adopted regulations that permitted the confinement of those who it believed could
  not or would not complete their TB treatment. Among most significant features of those new
  regulations was a provision that would have permitted the imposition of quarantine even if the health
  authorities had not exhausted each and every element of the least restrictive approach. In the face of a
  public health threat officials asserted that they need not be required to wait for the patient to fail each
  set of interventions. In an ultimately unsuccessful challenge to these regulations civil liberties
  opponents sought to argue that while measures like those proposed by the municipal authorities might
  have been appropriate with contagious patients that was not the case with those whose TB was no
  longer infectious. Since there was no imminent risk in such situations it was more appropriate to protect
  the right of the patient against state authority.
  Here again we can see how the concepts of risk, and of imminent risk, reflect more than a matter of
  measurement. As a trigger for state intervention, in this instance involving a deprivation of liberty, the
  concepts are suffused with moral considerations. In fact they compel us to confront the question of what
  threat, to whom, with what degree of certainty, and with what consequence all justify a limitation on
  freedom in the name of public health.
  Vaccination Program
  To this point we have focused on public health interventions designed to discover or monitor infectious
  disease and prevent the spread of such conditions. It is now necessary to turn to the question of
  whether liberty-limiting interventions can be justified to prevent the spread of disease from those not
  yet infected and to protect those who might become infected in the future. These are the questions
  posed by compulsory vaccination programs.
  Module 5: Ethics and Infectious Disease Control: STDs, HIV, TB
  143
  In an analysis of the last phase of the smallpox eradication campaign in India a CDC officer assigned to
  the effort wrote,
  Infected villages were revisited—often repeatedly—to check [for cases that] had been
  left out. Almost invariably a chase or forcible vaccination ensued in such circumstances
  … We considered the villagers to have an understandable but irrational fear of
  vaccination … We just couldn’t let people get smallpox and die needlessly. We went
  from door to door and when they ran, we chased. When they locked their doors, we
  broke down their doors and vaccinated. 11
  This striking description captures in an unvarnished way the extent to which concerns about disease
  prevention could provide a warrant for the untrammeled exercise of power. But even where the exercise
  of public health authority has not been used in so brutal a fashion, the history of vaccination is, in large
  measure, a history of the imposition of inoculations in the name of public health. In the United States,
  this issue was addressed by the U.S. Supreme Court in 1905. In a case noted in the introduction to this
  module Jacobson v. Massachusetts, the Court held,
  In every well ordered society charged with the duty of conserving the safety of its members the right to
  the individual and respect of his liberty may, at times, under the pressure of great dangers, be subjected
  to such restraint to be enforced by reasonable regulations as the safety of the general public may
  demand.
  Immunization in the United States has attained all-time highs. In 1998 the rates had reached 90% for 19-
  to 35-month-old children for most vaccines. To a very large extent this achievement can be viewed as a
  consequence of both persuasion—physicians routinely urge parents to immunize their children—and
  compulsion. All states require evidence of vaccination against a host of diseases including measles,
  polio and diphtheria. Children who are not immunized may not attend school or be registered in
  licensed day care centers. There are exceptions for religious reasons. 48 states permit parents to refuse
  immunization on religious grounds, and far fewer, 15 states, permit “philosophic exemptions.” But such
  provisions affect only an extraordinarily small number of children. Nevertheless, it is worth thinking
  about the ethical justification for recognizing the religious and, for that matter, the broader
  philosophical exemption. At stake is the recognition that in matters touching on deeply held beliefs, the
  state should only with great reluctance intrude. But how much risk and to whom would be tolerable
  given such restraint? Do parents have a right to place their children at some risk by failing to immunize
  them? How much risk would be sufficient to tip the balance against parental religious beliefs? And what
  if the risk were not simply to the child but to others?
  As a result of immunization programs diseases that were formerly a common occurrence among
  children have declined by well over 99 percent. For example in 1941 there were 890,000 cases of
  measles, and by the late 1990’s the number had fallen to 89. In 1968 there were approximately 150,000
  cases of mumps, by 1998 the number had fallen to 61. These achievements have, ironically, set the stage
  for the emergence of challenges to mandatory childhood vaccination.
  As the experience of disease has receded, what has emerged is concern about the remote prospect of
  adverse reactions. With the possibility of disease so small why subject a child to any risk? The issue of
  vaccination places into sharp relief the clash between the rationality of public policy and rationality of
  decision making on the part of individuals for themselves or for those they have a duty to protect.
  Module 5: Ethics and Infectious Disease Control: STDs, HIV, TB
  144
  Because it involves children who cannot consent for themselves the issue of compulsory vaccination
  also raises questions about when the state may substitute its judgment for that of parents.
  In an unusually thorough discussion of the ethical issues posed by childhood vaccination, Douglas
  Diekema and Edgar Marcuse have identified three broad questions that need to be considered:
  First, do parents who withhold vaccination from their children harm them to such an extent that parental
  refusal ought to be overridden? Second, what duties do parents owe others in the community to avoid
  causing harm through an unvaccinated child? Third, does the social value of having a vaccinated
  population—for the sake of herd immunity and the eradication of disease—justify coercive efforts to
  vaccinate all children?12
  In their analysis Diekema and Marcuse note that what makes the discussion of these linked questions so
  intriguing is the fact that immunization involves both a direct benefit to the individual child as well to
  those in the community who remain unimmunized who benefit from the immunization of the vast
  majority.
  The question thus emerges of whether those who choose not to immunize their children and to rely on
  the benefits provided by herd immunity are “free riders”? From an ethical perspective the issue can be
  framed as one of justice and fair distribution of risks and benefits. Those parents who choose to
  immunize their children assume risks on behalf of the community that those who choose not to
  immunize can avoid. Finally, in this regard it is critical to recognize that the existence of free riders may
  erode the commitment to immunization, thus lowering the overall rate of protective coverage—
  undercutting the very foundations for herd immunity. Thus a paradox emerges: Herd immunity allows
  individuals to choose not to be vaccinated, but recognizing the right of parents not to vaccinate their
  children may subvert that very herd immunity.
  The situation is somewhat different in cases such as measles, where immunization offers only imperfect
  protection. Thus the vaccinated remain at risk from the unimmunized who may develop disease. In such
  circumstances do the ethics of public health justify mandatory vaccination of all children for measles?
  What of the religious exemption?
  Conclusion
  In the first years of the HIV epidemic it became a convention in AIDS advocacy and among some public
  health officials to assert that there was no tension between the claims of privacy and civil liberties on
  the one hand and public health on the other. The argument was that restrictions on rights were
  inevitably counterproductive to the pursuit of public health goals. It was with that perspective as a
  guiding principle that efforts were made to rethink public health practices that bore the imprint of their
  origins in the late 19th and early 20th centuries. Most provocatively this perspective informed the first
  formulations of the linkage between health and human rights. More radically, the human rights
  perspective, building on the long tradition of social medicine, underscored the extent to which the
  vulnerability to disease, including infectious disease, was rooted in poverty and social inequality.
  Tuberculosis provided the paradigmatic case. TB had declined in United States and elsewhere long
  before antibiotic treatment became available, and as Thomas McKeown had demonstrated, the
  fundamental cause of the decline of tuberculosis was the transformation of the social conditions under
  which people lived. Indeed tuberculosis in the contemporary period was largely restricted to the poor.
  Module 5: Ethics and Infectious Disease Control: STDs, HIV, TB
  145
  If health was in large measure a function of broad social conditions what role could be played by public
  health intervention? This is one of the great challenges of public health analysis. But to the extent that
  interventions are critical to protecting the public health, it is inevitable that decision makers will have to
  confront the question of how the interests and rights of the individual are to be balanced against the
  public good. Demonstrating the enduring nature of these issues is the very recent debate over the
  extent to which the threat of bioterrorism can justify the exercise of public health measures like name
  reporting, mandatory vaccination and quarantine in situations defined as a public health emergency. As
  should be clear, the very determination of what constitutes an emergency warranting such measures is
  more than a technical matter. It is suffused with value questions regarding the balance of risks and
  benefits, tolerable uncertainties, and our conceptions of rights.
  In encountering these matters, careful ethical analysis can make a singular contribution to the practice
  of public health.
  Cases In Infectious Disease
  The six case studies embedded in this essay that highlight critical ethical challenges in the ethics of
  infectious disease control are:

1. Screening for HIV infection and latent TB infection – Highlighting the tension between the
   integrity of the body and the imperatives of identifying those who harbor infections that may be
   transmitted to others.
2. Disease surveillance and the reporting of disease to public health registries – Highlighting the
   tension between the confidentiality of the doctor-patient relationship and the necessity to obtain
   accurate information about the incidence and prevalence of infectious disease.
3. Contact investigation and the duty to warn – Highlighting the tension between the desire of
   patients to maintain their privacy and the obligation of public health officials and others to want and
   protect those who may have been placed at risk.
4. Directly observed therapy for TB patients – Highlighting the right to refuse treatment and the risk
   poised by individuals whose untreated disease poses a risk to others.
5. Quarantine of individuals who could not or would not complete their TB treatment –
   Highlighting the tension between personal liberty and the potential risk posed by those with TB that has
   not been completely treated.
6. Mandatory childhood vaccination – Highlighting the tension between parental rights and the
   public health obligation to protect children from preventable disease and the public from infectious
   threats.
   For Further Reading
   R. Bayer, Private Acts, Social Consequences: AIDS and the Politics of Public Health, Rutgers University
   Press, 1991 – Chapters 4, 5, 6.
   Module 5: Ethics and Infectious Disease Control: STDs, HIV, TB
   146
   R. Bayer and L. Dupuis, “Tuberculosis, Public Health, and Civil Liberties,” in Annual Review of Public
   Health 1994, (Annual Reviews Inc.) 16:307-26.
   D. Diekema and E. Marcuse, “Ethical Issues in the Vaccination of Children,” Primum Non Nocere Today
   (Elsevier, 1998), pp. 37-47.
   S. King, “Vaccination Policies: Individual Rights v. Community Health,” BMJ 319 (December 4, 1999):
   1448-1449.
   1 John Stuart Mill, On Liberty (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1989), 13.
   2 Jacobson v. Massachusetts , 197 U.S. 11 (1905)
   3 Cited in Merritt DJ: The Constitutional Balance Between Health and Liberty. Hastings Center Report 16: S2-10, 1986.
   4 Institute of Medicine, Ending Neglect: The Elimination of Tuberculosis in the United States, Washington DC: National
   Academy Press, 2000.
   5 Lawrence Gostin, “The Resurgent Tuberculosis Epidemic in the Era of AIDS: Reflections on Public Health, Law and
   Society,” Maryland Law Review 54: 1-131.
   6 Michael D. Iseman, David L. Cohn, John A. Sbarbaro, “Directly Observed Treatment of Tuberculosis,” New England Journal
   of Medicine 328;8 (1993): 576-578.
   7 Ibid.
   8 “Tuberculosis in the 1990s: Ethical, Legal and Public Policy Issues in Screening, Treatment, and the Protection of Those in
   Congregate facilities: A Report from the Working Group on TB and HIV.” In United Hospital Fund of New York, The
   Tuberculosis Revival: Individual Rights and Societal Obligations in a Time of AIDS (1992). Dissent of David Hansell.
   9 In re Halko . 54 Cal. Report. 661 (1966)
   10 Addington v. Texas , 441 U.S. 418 (1979)
   11 Paul Greenough, “Intimidation, Coercion and Resistance in the Final Stages of the South Asian Smallpox Eradication
   Campaign, 1973-1975,” Social Science and Medicine 41;5 (1995): 633-645.
   12 D. Diekema and E. Marcuse, “Ethical Issues in the Vaccination of Children,” In Primum Non Nocere Today (New
   York: Elsevier, 1998), pp. 37-47.
   Module 6: Ethics of Health Promotion and Disease Prevention
   147
   MODULE 6
   Ethics of Health Promotion and Disease Prevention
   Ronald Bayer, PhD
   Columbia University
   There is now widespread agreement among both the general population and health
   professionals that a good deal of disease is self-inflicted, the product of our own
   imprudent behavior. The premise that individuals contribute significantly to their own ill
   health or premature death appears unassailable in view of the mounting evidence
   relating various personal habits and lifestyle choices, such as poor nutrition, smoking,
   alcohol and drug abuse, failure to wear seat belts, and unsafe sexual practices, to major
   causes of morbidity and mortality.
   While it is generally accepted that each of us is, to a certain extent, “dangerous to our
   own health,” there is far less agreement on what can or should be done about making
   people less foolish. In particular, there is the question of how far government should go
   in fashioning lifestyles to minimize the physical and mental harm we inflict upon
   ourselves and others in society through risky personal choices. Where does personal
   choice and collective responsibility begin? How we reconcile two of our most prized
   social values, personal freedom and good health?
   —Howard M.Leichter, Free to be Foolish.
   Introduction
   The above-cited quotation sets the stage for the issues with which we will be concerned in this module.
   The issues posed can be reframed in the following way. What are the appropriate limits of the state in a
   liberal society in regulating, restricting or prohibiting behaviors that lead to premature morbidity and
   mortality; in shaping, molding or influencing the preferences and desires of its citizens; in protecting
   citizens from commercial influences that may encourage or sustain patterns of behavior that are
   antithetical to the goals of public health?
   The contemporary discussion of these issues can be traced to a number of public reports that
   underscored the extent to which medicine can only play a limited role in affecting the patterns of
   morbidity and mortality in what was viewed as a post infectious disease society. In 1975 Marc LaLonde,
   Minister of Health for Canada, issued a landmark report, A New Perspective on the Health of
   Canadians, which boldly stated that unless the environment changed self-imposed risks reduced death
   rates could not be significantly improved. LaLonde was acutely aware of the ethical challenges posed by
   this orientation: “Whether and to what extent government can get into the business of modifying human
   behavior, even if it does so to improve health.” These views and concerns were echoed in United States
   in the introduction to the 1979 Surgeon General’s report Healthy People. Secretary Joseph Califano
   declared, “You the individual can do more for your own health and well-being than any doctor or
   hospital or exotic medical device.” Like LaLonde, the Secretary underscored the ethical challenges
   signaling as well the treacherous political terrain. “There will be controversy—and there should be—
   Module 6: Ethics of Health Promotion and Disease Prevention
   148
   about what role government should play, if any, in urging citizens to give up their pleasurable but
   damaging habits. But there can be no denying the public consequences of those private habits. “
   The scope and significance of the challenge posed by these public documents can most forcefully
   captured by the clash that emerged between those who saw in this new perspective a call for vigorous
   and legitimate governmental intervention and those who believed that represented the public health
   version of victim blaming.
   No one more forcefully took up the banner for behavior change than John Knowles, a physician and
   Rockefeller Foundation president. In a widely read essay entitled “The Responsibility of the Individual”
   he took the opportunity to challenge a culture that fostered behaviors that caused illness and premature
   death:
   The idea of individual responsibility has been submerged in individual rights or demands to be
   guaranteed by government and delivered by public and private institutions. The cost of sloth,
   gluttony, alcoholic intemperance, reckless driving, sexual frenzy and smoking is now a national
   and not an individual responsibility. This is justified as individual freedom—[but] freedom in
   health is another man’s shackle in taxes and insurance premiums. I believe the idea of a “right”
   to health [ought to be replaced by an] obligation to preserve one’s health—a public duty if you
   will.
   These claims, which despite some recognition of the way in which broad social and institutional forces
   affected behavior, laid much of the responsibility for such actions on the individual. As a consequence
   they were viewed by many as an ideological strategy for relieving government of the obligation to assure
   the conditions of health or provide health care services to those were ill. It was a perspective, the critics
   noted, that despite the apparent attention to social conditions, tended to conceptualize behavior as the
   outcome of individual choices. Thus those who behaved foolishly had only themselves to blame for their
   condition. Finally, critics noted that the assertion that individuals had an obligation to be healthy had
   profoundly troubling implications. Just what was the source of this duty? Did each of us have an
   obligation to behave in every way possible to foster society’s economic and social well-being? If there
   was a duty to be healthy was there also a duty to be productive?
   However one framed the general issue, whether one saw the behaviors as a consequence of choice or as
   socially embedded, it was critical, as noted at the outset of this module, to confront the question of the
   role of the state. Because of the profound influence of individualism in American culture and politics it
   would be useful to begin this discussion with an oft quoted passage from John Stuart Mill’s essay On
   Liberty where we encounter a robust defense of the individual against intrusions by the state.
   The only purpose for which power can be rightfully exercised over any member of the civilized
   community, against his will, is to prevent harm to others. His own good, either physical or
   moral, is not sufficient warrant. He cannot rightfully be compelled to do or forbear because it
   will be better for him to do so, because it will make him happier, because in the opinion of
   others to do so would be wise or even right. These are good reasons for remonstrating with him
   or reasoning with him or persuading him or entreating him [but not for] compelling or visiting
   him with any evil in case he do otherwise. To justified that, the conduct from which it is desired
   to deter him must be calculated to produce evil to someone else. The only part of the conduct
   of anyone, for which he is amenable to society, is that which concerns others. In the part which
   Module 6: Ethics of Health Promotion and Disease Prevention
   149
   merely concerns himself, his independence is, of right, absolute. Over himself, over its own
   body and mind, the individual is sovereign.
   Before proceeding, it is crucial to understand the conceptual distinction being made by Mill. The target
   of his animus is paternalism—the attempt to impose limitations upon someone or to require actions by
   someone for his or her own good. Such impositions can be justified in two circumstances: (1) with
   children because it is assumed that they are incapable of deciding on their own behalf; and (2) with
   those who because of cognitive limitations cannot choose on their own behalf. The one exception that
   Mill makes only serves to underscore his position: one cannot sell oneself into slavery. One cannot do
   something that would forever preclude the exercise of one’s freedom. (It is worth noting here that some
   have used this exception as providing a justification for paternalistic intrusions designed to prevent
   individuals from using addictive drugs or even smoking cigarettes. How far such an exception would go
   in eviscerating Mill’s strong position on liberty is worth bearing in mind throughout this module.)
   By contrast intervention is justified for Mill when one acts in a way that may pose a harm to others.
   Other-regarding harms are the appropriate target of government regulation. The shorthand for this
   justification has come to be known as the “harm principle.” Conventionally put the principle asserts
   “your freedom to swing your arm ends where my nose begins.” This apparently straightforward
   formulation opens the way to a series of questions involving the nature of harms that may be prevented.
   While the bodily injury entailed in a blow to the nose is clearly a harm for Mill, what about an injury
   that is threatened, one that is possible, or only remotely so, one that is merely statistical, smoking in an
   open-air café, for example? What if the potential harm involves an annoyance, for example the smell of
   smoke in an open-air stadium? What if an act that is self-regarding in terms of injury is other-regarding
   in terms of economic costs, for example smoking alone? The point here is to underscore the extent to
   which Mill’s formulation can either serve to impose radical limits on what government can do in the
   name of public health, or if very broadly interpreted open the way to kind of interventions that would for
   all practical purposes eliminate the distinction between the realm of the private and social, between the
   self regarding and other regarding? After all, in a highly integrated society what action does anyone take
   that does not ultimately have an impact on “society”?
   If Mill’s antagonism to paternalism is understood as imposing severe limits on governmental
   intervention can it serve as a basis for an ethics of public health? If Mill’s doctrine is very broadly
   construed does it compel justifications for public health that ultimately involve gross contortions,
   finding harms to others when they can only remotely be understood as such? In this module we will note
   how on several occasions the need to avoid the appearance of paternalism shaped and distorted
   justifications for state intervention in the name of public health. The alternative would be to embrace
   paternalism explicitly as a core value of public health. While such a strategy might be politically
   untenable it would open the way to a more candid discussion of the extent to which communal well
   being justifies limits on behaviors that impose harms to individuals themselves and only secondarily on
   others. That is the strategy adopted by philosopher Robert Goodin.
   We do not leave it to the discretion of consumers, however well informed, whether or not to
   drink grossly polluted water, ingest grossly contaminated foods, or inject grossly dangerous
   drugs. We simply prohibit such things on grounds of public health … to a very large extent …
   the justification of public health measures, in general, must be baldly paternalistic. Their
   fundamental point is to promote the well-being of people who might otherwise be inclined
   cavalierly to court certain sorts of diseases.
   Module 6: Ethics of Health Promotion and Disease Prevention
   150
   Goodin’s posture represents a bracing corrective and while he is acute in pointing out that instances of
   public health paternalism abound it is remarkable how often efforts are made to mask such interventions
   as ultimately involving the protection of third parties. This was the case as we will see below in the
   discussion of mandatory seat belt laws.
   It is worth noting here that despite Goodin’s embrace of public health paternalism he is quick to
   underscore that it is a “weak” form of paternalism that he advocates. He argues that in a fundamental
   sense his paternalism takes the most basic preference of individuals to live long and well as its starting
   point. It simply seeks to impose on the reluctant or the foolish interventions designed to secure those
   ends. “It is one thing to stop people who want to commit suicide from doing so,” he writes, “but quite
   another to stop people who want to live acting away that they falsely believed to be safe. ” Provocative
   though this distinction may be, we should note that it provides a justification for paternalism that is
   breathtaking in its scope. Since we all want to be happy, fulfilled, healthy, what government intrusion
   could not be termed a “weak” form of paternalism? Is there something here that is akin to the
   paradoxical question asked in political philosophy “Can someone be forced to be free?”
   With these preliminary observations in place, it is now possible to confront the ethical issues posed by
   government effort to affect behavior in name of public health. In this module we will examine efforts
   involving health communication campaigns (and censorship), taxation designed to discourage
   consumption, and prohibitions or mandates on certain behaviors. In each case we will be concerned
   with the impact on individual liberty as well as fairness of burdens.
   Health communication campaigns and the censorship of advertising
   Health communication campaigns that discourage certain activities or encourage the adoption of others
   are the most common form of intervention designed to promote healthy behavior. They would at first
   appear to pose no ethical challenges. They provide needed information and thus enhance personal
   autonomy in the face of health risks. They may affect behavior that produces health related burdens for
   society. Thus such campaigns may limits the extent to which community may be compelled to tolerate
   negative externalities generated by those who engage in activities linked epidemiologically to morbidity
   and mortality. Finally, at an expressive level such efforts represent a public demonstration of the
   community’s concern for the health and well-being of its members.
   Yet even such interventions may raise troubling issues. Messages targeted at those most at risk may
   open the way to stigmatization and hence to the imposition of inequitable burdens. Two examples
   illustrate this point. In the context of the AIDS epidemic efforts to counter the tendency toward
   marginalization of those most at risk led to the creation of campaigns that suggested that everyone was
   at risk for HIV infection. While technically and biologically correct the campaign represented an
   epidemiological misstatement. In this instance a decision had been made to sacrifice veracity and
   perhaps effectiveness to protecting those most at risk for stigmatization. Was this determination to
   protect ethically warranted? The second case involved decision made by the New York State Health
   Department to require the posting of warnings at bars about the potential hazards of alcohol
   consumption during pregnancy. That rather straightforward effort to inform was greeted with dismay
   and hostility by advocates of women’s rights who saw this health information message as stigmatizing,
   as reflective of a paternalistic assumption that women did not know what was in their best interest and
   the interest of their fetuses, as an invitation to meddling by bartenders and patrons. Were such
   Module 6: Ethics of Health Promotion and Disease Prevention
   151
   concerns of sufficient merit to warrant the scuttling of an effort that was viewed as pertinent to the
   public health?
   In large measure critiques of health communication campaigns have centered primarily on the extent to
   which they have been understood to be a substitute for more effective public health interventions. But
   health communication campaigns can be successful. We know that the cumulative impact of many
   efforts over time is enhanced when novel messages, conveyed in a variety of media, have been
   supplemented by more personal interventions. Can such campaigns be too successful? Can they
   undermine autonomy by their efforts to reform the way in which we think about our health-related
   preferences? It is a striking feature of American fear regarding governmental intrusions that concern has
   been generated for some by the mere prospect of successful state sponsored programs to influence
   health-related behaviors. For commercial advertisers to advance exaggerated claims is almost expected.
   But were government to engage in similar levels of exaggeration, even in the name of public health,
   fears of unwarranted and dangerous manipulation would abound. Such reactions, if taken seriously,
   could place public health education campaigns at a disadvantage.
   In light of these considerations is worth thinking about the ethics of social marketing. Is not surprising
   that public health officials have come to recognize that they had much to learn from the advertising
   industry. After all, years of efforts had created a vast industry designed to understand the wellsprings of
   motivation that could be tapped to encourage the purchase of products through the creation or
   manipulation of desire. If, for example, advertising could convince adolescents around the world that
   they wanted and needed Nike running shoes could they not be convinced that cigarette smoking was
   bad? Could not the manipulative capacity of advertising be mobilized for public health goals?
   Whatever the answer to those questions will be–and the challenges of using advertising for public
   health goals may be substantial–social marketing raises critical ethical issues. Is the subversion of
   autonomy implicit in the manipulation of desire and preference ever justifiable? Can the protection of
   individuals from the manipulative activity of commercial advertisers justify counter-manipulation in the
   name of public health? Does such manipulation simply attempt to level the playing field? And does such
   an effort at balancing provided the ethical warrant for what otherwise might be considered morally
   troubling?
   But if efforts at public health education raise important ethical challenges proposals to restrict
   advertising in the name of public health pose direct questions about the relationship between the
   community’s well-being and freedom of expression. Here a discussion of the ethics of public health
   must inevitably engage American constitutional law. We will approach this issue through the case of
   proposed bans on cigarette advertising.
   Efforts to impose radical restrictions–and even total bans–on cigarette advertising emerged in the mid-
   1980s. These initiatives had to confront an evolving constitutional debate over the extent to which
   commercial speech should be accorded protections under the First Amendment. In 1986 the American
   Medical Association called for a total ban on cigarette advertising and promotion and in so doing
   joined the American Heart Association and American Lung Association. In testimony before Congress
   the American Public Health Association stated, “Advertisements should be to promote good health
   products and not products that kill.”
   Module 6: Ethics of Health Promotion and Disease Prevention
   152
   While proponents of the ban on all cigarette advertising and promotion sought to ground their
   arguments in a uniquely dreadful consequences of the sale and consumption of tobacco products many
   who opposed such efforts centered their claims on the uniquely important role of the First Amendment
   in American political culture. While the former believed it possible to prohibit advertising of cigarettes
   without unraveling the fabric of freedom of expression, even for commercial speech, the latter saw
   freedom as indivisible.
   While support for an outright ban on advertising gained strength in the 1980’s there was little evidence
   that such a move had anything like the necessary political support. It would require a reframing of the
   issue to make the call for restrictions more politically potent. That reframing gradually took place in the
   1990’s as the argument for restricting advertising and promotion increasingly focused on protection of
   children. At the heart of this reorientation was a pair of linked claims, one moral the other empirical.
   Children and young adolescents were incapable of making determinations on their own behalf and
   needed protection from manipulation by those who sought to stimulate their desires for harmful goods.
   Whatever the limits of paternalism in a liberal society, the exercise of the state’s protective authority
   was certainly appropriate with those below the age of consent. Since cigarette smoking once
   commenced, was driven by the addictive power of nicotine, the exercise of restrictive and protective
   authority to prevent smoking was morally justified. That such measures would indirectly impose limits
   on advertising and promotion viewed by adults was a price worth paying.
   The struggle between proponents of restrictions on tobacco advertising and advocates of First
   Amendment protection of such ” speech” was played out against an ongoing controversy over the
   potential efficacy of advertising bans. The debate had both practical and constitutional implications.
   Certainly restrictions on advertising directed at youths could only be justified if, in fact, they affected
   patterns smoking. From a constitutional perspective the issue was crucial. The Supreme Court’s
   jurisprudence on commercial speech restrictions stipulated that no matter how narrowly tailored,
   limitations could not pass muster if there was no evidence that they could achieve their goal. And here
   it is remarkable to note that despite decades of agitation for restrictions on advertising by public health
   advocates the evidence of efficacy had been very limited. This is the backdrop to the Supreme Court
   case Lorillard vs. Massachusetts decided in 2001. In that critically important case the Supreme Court
   stated that Massachusetts had failed to bear the burden of demonstrating that its restrictions on
   outdoor advertising designed to protect children would in fact achieve their goal. Hence there emerges
   a paradox: narrowly tailored restrictions on advertising designed to protect children are unlikely to be
   effective; those that might be effective are unlikely to pass constitutional muster.
   It is here that we need to confront a critical set of ethical questions. Is it true that a vibrant democratic
   culture requires unfettered commercial speech? Is the protection of children through measures that
   burden the rights of adults morally acceptable? And perhaps most pertinent do adults have a right to be
   protected from the seductions offered by advertising? In short, questions of advertising restrictions
   force us to confront the limits of paternalism.
   The wages of sin: taxes, consumption and the public health
   Given the focus of public discussion on the economic consequences of the relationship of personal
   behavior to morbidity and mortality it is not surprising that considerable theoretical attention has been
   devoted to the role of taxes as a critical element in health promotion efforts. Much of the concern has
   centered upon the issue of negative externalities, including the cost of health care and lost productivity.
   Module 6: Ethics of Health Promotion and Disease Prevention
   153
   Thus it was only natural that proposals were made to recapture those costs through excise taxes applied
   to products directly implicated in disease and early death.
   From the point of view of economics such taxes would correct for market imperfections. They would
   pass on to consumers the true cost of their behaviors by having the price of a dangerous product reflect
   the costs imposed on society by the consumption of such a product. From an ethical point of view
   efforts were made to justify such taxes as central to a more equitable distribution of the burdens
   associated with certain behaviors. On the other hand, since excise taxes are always regressive,
   burdening the consumption options of the poor more than the well-off, it was argued that such levies
   rather than enhancing fairness would generate inequity.
   The imposition of taxes in excess of those justified by calculable negative externalities, those
   downstream burdens that others are compelled to bear as a result of one’s behavior, would require
   arguments that went beyond the claims of society in the face of such costs. Such efforts would entail
   paternalistic imposts designed to reduce consumption patterns deemed undesirable from the
   perspective of public health. Indeed such taxes drew the ire of J.S. Mill. In writing about proposals to
   tax alcohol in the 19th century he stated, “To tax stimulants for the sole purpose of making them more
   difficult to be obtained is a measure differing only in degree from their entire prohibition.” We will
   discuss the issues posed here by the example of cigarette excise taxes.
   It was not until the mid-1980s that the idea of using the power to tax emerged as a central feature of the
   anti tobacco campaign in United States. Faced with a challenge of affecting mass behavior public health
   advocates concluded that a substantial increase in tobacco excise taxes might be the most effective
   measure that state and local governments could take to advance public health. As the issue was joined it
   became necessary to address a host of both technical and moral issues: How would price increases
   affect the consumption of an addictive product? What was the elasticity of demand for cigarettes among
   those who might be poised to begin smoking, young smokers, those who had smoked for years? Would
   such excise taxes be inherently regressive and therefore inequitable? Did smokers impose collective
   burdens on nonsmokers because of the medical costs they incurred and did equity justify or require the
   internalization of such negative externalities? Was the imposition of excise taxes on cigarettes, at least
   in some part, an act of paternalism designed to place economic burdens on smokers in order to
   enhance the prospect of quitting? And if so was such paternalism morally justified?
   Despite the recognition that increases in cigarette taxes could have a direct impact on tobacco
   consumption the public justification for such levies very quickly began to center on the social costs of
   smoking. Thus, for example, when California voters were asked to consider a ballot proposition that
   would have increased the cost of cigarettes by 25¢ a pack a coalition supporting the new tax declared:
   “The tobacco companies have said that a tax is unfair that taxes only smokers …. We say that for many
   years it was unfair that nonsmokers to have had to subsidize the smokers relative to their increased
   costs of medical care.” The advocates of the proposed tax increase provided a second justification, one
   that focused on the need to protect those who were the appropriate targets of paternalistic intervention.
   The new resources generated by the levy would provide funds to educate children about the dangers of
   smoking. Furthermore increased prices for cigarettes would raise the barrier to consumption by children
   and adolescents. Taxes might be more effective than the already existent legal prohibitions on such
   sales.
   Module 6: Ethics of Health Promotion and Disease Prevention
   154
   A powerful indication of the extent to which tobacco activists wanted to avoid the taint of paternalism
   was the following observation made by Kenneth Warner, an economist and longtime proponent of
   aggressive anti-tobacco efforts on the part of government. Were taxes, he said, a way of asserting that “
   we know better than you” and that “we don’t want people doing things the bad for themselves” he would
   oppose them. But taxes were not about protecting adults from their own choices but were rather a
   matter “discouraging children, the next generation from initiating its tobacco addiction.”
   Central to the moral arguments of the social costs of tobacco addiction were a set of assumptions about
   how smoking increased the cost health care. The evidence would, however, ultimately suggest that given
   the premature mortality associated with smoking the social cost argument far from definitive. Early
   death reduced social security payments, expenditures on nursing home care, and medical care late in
   life. Indeed by the year 2000 Kenneth Warner declared that claims that smoking clearly imposed costs
   on society in terms of expenditures was a “myth.” In the end then a central justification for increasing
   taxes was brought into question. What remained was the claim that higher prices protected children.
   And once again the question posed for the ethics and public health would be on the extent to which the
   invocation of child protection could serve as the engine force for broad public health policies.
   By the turn of the 21st century in a climate suffused with neo-prohibitionist trends regarding tobacco, it
   was, of course, possible to press for steeply increased cigarette taxes for purely fiscal reasons–
   increasingly burdening through a sin tax a product subject to wide scale marginalization.
   It was a trend toward higher taxes and prices and the changing demography of smoking in America that
   provided the context for a question regarding equity and public health. Cigarette smoking by the end of
   a 20th-century was increasingly a behavior of the less educated and the less affluent. There was, in fact,
   a steep social gradient inversely relating smoking and class. Excise taxes that were, by definition,
   regressive were being borne by those least able to pay. Was such a burden inequitable or did it,
   precisely because of its potential impact on consumption, ultimately serve the interests of the least
   advantaged. If it did so, was the imposition of such burdens an expression of paternalism. Was such
   paternalism justified? Did the right to take risks, or enjoy dangers, and pleasures, without the intrusive
   concern of the state make such intrusions unacceptable?
   Increased prices, unlike direct prohibitions ultimately leave to the consumer the choice of whether or
   not to purchase a product. Because they permit such choices while imposing burdens expressed
   through the market some have viewed them as a less troubling paternalism. But, at the end of the day,
   for those who must pay is such paternalism in fact less troubling? And while the case of tobacco may
   seem an especially appropriate target for health-inspired taxes would the extension of levies to high-fat
   foods sold by McDonald’s, for example, be morally acceptable? To the extent that current policy does
   not cover all products linked morbidity and mortality can we conclude that the decisions are reflective
   of the pattern of an invidious discrimination, even moralism, masquerading as public health?
   Restrictions, prohibitions, and mandatory behavior
   Whatever the ethical challenges posed by health education campaigns or by the use of the excise taxes
   they do preserve a realm of choice and hence avoid some of the obloquy that attends policies that
   unambiguously impose penalties for failing to behave in prescribed ways or for behaving in ways that
   have been proscribed. Prohibitions evoke the specter of Big Brother and of America’s “noble
   experiment” with alcohol. Yet on a broad range paternalistic public health regulations are an accepted
   Module 6: Ethics of Health Promotion and Disease Prevention
   155
   part of contemporary life. Prohibitions on the sale or prescription of many intoxicating substances are
   challenged only by libertarians opposed, in principle, to any but the most limited restrictions on
   individual liberty. Pure food and drug laws, as well as legislation governing the use of potentially
   carcinogenic food additives are not only rarely opposed but often demanded by those committed to
   public health despite the clear impingement on liberty and autonomy of potential consumers.
   It is only when government seeks to restrict the availability of a product well integrated into the social
   fabric, or when it plans to mandate behavior that is not already required that the ensuing controversy
   brings to the fore the ethical issues that undergird even the most widely accepted practices.
   The debate surrounding mandatory motorcycle helmet laws, which occurred more than three decades
   ago, provides a unique window on the extent to which explicitly paternalistic measures can encounter
   opposition and a as a consequence require justifications compatible with the individualistic trends in
   American culture. Hence the case remains of enduring significance. Stephen Teret has provided an
   analysis of the saga. In the nine years following the decision of the federal government to link highway
   funds to the enactment of mandatory motorcycle helmet laws, 49 states adopted the mandated
   requirements. Only California refused to do so. Utah limited the statutory requirements to highways on
   which travel exceeded 35 miles per hour.
   Despite the vehement opposition to the statutes by representatives of cycling groups compliance with
   helmet requirements was nearly universal. As a consequence, deaths from motorcycle accidents
   declined dramatically. But because motorcyclists viewed mandatory helmet laws as unacceptable, a
   violation of their civil liberties, an intrusion upon their autonomy, and an example of unjustifiable
   paternalism, they brought suit in state after state challenging the constitutionality of the statutes. Only
   in Illinois did the court hold mandatory helmet laws unconstitutional. In one case that was pursued to
   the U.S. Supreme Court, the nation’s highest tribunal refused to overturn a U.S. District Court holding
   that government could legitimately compel the use of helmets.
   In their decisions, courts tended to avoid justifications that suggested a warrant for paternalistic
   intervention. Rather, they sought to demonstrate that the social impact of private behavior provided
   ample justification. Characteristic was the language used by a U.S. District Court in Massachusetts
   From the moment of injury [society] picks the person up of the highway; delivers him to a municipal
   hospital and municipal doctors; provides him with unemployment compensation if, after recovery, he
   cannot replace his lost job; and if the injury causes permanent disability, may assume the responsibility
   for his and his family’s continued assistance. We do not understand the state of mind that permits the
   plaintiff to think that only he himself is concerned.
   Here in unvarnished words was a justification that relied on the harm principle conceptualized in terms
   of social costs. Strikingly absent was the will to assert that it was a legitimate social interest to protect
   motorcyclists from their own imprudent choices, a justification that might have articulated society’s
   interest in preventing death and suffering regardless of its social costs.
   What opponents of motorcycle laws had failed to do in the courts they succeeded in accomplishing in
   the Congress. The Secretary of Transportation was forbidden from using the power of the purse to force
   the states to impose protective requirements on motorcycles. Within three years of the 1976
   congressional action 27 states had repealed their laws. As a consequence motorcycle helmet use
   Module 6: Ethics of Health Promotion and Disease Prevention
   156
   declined by 40 percent in the repeal states. The mortality toll began to rise in terms of medical
   expenses and lost productivity. So too did the toll in human suffering.
   Here again we must address a set of critical ethical challenges: When can the state do just what Mill
   decried? Is an ethics of public health, focused on the well-being of populations, compatible with a
   Millian liberalism? How should we think about strained claims about third party costs and harms? When
   such claims are made despite the fact that they mask the true purpose of policy do they corrupt the
   discourse on public health? Would a public health that explicitly acknowledged the paternalism inherent
   in policy be more desirable or does such reluctance in fact serve important social functions?
   Conclusions
   A theme that runs through virtually every policy debate involving health promotion and disease
   prevention is the fear of the slippery slope. If the state is justified in imposing limits on smoking or
   requiring motorcyclists to wear helmets will that inevitably open the way to a cascade of intrusions–
   some petty, some truly burdensome. Does the logic of public policy dictate that once the first step is
   taken down the road to paternalism there is no stopping point? Does consistency demand of a state that
   imposes restrictions on smoking that it impose restrictions on French fried potatoes because their fatty
   nature threatens health as well? On the number of hours each of us devotes to exercise? Alternately, is it
   possible that the invocation of the slippery slope rather than revealing an important truth represents a
   barrier to reflective consideration of the ethics of public health?
   Cases in Health Promotion and Disease Prevention
7. Health Communication Campaigns and the Censorship of Advertising – Using the case of
   tobacco highlights the tension between robust conceptions of freedom of expression and the claims that
   the protection of the public health requires bans or restrictions on advertising that may stimulate the
   consumption of tobacco products.
8. Taxes, Consumption and the Public Health – Increasing taxes on cigarettes to limit consumption
   highlights the tension between the claim that individuals have a right to purchase products that give the
   m pleasure even if they produce illness and the public health claim that there is an obligation to inhibit
   behaviors that can predictably be the cause of morbidity and mortality. In this instance, the tax-induced
   increase in prices does not represent a prohibition but the creation of an economic burden that leaves
   individuals formally free to choose.
9. Mandatory Motorcycle Helmet Laws – This case places into bold relief the assertion that the
   protection of the public health, as represented in decreases in morbidity and mortality, may justify the
   imposition of outright prohibitions designed to protect individuals from their foolish choices, choices
   that incidentally may also produce burdens on society.
   For Further Reading
   D. Beauchamp, “Community: the Neglected Tradition of Public Health,” Hastings Center Report
   (December 1985) 28-36.
   J. Moreno, R. Bayer, “The Limits of the Ledger in Public Health Promotion,” Hastings Center Report
   (December 1985) 37-41.
   Module 6: Ethics of Health Promotion and Disease Prevention
   157
   R. Crawford, “You are Dangerous to Your Health: The Ideology and Politics of Victim Blaming,”
   International Journal of Health Services 7 (1977) 633-680.
   H. Leichter, “Saving Lives and Protecting Liberty: A Comparative Study of Seat Belt Debates,” Journal of
   Health Politics, Policy and Law (Summer 1986) 323-344.
   R. Goodin, No Smoking (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1989), Chapters 1 and 2.
   R. Bayer, L. Gostin, G. Javitt, A. Brandt, “Tobacco Advertising in the United States: A Proposal for a
   Constitutionally Acceptable Form of Regulation,” Journal of the American Medical Association 287; 22
   (2002): 2990-2995.
   R. Bayer, J. Colgrove, “Science, Politics and Ideology in the Campaign Against Environmental Tobacco
   Smoke,” American Journal of Public Health 92 (2002): 949-954.
   158
   Module 7: Ethical Issues in Environmental and Occupational Health
   159
   MODULE 7
   Ethical Issues in Environmental and Occupational Health
   Kristin Shrader-Frechette, PhD
   University of Notre Dame
   Issue Essay
   US physicist Alvin Weinberg (1988) claims that today’s environmental-health problems are relatively
   trivial. Although many aspects of human well being are influenced by the environment, Weinberg says
   that environmental-health problems (such as liquid and airborne wastes, stresses in the workplace, and
   unsafe food) are sensationalized by the hypochondria of laypeople. Weinberg believes that these
   contemporary hypochondriacs are driven by an hysteria analogous to the irrationality that drove
   fourteenth- and fifteenth-century witch hunts. Just as people eventually learned that witches did not
   cause misfortunes, Weinberg claims that the public must learn that various environmental problems do
   not cause the public-health problems often attributed to them. He says the public needs to come to its
   senses, just as those who killed more than a million alleged witches eventually came to their senses.
   Public-interest activist and attorney Ralph Nader, however, thinks Weinberg is wrong (Nader 2000). He
   believes that many of today’s public-health problems are substantial, increasing, and largely
   environmentally induced. The culprit behind this “corporate cancer,” Nader believes, is the profit
   motive. Labor leader Sheldon Samuels (1988) agrees with Nader and claims that workplace health
   problems are increasing, largely because of an “industrial cannibalism,” industries’ killing their own
   workers in order to save money on pollution control.
   Background
   Who is right about environmental-health threats, the Alvin Weinbergs or the Ralph Naders of the
   world? Are environmental-health risks minimal, but fueled by public ignorance and hypochondria? Or
   are environmental-health risks massive, but covered up by vested interests attempting to reduce
   manufacturing costs? To answer these questions, it is important to examine environmental-health
   problems faced by at least three distinct groups–workers, the public, and the poor or members of
   minority groups.
   Medical doctors long have realized that workers face special public-health threats as a consequence of
   workplace exposure to various environmental hazards. In 1472 a German booklet warned goldsmiths
   how to avoid poisoning by mercury and lead. And in 1556, the mineralogist Agricola wrote the first
   known review of miners’ health problems. He noted that some women who lived near the mines of the
   Carpathian Mountains in Eastern Europe had lost seven successive husbands to mine-related accidents
   and diseases. Pleading with employers to make workplaces safer, in 1700 Italian physician Ramazzini
   wrote Diseases of Workers (Shrader-Frechette 2002, ch. 7).
   More than two centuries ago, Percival Pott linked coal tars to the scrotal cancer that killed young
   chimney sweeps in England. Yet today thousands of coke-oven workers in steel mills around the world
   continue to inhale the same deadly substances, and they are dying of cancer at 10 times the rate of other
   Module 7: Ethical Issues in Environmental and Occupational Health
   160
   steel workers (Leigh 1995). Even in nations like the US, annual occupation-related deaths are
   approximately five times greater than those caused by the illegal drug trade and approximately four
   times greater than those caused by AIDS (Leigh 1995). A later case study will examine whether
   occupational health is getting better or worse and whether the current state of occupational health
   raises any important ethical issues, such as consent to higher workplace risks, that ought to be
   addressed.
   In the area of public health, obviously environmental threats are being reduced, as compared to several
   centuries ago. In the middle 1800s communities in most nations established Departments of Public
   Health to monitor and regulate the health effects from environmental contamination such as polluted
   water. While progress in environmental health is obvious, it is less clear that some areas of
   environmental health are improving. For example, the World Health Organization claims that pesticide
   poisonings, especially in developing nations, annually cause about 50,000 deaths (Matthews et al.
   1986). And the US Office of Technology Assessment asserts that up to 90 percent of all cancers are
   “environmentally induced and theoretically preventable” (Lashoff et al. 1981, pp. 3, 6 ff.). Experts agree
   that roughly one third of all cancers are caused by cigarette smoking (National Cancer Institute 1994),
   but they disagree about the causes of the remaining cancers. Some say a major culprit is industrial
   pollution, given that the cancer rate tends to track the rate of industrialization throughout the world
   (Epstein 1998; Walker 1998). Others say the greater culprit is lifestyle, such as eating too much fat,
   while still other medical experts say the predominant cause of cancer is genetic (Ames and Gold 2000).
   They point to the BRCA1 and BRCA2 genes thought responsible for 5 to 10 percent of all breast
   cancers. Whoever is right, the stakes are high. According to the National Institutes of Health, more
   Americans die each year from environmentally induced cancer than from murder. Cancer incidence in
   the US is increasing six times faster than overall cancer mortality is decreasing (National Institutes of
   Health 2000). A later case study will examine whether the cancer rate can be attributed, in large part,
   to environmental factors and whether there are ethical grounds, such as the right to life, and the right to
   equal protection, for additional investigation and regulation of these factors.
   The environmental health of minorities and poor people is perhaps even more problematic than that of
   either workers or the public generally. A recent article (Navarro 1990) in Lancet pointed out that on
   average whites live 6 years longer than African-Americans in the US. The essay also noted that, for
   most causes of death, the mortality differentials between the two groups is increasing, not decreasing.
   Even worse, the article charged, is that the US is the only western developed nation whose government
   does not collect mortality statistics by class, that is, by income and education. When the author looked
   at class-based mortality data for the only diseases (heart and cerebrovascular ailments) on which the US
   government collects class-related information, the class data showed an even wider disparity than the
   race data. If the author is correct, then the public health of poor and minorities is getting worse and
   may point to crucial inequities in society. A later case study will examine allegations of greater numbers
   of environmentally-induced health threats among poor and minorities, that is, instances of alleged
   environmental racism or environmental injustice. It will also investigate whether there are ethical
   grounds for additional investigation and regulation of factors affecting the health of poor people and
   minorities.
   State of the Debate
   The current debate over environmental threats to occupational, public, and minority health focuses both
   on the scientific facts (the magnitude of health risk) and on the ethical issues associated with those
   Module 7: Ethical Issues in Environmental and Occupational Health
   161
   facts. Normative controversies concern both the content of the ethical principles that should govern
   policy and decisions about environmental health and the scientific and evaluation methods that are most
   ethically defensible. Conflicts over the content of ethical norms focus on issues such as (1) rights to
   know, (2) autonomy and free informed consent, (3) equality, especially equal protection from
   environmental-health risks, and (4) due process. Controversies over the methods appropriate to ethical
   evaluation of environmental health focus on (5) the burden of proof, (6) stakeholder representation in
   environmental-health decisions, and (7) the legitimacy of using risk assessment and benefit-cost
   analysis in ethical evaluation of environmental-health problems.
   Debates over (1) rights to know particular environmental threats to public health usually pit commercial
   interests against medical interests. On the one side, market proponents, like advocates of the World
   Trade Organization, argue that requirement of full labeling of food products, for example, regarding the
   presence of possible pesticides or growth hormones, amounts to an infringement on free trade
   (Hoekman and Mattoo 2002). They also claim that such labels put some manufacturers (who use more
   pesticides or growth hormones, for example) at an unfair competitive advantage, relative to
   manufacturers who do not use the pesticides or hormones. On the other side, public-interest groups,
   like the nongovernmental organization (NGO), Public Citizen, argue that all consumers have the right
   to know exactly what they are purchasing (Wallach and Sforza 1999). They also maintain that even Adam
   Smith argued that markets could be free and competitive only if there were full information available to
   consumers.
   With respect to (2) autonomy and free informed consent, often the debate focuses on what serves the
   common good, versus what serves some private good or an individual’s right to self-determination. On
   the one hand, many people (like businessman Peter Drucker (1991)) maintain that allowing free informed
   consent to every potential victim of an environmental health threat would be extraordinarily inefficient
   and might even lessen economic progress and thus harm the common good. They say that if most
   residents had to give free informed consent to siting a polluting facility nearby, then very few needed
   facilities could ever be sited, and the consequences would economically disastrous, would harm the
   common good.
   On the other hand, medical ethicists, like Tom Beauchamp and James Childress (1994, pp. 142 ff.),
   point to the fact that, as a result of the Nuremberg Accords, it is not permissible to experiment on
   anyone without his consent, and involuntary exposure to pollution may amount to an experimentation on
   people and to a potential violation of their rights to life. Arguing for free informed consent, advocates
   also note that typically pollution can be reduced to a level according to which it is easy to obtain free
   informed consent of exposed people, but that often industry is unwilling to pay the costs of reducing
   pollution. In such cases, some ethicists argue for expanding regulations that might help guarantee free
   informed consent to environmental-health risks (Cranor 1994).
   Controversies over (3) equality, especially equal protection against threats to environmental-health
   risks, typically focus on whether decisions about environmental health should aim to maximize overall
   welfare, as utilitarians might propose, or on whether they should aim to ensure equal treatment among
   people, as egalitarians claim. Those, like economist John Harsanyi, who would likely find nothing
   reprehensible about siting most hazardous waste dumps in consenting minority communities, for
   example, typically maintain that the overall welfare of such communities can be improved because of
   such decisions (Harsanyi 1975, pp. 594-600). They say that increased support for the local tax base and
   Module 7: Ethical Issues in Environmental and Occupational Health
   162
   growth in jobs, available at the dumps, could offset any alleged inequality in the imposition of
   environmental health risks. They note that a bloody loaf of bread is better than no loaf at all.
   However, those who are worried about equal protection, like philosopher John Rawls (1971), maintain
   that any choice (about siting most dumps in consenting minority communities) is unethical if it forces
   people to jeopardize their health, relative to others, because of factors that are largely beyond their
   control. Such inequality in imposing environmental-health risks, say egalitarians, also is inequitable
   because people are not really free to reject it, if they are powerless politically and economically, or if
   they must jeopardize their health in exchange for other basic necessities of life. Moreover, egalitarians
   argue that because rights to life, and to equal protection from environmental-health threats, are
   necessary for the exercise of civil liberties and for fulfilling the conditions of human life, people ought
   not be forced to give up such rights and protections.
   If people are put at risk by an environmental threat to their health, ethicists also are divided on the issue
   of (4) due process and what, if anything, they deserve as compensation. On the one hand, more
   utilitarian (those who maximize overall average welfare) thinkers, like physicist Harold Lewis (1990),
   maintain that if people were allowed to exercise their due-process rights and were able to sue every
   source of potential health problems, then many societal resources would be wasted in lawsuits, and
   overall societal good would not be served. Moreover, they say that the burden of environmental health
   threats already is spread rather evenly to citizens, and therefore no one is put substantially more at risk
   than others are. Therefore, they claim, no one really needs to be compensated or to have his dueprocess
   rights enforced in this area.
   On the other hand, medical and public-interest groups, like Public Citizen, assert that environmentalhealth
   threats are not distributed equally. They say often such threats are covered up and are more
   serious than people believe; that when people are harmed, they have due-process rights to redress
   (such as compensation) under the law. Moreover, without such redress, they say those who threaten
   environmental health have no incentives to improve their modes of behavior (Wallach and Sforza 1999).
   One important area of due-process concerns, related to environmental health, is that of US weapons
   production. Under US law, defense operations that cause harm to citizens are typically not threats
   concerning which citizens can seek compensation. Because of the doctrine of sovereign immunity,
   according to which one cannot sue the sovereign or government, citizens have no rights to seek court
   action to protect their due process rights that may be jeopardized by the US government or its
   contractors. Yet current (year 2001) estimated costs to clean up the weapons-production facilities in the
   US, where thousands of communities are endangered because of chemical and radiological pollution,
   are approximately a trillion dollars. And US military contractors, such as Raytheon, McDonnell-
   Douglas, Westinghouse, Bechtel, Martin Marietta, and so on, are typically held not liable, by US law,
   even for intentional violations of public- and environmental-health standards at the facilities they run
   (US GAO 1999).
   On the one hand, the rationale for exempting government contractors from responsibility for violations
   of citizens’ due-process rights, to seek redress from injury caused by defense operations, is national
   security. Proponents of exemption also charge that everyone benefits from national security and
   defense, so everyone must be willing to pay the price (US Congress 1999). In addition, they argue that
   the health costs of defense are borne fairly equitably, across regions of the nation.
   Module 7: Ethical Issues in Environmental and Occupational Health
   163
   On the other hand, opponents of military violations of public-health and environmental standards argue
   that something is wrong when US defense activities harm the very people they are designed to protect
   (Rush and Geiger 1997-1998). They also point out that the US defense establishment is, by far, the
   largest and most serious violator of US public-health and environmental standards, and that the US has
   to be held accountable, on grounds of fairness, for obedience to its own laws. Critics of those who want
   to hold the defense establishment not responsible for threats to citizens’ due-process rights, also argue
   that failure to hold it responsible has caused many needless threats to public and environmental health.
   For example, the US could have tested all nuclear weapons below ground, instead of above ground, and
   it could have avoided hundreds of thousands of additional US cancers caused by above-ground weapons
   testing. Because of the absence of liability and due-process claims against the government, the critics
   note that the US pursued the cheaper path of above-ground testing, of not warning civilians to stay
   indoors after the tests, and of not testing the weapons on the east coast, so that the fallout could drift
   over the Atlantic, instead of over the US.
   Just as there is great debate over the content of the norms (e.g., individual rights versus common good)
   that ought to govern environmental-health decision-making, as in cases of weapons testing, so also
   there is controversy over the methods appropriate to ethical evaluation of environmental health. Primary
   among these debates is the focus on (5) the burden of proof. On the one hand, attorneys like Sander
   Greenland (1991) argue that, given US law, people ought to be presumed innocent until proved guilty,
   and therefore the potential victim of an environmental-health threat ought to bear the burden of proof
   in establishing his injury. Otherwise, they say that many innocent people and groups would face the
   impossible obstacles of trying to prove their innocence.
   On the other hand, philosophers like Carl Cranor (1994) argue that, because the damage from
   environmental-health threats is so great, and because it is so difficult and expensive to prove causality
   in such cases, therefore the burden of proof should be on the “deep pocket,” the party with the most
   resources and the party least likely to be vulnerable. According to Cranor, this least-vulnerable party is
   the person or group causing potential environmental-health threats. Such conflicts over who should
   bear the burden of proof in environmental-health disputes focus mainly on the common good, on equal
   treatment, and on fairness.
   In debates over ethical strategies for decisions about environmental-health threats, many conflicts arise
   over (6) the necessity of stakeholder representation. (Stakeholders are those who stand to gain or lose
   as a result of particular environmental health threats. Often stakeholders are primarily potential publichealth
   victims. ) On the one hand, groups like the US National Academy of Sciences, in its classic 1983
   discussion of societal health threats, argue that decisions about the magnitude and importance of such
   risks ought to be made by experts, since only scientific experts have the requisite technical expertise
   (NRC 1983).
   On the other hand, later committees of the US National Academy of Sciences, like the 1996 group
   studying democratic constraints on risk imposition, (NRC 1996) argue that environmental-health
   decisions are not mainly about technical matters. They say such decisions are mainly about whether the
   potential victim community believes the risks are worth the benefits. Hence the citizens’ groups
   maintain that stakeholder representation is essential to democratic control of public health. Otherwise,
   they say, vested interests likely would dominate decisions about environmental health.
   Module 7: Ethical Issues in Environmental and Occupational Health
   164
   Ethicists concerned about environmental health also disagree over (7) the legitimacy of using risk
   assessment and benefit-cost analysis in ethical evaluation of environmental-health problems. That is,
   they disagree over the degree to which analytic methods ought to be used to resolve these problems.
   On the one hand, many economists and policy-makers argue in favor of such analytic techniques on the
   grounds that they systematize the problem under investigation, clarify it, and make it more tractable
   (Shrader-Frechette 1991). They also argue that, because society does not have infinite resources to
   correct environmental-health problems, therefore techniques such as risk assessment are necessary both
   to quantify the risk and to determine how to evaluate it. On the other hand, many environmentalists are
   opposed to any use of analytic methods in environmental-health decision-making (O’Brien 2000). They
   say that such techniques err both because they give control of public health to vested interests, rather
   than to potential victims, and because it is not possible to put a price on the value of life. They also say
   that the techniques fail to take account of many important ethical considerations such as consent and
   equity. Finally they complain that the techniques unfairly presuppose a largely utilitarian account of
   public policymaking.
   Policy Issues
   In each of these areas of environmental-health debate, there are a number of concrete policy proposals
   that have been developed to address ethical aspects of environmental health. For example, one policy
   issue, regarding (1) rights to know, concerns whether the World Trade Organization ought to have the
   right to define accurate labeling on potentially dangerous foods as “impediments to trade.” With respect
   to (2) autonomy and free informed consent, a crucial policy issue is whether representative democracy
   can adequately guarantee the free informed consent of potential environmental-health victims, or
   whether the victims themselves have the right to give or withhold free informed consent. For example,
   in the case of the proposed Yucca Mountain Nuclear Waste Repository, the US Nuclear Regulatory
   Commission, as a federal executive agency appointed by the President, claims the right to give free
   informed consent to the repository, whereas the residents of Nevada, 80 percent of whom oppose the
   facility, claim the right to withhold consent (Shrader-Frechette 1993).
   On the issue of (3) equality and equal protection against environmental-health threats, one important
   current policy issue is whether all areas of the nation have equal rights to a liveable environment, or
   whether some people ought to have the right to trade the equal protection of their community health or
   environmental health for money. Is there a right to a liveable environment? Or is it a good that can be
   traded when necessary? Another policy issue is whether the US ought to require the same
   environmental-health standards for products manufactured abroad as for those manufactured in the US.
   Currently US manufacturers are held to higher standards of occupational health and environmental
   health than are the manufacturers from whom the US often imports goods and foodstuffs. Do these
   other nations have sovereignty over such decisions, or does the US have the right to demand the same
   safety standards of everyone who wishes to sell its products in the US (see Wallach and Sforza 1999)?
   With respect to (4) rights to due process, an important policy issue is whether the US government
   ought to repeal the Price-Anderson Act. This law gives utilities protection against 99 percent of the
   costs of worst-case nuclear accidents, including costs and damages likely to threaten public health. Is
   the act is constitutional, as the Supreme Court alleged, because no violations of actual due process, in
   the face of catastrophic accidents, have actually occurred? Or is the act a violation of due-process
   rights, rights that ought to be guaranteed in principle (Shrader-Frechette 1993, pp. 15-23, 96-98)?
   Module 7: Ethical Issues in Environmental and Occupational Health
   165
   With respect to (5) the burden of proof, an important policy issue is whether those who threaten
   environmental health, because of their products, ought to be held liable on grounds of considerably
   weakened evidentiary standards for proof of harm, or whether the current standards ought to be
   maintained. These current standards place the burden of proof on the potential victim. In the case of
   cancer, for example, it often is extraordinarily difficult for victims to prove what caused their disease,
   and most cancer outbreaks are recognized because of statistical associations that preclude proving that
   an individual cancer had a particular environmental-health cause (Cranor 1994).
   In the area of (6) stakeholder representation in environmental-health decisions, one of the crucial policy
   decisions is whether all federal agencies who assess health risks ought to be mandated to change and
   therefore to follow the US National Academy of Sciences recommendation to give stakeholders equal
   weight (to experts) in decision-making regarding environmental health (NRC 1996). Many ethicists
   argue that justice requires not merely equal consideration of interests and equal treatment, but also
   equal voice in the decision about how to give equal consideration and equal treatment (Rawls 1971).
   Finally, one of the crucial policy issues regarding (7) the legitimacy of using risk assessment and
   benefit-cost analysis in ethical evaluation of environmental and health-related problems is whether all
   federal health-related decisions require a cost-benefit justification, as the Bush Administration
   proposes, or whether justifications instead can be based purely on ethical criteria, such a rights to equal
   protection (O’Brien 2000).
   References
   Bruce N. Ames and Lois Swirsky Gold, “Paracelsus to Parascience: The Environmental Cancer
   Distraction,” Mutation Research 447, no. 1 (January 17, 2000), pp. 3-13.
   Tom Beauchamp and James Childress, Principles of Biomedical Ethics, New York, Oxford University
   Press, 1994.
   Carl Cranor, Regulating Toxic Substances, New York, Oxford University Press, 1994.
   Peter Drucker, “Saving the Crusade,” in Kristin Shrader-Frechette (ed.), Environmental Ethics, Pacific
   Grove, CA, Boxwood Press, 1991, PP. 201-207.
   Samuel Epstein, The Politics of Cancer Revisited, Fremont Center, NY, East Ridge Press, 1998.
   Sander Greenland, “Science versus Public Health Actions,” American Journal of Public Health, 133, no.
   5 (1991) pp. 435-436.
   John Harsanyi, “Can the Maximin Principle Serve as a Basis for Morality? A Critique of John Rawls’s
   Theory,” American Political Science Review 69, no. 2 (1975), pp. 594-602.
   Bernard Hoekman and Aaditya Mattoo (eds.), Development, Trade, and the WTO, New York, World
   Bank, 2002.
   J.C. Lashoff et al. , Health and Life Sciences Division of the U.S. Office of Technology Assessment,
   Assessment of Technologies for Determining Cancer Risks from the Environment, Washington D.C.,
   Office of Technology Assessment, 1981.
   J. Paul Leigh, Causes of Death in the Workplace, London, Quorum, 1995.
   Harold W. Lewis, Technological Risk, New York, Norton, 1990.
   Module 7: Ethical Issues in Environmental and Occupational Health
   166
   Ralph Nader, The Ralph Nader Reader, New York, Seven Stories Press, 2000.
   National Cancer Institute (NCI), Surveillance, Epidemiology, and End Results, Cancer Statistics Review
   1973-1994, Bethesda, MD, NCI, 1994.
   National Institutes of Health, Cancer Rates and Risks, http://seer.cancer.gov/pub l ications/raterisk/
   (US Government: US National Institutes of Health and US National Cancer Institute, 2000).
   National Research Council, Risk Assessment in the Federal Government, Washington, DC, National
   Academy Press, 1983.
   National Research Council, Understanding Risk, Washington, DC, National Academy Press, 1996.
   Vincente Navarro, “Race or Class versus Race and Class: Mortality Differentials in the United States,”
   Lancet, 336 (1990), p. 1238-1240.
   Mary O’Brien, Making Better Environmental Decisions, Cambridge, MIT Press, 2000.
   John Rawls, A Theory of Justice, Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1971.
   D. Rush and J. Geiger, “NCI Study on I-131 Exposure from Nuclear Testing,” Physicians for Social
   Responsibility 4, no. 3 (1997-1998):1-5.
   Sheldon Samuels, “The Arrogance of Intellectual Power,” in Phenotypic Variations in Populations:
   Relevance to Risk Assessment, ed. A. Woodhead, M. Bender, R. Leonard, New York, Plenum Press,
   1988, pp. 115-116.
   Kristin Shrader-Frechette, Burying Uncertainty: Risk and the Case Against Geological Disposal of
   Nuclear Waste, Berkeley, University of California Press, 1993.
   Kristin Shrader-Frechette, Environmental Justice: Creating Equality, Reclaiming Democracy, New York,
   Oxford University Press, 2002.
   Kristin Shrader-Frechette, Risk and Rationality: Philosophical Foundations for Populist Reforms,
   Berkeley, University of California Press, 1991.
   U.S. Congress, Worker Safety at DOE Nuclear Facilities, Washington D.C., U.S. Government Printing
   Office, 1999.
   U.S. General Accounting Office, DOE: DOE’s Nuclear Safety Enforcement Program Should Be
   Strengthened, Washington D.C., U.S. Government Printing Office, 1999.
   Martin Walker, “Sir Richard Doll: A Questionable Pillar of the British Cancer Establishment,” The
   Ecologist (March/April 1998), pp. 82-92.
   Lori Wallach and Michelle Sforza, Whose Trade Organization, Washington, DC, Public Citizen, 1999.
   A. Weinberg, “Risk Assessment, Regulation, and the Limits,” in Phenotypic Variation in Populations, ed.
   A. Woodhead, M. Bender, and R. Leonard, New York, Plenum, 1988, pp. 121-128.
   Module 7: Ethical Issues in Environmental and Occupational Health
   167
   Fact Sheet on Environmental Health
   In evaluating the extent of environmental-health threats, it is important to realize that factual
   information, often used as a basis for ethical decisions about environmental health, may fall victim to a
   number of biases and values. For example, threats to environmental health may be described in
   problematic ways as a consequence of at least 4 factual difficulties, (1) framing problems, (2) low-power
   studies, (3) alternative statistical-epidemiological methods, and (4) arbitrary decision rules.
   Any ethical decision about the magnitude of an environmental-health threat is subject to considerable
   uncertainty as a consequence of different frames. For example, if one evaluates environmental-health
   threats to coal miners in terms of the “frame” of tons of coal mined, the health of miners appears to be
   improving. That is, coal-mine deaths, per ton of coal mined, have been decreasing since 1950 in the US.
   However, if one evaluates environmental-health threats to coal miners in terms of the “frame” of
   numbers of coal miners, the health of miners appears to be diminishing. That is, coal mine deaths, per
   thousand coal-mine employees in the US, have been increasing since 1950. Note that the number of
   deaths remains the same in both cases, but the significance of the number changes, on the basis of the
   frame that is used to view the deaths (see NRC 1996, pp. 50-52).
   One of the most common ways in which a polluter is able to claim that there is no environmental-health
   threat that results from his activities is by using small sample sizes or low-power studies. For example,
   if an excess of 1 in 10,000 workers exposed to y amount of vinyl chloride dies, within 5 years of
   exposure, of liver cancer, and if the epidemiological studies investigating this health effect employ a
   sample size of only 200, there is only a very small probability that the test will reveal a 1 in 10,000
   chance of cancer for a 5-year study, given the low incidence of the excess cancer. The sample size is too
   small to be likely to reveal the risk. Similarly with low-power studies. For example, when John
   Todhunter of the US EPA in 1982 reassessed the data alleging the carcinogenicity of formaldehyde, he
   concluded that the data did not show the carcinogenicity of formaldehyde. These negative statistical
   results, this failure to show a statistically significant increase in cancers, as a result of formaldehyde
   exposure among DuPont workers, however, appears to be merely an artifact of the low power of the
   statistical tests that Todhunter used. The DuPont study had only a 4 percent chance of rejecting the null
   hypothesis (and therefore inferring excess cancers), even if there were a twofold increase in cancer of
   the pharynx or of the larynx in those exposed to formaldehyde. That is, the DuPont study had only a
   power of 4 percent to detect twofold increases in cancers. As this example shows, failing to reject the
   null hypothesis does not rule out excess environmental cancers unless the epidemiological tests are
   reliable. (For the DuPont and Todhunter assessments and discussion of these problems in the
   formaldehyde case, see Mayo, 1991).
   Other statistical-epidemiological methods also can cause environmental-health threats to be
   overestimated or underestimated. For example, many industries are likely to claim that their employees
   are more likely to die at home than on the job, that their homes are less safe than the workplace. They
   often make such claims on the basis of the “healthy worker effect.” This effect typically is exhibited when
   an epidemiologist compares the cancers per x workers in a particular industry, for example, to the
   cancers per x members of the total population. However, there is a selection bias in comparing worker
   health statistics to those of the general population. The general population includes very young people,
   very old people, highly sensitive people, people too sick to work, and so on, whereas the worker
   population is in the middle-age group, a group which is generally freer of highly sensitive people or sick
   Module 7: Ethical Issues in Environmental and Occupational Health
   168
   people (or else they would not still be working). As a consequence, even workers with higher rates of
   occupationally-induced illness may appear healthier than the general population, simply because
   epidemiologists use a selection bias in comparing their health rates to those of the general population,
   a population that includes many more at-risk people than does the work population (Moeller 1997, pp.
   43-44.)
   Still another common difficulty that arises in evaluating environmental-health threats is caused by use of
   different decision-theoretic rules for evaluating the same data. For example, according to the US
   government’s Rasmussen Report, the probability of a nuclear core melt, in a US reactor, is about 1 in 4
   for all US reactors, assuming a 30-year lifetime for the reactors. Assessments conducted by the Ford
   Foundation and by the Union of Concerned Scientists (UCS), however, disagreed on the environmentalhealth
   risks associated with using nuclear fission, even though both studies used the same data about
   reactor-accident probabilities and about accident consequences. What accounted for the difference in
   the health assessments? The Ford research was based on the widely accepted Bayesian decision
   criterion that it is rational to choose the action with the highest expected utility, where “expected utility”
   is defined as the weighted sum of all possible consequences of the action, and where the weights are
   given by the probability associated with the consequence. The UCS recommendation followed the
   maximin decision rule that it is rational to choose the action that avoids the worst possible consequence
   of all options. Thus, for identical data, the chosen decision rule–with particular ethical
   presuppositions–determined the calculated environmental-health threat associated with nuclear power.
   (For discussion of the Rasmussen Report, the Ford Foundation Report, and the UCS assessment,
   including these decision-theoretic rules, in areas of environmental health, see Shrader-Frechette, 1991,
   pp.100- 130.)
   As the preceding paragraphs reveal, it is important to evaluate the factual-scientific basis on which the
   environmental-health threats are assessed, prior to engaging in ethical evaluation, because decisions
   about the acceptability of a particular environmental-health risk are a function of many subtle factors.
   These include the actual magnitude or seriousness of the risk. Moreover, this magnitude and
   seriousness can be underestimated or overestimated, purely on the basis of considerations such as
   framing, the power of the studies, statistical-epidemiological methods, and decision rules.
   References
   Deborah Mayo, “Sociological Versus Metascientific Views of Risk Assessment,” in Acceptable Evidence,
   ed. Deborah Mayo and Rachelle Hollander, New York, Oxford University Press, 1991, ch. 12.
   Dade Moeller, Environmental Health, Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1997.
   National Research Council, Understanding Risk, Washington, DC, National Academy Press, 1996.
   Kristin Shrader-Frechette, Risk and Rationality: Philosophical Foundations for Populist Reforms,
   Berkeley, University of California Press, 1991.
   Module 7: Ethical Issues in Environmental and Occupational Health
   169
   Four Case Studies on Environmental-Health Controversies
   In order to determine how the preceding ethical debates, policy options, and scientific methods play
   respective roles in controversies over environmental health, it is useful to examine, in more detail,
   several important environmental-health disputes. These concern, respectively, (1) environmental
   injustice in Homer, Louisiana; (2) escalating cancer rates, (3) endocrine disruptors, and (4)
   occupational health in the US.
   For each case study, the issues of debate are introduced, and then readers are invited to consider
   various arguments, possible counterarguments, the need for additional information, the frames
   employed in the debate, relevant ethical values, and the interests of various stakeholders involved.
   References and citations for additional resources are provided. In addition, readers will find that every
   issue of the journal, Environmental Health Perspectives , provides additional information and potential
   case studies for discussion.
   Module 7: Ethical Issues in Environmental and Occupational Health
   170
   Case Study 1: Environmental Injustice in Homer, Louisiana
   Do all citizens have equal rights to protection against threats to environmental health? This question
   arises both because minorities and poor in developed nations bear greater-than-average environmentalhealth
   risks and also because those in developing nations bear greater health risks than those in the
   developed world, in large part because of the policies of developed nations. For example, according to
   the US General Accounting Office, roughly one-third of all US pesticide exports are products that are
   banned or not registered for use in the US because they are deemed too dangerous. Instead the US
   ships them abroad. As already mentioned, the World Health Organization estimates that approximately
   half a million cases of accidental pesticide poisoning occur annually, with a death-to-poisoning ratio of
   1 to 10. This means that each year, about 50,000 people die annually from pesticide poisoning, most in
   developing nations. One person is poisoned every minute from pesticides in developing nations
   (Mathews et al. 1986).
   Such disproportionate environmental-health impacts also affect those in the developed world. In 1983,
   African-American sociologist Bob Bullard largely began the whole area of study known as
   “environmental injustice” when he showed that (1996), from the 1920s through the 1970s, Houston
   placed almost all its city-owned landfills in African-American neighborhoods. Although they
   represented only 28 percent of the city’s population, African-American communities received 15 of 17
   landfills and 6 of 8 incinerators. Bullard showed not only that minorities across the US faced
   disproportionate environmental-health threats from incinerators and toxic-waste dumps, but also that
   these added risks increased other public-health problems–such as crime, poverty, and drugs–in
   minority communities. Comparing pollution in different California ZIP codes, researchers likewise
   showed that in the dirtiest US ZIP code, in Los Angeles, industries release 5 times as much pollution as
   in the next-worst ZIP code. They concluded it is no accident that the dirtiest ZIP code is 59 percent
   African-American. Thus African-Americans appear to be victims of a special public-health problem,
   environmental injustice.
   To understand alternative perspectives on the issue of environmental injustice, disproportionate
   environmental risks’ being imposed on poor people and minorities, consider a recent case, a proposal
   to build a multinational, highly-polluting, uranium-enrichment facility in an African-American
   community in Homer, Louisiana. One of the poorest towns in the US, Homer has a per capita income of
   only about $ 5,000 per year. Members of the local community were able to oppose the proposed
   Claiborne Enrichment Center facility only because of help from outside experts, and their stopping the
   facility in 1997 became the first major environmental-justice victory in the US.
   Questions for discussion:
   ???? Why would various parties want to locate a uranium-enrichment facility in Homer? Why might a
   multinational corporation want to build such a facility there? Why might residents welcome or
   oppose such a plan? Why would local businessmen or politicians welcome or oppose such a
   plan? Why would teachers, school administrators, and others concerned with public services
   welcome or oppose the building of such a facility?
   ???? Why would “outsiders,” like environmental activists take an interest in Homer and the Claiborne
   facility? Who are the outsiders and insiders in cases of potential environmental pollution, and
   which should have the greater “say” in decisions about building a potential polluter? Why?
   Module 7: Ethical Issues in Environmental and Occupational Health
   171
   ???? What data should inform a decision about whether to build? In addition to scientific data about
   the facility and its environmental impact, what other data are relevant? How certain or uncertain
   are these data? In the presence of scientific, economic, social, or other uncertainty, who should
   bear the burden of proof and why?
   ???? Can a community give informed consent to the initiation of a project like building the Claiborne
   facility? How would such consent be similar to a process of individual informed consent, and
   how would it differ? Consider what is discussed in Module 4 on community-based practice and
   research and on the process of sharing power within communities. Which methods discussed in
   that module might be useful in Homer?
   ???? What would need to be disclosed and to whom in order for the community of Homer to make an
   informed decision about building the Claiborne facility? Are all of the issues to be disclosed
   factual, or are there ethical assumptions that need to be disclosed as well? Who represents the
   community in such a decision? Is it the community’s decision to make?
   ???? Consider some of the issues raised in Module 2 on the Tuskegee Syphilis Study and issues of
   race. What role does the predominant race of the residents of Homer play in the siting of the
   Claiborne facility there? Would you argue that the facility will benefit those of a minority group,
   African-Americans, or would you argue that they are being singled out to bear an environmental
   burden?
   Module 7: Ethical Issues in Environmental and Occupational Health
   172
   Case Study 1: Discussion
   Henry Payne (1997) argued that the proposed Claiborne Enrichment Center, in Homer, Louisiana, would
   have been desirable for the local African-American community but that outside environmental activists
   misled the community into criticizing the facility, which actually would be in the community’s best
   interests. Payne argued that these activists prevented Homer citizens from getting the industry and the
   jobs that they want and need. He argued that the proposed facility would bring jobs and an improved
   economy to a poor area, and yet that it would cause no serious environmental harm. Payne takes, as
   facts, (1) that the facility would have benefited minorities nearby, (2) that these minorities wanted it, (3)
   that outside activists did not want the facility, (4) that the proposed plant would help the local
   economy, and (5) that the facility would cause no serious public health or environmental harm. In
   claiming (5), Payne assumed (a) that in a situation of uncertainty, with little scientific study, ethics does
   not require people to be “safe rather than sorry.” He also assumed (b) that the absence of positive
   evidence of harm from the facility, or ignorance about the facility, was the same as a guarantee of safety
   about the facility. Thus he made the ethical assumption (c) that public health advocates bear the burden
   of proof in alleging harm from a proposed plant. Finally, Payne assumed (d) that the requirements (see
   Beauchamp and Childress 1994) of free informed consent (disclosure, understanding, voluntariness, and
   rationality) were met in the Louisiana case and that the minority community therefore actually consented
   to the proposed facility.
   In assessing the adequacy of the Payne account, one would need to evaluate his factual assumptions (1)-
   (5) and his ethical assumptions (a)-(d). One also would need to take account of the fact that, in arguing
   for both his ethical and factual claims, Payne cited neither any scientific analyses nor any ethical and
   legal analyses to support his position. Instead, he relied on a commonsense assumption that
   manufacturing facilities bring economic benefits.
   Addressing Payne’s points, Daniel Wigley and Kristin Shrader-Frechette (1996), argued that both
   Payne’s factual and ethical assumptions are wrong, and they therefore claimed that siting the Louisiana
   facility is not justified. Shrader-Frechette and Wigley challenged both the factual assumption (1) that the
   plant would have benefited minorities and (5) as well as the ethical assumption (a) that ignorance about
   the facility justified believing it was safe. Analyzing the required environmental impact assessment (EIA)
   for the plant, they showed that its proponents failed to consider a number of costs of the facility and
   that these costs were likely to exceed the associated benefits. In particular, they argued that the jobs
   created by the plant would go to skilled white labor and professionals, not to unskilled blacks, and that
   the EIA included no probabilistic risk assessment of threats posed by the facility. Instead they revealed
   that the EIA made purely subjective judgments about site safety.
   Much of the Wigley and Shrader-Frechette (1996) analysis was devoted to showing that the EIA
   performed by the enrichment corporation (wishing to site the proposed facility) employed procedures
   that actually violated minority rights to free informed consent. In particular, Shrader-Frechette and
   Wigley showed, first, that the corporation did not disclose the actual nature of the facility to anyone,
   and instead asked citizens if they would like to have a manufacturing facility nearby. The company
   violated the disclosure requirement (for free informed consent), second, by covering up the radiological
   risks and health threats to be imposed by the facility and by failing to reveal that the onsite radiological
   wastes would not be covered by US government regulations. Third, the company did not reveal that the
   products of the multinational facility would likely be used abroad, not in the US. Nor did it reveal that
   Module 7: Ethical Issues in Environmental and Occupational Health
   173
   these multinational products would compete with higher quality US products, while Louisiana residents
   would bear the health risks of the facility. In addition, Shrader-Frechette and Wigley argued that the site
   EIS violated the criterion of voluntariness (for free informed consent) because the corporation polled
   only white residents living a great distance away from the proposed facility. It did not even seek the
   opinions of any of the minority residents who make up the entire population living within 5 miles of the
   plant. Thus, Shrader-Frechette and Wigley concluded that the Louisiana facility siting amounted to
   environmental racism or environmental injustice and that neither factual nor ethical arguments, given in
   the EIA, were capable of supporting it.
   References
   Robert Bullard, Confronting Environmental Racism, Boston, South End Press, 1996.
   Tom Beauchamp and James Childress, Principles of Biomedical Ethics, New York, Oxford University
   Press, 1994.
   J.T. Mathews et al., World Resources 1986, New York, Basic Books, 1986.
   Henry Payne,” Environmental Injustice,” Reason 29, no. 4 (September 1997), pp. 53-57.
   Daniel Wigley and Kristin Shrader-Frechette, “Environmental Justice: A Louisiana Case Study,” Journal
   of Agricultural and Environmental Ethics 9, no. 1(1996), pp. 61-82.
   Additional resources
   Ruth Faden and Tom Beauchamp, A History and Theory of Informed Consent, New York, Oxford
   University Press, 1986. (on informed consent, voluntariness)
   David Newton, Environmental Justice, Oxford, England, ABC-CLIO, 1996.
   Iris Marion Young, Justice and the Politics of Difference, Princeton, Princeton University Press, 1990.
   (on the ways in which policies and practices affect differently situated people differently)
   Module 7: Ethical Issues in Environmental and Occupational Health
   174
   Case Study 2: Escalating Cancer Rates: Assessing Vested Interests and the
   Published Literature
   Early in the pages of Silent Spring (1962), her classic book publicizing health effects of the use of
   chemical pesticides, Rachel Carson claimed that Americans ought to revise the US Bill of Rights. She
   pointed out that, when America was founded, Thomas Jefferson and his colleagues thought that the
   greatest threats to the “liberty, equality, and fraternity”—preached by the French and embraced in the
   colonies—were kings and unjust political institutions. Therefore Carson says they wrote the
   Constitution and the Bill of Rights so as to protect people against government incursions on personal
   liberty, health, and equality. If our founding mothers and fathers were alive today, however, Carson says
   that they would take care to rewrite the Bill of Rights so that citizens are protected against industrial
   pollutants, like chemical pesticides. She argues that powerful corporations (and corporations are
   defined as “persons” under the US Constitution ) constitute a grave threat to public health, public
   liberty, and public equality, and perhaps a graver threat than that of unjust government. Carson
   encourages public-health advocates to ask how there can be rights to liberty when dirty technologies
   take away the liberty to breathe clean air. Or how there can be rights to life, when hazardous wastes
   pollute the water that is necessary to life.
   Not everyone would agree with Carson’s analysis of the threats to environmental health today. In the
   case of cancer, for example, the scientific community and the ethical community are divided on the
   causes of the diseases and on the appropriate ethical response to it. As already mentioned, according to
   the US National Research Council (1993), cancer will soon become the leading cause of death of
   Americans. Moreover cancer is not a disease of old age, as cancer victims die, on average, 15 years
   earlier than others. It is the leading cause of death of children between the ages of 2 and 18, and the
   leading cause of death of women in their thirties. In fact, since 1950, the cancer rate for children under
   age 15 has increased by 32 percent. Cancer incidence, in the general population, is increasing six times
   faster than overall cancer mortality is decreasing (NIH 2000).
   Because cancer is one of the major environmental-health problems, it is important to identify its causes
   and to prevent them. The environmental and medical communities tend to agree with Samuel Epstein
   (1998), that industrial pollutants are the major problem, while the governmental and industrial
   communities tend to agree with Bruce Ames that genetics and lifestyle are the main causes of cancer.
   Initial questions for discussion:
   ???? Why do you think that environmental and medical communities on the one hand, and
   governmental and industrial communities on the other, would tend to differ in their accounts of
   the causes of cancer? What interests are at stake for each “camp?” How do the influences on
   each camp affect the research agendas of each group?
   Martin Walker (2000) uses the case of well-known British epidemiologist Sir Richard Doll to illustrate
   the thesis that scientists’ conclusions regarding the causes of cancer can be affected by their vested
   interests. Because many scientists obtain their funding from corporations, Walker (2000) and medical
   doctor Samuel Epstein (1998) argue that such scientists are pressured to defend positions favorable to
   industry. This can lead them to neglect or underestimate public-health risks caused by industrial
   practices and to overestimate natural causes of disease, according to Walker. In particular, Walker
   Module 7: Ethical Issues in Environmental and Occupational Health
   175
   (2000) argues that some prominent scientists (like Bruce Ames, Richard Doll, Richard Peto, and Lois
   Gold) who blame cancer on lifestyle and genetics are guilty of both ethical and scientific errors.
   Questions for discussion
   ???? In the preceding paragraph, what is meant by “natural causes of disease?” With what are such
   “natural causes” contrasted?
   ???? What sorts of scientific and ethical errors might a commentator like Walker have in mind when
   he suggests that some scientists ignore or underestimate public health risks of industrial
   practices?
   ???? Are there changes that could be made in the way science is done that would reduce the
   likelihood that scientists would make these sorts of errors because of their “vested interests?”
   ???? Can scientists and academics be truly “disinterested?” How can they reduce the degree to which
   they have vested interests or are insufficiently disinterested? If it is true that people always have
   interests and are always beholden to some people, projects, or priorities other than the pursuit
   of truth, is it better to be beholden to some people, projects, or priorities as opposed to
   others?
   ???? What are the people, projects, and priorities that influence your research agenda and the
   conduct of your work? How do these influences affect the outcome of your research? What are
   the relevant differences among influences on the choice of research question, influences on the
   funding of some research projects (and not others), influences on the outcome of research (i.e.,
   findings), and influences on the dissemination of research findings? Are some sources, types,
   and targets of influence more troubling than others?
   ???? What are the strongest sources of influence on those you work with in your department, work
   unit, lab, or school? Would those sources of influence be subject to the sorts of criticism that
   Walker offers?
   ???? It would seem ideal for those private parties (e.g., corporations) that impose potential health
   risks to fund research to investigate the magnitude of those risks and to monitor the public’s
   health. Should such private entities bear this responsibility? How could they discharge this
   responsibility without placing those who investigate such risks in a position of conflicting
   interests?
   Module 7: Ethical Issues in Environmental and Occupational Health
   176
   Case Study 2: Discussion
   On the ethical side, Walker says (a) that some prominent scientists cover up studies showing the
   negative health effects of industrial chemicals, for example, and (b) that instead of empirically
   investigating environmental-health effects, they typically rely instead on the mere opinions of scientific
   colleagues who are employed by (or subcontractors to) industries that use or manufacture toxic
   chemicals. In addition, Walker argues (c) that those (who blame lifestyle and genetics, not
   environmental pollutants, for most cancer) also are biased because their research is funded by vested
   corporate interests and not by disinterested scientific foundations. Finally, he claims (d) that
   disinterested academic and medical scientists have sharply criticized the methods used in such industryfunded
   studies.
   On the scientific side, Walker says that a major reason the “cancer is caused by lifestyle not
   environmental pollution” advocates err is that they typically do not fund or do research on the
   epidemiological causes of diseases like cancer. Instead Walker says they tend to do only basic research
   on the theoretical mechanisms according to which cancer incidence occurs. Thus, he says they claim
   there is no evidence of environmental causes of cancer because they do not investigate possible
   environmental causes of cancer. In general, Walker accuses those (who say cancer is caused mainly by
   genetics and lifestyle, not environmental factors) of violating personal and professional ethical codes.
   They violate ethics, he suggests, by virtue of the fact that they tend to consider only the data and
   research that support the industry position, whereas they simply ignore all other information. In thus
   defending his view, Walker assumes that because vested interests tend to fund research that denies any
   environmental causes of many cancers, therefore that research is more suspect than that funded by
   disinterested government, academic, or medical agencies. He also assumes that the cancer analyses of
   public-health officials are likely to be more plausible than those of corporate-funded researchers.
   In contrast to Walker, Bruce Ames and Lois Swirsky Gold (2000) claim cancer is caused mainly by
   naturally-occurring chemicals, genetics, and poor diet, not environmental factors. As a result, they
   contend that focus on environmental causes of cancer actually threatens public health and the common
   good because the focus does not address the main causes of cancer. Ames and Gold also maintain that
   investing public funds in research on the effects of synthetic chemicals damages public health by
   diverting resources away from more serious threats.
   In presenting their case, Ames and Gold make both ethical and scientific assumptions. On the ethical
   side, they assume (a) that scientific research ought to address the most serious health threats first,
   namely those that kill the greatest number of people. They also assume (b) that those who create such
   health threats, or who profit from them, have no special ethical obligation to minimize those threats or
   to do research on them, provided that such threats are smaller than those arising from other social
   activities, like driving an automobile or smoking cigarettes. In other words, they make the ethical
   assumption (c) that the magnitude of public health threats, rather than the equality and fairness
   associated with their imposition, is what determines their societal importance. Pursuing this same
   magnitude or quantitative assumption, Ames and Gold argue that people worry needlessly about
   industry caused carcinogens (from things like toxic chemicals), because they say natural carcinogens in
   foods (such as coffee and peanuts) present greater risks than industrial substances. Following ethical
   assumptions (a), (b), and (c), Ames and Gold argue that public health officials ought to pay greater
   attention to natural carcinogens and less attention to manmade carcinogens. In other words, they make
   the ethical assumption (d) that private interests may contribute to public health risks, without ethical
   Module 7: Ethical Issues in Environmental and Occupational Health
   177
   violations, provided that the harm arising from their contributions is of a lesser magnitude than the
   dangers posed by natural sources. They also make the ethical assumption (e) that the liberty of private
   interests, operating in the market, is more important than mere possibilities of industrial harm,
   especially when the possible harm appears to be quite minimal, as compared to that caused by natural
   carcinogens.
   References
   Bruce N. Ames and Lois Swirsky Gold, “Paracelsus to Parascience: The Environmental Cancer
   Distraction,” Mutation Research 447, no. 1 (January 17, 2000), pp. 3-13.
   Rachel Carson, Silent Spring, Boston, Houghton Mifflin Company, 1962.
   Samuel Epstein, The Politics of Cancer Revisited, Fremont Center, NY, East Ridge Press, 1998.
   National Institutes of Health, Cancer Rates and Risks, http://seer.cancer.gov/pub lications/raterisk/
   (US Government: US National Institutes of Health and US National Cancer Institute, 2000).
   National Research Council, Pesticides in the Diets of Infants and Children, Washington D.C., National
   Academy Press, 1993.
   Martin Walker, “Sir Richard Doll: A Questionable Pillar of the British Cancer Establishment,” The
   Ecologist (March/April 1998), pp. 82-92.
   Module 7: Ethical Issues in Environmental and Occupational Health
   178
   Case Study 3: Endocrine Disruptors: Approaches to Uncertainty
   Many of the threats to environmental health arise from chemicals, especially because in the US, there
   are about 80,000 different chemicals used in industrial and agricultural processes in the US, and only
   about 2 percent have been tested for toxicity, whereas only about one-half of one percent have been
   tested for carcinogenicity, in part because testing is so expensive. In recent years, the environmental
   health threat from chemicals has mounted, because very low doses of organic compounds (like
   chlorine), doses far below that found to induce cancer, are now thought to be responsible for
   reproductive-related disorders associated with endocrine disruption. Behaving as synthetic estrogens,
   these endocrine disruptors are believed to be responsible for the declining sperm count in males, a
   decline evident since the 1950s. As a result of many small doses of organic compounds, males of many
   species have become feminized and, as a result, the species have gone extinct. In other cases, the
   increase of estrogens has caused a variety of additional, reproductive-related cancers (Colborn et al.
   1993).
   Theo Colborn and her colleagues (1993) argue that large amounts of chemicals have been released into
   the environment since World War II. Many of these chemicals, Colborn argues, have disrupted the
   endocrine systems of animals. (The endocrine system consists of glands that regulate various bodily
   functions, such as growth, reproduction, and nutrition, by means of hormones). Because many humanmade
   industrial chemicals act as synthetic estrogens, they can disrupt the bodily functions that natural
   hormones regulate. Even minute exposures to these artificial chemicals, at any point in life, can pass
   them on to offspring during pregnancy and lactation. Colborn and her scientific colleagues argue that
   such chemicals can have adverse effects on reproductive and immune systems in humans and wildlife,
   even at levels far below those necessary to induce cancer. As a consequence, she argues for caution in
   employing these chemicals, a caution that would require much tighter environmental regulation. Some
   of these endocrine disrupting chemicals include PCBs, dioxin, and DDT. Colborn and those who argue
   that even small amounts of such endocrine-disrupting chemicals are risky thus assume that ethics
   requires one, in the face of incomplete scientific information, to use the precautionary principle. (The
   precautionary principle specifies that positive evidence of societal harm is not necessary before one
   takes precautions to protect public health. The rationale for the principle is that if one always waits until
   conclusive evidence of definite harm is available, then many public-health threats would be so advanced
   that it would be far more difficult to stop them and to prevent catastrophe. Proponents of the
   precautionary principle also argue that failure to employ the principle would amount to using humans as
   guinea pigs in industrial and economic experiments. Finally, proponents of the principle argue that
   because vested interests are so powerful, they often keep government from doing the necessary studies
   to confirm public-health harms arising from activities of those vested interests. They note, for example,
   that less than two percent of industrial and agricultural chemicals (of the 80,000 to 100,000 currently
   in use) have actually been tested for any health effects. In the absence of complete scientific studies
   about some hazard, proponents of the precautionary principle say it is necessary to take extra
   precautions to protect public health).
   Besides supporting the precautionary principle, Colborn and other scientists (who argue that even small
   amounts of endocrine-disrupting chemicals likely are dangerous) claim that much scientific and publichealth
   evaluation of these chemicals has been scientifically inadequate. They say (1) endocrinedisrupting
   effects occur at levels several orders of magnitude lower than those needed to cause cancer,
   and that government currently requires no tests for such effects. Yet, they note (2) that laboratory tests
   Module 7: Ethical Issues in Environmental and Occupational Health
   179
   and field data have revealed endocrine-disrupting effects on other animals. Besides, they claim (3) that
   the best scientific explanation of the reason for the continuing decline in human sperm counts, since
   1950, is that humans are responding in the same way, in response to these chemicals, as other animals.
   Factually, Colborn and her coauthors assume that seriously damaging effects of endocrine disruptors,
   on other species, argues for caution in exposing humans to these chemicals.
   On the ethical side, Colborn and her coauthors recommend more study of potentially endocrine
   disrupting chemicals, as well as their precautionary regulation, for at least two additional reasons. (A)
   They say ethics requires one to be especially careful of low-dose chemical effects because they often are
   incurred during neonatal periods but not manifested till middle age; ethics requires extra precaution
   with effects that are delayed, and therefore hard to detect, and with effects that are most damaging to
   the most vulnerable individuals, namely developing children. (B) They also say that ethics requires one
   to be especially careful of these chemicals because their effects are permanent and irreversible.
   Reference
   Theo Colborn et al. , “Environmental Endocrine Disruptors,” Environmental Health Perspectives 101, no.
   5 (October 1993), pp. 378-384.
   Questions for discussion
   ???? The whole issue of endocrine disruptors raises the question of how to behave in the face of
   environmental-health threats that are uncertain, that have not been definitively proved. Should
   one be a health conservative and assume the worst, in order to safeguard the gene pool and
   future generations? Or should one be a health liberal and not take drastic and costly steps to
   reduce endocrine disruptors until the scientific data are clear? Whose interests are served by the
   “health conservative” and “health liberal” positions?
   ???? In conditions of uncertainty, who in society should be most stringently protected from health
   risks: the majority, the average person, the least-well-off, the most vulnerable, those who
   protect themselves, those who are not themselves “risk imposers?” What values support
   protecting each of these groups: fairness, respect for autonomy, utility (promoting good),
   beneficence, equality?
   ???? What are the arguments in favor of the precautionary principle? What arguments can be made
   against following it? In the case of endocrine disruptors, what factual disputes could be raised
   against Colborn and her colleagues? What ethically-based arguments could be raised against
   her advocacy of the precautionary principle in this case? What role should concern for economic
   progress play in arguments for and against costly plans to reduce endocrine disruptors? What
   role(s) does uncertainty play in arguments about both environmental and economic impact of
   endocrine disruptors and their reduction?
   ???? In balancing risks and potential benefits, what, if any, special weight should be given to risks of
   harms that would be permanent and irreversible? How should risks whose associated harms do
   not manifest themselves for some time be treated in the balancing of risks and potential
   benefits?
   Module 7: Ethical Issues in Environmental and Occupational Health
   180
   Case Study 3: Discussion
   Those who tend to follow an egalitarian or contractarian ethical approach, like that of John Rawls (1971),
   argue that, in situations of scientific or medical uncertainty, one ought to be careful to protect the leastwell-
   off, or most vulnerable, persons. These egalitarian ethicists attempt to follow the rule to treat
   people equally or consistently. One ought to follow a maximin decision rule, says Rawls, in situations of
   uncertainty characterized by (a) potentially disastrous consequences, (b) no overarching benefit to be
   obtained from taking the grave risk, and (c) little knowledge of the actual probability of disaster. The
   maximin decision rule specifies that, in situations of uncertainty, one’s first or major goal ought to be
   not to treat people equally but to help the least-well-off people first. Ethicists who support use of
   egalitarian principle also say that it is not fair that one person should impose a potentially catastrophic
   risk on another, especially if the probability is uncertain, when the risk imposer gains from his action,
   while the risk victim may bear potentially great losses to which he has not consented and for which he
   has not been compensated.
   On the other hand, those who tend to follow a utilitarian ethical approach, like that of John Harsanyi
   (1975), argue that following a maximin rule, in situations characterized by (a), (b), and (c) would be
   likely to thwart economic progress. They also say that following the maximin rule is not egalitarian but
   instead gives too much weight to the interests of potential victims. Finally they argue that rational
   people, in a high-risk situation of uncertainty, would be likely to maximize average expected utility and
   not follow a maximin rule. Rules to maximize average expected utility call for maximizing the average
   welfare of the average person. They do not call either for equalizing welfare or helping the worst-off.
   Alicia Lubchenko (1990) and her colleagues, at the industry-funded American Council on Science and
   Health, argue that people need not be concerned about endocrine-disrupting chemicals, although these
   chemicals have been discovered to have an effect on wildlife. Lubchenko et al. say there is nothing to
   worry about, because humans are exposed to lower doses than is wildlife. Lubchenko et al. also argue
   that the chemicals are similar to estrogenic substances found in many plants, including those that
   humans eat, and that use of some estrogenic chemicals is decreasing. She argues that there is
   insufficient evidence to show that these chemicals actually harm humans. Lubchenko and her colleagues
   (who argue that so-called “endocrine disruptors” present no serious public health threats) thus disagree
   with Colborn et al. on both factual and ethical grounds. Factually speaking, Lubchenko assumes (1) that
   wildlife exposures to endocrine disruptors are greater than human exposures, even though Colborn
   denies this point, and even though humans are higher on the food chain than virtually all other animals
   observed to have endocrine-disrupting disabilities. (2) Lubchenko also notes that endocrine-disrupting
   chemicals are very weak, as compared to the normal human estrogens which they mimic, (3) that the
   link between specific chemicals and causal effects of endocrine disruption is controversial, and (4) that
   the many studies alleging a decline in male sperm counts also are controversial. In the face of their
   factual disagreement with Colborn et al., Lubchenko and her coauthors make a number of ethical
   assumptions different from those of Colborn. They assume (a) that missing or controversial studies do
   not argue, ethically, for more regulation, or more precaution, regarding use of endocrine disruptors,
   whereas Colborn et al. argue that public health protection requires precaution, in the face of ignorance.
   Lubchenko et al. also assume (b) that if humans are naturally exposed to estrogens , therefore there is
   likely no serious harm and no ethical violation involved in exposing them to additional doses of
   synthetic estrogens, that is, to estrogen disruptors. Thus, even if Colborn and Lubchenko agreed on the
   Module 7: Ethical Issues in Environmental and Occupational Health
   181
   facts about endocrine disruptors, they still would disagree about the appropriate ethical response to this
   potential public-health problem.
   References
   Theo Colborn et al. , “Environmental Endocrine Disruptors,” Environmental Health Perspectives 101, no.
   5 (October 1993), pp. 378-384.
   John Harsanyi, “Can the Maximin Principle Serve as a Basis for Morality? A Critique of John Rawls’s
   Theory,” American Political Science Review 69, no. 2 (1975), pp. 594-602.
   Alicia Lubchenko et al., “Endocrine Disruptors,” New York, American Council on Science and Health,
   1999.
   John Rawls, A Theory of Justice, Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1971.
   Additional resources
   Ronald Dworkin, Taking Rights Seriously, Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1977. (on rights,
   economic analysis in assigning responsibility and legal liability)
   Bernard Williams, Utilitarianism: For and Against, Cambridge, Cambridge University Press, 1973. (on
   utilitarian approaches in ethics)
   Module 7: Ethical Issues in Environmental and Occupational Health
   182
   Case Study 4: Occupational Health in the US
   One of the most serious questions of environmental health is whether everyone ought to have equal
   rights to protection against environmental harm, or whether workers ought to be allowed to trade some
   safety in exchange for higher wages. Elephant handlers at the Philadelphia Zoo, for example, receive an
   extra $ 1000 per year, in exchange for the risks they face of being mauled by the elephants. On the one
   hand, in many nations of the world, there is no double standard for environmental health risks faced by
   workers, and pollution control is required to be as stringent for them as for members of the public.
   Countries that typically have no such double standard for workplace risk include Germany, Sweden, and
   Denmark, and the former Soviet states that are now republics. On the other hand, in the Englishspeaking
   nations of the world, as well as Norway, there does tend to be a double standard for workplace
   and public risk, in part because these countries have been influenced by the economic theories of Adam
   Smith. Smith argued that a compensating wage differential (CWD), or hazard pay, justifies higher
   workplace risks; he says that workers may accept higher risks if they freely consent to the higher risks
   they bear in the workplace (Shrader-Frechette 2002, ch. 7).
   In most nations of the world, for example, nuclear workers follow the regulatory standards set by the
   International Commission on Radiological Protection (ICRP 1991), according to which nuclear workers
   are allowed to receive, each year, up to 50 times the dose of radiation that members of the public are
   allowed to receive. Proponents of the double standard argue that workers are compensated for the extra
   risk and also that it would be paternalistic not to allow workers to take the risks they want (Viscusi
   1992). Otherwise, workers’ autonomy would be violated. Proponents also maintain that allowing a
   compensating wage differential maximizes overall welfare in society, because some risky jobs need to be
   performed, and it is better for them to be performed voluntarily. Besides, they note that the CWD
   promotes efficiency because it allows people to make the tradeoffs that benefit them.
   References
   International Commission on Radiological Protection (ICRP), 1990 Recommendations, Oxford,
   Pergamon Press, 1991.
   Kristin Shrader-Frechette, Environmental Justice: Creating Equality, Reclaiming Democracy, New York,
   Oxford University Press, 2002.
   Kip Viscusi, Fatal Tradeoffs, New York, Oxford, 1992.
   Initial questions for discussion:
   ???? What arguments might be made against such a double standard regarding the degree of risk
   workers may incur as compared to members of the public?
   ???? Think about products you are currently using or wearing. Do you believe that some workers
   involved in the products’ production incurred greater risks than other workers or members of
   the public were exposed to? What was the nature of those risks? Do you believe those workers
   voluntarily consent to incur those greater risks? What information would you need in order to
   decide? How would you devise a compensation scale that reflected those differentials in risk?
   What factors would you take into account? What values would you employ to argue for your
   plan?
   Module 7: Ethical Issues in Environmental and Occupational Health
   183
   Case Study 4: Discussion of Initial Questions
   Opponents of the double standard claim that the higher risks to which many chemical and nuclear
   workers, for example, are exposed, harms not merely them but their children and the gene pool
   (Herbert and Landrigan 2000). All amounts of radiation are risky, and only 35 ev are sufficient to
   damage DNA. Opponents of the double standard also argue that workers typically have not given free
   informed consent to the higher risks, and instead that they have been forced to take risky jobs, not
   because they want them but because they are poor or in dire financial straits. Opponents of the double
   standard likewise say that often workers do not know the risks they face, so they have not really
   consented. They maintain, as well, that for poor people, non-unionized people (about 85 percent of the
   workforce in the US), people without college educations, old people, women, and minorities, there is
   no compensating wage differential, regardless of the risk. They claim that there merely appears to be a
   differential because all workers are lumped together, aggregated, and their pay averaged together, on
   the basis of the risks they face (Shrader-Frechette 2002, ch. 7).
   References
   Robin Herbert and Philip Landrigan, “Work-Related Death: A Continuing Epidemic,” American Journal
   of Public Health 90, no. 4 (April 2000), pp. 541-545.
   Kristin Shrader-Frechette, Environmental Justice: Creating Equality, Reclaiming Democracy, New York,
   Oxford University Press, 2002.
   Module 7: Ethical Issues in Environmental and Occupational Health
   184
   Case Study 4: Part 2
   Much of the debate over the ethical acceptability of worker consent to the higher workplace risks they
   face is focused on the state of worker health. If worker health is actually getting better, then concerns
   about harm, consent, and compensation may be misplaced, while, if worker health is getting worse, then
   this fact lends credibility to these concerns. The US Department of Health and Human Services (HHS
   1999) suggests grounds for believing that worker health is improving. It points out that, from 1933 to
   1997, deaths from work-related injuries decreased from 37 per 100,000 workers to 4 per 100,000
   workers. This improvement is attributed to a number of factors, including efforts by labor and
   management, improved education, stricter regulation, and development of safer equipment.
   In arguing that worker health is improving, the US Department of Health and Human Services (HHS)
   makes a number of ethical and scientific assumptions. On the factual side, the HHS notes that US
   workplace fatalities have decreased, especially in coal mines. The HHS thus assumes (1) that a decline in
   fatal workplace injuries argues for an improvement in worker health and (2) that the decline in fatal
   coal-mine accidents is typical of the improvement in worker health and welfare.
   Reference
   US Department of Health and Human Services (HHS), Achievements in Occupational Health, 1900-
   1999,” Morbidity and Mortality Weekly Report 48, no. 22 (June 11, 1999), pp. 461-469.
   Questions for discussion
   ???? Remembering the discussion of vested interests in case study 2 (on the reporting cancer rates
   and causes), identify the parties who have competing interests with regard to the data collected
   and reported by the HHS. Are there other data that you would want to use to assess trends in
   workplace safety?
   ???? Remembering that choice of a frame used to conduct an assessment, such as an assessment of
   workplace safety, can affect that assessment, identify the frame being used in the HHS
   assessment and suggest other frames. What are the arguments in favor of the use of each frame?
   Module 7: Ethical Issues in Environmental and Occupational Health
   185
   Case Study 4: Part 2 Discussion
   On the ethical side, one can question whether the frame of fatal workplace injuries, however, accurately
   reveals an improvement in worker health and whether coal miners are accurate indicators of actual
   workplace conditions. According to Leigh (1995), only about 17 percent of workplace fatalities, about
   17,000 per year in the US, arises from on-the-job accidents, like those documented by HHS. The
   remaining approximately 80,000 US workplace fatalities come from cancers induced by workplace
   exposure to hazardous substances (like radiation) and toxic chemicals. These 80,000 additional annual
   fatalities are much harder to detect, in part because there is no follow-up of employees who have
   retired, moved on, or quit work due to illness. Nor are there epidemiological studies or records kept of
   worker illnesses or cancers. If any records are kept, they are managed by the employers. Thus, the
   workers who succumb to latent, harder-to-detect cancers may represent a “silent majority” who (the
   HSS assumes) have no obvious health effects yet have much greater hidden health effects. If one
   assumes that the question of worker health can be “framed” purely in terms of acute problems, fatalities
   caused by on-the-job injuries, then the HHS may be correct that occupational health is increasing. If the
   frame is inaccurate, however, then the HHS may be incorrect. Likewise, the HHS may be incorrect to
   assume that coal miners represent typical groups in which workplace safety has improved. After all, coal
   mining has been known to be dangerous for centuries. Yet approximately 5,000 new chemicals, for
   example, are introduced into US industrial and agricultural processes each year, and most are not
   tested. If, as already noted, less than two percent of the approximately 80,000-100,000 industrial
   chemicals have been tested in any sense, then it may be that the largest workplace risks are in areas of
   unknown exposures and unknown effects, rather than in well-known areas of hazards such as coal
   mining.
   Herbert and Landrigan (2000), however, offer grounds for questioning whether worker health is
   improving. Instead of focusing on acute problems, such as fatalities from workplace injuries, Robin
   Herbert and Philip Landrigan say that most workplace-related deaths are not from acute problems such
   as injury but from cancers, and that the cancers typically are not tracked or recorded as occupationrelated.
   Herbert and Landrigan say that minorities are over-represented in jobs associated with toxic
   substances and that approximately 65,000 people die each year from occupation-related diseases,
   mainly cancer. They argue that, at least on the cancer front, workplaces are not safer, and that
   occupational health will improve only if there are better industrial-hygiene controls and substitution of
   less harmful products for toxic chemicals.
   References
   Robin Herbert and Philip Landrigan, “Work-Related Death: A Continuing Epidemic,” American Journal
   of Public Health 90, no. 4 (April 2000), pp. 541-545.
   J. Paul Leigh, Causes of Death in the Workplace, London, Quorum, 1995.
   Module 7: Ethical Issues in Environmental and Occupational Health
   186
   Case Study 4: Part 3
   In arguing that worker health is not improving, Herbert and Landrigan make a number of ethical and
   scientific assumptions. On the scientific side, they assume (1) that the frame of fatalities induced by
   workplace injuries is not an adequate measure of worker health and safety and (2) that until technology
   and manufacturing change radically, to use safer products and processes, worker health and safety will
   not improve substantially. Herbert and Landrigan also make the scientific or factual assumption (3) that
   because so little good data on workplace-induced disease exists, and because many workplace-induced
   diseases are not uniquely caused in the workplace (people have other exposures to chemicals and
   hazardous substances), it is very difficult to get firm data on workplace hazards. Nevertheless, they say
   it is clear that acute injuries (the frame used by HHS) grossly underestimates workplace caused deaths.
   Thus they tend to accept the workplace fatalities given by Leigh (1995).
   References
   Robin Herbert and Philip Landrigan, “Work-Related Death: A Continuing Epidemic,” American Journal
   of Public Health 90, no. 4 (April 2000), pp. 541-545.
   J. Paul Leigh, Causes of Death in the Workplace, London, Quorum, 1995.
   Questions for discussion
   ???? What ethical or value-laden assumptions are implicit in Herbert and Landrigan’s argument that
   worker health is not improving?
   ???? Is it of ethical concern if particular groups within American society—e.g., minority group
   members, women, or the poor—bear a disproportionate burden of workplace injuries? Which
   ethical values support such concern?
   ???? Is there is a responsibility to protect workers from workplace hazards? If so, who bears (or
   shares) that responsibility? Does it matter whether the workers are citizens, legal or illegal
   residents, or workers in other countries?
   ???? If it would be of ethical concern that particular groups within American society bear a
   disproportionate burden of workplace injuries, does the same concern arise if particular groups
   within global society bear such a burden, e.g., particular nations, regions, or groups within
   other nations? If workplace injuries are of concern internationally or globally, what recourse to
   remedies do individuals, governmental agencies, and organizations within the US have?
   Module 7: Ethical Issues in Environmental and Occupational Health
   187
   Case Study 4: Part 3 Discussion
   On the ethical side, Herbert and Landrigan assume (a) that completeness requires one to take account
   of latent, hard-to-identify cancer fatalities, induced by workplace exposures and (b) that fairness and
   justice require one to examine the health of minorities and the poor, because their workplace health
   threats are more severe than those faced by non-minorities and by middle-class workers. They also
   claim that there are ethical problems associated with claiming that US worker health is improving,
   especially given the fact that many US industries engage in an export of hazards so as to avoid US
   regulations. Herbert and Landrigan believe that this “export of hazards” is one reason that the
   International Labor Organization affirms that there are about a million workplace-related fatalities in the
   world annually. This number, they say (Herbert and Landrigan 2000) is more than double the number
   killed annually in wars throughout the world, and more than 100,000 greater than those killed in
   automobile accidents.
   Reference
   Robin Herbert and Philip Landrigan, “Work-Related Death: A Continuing Epidemic,” American Journal
   of Public Health 90, no. 4 (April 2000), pp. 541-545.
   Additional resources
   Peter Dorman, Markets and Mortality: Economics, Dangerous Work, and the Value of Human Life,
   Cambridge, Cambridge University Press, 1996.
   Elaine Draper, Risky Business, Cambridge, Cambridge University Press, 1991.
   Ruth Faden and Tom Beauchamp, A History and Theory of Informed Consent, New York, Oxford
   University Press, 1986. (on informed consent, voluntariness)
   Charles Levenstein and John Wooding (eds.), Work, Health, and Environment, New York, Guilford,
   1997.
   David Newton, Environmental Justice, Oxford, England, ABC-CLIO, 1996.
   Module 7: Ethical Issues in Environmental and Occupational Health
   188
   Tools for Best Practice and Policy Assessment
   In creating a case study of one’s own, on topics of environmental health, one might focus on a number
   of key ethical themes, such as consent, equity, or compensation. With respect to consent, several types
   of cases lend themselves to discussion, especially those dealing with siting a LULU (locally
   unacceptable land use), a hazardous facility such as a waste dump. Virtually every community has some
   LULU, and there are many LULUs that deal with issues of national interest, such as the proposed Yucca
   Mountain High-Level Nuclear Waste Repository in Nevada. Because there are so many controversial
   sitings that allegedly threaten public or environmental health, it should be easy to investigate whether
   the conditions for free informed consent are actually satisfied in one or more of these proposed sitings.
   With respect to equity and equal protection, it might be useful to discover, in one’s own community,
   whether the poorest-income areas are those with the highest levels of air pollution. There are
   databases, some on the Internet, that show toxic releases in different areas. Air sampling is also an
   empirical strategy that might be used. By sampling air and by examining problems associated with
   “medical geography” databases, it should be possible to see whether there are potential problems of
   environmental injustice and whether there are any offsetting benefits (such as cheaper housing prices or
   increased employment) that might compensate for the alleged inequities in environmental-health
   protection.
   Compensation issues in risky workplaces might be addressed by cases investigating environmental
   health in local places of employment. It might be instructive to determine, for a given workplace,
   whether there is indeed a compensating wage differential, and what its level is. It also might be
   instructive to examine whether, apart from compensation, workers in risky jobs have been adequately
   informed about the relevant environmental-health risks. Virtually all of the case studies related to
   environmental and occupational health can be addressed by examining some of the readings selected in
   the case studies for this module, and then following those investigations as a model for how one might
   examine ethical issues. The cases, however, will be more interesting if students address issues,
   pollutants, workplaces, and problems faced in their own communities. Such emphases will bring ethical
   issues “home.”
   Module 7: Ethical Issues in Environmental and Occupational Health
   189
   Bibliography of References and Additional Resources
   Bruce N. Ames and Lois Swirsky Gold, “Paracelsus to Parascience: The Environmental Cancer
   Distraction,” Mutation Research 447, no. 1 (January 17, 2000), pp. 3-13.
   Tom Beauchamp and James Childress, Principles of Biomedical Ethics, New York, Oxford University
   Press, 1994.
   Robert Bullard, Confronting Environmental Racism, Boston, South End Press, 1996.
   Rachel Carson, Silent Spring, Boston, Houghton Mifflin Company, 1962.
   Theo Colborn et al. , “Environmental Endocrine Disruptors,” Environmental Health Perspectives 101, no.
   5 (October 1993), pp. 378-384.
   Carl Cranor, Regulating Toxic Substances, New York, Oxford University Press, 1994.
   Peter Dorman, Markets and Mortality: Economics, Dangerous Work, and the Value of Human Life,
   Cambridge, Cambridge University Press, 1996.
   Elaine Draper, Risky Business, Cambridge, Cambridge University Press, 1991.
   Peter Drucker, “Saving the Crusade,” in Kristin Shrader-Frechette (ed.), Environmental Ethics, Pacific
   Grove, CA, Boxwood Press, 1991, PP. 201-207.
   Ronald Dworkin, Taking Rights Seriously, Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1977.
   Environmental Health Perspectives (journal; all issues are relevant).
   Samuel Epstein, The Politics of Cancer Revisited, Fremont Center, NY, East Ridge Press, 1998.
   Ruth Faden and Tom Beauchamp, A History and Theory of Informed Consent, New York, Oxford
   University Press, 1986.
   Sander Greenland, “Science versus Public Health Actions,” American Journal of Public Health, 133, no.
   5 (1991) pp. 435-436.
   John Harsanyi, “Can the Maximin Principle Serve as a Basis for Morality? A Critique of John Rawls’s
   Theory,” American Political Science Review 69, no. 2 (1975), pp. 594-602.
   Robin Herbert and Philip Landrigan, “Work-Related Death: A Continuing Epidemic,” American Journal
   of Public Health 90, no. 4 (April 2000), pp. 541-545.
   Bernard Hoekman and Aaditya Mattoo (eds.), Development, Trade, and the WTO, New York, World
   Bank, 2002.
   International Commission on Radiological Protection (ICRP), 1990 Recommendations, Oxford,
   Pergamon Press, 1991.
   J.C. Lashoff et al. , Health and Life Sciences Division of the U.S. Office of Technology Assessment,
   Assessment of Technologies for Determining Cancer Risks from the Environment, Washington D.C.,
   Office of Technology Assessment, 1981.
   J. Paul Leigh, Causes of Death in the Workplace, London, Quorum, 1995.
   Charles Levenstein and John Wooding (eds.), Work, Health, and Environment, New York, Guilford,
   1997.
   Module 7: Ethical Issues in Environmental and Occupational Health
   190
   Harold W. Lewis, Technological Risk, New York, Norton, 1990.
   Alicia Lubchenko et al., “Endocrine Disruptors,” New York, American Council on Science and Health,
   1999.
   J.T. Mathews et al., World Resources 1986, New York, Basic Books, 1986.
   Deborah Mayo, “Sociological Versus Metascientific Views of Risk Assessment,” in Acceptable Evidence,
   ed. Deborah Mayo and Rachelle Hollander, New York, Oxford University Press, 1991, ch. 12.
   Dade Moeller, Environmental Health, Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1997.
   Ralph Nader, The Ralph Nader Reader, New York, Seven Stories Press, 2000.
   National Cancer Institute (NCI), Surveillance, Epidemiology, and End Results, Cancer Statistics Review
   1973-1994, Bethesda, MD, NCI, 1994.
   National Institutes of Health, Cancer Rates and Risks, http://seer.cancer.gov/pub lications/raterisk/
   (US Government: US National Institutes of Health and US National Cancer Institute, 2000).
   National Research Council, Pesticides in the Diets of Infants and Children, Washington D.C., National
   Academy Press, 1993.
   National Research Council, Risk Assessment in the Federal Government, Washington, DC, National
   Academy Press, 1983.
   National Research Council, Understanding Risk, Washington, DC, National Academy Press, 1996.
   Vincente Navarro, “Race or Class versus Race and Class: Mortality Differentials in the United States,”
   Lancet, 336 (1990), p. 1238-1240.
   David Newton, Environmental Justice, Oxford, England, ABC-CLIO, 1996.
   Mary O’Brien, Making Better Environmental Decisions, Cambridge, MIT Press, 2000.
   Henry Payne,”Environmental Injustice,” Reason 29, no. 4 (September 1997), pp. 53-57.
   John Rawls, A Theory of Justice, Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1971.
   D. Rush and J. Geiger, “NCI Study on I-131 Exposure from Nuclear Testing,” Physicians for Social
   Responsibility 4, no. 3 (1997-1998):1-5.
   Sheldon Samuels, “The Arrogance of Intellectual Power,” in Phenotypic Variations in Populations:
   Relevance to Risk Assessment, ed. A. Woodhead, M. Bender, R. Leonard, New York, Plenum Press,
   1988, pp. 115-116.
   Kristin Shrader-Frechette, Burying Uncertainty: Risk and the Case Against Geological Disposal of
   Nuclear Waste, Berkeley, University of California Press, 1993.
   Kristin Shrader-Frechette, Environmental Justice: Creating Equality, Reclaiming Democracy, New York,
   Oxford University Press, 2002.
   Kristin Shrader-Frechette, Risk and Rationality: Philosophical Foundations for Populist Reforms,
   Berkeley, University of California Press, 1991.
   U.S. Congress, Worker Safety at DOE Nuclear Facilities, Washington D.C., U.S. Government Printing
   Office, 1999.
   Module 7: Ethical Issues in Environmental and Occupational Health
   191
   U.S. General Accounting Office, DOE: DOE’s Nuclear Safety Enforcement Program Should Be
   Strengthened, Washington D.C., U.S. Government Printing Office, 1999.
   US Department of Health and Human Services (HHS), Achievements in Occupational Health, 1900-
   1999,” Morbidity and Mortality Weekly Report 48, no. 22 (June 11, 1999), pp. 461-469.
   Kip Viscusi, Fatal Tradeoffs, New York, Oxford, 1992.
   Martin Walker, “Sir Richard Doll: A Questionable Pillar of the British Cancer Establishment,” The
   Ecologist (March/April 1998), pp. 82-92.
   Lori Wallach and Michelle Sforza, Whose Trade Organization, Washington, DC, Public Citizen, 1999.
   Daniel Wigley and Kristin Shrader-Frechette, “Environmental Justice: A Louisiana Case Study,” Journal
   of Agricultural and Environmental Ethics 9, no. 1(1996), pp. 61-82.
   A. Weinberg, “Risk Assessment, Regulation, and the Limits,” in Phenotypic Variation in Populations, ed.
   A. Woodhead, M. Bender, and R. Leonard, New York, Plenum, 1988, pp. 121-128.
   Bernard Williams, Utilitarianism: For and Against, Cambridge, Cambridge University Press, 1973.
   Iris Marion Young, Justice and the Politics of Difference, Princeton, Princeton University Press, 1990.
   192
   Module 8: Public Health Genetics: Screening Programs and Individual Testing/Counseling
   193
   MODULE 8
   Public Health Genetics:
   Screening Programs and Individual Testing/Counseling
   Ruth Gaare Bernheim, PhD
   Institute for Practical Ethics, University of Virginia
   Richard Bonnie, LLB
   School of Law, University of Virginia
   Phillip Nieburg, MD, MPH
   Center for Biomedical Ethics, University of Virginia
   Issue Essay
   Advances in genetic science provide new insight into the complex, interactive roles that genetic and
   environmental factors play in morbidity and mortality, and they consequently create innumerable
   opportunities for disease prevention and health promotion. Should genetic information and genetic
   interventions, however, be used routinely in public health—like other health data and services—or are
   they different? Answers to this question essentially frame the ethical debates about public health
   genetics.
   While some people argue that the uniquely personal nature of genetic information requires an individual
   rights approach that limits public health use, others view genetic data as just another type of population
   data that can be collected, aggregated, and used along with other surveillance and environmental data
   to produce social utility. Still others focus on the significant power of genetic advancements to improve
   individual lives and, from a distributive justice perspective, emphasize public health’s responsibility to
   not only ensure access to genetic information throughout the population but more importantly to
   provide genetic services for the disadvantaged. Public health must address these and other competing
   ethical claims when developing public health genetics policies.
   Public Health Ethics
   Public health genetics has been defined as “the application of advances in genetics and molecular
   biotechnology to improve public health and prevent disease.”1 As with public health generally, it is
   teleological (end-oriented) and consequentialist—it draws on a population-wide analysis to identify
   strategies for improving the health of the entire population, in contrast to the patient-centered focus of
   clinical genetics.
   Several of the major ethical principles or considerations that animate public health include: producing
   population benefits, preventing and removing harms, and producing the maximal balance of benefits
   over harms and other costs (utility). These values provide a prima facie warrant for public health action.
   Module 8: Public Health Genetics: Screening Programs and Individual Testing/Counseling
   194
   Newborn genetic screening programs are just one example of public health interventions justified by
   these values.
   Other general moral considerations in public health, however, are recognized as setting limits or
   constraints on what may be done in pursuit of population health and social utility. These concerns
   include respecting individuals’ autonomous choices and actions, protecting privacy and confidentiality,
   distributing benefits and burdens fairly, and maintaining trust with the community. Unlike with public
   health interventions directed at the entire population, such as water fluoridation, genetic interventions
   are at their core individually focused, requiring the collection of individual-specific data and often
   targeting individuals and groups at risk for genetic conditions. Thus, public health genetic interventions
   have the potential to cause or increase social harms, especially when the targeted individuals or groups
   have been vulnerable in the past to discrimination or social stigmatization because of race or ethnicity.
   For this reason some critics maintain that few, if any, government-sponsored public health genetics
   interventions are appropriate. This perspective often is based on a balancing of the potential population
   benefits of genetic interventions with what these critics consider to be the stronger moral claims against
   the intervention which arise from the risk of social harms and from individual interests in autonomy,
   privacy, and confidentiality.
   For some genetic interventions, such as newborn screening, ethical considerations such as respect for
   individual autonomy, privacy, and confidentiality, therefore, may act as ethical constraints on public
   health action. This perspective is evident in arguments that call for requiring explicit informed consent
   from parents for all newborn screening programs, even though requiring consent will likely lead to a
   decrease in both population and individual benefit because some infants will not be screened. Ethical
   justification for this position is based both on (i) a heightened autonomy interest, because the potential
   social harm to individuals from the misuse of genetic data is judged to be greater than with other types
   of medical data, and (ii) a related need to explicitly involve individuals in genetics decisions in order to
   maintain trust with community members, who are partners with public health officials in defining and
   achieving population health benefits.
   These autonomy-based ethical arguments are countered generally in public health genetics policies by
   claims that genetic science fundamentally challenges and requires new specifications of the concept of
   autonomy. After all, by establishing the genetic links among individuals, families, and groups, genetic
   science generates new questions and insight about moral obligations to those who are genetically
   related—and to the public in general. Given humans’ common genetic heritage and the fact that genetic
   advancements result from (and often depend on) the analysis of population data and the collective
   efforts of scientists and organizations, this perspective suggests that individual interests cannot easily
   be separated from population benefits, and that even individual interests are supported in the long run
   by acknowledging the weight of moral claims to produce population health benefits.
   This perspective, based on the view that genetic science heralds a new era of medical and
   pharmacogenetic treatment, may even lead to ethical claims that human genetic data are a form of
   common property that should be collected and analyzed for purposes of social utility and population
   health. With this line of argument, for instance, genetic data from newborn screening programs might
   be viewed as common property; thus, being screened and providing genetic data for population-based
   surveillance to allow for analysis of genetic/environmental interactions might be considered an
   Module 8: Public Health Genetics: Screening Programs and Individual Testing/Counseling
   195
   obligation of citizens for the social good, similar to the obligation to submit to compulsory
   immunizations or to pay taxes.
   It is common in public health practice for conflicts to arise among important moral considerations such
   as, in newborn screening programs, between producing population benefits and respecting individual
   liberty (by requiring parental consent). To help determine whether promoting public health with a
   particular program warrants overriding conflicting values such as individual liberty, Childress, Faden
   and Gaare, et al. , propose five “justificatory conditions” or criteria. These are 1) effectiveness (the
   public health program will likely realize its goal); 2) proportionality (the probable benefits of the
   program outweigh the infringed general moral considerations); 3) necessity (the program is essential to
   achieve the public health goal); 4) least infringement (the program is the least restrictive alternative);
   and 5) public justification (public justification can be given).2 An ethical analysis of newborn screening
   programs using these criteria would be aided by empirical data, as well as public consultation. For
   example, information about parents’ willingness to give consent if the screening programs were
   voluntary would provide evidence about whether the mandatory programs satisfy the least infringement
   condition.
   The History of Eugenics
   A long shadow is cast on public health genetics by the history of eugenics, a social movement of the
   early 20th century that carried to an extreme the impetus to improve the human population through
   government interference in reproduction and in the selective transmission of genes to future
   generations. Although people often remember eugenics as an evil Nazi project to purify Germany’s
   gene pool, it was in fact widely popular in the U.S., Europe, and other countries as a way to cure social
   ills such as drunkenness, criminal behavior, and poverty. Groups with divergent political views,
   including Progressives, reformists, feminists, and successful capitalists, believed that society ought to
   foster the breeding of those with favorable traits (positive eugenics) and discourage or prevent the
   breeding of the biologically inferior (negative eugenics).
   Although eugenicists varied greatly in their particular beliefs and approaches, class and race prejudices
   were pervasive. In Northern Europe and the United States, eugenicists generally “favored standards of
   fitness and social value that were predominantly white, middle-class, Protestant….”3 Positive eugenics
   programs rarely went beyond providing encouragements, such as “Fitter Family” competitions or family
   allowances. Negative eugenic projects, however, led to coercive measures like the eugenic sterilization
   laws enacted in Northern Europe, including Denmark, Sweden, and Germany, and in more than two
   dozen American states by the mid-1930s. The constitutionality of these laws was upheld in the 1927
   U.S. Supreme Court decision, Buck v. Bell. The court’s now-dubious opinion, written by Justice Oliver
   Wendell Holmes, stated that “(t)he principle that sustains compulsory vaccination is broad enough to
   cover cutting the Fallopian tubes,”4 and explicitly proposed the worrisome connections between public
   health and eugenics.
   Public Values and Accountability
   The integration of genetics into public health practice today must be understood in the context of
   significant progress made during the last 50 years in scientific and technological knowledge and in the
   development of national and international norms for medical research, professional ethics, and
   reproductive rights—all of which provide safeguards against a revival of eugenic policies. For instance,
   public health ethics increasingly acknowledges the partnership between public health professionals and
   Module 8: Public Health Genetics: Screening Programs and Individual Testing/Counseling
   196
   the community in jointly defining goals and articulating values. (This is similar to the evolution that
   occurred in clinical medical ethics during the last half-century, in which the doctrine of informed
   consent, based on respect for the autonomy of individual patients, increasingly established the patient
   as a partner in defining his or her treatment plan.)
   The public health/community partnership extends not only to defining community health problems,
   collecting and interpreting data, and designing appropriate interventions but also to jointly developing
   policies, regulations, and laws to protect individual and group interests that may be adversely affected.
   When considering public health genetics policies, many public health professionals and researchers
   explicitly address the history of eugenic abuses. For example, the Association of State and Territorial
   Health Officers’ (ASTHO’s) public health genetics policy statement includes a section on eugenics that
   states:
   In the early to mid twentieth century, approximately 30 states enacted eugenics laws to limit the
   transmission of perceived undesirable characteristics such as mental retardation by restricting the
   reproduction of affected individuals. There was little scientific evidence by current standards that would
   have indicated that a person with one of the targeted traits would have offspring with the same
   condition; however, tens of thousands of women and men were involuntarily sterilized as a result of
   these laws. A situation like this must never be allowed to occur.5
   Condit, Parrott, and O’Grady are even more specific, identifying at least three lessons learned from the
   past: Genetic information can be used to stigmatize; genetic information should be used to benefit
   individuals; and “genetically based decisions must be made by individuals, based on their own values
   and preferences, not on externally imposed criteria, whether or not these criteria are perceived to be
   true and just by socially sanctioned experts.”6 They question public health choices that favor financial
   concerns about efficiency over individual rights, and suggest, for instance, that voluntary newborn
   screening programs may be superior to nonvoluntary approaches, in part because research suggests that
   parents who voluntarily involve their families may be “more likely to follow through on treatment
   regimens because they understand and are committed to their value.”7
   An ethical analysis of a genetic intervention by a public health agency, then, might begin with the
   following questions: What is at stake in the situation? What is at stake in alternative courses of action?
   Who are the critical stakeholders? A stakeholder is anyone who might be affected by the decision, and
   part of the analysis would include consideration of the costs and benefits of an action for each
   stakeholder as well as the nature of the relationships with and among stakeholders. With questions of
   genetics, for which “stakeholders” can include distant relatives or future generations, a stakeholder
   approach to understanding and balancing the conflicting moral obligations and principles provides a
   useful framework for identifying ethically relevant considerations.
   This “ethics process,” especially when it is public and includes actual stakeholders (when possible)
   rather than representatives speaking on their behalf, can facilitate real understanding. Ethical
   deliberation also can illuminate questions that can be addressed by empirical research (e.g., assessing
   the actual risk of genetic discrimination) and the need for legislative action (e.g., anti-discrimination
   laws). Public health policy evolves as empirical evidence about the effectiveness and the social effects of
   interventions accumulates, and as societal responses change.
   Module 8: Public Health Genetics: Screening Programs and Individual Testing/Counseling
   197
   For government public health officials, public health ethics requires a process of public accountability.
   At a minimum, their accountability involves “transparency in openly seeking information from those
   affected and in honest disclosure of relevant information to the public.” 8 For genetics and other issues
   about which there is ethical disagreement, public health ethics also requires a fair process, which—as
   defined by Norman Daniels in a different context—includes: (1) transparency and publicity about the
   reasons for a decision; (2) appeals to rationales and evidence that fair-minded parties would agree are
   relevant; and (3) procedures for appealing and revising decisions in light of challenges by various
   stakeholders. As Daniels explains, “Since we may not be able to construct principles that yield fair
   decisions ahead of time, we need a process that allows us to develop those reasons over time as we face
   real cases.”9
   Public Health Genetics
   The role of governmental public health agencies in addressing genetic advancements encompasses the
   three core functions defined for public health practice by the Institute of Medicine:
   ???? Assessment (of data on the population’s health)
   ???? Assurance (of high quality health services)
   ???? Policy development (to serve the public interest by promoting the use of scientific knowledge)
   The Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC), in addition to state and local health
   departments, currently have oversight of large health care databases, including birth and death records,
   disease registries, and statistics on reportable diseases, and with these data, they determine the need
   for and benefit of population interventions, such as educational programs on nutrition or screening
   programs for high blood pressure or cancer. Khoury, Burke, and Thomson call for the collection of
   additional surveillance data “to determine the population frequency of genetic variants that predispose
   people to specific diseases, both common and rare; the population frequency of morbidity and mortality
   associated with such diseases; and the prevalence and effects of environmental factors known to interact
   with given genotypes in producing diseases.”10
   Current birth-defects surveillance illustrates the value of such population data—for instance, in
   understanding the etiology of certain genetic conditions or birth defects clusters, such as those caused
   by new teratogens in the environment or health services. Botto and Mastroiacovo point out that
   population monitoring was useful in identifying valproic acid as a cause of spina bifida and the
   association of a cluster of limb anomalies among infants with their mothers’ chorionic villus sampling
   (CVS). They suggest that international comparisons of the prevalence of neural-tube defects, for
   instance, may provide insight about gene-environment interactions, particularly if prevalence data are
   integrated with population data on genetic variation (e.g., the frequency of polymorphisms of folaterelated
   genes) and dietary intake (e.g., micronutrient consumption). 11
   Identifying the connection between environmental risk factors and inherited susceptibility to cancer also
   has been called a “new paradigm” for cancer prevention and control, and Coughlin and Burke describe
   the need for additional population-based molecular epidemiologic research to explore these
   connections They hypothesize, for instance, that for women at risk of breast cancer, gene-environment
   interactions between gene mutations and nongenetic factors, such as ionizing radiation or cigarette
   smoking, may be identified and lead to new targeted prevention programs.12
   Module 8: Public Health Genetics: Screening Programs and Individual Testing/Counseling
   198
   These examples illustrate the vagueness of the term “genetic condition.” While it often refers to
   relatively rare conditions in which a single gene is implicated (e.g., Huntington’s Disease), public health
   genetics has a much broader focus. In fact, because virtually all human disease involves both genetic
   variants and environmental factors (broadly defined to include infectious, physical, and social factors),
   viewing any particular condition in public health as “genetic” is as much a matter of public choice and
   ethics as it is genetic science.
   Some scientific distinctions about genetic disorders and causation may not even be helpful in
   determining the appropriate role for public health. An example is the distinction medical geneticists
   make between disorders resulting from single-gene variants, such as PKU and hemochromatosis, and
   other disorders associated with susceptibility genes, such as colon cancer and breast cancer. Khoury,
   Burke, and Thomson describe the complexity of genetic labels by pointing out that even many of the
   classic single-gene metabolic disorders are the result of both a deficiency in a nutritional enzyme and a
   dietary exposure to one or more chemicals (e.g., phenylalanine and phenylalanine hydroxylase
   deficiency in PKU; iron intake and mutations in the HFE gene in hereditary hemochromatosis).13 They
   quote Rothman: “‘It is easy to show that 100% of any disease is environmentally determined and 100% is
   genetically determined as well. Any other view is based on a naive understanding of causation.’” 14 Given
   the pervasive role of genetic factors in human disease, then, the more important issue involves not
   whether some disorder is labeled “genetic” rather than behavioral or environmental but instead, when
   and how to use genetic information and technology effectively, and ethically, in public health policy and
   practice.
   Tobacco use, commonly viewed as a behavioral or environmental problem, illustrates this point. Even
   though more than 90% of lung cancers may be caused by smoking, only 10-15% of smokers develop lung
   cancer, which suggests “the interaction of smoking with other factors including genetic ones.” 15 If a
   genetic test became available to determine an individual’s susceptibility to cancer from exposure to
   tobacco smoke, what would be an appropriate public health response? Would including the genetic test
   be justified as part of the state newborn screening program, so that public health professionals could
   alert parents to take particular precautions to protect the child from second-hand smoke? Would the
   state be justified in following up later in childhood and targeting particular anti-smoking interventions
   to middle-school children with genetic susceptibilities? Would the public health department be justified
   in requiring genetic analysis of lung cancers in the cancer registry, so that family members could be told
   of their potential susceptibility—and, if so, should such notification be mandatory or voluntary? Should
   public health departments provide access to genetic tests for susceptibility? If so, should they collect
   the data in order to target education and behavior modification interventions to those at special risk,
   including the family members of those tested?
   In answering many of these questions, scientific assessments of the magnitude of genetic susceptibilities
   may be less important than the ethical considerations. These include concerns about individual rights,
   such as liberty of action and the risk of discrimination, stigmatization, and social harm, in addition to
   concerns about ensuring equitable access to services and maintaining public trust. Determining whether
   to use genetic technology and genetic information about tobacco in a public health program requires
   examining the social, economic, and political implications of such a decision. There are implications for
   individuals, such as the potential for discriminatory use of genetic information in insurance and
   employment, as well as widespread social effects, such as a potential public perception that tobacco use
   is merely a genetic problem of a subgroup of the population. This in turn may lessen a sense of
   Module 8: Public Health Genetics: Screening Programs and Individual Testing/Counseling
   199
   collective responsibility for addressing the underlying economic and political issues related to tobacco
   production and use.
   A complex web of individual and group interests, benefits, and costs is involved in these questions, and
   the public health agency provides a public structure to facilitate transparent ethical reflection,
   deliberation, and consensus-building. Public health accountability ensures that tradeoffs and balancing
   of ethical claims will be made openly, with explicit acknowledgement that individuals’ fundamental wellbeing
   and values are at stake and that reasons, grounded in ethics, will be provided to those potentially
   affected by the decisions. At the same time, public health ethics with its population perspective focuses
   attention on the level and distribution of well-being throughout the population and “makes explicit the
   competition for scarce resources that has proven difficult to address in the patient-centered maze of
   medical ethics.”16
   Genetic Testing
   Genetic tests are rapidly being developed and marketed for clinical diagnosis, treatment, and
   prevention, and are now available for hundreds of inherited and chromosomal disorders and genetic
   predispositions. A genetic test is defined as:
   [T]he analysis of human DNA, RNA, chromosomes, proteins, and certain metabolites in
   order to detect heritable disease-related genotypes, mutations, phenotypes, or
   karyotypes for clinical purposes. Such purposes include predicting the risk of disease,
   identifying carriers, and establishing prenatal and clinical diagnosis or prognosis.
   Prenatal, newborn and carrier screening, as well as testing in high risk families, are
   included. Tests for metabolites are covered only when they are undertaken with high
   probability that an excess or deficiency of the metabolite indicates the presence of
   heritable mutations in single genes. Tests conducted purely for research are excluded
   from the definition, as are tests for somatic (as opposed to heritable) mutations, and
   testing for forensic purposes…Some, but not all, predictive genetic testing falls under
   the rubric ‘genetic screening,’ a search in a population for persons possessing certain
   genotypes.17
   The 1997 Final Report of the Task Force on Genetic Testing (established by the National Institutes of
   Health-Department of Energy Working Group on Ethical, Legal, and Social Implications of Human
   Genome Research) provided extensive recommendations on the safety and effectiveness of genetic tests,
   as well as the overarching principles excerpted below as guides for future policy:18
   Informed Consent. The Task Force strongly advocates written informed consent [for genetic
   testing]. The failure of the Task Force to comment on informed consent for other uses does not
   imply that it should not be obtained.
   Test Development—Informed consent for any validation study must be obtained
   whenever the specimen can be linked to the subject from which it came.
   Testing in Clinical Practice— (1) It is unacceptable to coerce or intimidate individuals
   or families regarding their decision about predictive genetic testing. Respect for
   personal autonomy is paramount. People being offered testing must understand that it
   Module 8: Public Health Genetics: Screening Programs and Individual Testing/Counseling
   200
   is voluntary. Their informed consent should be obtained. Whatever decision they make,
   their care should not be jeopardized.
   (2) Prior to the initiation of predictive testing in clinical practice, health care providers
   must describe the features of the genetic test, including potential consequences, to
   potential test recipients.
   Newborn Screening—(1) If informed consent is waived for a newborn screening test,
   the analytical and clinical validity and clinical utility of the test must be established and
   parents must be provided with sufficient information to understand the reasons for
   screening. By clinical utility, the Task Force means that interventions to improve the
   outcome of the infant identified by screening have been proven to be safe and effective.
   (2) For those disorders for which newborn screening is available but the tests have not
   been validated or shown to have clinical utility, written parental consent is required
   prior to testing.
   Prenatal and Carrier Testing. Respect for an individual’s/couple’s beliefs and values
   concerning tests undertaken for assisting reproductive decisions is of paramount importance
   and can best be maintained by a nondirective stance. One way of ensuring that a non-directive
   stance is taken and that parents’ decisions are autonomous is through requiring informed
   consent.
   Testing of Children. Genetic testing of children for adult onset diseases should not be
   undertaken unless direct medical benefit will accrue to the child and this benefit would be lost
   by waiting until the child has reached adulthood.
   Confidentiality. Protecting the confidentiality of information is essential for all uses of genetic
   tests. (1) Results should be released only to those individuals for whom the test recipient has
   given consent for information release. Means of transmitting information should be chosen to
   minimize the likelihood that results will become available to unauthorized persons or
   organizations. Under no circumstances should results with identifiers be provided to any
   outside parties, including employers, insurers, or government agencies, without the test
   recipient’s written consent.
   (2) Health care providers have an obligation to the person being tested not to inform other
   family members without the permission of the person tested, except in extreme circumstances.
   Discrimination. No individual should be subjected to unfair discrimination by a third party on
   the basis of having had a genetic test or receiving an abnormal genetic test result. Third parties
   include insurers, employers, and educational and other institutions that routinely inquire about
   the health of applicants for services or positions.
   Consumer Involvement in Policy Making. Although other stakeholders are concerned about
   protecting consumers, they cannot always provide the perspective brought by consumers
   themselves, the end users of genetic testing. Consumers should be involved in policy (but not
   Module 8: Public Health Genetics: Screening Programs and Individual Testing/Counseling
   201
   necessarily in technical) decisions regarding the adoption, introduction, and use of new,
   predictive genetic tests.
   Public Health Genetic Testing
   The formulation of sound public health policy regarding genetic testing and screening programs
   requires an on-going, systematic, evidence-based analysis of the benefits, risks, and costs of genetic
   tests and follow-up interventions. Multidisciplinary research and perspectives from history, cultural
   anthropology, economics, psychology, and other disciplines provide important information. Given that
   the risks and harms of genetic testing are primarily psychosocial, empirical evidence is necessary in
   order to assess whether the tests are justified—that is, whether the probable benefits outweigh the
   probable harms or costs. As Beauchamp and Childress point out, the probable benefits also “vary from
   genetic condition to condition, depending on whether the screening and testing are for disease,
   disposing condition, or carrier status, whether preventive or treatment measures are available, whether
   the information is important for reproductive decisions, and the like.” They summarize: “For any genetic
   screening or testing, fundamental questions concern who will use the resulting information, how they
   will use it, and for what purposes.” 19
   As with any public health decision, critical questions involve (1) deciding what factors to include in the
   calculations of costs and benefits (e.g., whether to include in the cost calculations the future lost
   productivity of children who die or suffer disability as a result of not being screened as newborns) and
   (2) determining how to value the costs of social stigma that may result from targeting particular groups
   at high risk.
   The following types of genetic testing are especially relevant to this discussion.
   Newborn Screening Programs for Phenylketonuria (PKU). These programs were among the first
   genetic screening programs developed in the United States and, along with testing for hypothyroidism
   and hemoglobinopathies, are now conducted in all 50 states and the District of Columbia. Widely
   touted as a public health success, they identify infants with the hereditary metabolic disorder so that
   special dietary treatment can prevent life-long mental disabilities. However, commentators have
   criticized the way the PKU screening programs were initially developed and their legacy of mandatory
   newborn screening without parental consent.
   The PKU programs were established throughout the United States during the 1960s and 1970s, without
   the initial support of the American Academy of Pediatrics and the medical community in general,
   without prior controlled clinical trials, without appropriate empirical evidence about the optimal
   diagnosis and management of PKU, and without adequate treatment programs. Even today, the
   economic impact on and financial support available for U.S. families affected by the disease are not well
   documented. The fact that testing for a rare condition affecting fewer than 400 American infants a year
   attracted such a groundswell of support has been attributed in part to the advocacy of various groups,
   such as the March of Dimes Birth Defects Foundation and the National Association for Retarded
   Citizens (now the ARC), which proposed model legislation to create public programs and conducted
   lobbying campaigns. Other support came from PKU clinicians, parents, and the Kennedy
   Administration’s Presidential Advisory Commission on Mental Retardation, which hired an advertising
   group to develop a public campaign advocating mandatory screening. 20
   Module 8: Public Health Genetics: Screening Programs and Individual Testing/Counseling
   202
   Given the widespread public acceptance of PKU screening, many states also began screening for sickle
   cell disease (SCD) in the early 1970s. SCD, an autosomal recessive hemolytic anemia that occurs most
   frequently in African Americans, causes serious infections, life-threatening splenic sequestration and
   severe anemia, stroke, and respiratory problems. When SCD screening laws were first introduced, they
   varied greatly, with some targeting special populations and some including newborns, preschool
   children, and even individuals seeking marriage licenses. New York’s statute, for instance, required
   screening for urban school children but not rural ones. Most laws did not include confidentiality
   provisions; the result, in some cases, was stigmatization, charges of racism, and documented
   discrimination, especially in the military. An Institute of Medicine Report (IOM) states: “Initial
   supporters of SCD screening were spurred on by the success of PKU screening, but the clear difference
   between SCD and PKU was not fully appreciated until later. There was no intervention for SCD at this
   time other than counseling to avoid marriage or pregnancy (prenatal SCD screening was not feasible).”21
   The National Sickle Cell Anemia Control Act, enacted in 1972, made federal funding for screening
   contingent on programs being voluntary. However, since a prophylactic regimen of penicillin in infants
   was shown in the 1980s to significantly reduce the morbidity and mortality of SCD, and a National
   Institutes of Health consensus panel in 1987 recommended universal (not targeted) newborn screening,
   about 40 states and the District of Columbia have now adopted universal newborn screening programs
   for SCD. The IOM report summarizes the lessons learned from the early sickle cell screening programs
   as follows:
   The experience with SCD screening in the 1970s illustrates the difficulties that can arise when
   the goals of screening programs are not clearly specified, when there is no treatment that
   improves health outcomes, and when the intervention is not acceptable to the target population
   because of stigma and discrimination….The change in approach to SCD screening over time,
   as new facts and treatment opportunities emerge, illustrates that programs must have the
   flexibility to change over time, as the situation changes. 22
   These early experiences led to numerous multidisciplinary policy statements, beginning with a National
   Academy of Sciences report in 1975, all of which recommend that empirical research on the benefits and
   risks of a particular genetic test be undertaken before mass screening programs are established. The
   1997 Report of the National Institutes of Health-Department of Energy’s Task Force on Genetic Testing,
   for instance, stated the newborn screening tests must have primary benefit for the infant identified and
   are not justified solely to determine the carrier status of the infant or parents. 23 Others have called for
   assessing the community’s interest in and acceptance of a genetic test, particularly if a particular group
   will be targeted for screening; assuring laboratory quality; addressing issues of education, informed
   consent, privacy, and confidentiality; assuring the availability of follow-up services; and assessing the
   costs and the priority of the particular test, given the limited financial resources. 24
   Newborn screening programs currently vary greatly among the states, so that the 4 million infants born
   annually in the United States are tested for different conditions depending on where they are born.
   Mounting pressure from parents, advocacy groups, medical professionals, and test manufacturers is
   being exerted on state legislatures to increase the number of conditions included in state screening
   programs, while numerous groups are calling for national standards so that all newborns in this country
   will have equitable access to appropriate newborn screening and its potential benefits. The 1994
   Institute of Medicine Committee on Assessing Genetic Risks recommended that three conditions be met
   before a newborn screening program is initiated: (1) The identification of the genetic condition provides
   Module 8: Public Health Genetics: Screening Programs and Individual Testing/Counseling
   203
   a clear benefit to the child; (2) a system must be in place to confirm the diagnosis; and (3) treatment
   and follow-up must be available for affected newborns. 25 In fact, however, state newborn screening
   policies are influenced by many other factors, such as community values; political and economic
   conditions; and the availability of health data, public health personnel, laboratory facilities, and
   technical capabilities within the state.
   A Report from the Newborn Task Force on Newborn Screening in 2000 explicitly recommended that
   “public health agencies must involve health professionals, families and the general public in the
   development, operation, and oversight of newborn screening systems.” 26 Current controversies focus on
   the role of various stakeholders in allocation and financing decisions related to screening programs,
   particularly given the cost of follow-up programs that must be supported by state health departments
   and the need to balance resources among competing community health needs, including screening and
   services for other genetic disorders. Particular attention is focused on the methods and role of costeffectiveness
   analysis in determining which tests to include in newborn screening programs and on the
   appropriateness of informing and seeking consent from parents for newborn screening.
   The ethical issue of informed consent for newborn screening was addressed by the American Academy
   of Pediatrics in its 2001 policy statement, “Ethical Issues with Genetic Testing in Pediatrics.” 27 The
   report provides the following analysis:
   A persistent ethical issue in newborn screening is whether screening should be voluntary or mandatory.
   Whether programs are voluntary or mandatory has significant implications for informed responses to
   test results and for the integration of new tests into established programs. A voluntary approach in this
   context entails an informed decision by parents about newborn screening. Wyoming and Maryland are
   the only 2 states that require informed consent for newborn screening, although 13 other states require
   that parents be informed about newborn screening before testing (18). A mandatory approach in this
   context requires an explicit refusal of screening by parents who object to this intervention. All states
   except South Dakota permit parental refusal of newborn screening for religious or personal reasons
   (18).
   The principal ethical justification offered for mandatory screening is the claim that society’s
   obligation to promote child welfare through early detection and treatment of selected
   conditions supersedes parental prerogatives to refuse this simple medical intervention (19). An
   opposing argument maintains that parents traditionally have broad discretion for making health
   care decisions for their children. Although parents do not have the prerogative to forgo
   effective treatments for life-threatening conditions, they generally have the prerogative to
   pursue a variety of options in less threatening circumstances, including options that some
   medical professionals would consider unwise. Furthermore, it is argued that the great majority
   of parents will continue to be supportive of newborn screening when they are informed
   adequately of the risks and benefits (20).
   With continued broad public support, approaches involving informed consent (that is, parental
   permission) (21) may fulfill the important goals of the programs and enhance program quality
   while respecting traditional parental prerogatives to be informed participants in health care
   decisions for their children. In a study of newborn screening in Maryland involving informed
   consent, the majority of women preferred that permission be asked before screening, and the
   informed refusal rate was only 5 per 1000 infants (22). In the Maryland study, the consent
   Module 8: Public Health Genetics: Screening Programs and Individual Testing/Counseling
   204
   process typically took 5 minutes or less of staff time. Additional research to develop and
   evaluate models of parental education and consent will be valuable.
   Two potential advantages of obtaining informed consent for newborn screening include more
   prompt and efficient responses to positive results and an ability to incorporate experimental
   tests into established screening programs. Under current programs, the information provided to
   parents about newborn screening is often minimal. A significant source of problems in newborn
   screening programs is slow or uninformed responses to test results by parents and physicians
   (23). If an informed consent process promotes more thorough understanding of the implications
   of the tests, slow or inappropriate responses to positive results may decrease. Second, advances
   in genetic research will offer many additional tests for consideration by newborn screening
   programs (24). The relative risks and benefits of new tests will be uncertain until adequate
   clinical research has been conducted. In these circumstances, experimental tests should be
   offered on a voluntary basis with informed consent. Experimental tests could be integrated more
   easily in screening programs that routinely sought informed consent for newborn screening
   tests. 28
   Additional ethical questions about informed consent arise regarding the storage and later use of
   newborn blood spots to evaluate the effect of genetic variation on population morbidity and mortality.
   While informed consent is universally understood to be required for genetic research, no consensus
   exists regarding informed consent standards for the use of stored samples—especially anonymous
   ones—to conduct epidemiological studies based on large-scale screening and/or surveillance data.
   Khoury, Burke, and Thomson describe the “debate about the practicality of re-contacting subjects from
   population studies (for informed consent); whether or not genetic studies pose more than ‘minimal
   risks’ to subjects; the definitions and desirability of ‘anonymization’ of existing samples; and whether or
   not coded but ‘linked’ or linkable’ samples can be used.”29 Balancing the potential harms to individual
   interests with the potential benefits to individual and population health requires a systematic assessment
   of the benefits, risks, and costs to individuals, perhaps through pilot demonstrations; an evaluation of
   methods for maintaining privacy and confidentiality within public health registries; and an exploration of
   ways to minimize the potential stigmatization of population subgroups.
   Predictive Genetic Testing to Learn the Risk of Future Disease. These tests can reveal the presence
   of genetic disorders presymptomatically, as in the case of hereditary hemochromatosis, or can reveal
   susceptibility to certain diseases, such as with BRCA1 breast cancer or colon cancer. Genetic testing or
   screening is most appropriate when early treatment or other modifiable risk factors allow for behavior
   change or preventive interventions that can reduce the probability of harm, and when an assessment of
   the benefits, harms, and costs of testing and population screening programs provides the basis for the
   public health policy. Ethical issues are often related to the potential psychological harm to individuals,
   family members, and family interactions and relationships that may result from testing, inaccurate or
   misunderstood results, and the potential misuse of genetic risk information in insurance and
   employment discrimination.
   Hereditary hemochromatosis (HH), a common adult-onset genetic disorder for which screening tests
   and treatments are available, illustrates the challenges for public health policy making. The disorder,
   which is estimated to occur in one out of every 200 to 400 people of European heritage, causes
   Module 8: Public Health Genetics: Screening Programs and Individual Testing/Counseling
   205
   excessive iron storage and can lead to damage of the liver and other organs, arthritis, and diabetes in
   many but not all affected adults. Treatment by removing iron from the blood is safe and effective and
   can lead to a normal life expectancy if initiated before organ damage has occurred. Many in the medical
   community, as well as patient support groups, advocate population screening. However, universal
   screening for HH was rejected by a 1997 consensus panel, in part because of inadequate clinical
   knowledge about the natural history of hemochromatosis, uncertainty about the proportion of people
   with genetic risk who will develop the complications of iron overload, and concern about possible
   genetic discrimination. 30 The president of the American Society of Human Genetics challenged the
   consensus statement and argued that the potential to prevent disease outweighed the various problems.
   Other commentators also have expressed similar concern: “We are facing the dilemma of waiting until
   all requisite information about diagnostic process and therapeutic indications is available or cautiously
   initiating a more vigorous screening program that will detect unsuspected disease with potential
   morbidity and mortality, realizing that unnecessary therapy and anxiety may occur.” 31 One worry in
   particular about HFE mutation testing for hemochromatosis is the possibility that follow-up treatment
   will be initiated in individuals who may test positive but who may never develop the iron overload
   condition. The Centers for Disease Control and Prevention recommends, instead, iron overload testing
   (not genetic testing) for individuals who have affected blood relatives. CDC experts believe that
   “strategies are needed to disseminate information to family members about their genetic risk and to aid
   their efforts to be tested, and that this “must be accomplished in the course of patient care.” 32 Public
   policy regarding HH population screening shows the complexity of initiating population genetic
   screening programs, given the need to evaluate the predictive value of the test, measure the benefits
   and harms of testing and not testing, protect against genetic discrimination, and act without complete
   knowledge.
   With the proliferation of genetic tests comes a number of particularly challenging issues regarding the
   benefits of tests for disorders for which there currently is no clear treatment. These issues include (1)
   the difficulty of assessing the results of many genetic tests and providing helpful information about
   genetic risks and (2) the appropriate role for government regulation of commercial tests with uncertain
   predictive accuracy. Genetic tests available for breast cancer and Alzheimer’s disease, for instance,
   indicate only a propensity or increased probability of developing the diseases, while even tests for other
   disorders that are completely penetrant (i.e., always result in disease), such as Huntington’s Disease, do
   not provide information about severity or onset of the disease, which can be highly variable.
   Consequently, providing genetic information does not always influence individuals to undertake
   prevention activities. Andrews describes the complex reactions and psychological harms that can result
   from genetic testing. She writes: “In fact, there is evidence that the stress created by genetic information
   can actually lessen the likelihood that the individual will engage in surveillance strategies and monitor
   himself or herself for early signs of the disease.”33 Andrews also points out other potential harms that
   may arise from the misinterpretation of a negative test result, including a false sense of security.
   Numerous ethical questions arise regarding the benefits and harms that result from such tests; the
   appropriateness of commercial marketing of these tests, particularly given the fears associated with
   certain genetic conditions; and insurance reimbursement or government financial support for the tests
   and for follow-up prophylactic interventions, such as removal of breasts.
   Predictive genetic testing of children and adolescents for late-onset disorders, such as Huntington’s
   Disease and hemochromatosis, raises unique ethical questions because testing in childhood limits the
   child’s freedom of choice later in life to decide not to be tested (many adults choose not to be tested,
   Module 8: Public Health Genetics: Screening Programs and Individual Testing/Counseling
   206
   so consent cannot be presumed) and subjects the child to the risk of stigma and discrimination. The
   American Academy of Pediatrics’ policy states that, unless there is anticipated benefit to the child or the
   availability of interventions that can be initiated in childhood to reduce morbidity and mortality,
   “genetic testing for adult-onset conditions generally should be deferred until adulthood or until an
   adolescent interested in testing has developed mature decision-making capacities.” 34
   Reproductive Testing and Prenatal Screening. These tests raise particular challenges for public
   health practice and policy, such as ensuring that the reproductive freedom of vulnerable individuals is
   adequately protected; clearly defining and implementing nondirective goals for genetic counseling
   programs; and developing assessment tools for cost-effectiveness evaluation of public health prenatal
   screening programs. Family history has long provided clues about an individual’s risk of genetic disease,
   but hundreds of genetic tests are now available to clearly identify people who are carriers of genetic
   conditions that may be passed on to their children, including Tay-Sachs disease, muscular dystrophy,
   cystic fibrosis, and sickle cell anemia. Many people emphasize that carrier testing and genetic
   counseling can provide significant benefit to individuals by enhancing their capacity to make informed
   choices about reproduction. The information about genetic risk presents individuals with numerous
   options: prior to conception they can decide whether to conceive and/or whether to use reproductive
   technologies to decrease the risk of transmitting a genetic condition, and after conception they can
   decide whether to abort an affected fetus.
   Providing universal access to low-cost public health carrier screening and reproductive genetic
   counseling would therefore seem to be desirable from an individual rights perspective (because it
   facilitates informed reproductive choice for more people and would reduce suffering of future
   generations) and from a public health perspective (because it would tend to reduce the prevalence of
   disease and disability). However, universal access to genetic counseling has been challenged on the
   grounds that it could tend to erode the reproductive freedom of vulnerable individuals. Benkendorf,
   Peshkin, and Lerman raise concerns that vulnerable individuals may not understand that they are free to
   refuse recommendations provided by public health programs and may also may feel pressure to act on
   information about abnormal genetic results in ways that are “inconsistent with their values.” 35
   Others explicitly challenge the motives for government genetic counseling programs and the
   presumption that individual and social interests are congruent. Diane B. Paul, for instance, writes:
   “Today, everyone favors increasing the choices available to women. But fostering reproductive
   autonomy is rarely if ever the primary goal of governments when they choose to fund genetic services.
   That states expect to save money is evident in the arguments actually made to legislatures, which are
   typically framed in cost-benefit terms. Thus it seems that the new consensus on reproductive autonomy
   rests on the old assumption that families will ordinarily make the ‘right’ decisions.”36
   In response, some people point out that reproductive freedom can be threatened not just by the state
   but also by market forces and societal pressures. Underwriting and reimbursement policies of health
   insurance companies, marketing and pricing by for-profit genetic testing and technology companies, the
   rhetoric of advocacy groups, and the beliefs held by religious groups are among the many factors that
   may exert a strong influence on individual reproductive decisions. Calling for expanded clinical genetic
   services “at public expense if necessary,” Buchanan, Brock, Daniels, and Wikler suggest that the state
   can remove potential pressures to curtail reproductive freedoms—by providing prospective parents with
   Module 8: Public Health Genetics: Screening Programs and Individual Testing/Counseling
   207
   both adequate information and “alternative means of having children, when the more customary
   methods threaten genetic harms.” 37
   Because of public funding and the ethical requirements of public accountability, public health initiatives
   are subject to greater public review and evaluation than private programs. Measuring the benefits of
   reproductive genetics programs and justifying their costs present yet another challenge, especially using
   conventional cost-effectiveness evaluation methods. If the goal of these programs is to enhance
   reproductive decision making, Lin-Fu and Lloyd-Puryear point out the inappropriateness of measuring
   the costs of the programs against the number of women who undergo amniocentesis or chorionic villus
   sampling. They question whether public health officials will “deviate from conventional cost-benefit
   analysis” and consider a sufficient justification for funding a program to be providing the public with “a
   basis for informed decision making.”38
   Given their policy development role delineated by the Institute of Medicine, public health professionals
   increasingly must work with professional organizations and consumer groups to decide when and how
   to integrate genetic advances into public health. These decisions must be based on at least the
   following considerations: an epidemiological assessment of the impact or likely impact of a genetic
   variation on the disease risk; the degree to which the genetic risk or condition is modifiable or
   treatable; the degree to which the public regards public health action by government as appropriate for
   the particular condition; and justification that the particular intervention is ethical.
   State of the Debate
   Current debates in public health genetics about genetic testing focus generally on defining, measuring,
   and balancing competing moral values, particularly population benefit, individual interests, and
   distributive justice. Underlying the discussion about ethical principles and frameworks is the
   fundamental question of genetic exceptionalism—that is, whether to treat information derived from
   genetic testing as different from other health-related information by, for example, providing geneticspecific
   privacy and antidiscrimination laws.
   In support of this position, Ronald Green and Mathew Thomas recognize five unique aspects of genetic
   information: (1) DNA’s informational nature; (2) its longevity; (3) its potential use as a personal
   identifier; (4) the familial risks indicated by the information; and (5) the effects on communities.39
   George Annas also argues that genetic information is “uniquely private” and in need of special
   legislative protection. He suggests that a person’s genetic information can be viewed as a coded “future
   diary,” which should be considered “as personal and private as a diary about that person’s past.” 40Annas
   describes four different ways of thinking about privacy in this country: private information, private
   relationships (husband-wife), private decisions (such as reproductive), and private places (such as
   bedrooms). Since genetic information involves three of these four, Annas suggests that genetic
   information may be “more powerfully private than other types of information.” He goes beyond the usual
   concerns about the use of genetic information in employment and insurance discrimination because that
   “discussion assumes that information has already been collected, analyzed, and stored somewhere.”
   Annas asserts:
   I believe that if you are really interested in genetic privacy, you have to protect people before
   the information has been collected by giving people a choice to participate or not. To make
   Module 8: Public Health Genetics: Screening Programs and Individual Testing/Counseling
   208
   privacy protection more meaningful, the law should make it clear that each of us owns our
   DNA.41
   Challenging Annas’s use of the term “future diary,” which “implicitly supports genetic exceptionalism,”
   Douglas Ginsburg argues that our genetic information is much less diverse than written personal diaries
   and that “the secrets that our future diaries are supposed to hold, like our family histories, speak only to
   probabilities.” Acknowledging that genetic exceptionalism is psychologically compelling, Ginsburg
   concludes that “the questions that genetic information raises are not sufficiently different from those
   raised before—either qualitatively or as a matter of degree—to justify the creation of unique legal
   solutions – solutions likely to serve only to press the popular debate ever more toward the reductionist
   forms of genetic exceptionalism.” 42 Thomas Murray also challenges the basis of genetic exceptionalism
   as an “overly dramatic view of the significance of genetic information in our lives” and argues that “the
   more we repeat that genetic information is fundamentally unlike other kinds of medical information, the
   more support we implicitly provide for genetic determinism, for the notion that genetics exerts special
   power over our lives.” 43
   Burris, Gostin, and Tress suggest that genetic information “is more like, than different from, other
   health information,” and that genetic illnesses may even require less legal protection than sexually
   transmitted diseases, which often carry a stigma because of their transmission through voluntary risky
   behavior.44 They raise arguments similar to those used against HIV exceptionalism:
   On a practical level, we must be cautious that the very people whom policymakers hope to
   encourage to take advantage of genetic testing may become more reluctant because of the
   heightened focus on its exceptional nature. Treating genetics as distinct from the rest of
   medicine may enhance the stigma of genetics testing, even as legislators attempt to remove its
   stigmatizing effects. This can create public fears and misapprehensions about genetics that
   could discourage individuals from seeking testing and treatment and thwart future scientific
   progress.45
   Another related normative issue is whether decisions about whether or not to integrate genetic
   advances into public health practice should focus primarily on their potential long-term benefits for
   population health, or instead on the potential social harms for individuals and groups. While both
   harms and benefits are assessed in all ethical analyses, approaches vary in their emphasis, particularly in
   situations of scientific uncertainty. A decision about whether to incorporate genetic information into
   existing surveillance systems on infectious disease and cancer illustrates the complexity of such an
   analysis, since both the benefits and harms are uncertain and difficult to quantify. Given the lack of
   empirical data, the critical question becomes which side bears the burden of justifying public health
   action or non-action.
   Those who support the collection of additional surveillance data on genetics cite the potential (though
   unknown) opportunity costs of not acting and emphasize the population health benefits and prevention
   programs that would be possible with new knowledge about gene-environment interactions. Others
   believe that the potential harms for individuals are so great that clinical trials and empirical studies
   must first be conducted to evaluate and eliminate any social harms that might arise with the collection
   of genetic data. Disagreement focuses, in part, on the extent to which genetic information in public
   health data banks can be protected from breaches of confidentiality and misuse.
   Module 8: Public Health Genetics: Screening Programs and Individual Testing/Counseling
   209
   Different frameworks for balancing benefits and harms have been put forward. On one hand, Lori
   Andrews describes a fundamental rights approach to genetic policymaking, in large part to protect
   against harm. She explains that the fundamental rights model is appropriate for health care services,
   such as reproductive services, “that are central to our notions of ourselves” and that have “an impact on
   how the individual is viewed and treated by social institutions.” 46 Andrews suggests that genetic testing
   currently is being made available and used without appropriate understanding of and protections
   against potential negative psychological and social impacts, such as discrimination against individuals
   and minority groups. The fundamental rights approach, emphasizing individual rights and the need to
   protect individual freedom, thus gives great weight to individual decisions to voluntarily choose or
   reject genetic health services and to individuals’ access to extensive information about genetic
   services.47
   Andrews raises special concerns about the potential negative impact of genetic services on women and
   vulnerable populations, such as people of color and individuals with disabilities, and calls for careful
   examination of the differential impact of genetic interventions on particular groups. Citing empirical
   research on differential medical treatment of women and minorities, and the history of the eugenics
   movement, Andrews maintains that individuals in disadvantaged groups “are most likely to have their
   individual decisions overridden, sometimes on the patronizing grounds that it is for their own good,
   other times for the supposed good of society.” She argues that “allowing individuals in disadvantaged
   groups to make informed, more autonomous choices could reduce the resulting stigmatization and
   inequalities.” 48
   Another ethical perspective focuses more on equal opportunity, maximizing the benefits from genetic
   science, and recognizing society’s obligations, grounded in requirements of distributive justice, to
   provide access to genetic services. This approach emphasizes the significant impact of access to genetic
   services on an individual’s fair access to equal opportunity (which can be severely limited by pain and
   disability), the potential to prevent grave harm, and the recognition that genetic technology has been
   created in part with public investment and financial resources from the population as a whole.
   Buchanan, Brock, Daniels and Wikler urge “maximum progress in developing the genetic techniques
   and safeguards against exclusion” and propose that “public policy should try to ensure that the benefits
   of genetic therapy and (particularly) enhancement are not distributed along class lines or selectively to
   those who already enjoy greater opportunity.”49
   While acknowledging the concerns of disability rights groups that genetic interventions could further
   disadvantage those with genetically related disabilities, Buchanan et al . contend that this is not an
   inevitable consequence of genetic progress. They write:
   The problem lies not in our genes, but in their interpretation on a social level. One way we can
   resist the genetic determinism that constitutes part of the threat of greater discrimination is to
   demonstrate that we can, as a society, accommodate genetic advances while integrating, rather
   than marginalizing, people with disabilities.50
   These philosophers describe a potential role for the state (to balance market-based inequities) in
   providing access to genetic services with public funds. They argue that recognition of this role for the
   state “is not incompatible with a proper respect for reproductive freedom in particular and for liberty
   generally,”51 and suggest that future public policy should focus on ameliorating the conditions of those
   Module 8: Public Health Genetics: Screening Programs and Individual Testing/Counseling
   210
   with disabilities and enacting protective safeguards. Several commentators point to the positive effects
   of federal protections, such as the 1990 Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) that protects against
   employment discrimination for disabled workers who are otherwise qualified to do a job. Policies
   continue to evolve regarding the extent to which genetic conditions or genetic predispositions without
   any symptoms are considered disabilities under the ADA, but the law demonstrates society’s ability to
   mandate the inclusion of and reasonable accommodation for those with particular needs or
   vulnerabilities.
   Another set of background normative issues focuses on concerns about genetic reductionism and the
   identification of families, groups, subpopulations, or communities for public health targeting based on a
   genetic condition or genetic risk. Targeting particular subgroups with an elevated genetic risk is
   arguably justified because of the costs of universal screening for genetic conditions that have a very low
   incidence in the general population. However, concerns arise that increased use of genetic data and
   targeting will lead to victim-blaming and a public perception that health and illness are individual
   concerns.52
   Clayton describes the risks and limitations of targeted public health interventions in general (especially
   for vulnerable subgroups at risk for stigmatization and discrimination) and the challenges of targeting
   subpopulations when genetic risk factors may have some correlation with race. Even though she points
   out that “genetic variation and community, population, and even race do not correlate very well,”
   Clayton nonetheless proposes consulting communities to address the possibility of group harms and to
   acknowledge the significance of group identities and interests for some members of society. Community
   consultation, she says, “will provide several important benefits: (1) to understand the group’s concerns
   and to develop responses; (2) to help investigators focus on the consequences of their research for the
   subjects; and (3) to capitalize upon the teachable moment of research to educate the group about
   genetics, perhaps mobilizing them to participate in a more informed manner in political debates about
   the appropriate use of genetic information.”53
   Others, in contrast, note the wide variation of beliefs and experiences within communities and reject the
   notion of community consent or a strong role for group involvement, proposing instead that individuals
   take into account the risks and benefits of genetic research and testing for their families and
   communities. Dena Davis, for instance, points out that “even within the most traditional and isolated of
   communities, a person still has multiple identities based on, for example, age, gender, and profession.”
   She concludes that “(o)nly the individual can decide how her values will adjudicate among the many
   communities to which she belongs.” 54 Others, however, focus on the family unit as having a more
   significant role regarding genetic information. For example, Doukas and Berg explore the creation of a
   family covenant for genetics that defines expectations among family members regarding autonomy and
   benefit and promotes discussion within families about the competing ethical claims and conflicts that
   arise over genetic testing and information.55
   These different positions highlight the fact that genetic testing and screening provide information that
   may have significant implications for family members and particular communities. Courts have begun to
   address the issue of a physician’s duty to warn their patient’s family members (who are not their
   patients) about increased risk of genetic disease. In Safer v. Pack ,56 for instance, a New Jersey court
   focused on the forseeability of the risk of avoidable harm; the fact that individuals or groups at risk can
   be easily identified; and that the harm can be averted or minimized by warnings. As genetics continues
   to be further integrated into public health practice, policies must address the claims of family members
   Module 8: Public Health Genetics: Screening Programs and Individual Testing/Counseling
   211
   and groups for access to shared genetic information; for warnings about genetic conditions that become
   known to professionals based on collected genetic data; and for protections from potential social
   harms. The degree of risk and the severity of the potential harm that can be averted will be significant
   factors in developing policies.
   Module 8: Public Health Genetics: Screening Programs and Individual Testing/Counseling
   212
   Fact Sheet on Genetics/Gene Testing and Screening
   Excerpts adapted from the New York State Department of Health Task Force on Life & the Law Report,
   “Genetic Testing and Screening in the Age of Genomic Medicine,” Executive Summary, pp.1-3
   (http://www.health.state.ny.us/nysdoh/taskfce/screening.htm)
   Genes and Chromosomes
   ???? Genes are the blueprints of heredity. Genes are made of hundreds to thousands of DNA bases.
   The human genome consists of tens of thousands of pairs of genes. Each person inherits one
   copy of each gene from each parent.
   ???? Genes are organized along string-like structures called chromosomes. Each individual inherits
   two sets of twenty-three chromosomes, one from each parent: two sets of twenty-two autosomes
   and one set of sex chromosomes (X, X or X, Y).
   Genetic Variations, Mutations, and Human Disease
   ???? The DNA base sequence of human genes is about 99.9 percent identical among individuals.
   About 1 of every 1,000 DNA bases varies among individuals, accounting for inherited
   differences in traits and disease susceptibility.
   ???? Changes in a DNA base sequence, called mutations, account for inherited gene variations.
   Mutations may be harmful if they prevent a gene from making a normal copy of its specific
   protein. These mutations can cause, or increase susceptibility to, specific diseases.
   ???? Single-gene diseases are relatively rare diseases that result when a person inherits one gene
   with a harmful mutation or a pair of genes in which each has a harmful mutation. Inheritance of
   these mutated genes generally results in a 100 percent chance of developing a specific disease.
   Single-gene diseases include autosomal dominant diseases (e.g., Huntington disease),
   autosomal recessive diseases (e.g., sickle cell disease), and X-linked diseases (e.g., Duchenne
   muscular dystrophy).
   ???? Most diseases result from a complex set of both genetic and environmental causes. Inheritance
   of some harmful gene mutations increases the chance, although it does not ensure, that a
   person will develop a specific disease. These mutations are called inherited susceptibility
   mutations.
   Genetic Testing
   ???? Genetic testing for inherited genetic variants is performed for several purposes: diagnosis of
   individuals with symptoms, determination of future disease risks in asymptomatic individuals,
   determination of genetic risks for progeny, guidance of medical treatment, research, and
   individual identification.
   ???? Genetic testing for inherited genetic disease risks is an analysis of DNA, chromosomes, or gene
   products to provide specific information about variations in the number or form of genes or
   chromosomes in an individual or his or her progeny.
   Module 8: Public Health Genetics: Screening Programs and Individual Testing/Counseling
   213
   ???? Genetic information is information about specific variations in genes or chromosomes learned
   by genetic testing or by other means.
   ???? DNA-based testing directly analyzes the DNA base sequence of a gene.
   ???? Phenotypic testing identifies specific inherited gene variations indirectly, by detecting specific
   variations in the structure of a protein encoded by a gene or variations in a protein’s enzyme
   activity.
   ???? Karyotype analysis and fluorescent in situ hybridization analysis detect variation in form or
   number of chromosomes.
   ???? New testing technologies that will promote genetic testing in health care include DNA chip
   technology and tandem mass spectrometry.
   Assessing the Accuracy and Usefulness of Genetic Tests
   ???? Analytical validity of a genetic laboratory test is a measure of how well the test detects what it is
   designed to detect. It encompasses analytical sensitivity (the probability that the test will detect
   a gene variant it is designed to detect when present in a sample) and analytical specificity (the
   probability that that the test will be negative when a specific variant tested for is not present in
   a sample).
   ???? Clinical validity measures the extent to which an analytically valid test result can diagnose a
   disease or predict future disease. For predictive genetic tests, it includes positive predictive
   value (the ability to predict that an individual will develop a disease) and negative predictive
   value (the ability to predict that an individual will not develop a disease).
   ???? For DNA-based testing, clinical validity is limited by genetic heterogeneity and incomplete
   penetrance. Genetic heterogeneity means that different mutations in a specific gene, or
   mutations in different genes, are associated with the same disease. Incomplete penetrance
   means that within a population, not everyone who tests positive for a specific gene mutation will
   develop the associated disorder.
   ???? Utility of a test is a measure of how useful test results are to the person tested. Clinical utility is
   a measure of how a test may guide clinical decisions. In some circumstances, predictive genetic
   testing may not provide medical preventive or treatment options but may help reduce anxiety
   and/or aid planning for the future.
   Predictive Genetic Testing to Assess Reproductive Risks
   ???? Reproductive genetic tests detect heritable genetic variations that are associated with disease.
   This type of testing includes carrier testing, prenatal testing of fetal cells, and pre-implantation
   testing of embryos formed by in vitro fertilization.
   Module 8: Public Health Genetics: Screening Programs and Individual Testing/Counseling
   214
   ???? Reproductive genetic tests generally are offered to individuals and couples who are at increased
   genetic risk for a specific disorder based on family history or membership in a racial or ethnic
   group that has identified genetic variants that increase risk for a specific disease.
   ???? Carrier testing generally is performed to determine the risk of a healthy individual or couple of
   having a child with a recessive disorder. It may be performed before or after conception.
   ???? Prenatal testing of fetal cells includes amniocentesis and chorionic villus sampling.
   ???? Pre-implantation testing of embryos formed by in vitro fertilization is performed using single
   cells removed from individual embryos to detect specific gene mutations or chromosomal
   anomalies.
   Predictive Genetic Testing to Assess Future Disease Risks in Healthy Adults
   ???? Presymptomatic genetic testing is predictive testing of apparently healthy adults to determine
   whether they are at risk for a single-gene disorder. These disorders occur with virtually 100
   percent incidence in persons who have inherited a specific gene mutation.
   ???? Susceptibility (predispositional) testing is predictive genetic testing of apparently healthy adults
   to determine whether they are at increased risk, relative to the general population, for a specific
   future disease. A positive test result (finding a mutation) does not necessarily mean that a
   person will develop a future disease.
   ???? Pharmacogenetic testing is genetic testing of individuals to guide their pharmaceutical or other
   medical treatment. Pharmacogenetic testing seeks to promote a favorable response and to
   prevent an adverse response to a drug or other treatment based on genetic predisposition.
   Module 8: Public Health Genetics: Screening Programs and Individual Testing/Counseling
   215
   Case Study 1: Cystic Fibrosis Carrier Screening
   You are the nurse practitioner who directs one of the health department’s largest prenatal clinics serving
   a diverse urban population, and you have received the following memo. What would be your position on
   cystic fibrosis carrier screening and why?
   To: Senior Health Care Professional Staff
   From: Director, Division of Maternal and Child Health, State Health Department
   The state health department has become aware of new guidance from the American College of
   Obstetricians and Gynecologists, calling for widespread cystic fibrosis (CF) carrier screening. In
   light of the new recommendations, the state health department must consider whether to revise
   its screening policies for pregnant women who receive care in health department prenatal
   clinics.
   The current department policy is that high-risk families (those with a family history or child with
   CF) are referred to a genetics clinic for genetic counseling and testing for CF, if indicated. (The
   prenatal clinics routinely screen all obstetrical patients for a number of conditions that include
   rubella, syphilis, and hepatitis B. Targeted sickle cell testing is done for African American
   patients and others in high risk groups, with follow-up referrals to private genetic clinics funded
   by the health department, when needed.)
   Newborn screening for cystic fibrosis currently is not included in the state newborn screening
   program. Participants in the 1997 Centers for Disease Control and Prevention workshop,
   “Newborn Screening for Cystic Fibrosis: A Paradigm for Public Health Genetics Policy
   Development,” recommended that several states conduct research/pilot studies to assess the
   benefits of newborn screening for CF, but evidence is still inconclusive.
   About 15,000 maternity patients receive care in the state health department clinics each year.
   About 9,000 (60%) of the patients are Caucasian or another race or ethnicity considered at
   higher risk for carrying the CF gene. The cost of a test for CF carrier status is about $250.00. If
   both parents test positive, a follow-up genetic consultation would cost about $1,200. At this
   time, the only targeted testing routinely done in the health department prenatal clinics is for
   sickle cell anemia. About 6,000 (40%) of the obstetrical patients in the health department
   prenatal clinics are African American and they routinely receive the targeted sickle cell test,
   which costs about $4.00 per test. (Sickle cell has a prevalence rate of about 1 in 600 in the
   African American population and a carrier rate of about 1 in 12.) The benefit of carrier testing
   for both sickle cell and cystic fibrosis is the provision of increased information to pregnant
   couples so that they have the opportunity to learn all they can before their delivery dates in
   order to make informed decisions and plans.
   The maternal and child division is calling a meeting of senior health professionals in the
   division to discuss whether CF carrier screening should be provided. Please review the
   following material and prepare a brief statement of your perspective on the issue, particularly
   focusing on the ethical issues.
   Module 8: Public Health Genetics: Screening Programs and Individual Testing/Counseling
   216
10. Recommendations from the American College of Obstetricians and Gynecologists
    “Ob-Gyns Offering Large-Scale Cystic Fibrosis Screening”
    (http://www.acog.org/from_home/publications/press_releases/nr12-12-01-2.cfm)
    Washington, DC –The nation’s obstetrician-gynecologists have initiated one of the first clinical
    changes in the US arising from discoveries of the human genome project. In recent weeks, obgyns
    began to greatly expand the number of couples offered genetic screening for cystic fibrosis
    (CF) during preconception or prenatal care, thanks to tests made possible by genetic research.
    “The genetic revolution has begun,” announced Michael T. Mennuti, MD, of The American
    College of Obstetricians and Gynecologists (ACOG), speaking today at an ACOG press briefing
    in New York City. “The advances of the human genome project have moved from the laboratory
    to the obstetrician’s office. With these changes come new options and new decisions for
    expectant couples.”
    ACOG now recommends that ob-gyns make DNA screening for cystic fibrosis available to all
    couples seeking preconception or prenatal care — not just those with a personal or family
    history of carrying the CF gene, as previously recommended. ACOG has distributed physician
    and patient education materials to its 40,000 members to help implement this major screening
    change.
    Couples who learn they both carry the CF gene would have a 1 in 4 chance of delivering a child
    with cystic fibrosis. CF can bring pulmonary and gastrointestinal symptoms of varying severity,
    but most CF cases are associated with substantial illness and shortened lifespan and require
    lifelong medical care. Since the discovery in 1989 of the gene, called CFTR, that causes the
    autosomal recessive genetic disorder of CF, more than 900 mutations of the gene have been
    identified. Screening is now available for the most frequent CF mutations.
    Among ACOG’s new recommendations:
    ???? Testing will be made available to all couples, whatever their risk for carrying the CF gene,
    through information brochures on CF given to couples seeking preconception or prenatal
    care. These materials explain the relative risks for carrying CF, screening options, and what
    steps are next should a couple learn that they carry the CF gene.
    ???? For couples in ethnic or racial groups considered at higher risk for carrying the CF gene —
    Caucasians, particularly those of European or Ashkenazi Jewish descent — physicians will
    specifically offer screening and will follow up with inquiries about the couple’s decision on
    whether to be screened.
    “Our approach may become the prototype for future screenings for other genetic diseases,”
    notes Dr. Mennuti, the secretary of ACOG who co-chaired a steering committee on the project.
    CF is one of the most common genetic disorders in Caucasian populations, carried by about 1 in
    29 Caucasians. CFTR is much less frequent in Asian Americans (carried by 1 in 90), in African
    Americans (1 in 65), and in Hispanic Americans (1 in 46).
    Module 8: Public Health Genetics: Screening Programs and Individual Testing/Counseling
    217
    Physicians and patients will need to discuss whether it is worthwhile for a couple to be
    screened. “Should a couple learn that they both carry the CF gene — which gives them 1 in 4
    odds of having a child with CF — they must make the personal decision whether to continue or
    terminate the pregnancy,” says Dr. Mennuti. He notes that some couples will want to continue
    the pregnancy and learn all they can about the health needs and treatments for children with CF.
    “Testing provides the opportunity for such couples to learn all they can before their delivery due
    date,” notes Dr. Mennuti.
    To help physicians and patients with these decisions, ACOG and the American College of
    Medical Genetics (ACMG) issued a guideline publication for physicians, Preconception and
    Prenatal Carrier Screening for Cystic Fibrosis. A companion brochure for patients, Cystic
    Fibrosis Carrier Testing: The Decision is Yours, uses a question-and-answer format to help
    patients sift through information about their chances for carrying the disease and whether they
    should have testing. Cystic Fibrosis Testing: What Happens If Both My Partner and I Are
    Carriers? uses a similar format to explain the implications of test results and direct patients to
    appropriate counseling experts.
    Francis S. Collins, MD, PhD, director of the National Human Genome Research Institute, told
    ACOG members at their 50th anniversary meeting in April that the human genome era in
    medicine “will have profound implications for all branches of medicine, but perhaps particularly
    so for obstetrics and gynecology.” “It’s not surprising that the impact of the human genome
    project will first hit home during prenatal care visits across the United States,” adds Dr.
    Mennuti. “As we increase our ability to screen for more and more genetic diseases, the
    obstetrician’s office becomes the first arena where individuals confront the new dilemmas
    presented by 21st century science.”
    ACOG’s initiative is the final phase of a three-year project with ACMG and the National Human
    Genome Research Institute.
11. Excerpt from “Access to Genetic Services in the United States: A Challenge to
    Genetics in Public Health ,” by Jane S. Lin-Fu, M.D. and Michele Lloyd-Puryear, M.D., Ph.D.,
    in Genetics and Public Health in the 21st Century, ed. Muin J, Khoury, Wylie Burke, and
    Elizabeth J. Thomson, New York, Oxford University Press, 2000, pp. 286-287.
    Race and ethnicity in public health genetic programs
    In the United States, although racial designation in census data is based on self-identification,
    racial classification in the social context has no biological basis. Despite this illogical and
    offensive approach, the U.S. census and other governmental data sources continue to tabulate
    data according to race and ethnicity as defined by the 1977 U.S. Office of Management and
    Budget Directive No. 15.
    The incidence of diseases often varies among different racial and ethnic populations, and it is
    common for public health programs to target high-risk groups who often are minorities.
    Although the method of reaching out to each community should be culturally appropriate, the
    actual test and treatment or prevention measures used are generally the same for all racial and
    Module 8: Public Health Genetics: Screening Programs and Individual Testing/Counseling
    218
    ethnic groups. This one-size-fits-all approach, however, may present a problem in public health
    genetic programs.
    In planning for public health genetics programs, not only must one bear in mind that the
    frequency of genetic disorders is often very different in different populations and the genotypephenotype
    correlation may vary from group to group, but common mutations for the same
    genetic disease often differ among racial and ethnic populations. A single public health policy
    on a genetic disease for all racial and ethnic groups may be neither prudent nor ethical. The
    1997 National Institutes of Health Consensus Development Statement on Genetic Testing for
    Cystic Fibrosis CF is a clear example.
    The Statement recommended that genetic testing for CF should be offered to adults with a
    positive family history of CF, to partners of people with CF, to those seeking prenatal care and
    to couples planning a pregnancy. It did not recommend offering the CF test to the general
    population. The Statement acknowledged the wide range of test sensitivity in different
    population groups using current technology, nonetheless made no special recommendation for
    groups for whom the current CF test is of extremely low sensitivity. In the United States, the
    incidence of cystic fibrosis is much higher among European Americans (1/3,300) than among
    African Americans (1/15,300) or Asian Americans (1/32,100). Because of differences in mutation,
    the sensitivities of current cystic fibrosis tests vary widely, ranging from 90-95% among U.S.
    European Americans to 30% among Asian Americans. Thus offering CF testing to couples
    planning for a pregnancy or women seeking prenatal care, regardless of race or ethnicity,
    utilizing tests for the predominant mutations in U.S. European Americans would have an
    extremely low cost-benefit ratio in certain minority populations such as Asian American and
    Hispanic (24). More important, offering a genetic test of extremely low sensitivity to certain
    racial and ethnic populations raises the ethical issue of equity and questions the wisdom of such
    across-the-board one-size-fits-all genetics public policy for all U.S. populations. In CF testing,
    assuring true informed decision through effective counseling is a particular challenge for the
    Hispanic and Asian American populations. These two minority groups have the lowest test
    sensitivity (57% in Hispanics and 30% in Asian Americans) yet both have a very high proportion
    of immigrants who face severe linguistic and cultural barriers in accessing any service. Since
    offering a genetic test of 30-50% or even 75% sensitivity in a broad-based program should have
    been unacceptable to most public policy-makers, one must question what is an acceptable
    sensitivity level when genetic testing is recommended without regards to race and ethnicity? If
    one truly considers all human beings as equal, regardless of race and ethnicity, then shouldn’t
    public health policies and programs on genetic testing seek a test sensitivity of 90-95% for all
    racial and ethnic groups and not just for the majority population? If this is deemed impractical,
    and public health programs decide to offer a test with less than 90% sensitivity to certain
    minority populations, is this ethical and how should people in these communities be counseled?
    Is equity in fact achievable in one-size-fits-all genetics public policies?
12. Recent Research: Cystic Fibrosis Carriers Unlikely to Inform Many Family Members of
    their Genetic Risk (http://www.cdc.gov/genomics/update/text/gin1.htm)
    WASHINGTON, D.C., Nov. 6, 2001 – On the heels of new guidelines from three major medical
    groups calling for widespread cystic fibrosis (CF) carrier screening, new research suggests that
    Module 8: Public Health Genetics: Screening Programs and Individual Testing/Counseling
    219
    individuals found to be CF carriers are unlikely to inform many at-risk family members of their
    status. Several CF papers are being presented here today at the 20th Annual Education
    Conference of the National Society of Genetic Counselors (NSGC). A report on the largest
    ethnicity-based prenatal screening program in an HMO setting also is being given today at the
    meeting.
    Just a few weeks ago, the National Institutes of Health, American College of Medical Genetics
    and the American College of Obstetricians and Gynecologists issued joint guidelines calling for
    CF carrier screening to be offered to every Caucasian who is pregnant or considering having a
    baby.
    CF is a chronic, progressive illness that causes serious breathing and digestive problems
    resulting from build-up of sticky mucus in the lungs, pancreas and other organs. The average
    life expectancy for a person with CF is 32 years. About 1 in 25 Caucasians are carriers of CF, the
    most common severe recessive condition in individuals of Northern European ancestry.
    Approximately 1 in 2,500 babies born in this country each year will have CF, which can occur
    only when both parents are carriers. Genetic testing can identify carriers and determine how
    likely a couple is to give birth to a child who has CF or will be a CF carrier.
    Carriers Should Be Educated about CF Risk, Importance of Notifying Family Members
    “Many people have never heard of CF and mistakenly believe that if it’s not present in their
    immediate family they are not at risk,” said Kelly E. Ormond, genetic counselor and director of
    the graduate program in genetic counseling at Northwestern University Medical School,
    Chicago.
    Ormond conducted a study to determine how likely CF carriers were to inform immediate and
    extended family members of their carrier status and whether the presence of a family history of
    CF affects the likelihood that a carrier will notify at-risk relatives.
    “It’s important not only to inform relatives if you discover you’re a CF carrier, but to explain the
    implications as well,” Ormond said. “Individuals with a first-degree relative who is a CF carrier
    have a 1 in 2 risk of being a CF carrier themselves. If a second-degree relative is a CF carrier,
    the risk is 1 in 4; and if a third-degree relative is a carrier, the risk is about 1 in 8.”
    The Northwestern University study sought to determine the notification attitudes and practices
    of 48 CF carriers with 871 first-, second- and third-degree relatives. CF carriers who had a
    family member affected with CF informed 100 percent of their living first-degree relatives
    (parents, children, siblings and half-siblings); whereas, CF carriers without a family history only
    informed 84 percent of living parents and 56 percent of siblings.
    The most common reasons for sharing CF carrier status with parents and siblings were
    closeness of social relationship and the birth of an affected child with CF, according to
    Ormond. Two-thirds of children at risk for being carriers had not yet been informed of carrier
    status, primarily because they were too young.
    CF carriers with a family history of CF informed 68 percent of second-degree relatives (uncles,
    aunts, nieces and nephews) and 50 percent of third-degree relatives (first cousins). Carriers
    Module 8: Public Health Genetics: Screening Programs and Individual Testing/Counseling
    220
    without a family history of CF only informed 21 percent of second-degree relatives and 3 percent
    of third-degree relatives.
    Largest Prenatal CF Carrier Screening Program Finds Pre-Test Education is Essential
    During the NSGC meeting, Sharon Ungerleider, genetic counselor with Kaiser Permanente of
    Northern California, reported on the nation’s largest ethnicity-based prenatal CF carrier
    screening in an HMO setting.
    Since 1999, Kaiser Permanente Northern California Region has offered CF genetic screening to
    all pregnant women who identify either themselves or their partners as having Caucasian
    ancestry. A woman is tested first and when a mutated, or damaged, CF gene is found, the male
    partner is offered CF screening to help determine the likelihood that the fetus will be affected.
    Kaiser tests for 37 CF mutations; current guidelines recommend screening for 25 mutations. Of
    the 27,507 Kaiser members who have been screened to date, 952 female carriers and 27 male
    carriers were identified. All 27 high-risk couples were offered genetic counseling and prenatal
    testing.
    “It takes two mutations to have a child affected with CF, but just because you’re both carriers
    doesn’t mean you will definitely have a baby with CF,” Ungerleider said. “There is a 1 in 4
    chance that the child will have CF. There is a 1 in 2 chance that the child will be a carrier, just
    like both parents, and there is a 1 in 4 chance that the baby won’t have CF or be a carrier.”
    Pre-test education is extremely important when helping couples understand their CF risk and
    the significance of their genetic test results, according to David R. Witt, M.D., medical
    geneticist and director of Kaiser’s regional CF screening program in Northern California.
    “There is a spectrum of CF in terms of the severity of the disease that is influenced by the
    particular mutations that are present,” Dr. Witt said. “Severe mutations represent about 90
    percent of all mutations, and mild mutations represent about 10 percent. If a couple has one
    mild and one severe mutation, the mild mutation gives some protection with the gastrointestinal
    aspects of CF, but the lung aspects of the disease can still go either way in terms of severity.
    Explaining the expected impact of the mutation findings in terms of the future child’s clinical
    course is a difficult but critical part of genetic counseling.”
    Knowing whether you’re a carrier gives you options you wouldn’t otherwise have had, Ormond
    said. “Your partner can be tested. You can have prenatal diagnosis if you’re expecting a child. If
    both partners are CF carriers, couples planning a pregnancy can consider alternate methods for
    getting pregnant, including egg or sperm donation or pre-implantation diagnosis.”
    (Co-authors on the paper on the topic being presented by Ormond are P.L. Mills, L.
    Lester and L. Ross. Co-authors on the paper on the topic being presented by
    Ungerleider are Dr. Witt and J. Coppinger.)
    Module 8: Public Health Genetics: Screening Programs and Individual Testing/Counseling
    221
    Case Study 2: Ethical Implications of a Decision on MCADD Screening of
    Newborns
    As Director of the State Health Department, John Jamison has responsibility for the state’s Newborn
    Screening Program, which currently screens every infant born in the state for six disorders, including
    phenylketonuria, hypothyroidism, and hemoglobinopathies. The state’s newborn screening program has
    had a quiet and respected history in the state up until now, unlike some other health department
    programs, such as the state cancer registry that was a recent focus of legislative hearings and a public
    outcry over privacy concerns.
    The nurse practitioner who directs the newborn screening program, Sally Scott, has just reported that
    pressure is building for the addition of new testing for genetic disorders to the battery of required state
    screenings for newborns. Sally says pressure is coming from many sources, including individual parents,
    powerful advocacy groups within the state, and even some physicians. A coalition of these interested
    parties has just met with her and requested the state health department’s support for a bill to add a test
    for one particular disorder this legislative session – the test for Medium Chain Acyl-CoA
    Dehydrogenase Deficiency (MCADD). The group intends to issue a press release within two or three
    days and plans to publicize whether the state health department is supportive of the test.
    Sally believes the test for MCADD is likely to garner more attention and support from the public and
    the press than other newborn screening tests, because MCADD increasingly has been mentioned as a
    potential cause of Sudden Infant Death Syndrome (SIDS).
    Sally met with Jamison yesterday for guidance. She warned him that MCADD is just the latest, in what
    she believes is becoming a continuing and growing problem for the state health department regarding
    genetic screening for newborns. As director of newborn screening for the last five years, she has been
    receiving frequent inquiries about the possibility of expanded newborn genetic screening, both for
    particular disorders and for predisposing conditions.
    Jamison asked Sally to get back to him today with as much relevant material as she can quickly find, so
    that they can review the data and discuss the options with the department’s epidemiologist, health
    policy analyst, and the Director of the Division of Maternal and Child Health.
    At the meeting Sally presents the following information.
    The State legislature, with guidance from the health department when appropriate, has the authority to
    establish newborn screening policies, including deciding which disorders should be included among the
    battery of newborn screening tests.
    Currently parental consent is not required for the newborn screening tests in the state. All newborn
    screening tests are conducted by the state lab, which reportedly discards newborn blood samples after
    the initial testing.
    The state newborn screening program provides follow-up notification of positive tests, counseling, and
    in some cases, state-provided treatment when newborn conditions are identified. These costs generally
    are not covered by health insurance.
    Module 8: Public Health Genetics: Screening Programs and Individual Testing/Counseling
    222
    The annual cost of the newborn screening program in the state is now $2.5 million.
    MCADD is a type of fatty oxidation disorder where an enzyme defect in the fatty acid metabolic
    pathway inhibits the body’s ability to utilize stored fat. Initial clinical presentation occurs from two
    months of age to two years, and has not been found in children post-adolescence. An initial event of
    MCADD is usually triggered by prolonged fasting, which can lead to vomiting, lethargy, coma, apnea,
    cardiopulmonary arrest, and sudden death. Up to 30 percent of initial events result in death and lead to
    a misdiagnosis of SIDS in up to 5 percent of cases. One recent publication suggested that up to 50% of
    infants with MCADD died as a result of their first acute episode and in these cases, MCADD was
    diagnosed postmortem.
    Current data suggest that the incidence of MCADD varies in the U.S. between a homozygous
    prevalence (individuals presenting with MCADD) of between 1 in 6,400 to 1 in 20,000 and a
    heterozygous prevalence (asymptomatic carriers of MCADD) of 1 in 6,900. The newborn screening data
    from three other states that currently test for MCADD show a per year incidence that ranges from
    0.0001 in one state to 0.00003 in another state. A routine blood sample drawn at time of birth and
    processed via a Tamden Mass Spectrometer (TMS) can reveal MCADD gene involvement. Follow-up
    testing can confirm diagnosis. The state laboratory, however, currently does not have equipment to
    conduct these tests.
    Treatment: Some studies suggest that early detection and follow-up treatment that could be as simple
    as eliminating prolonged periods of infant fasting could be life saving. Recent studies suggest that
    intravenous infusion with 10% dextrose will generally cause rapid improvement after an acute event.
    Other treatment options such as 150 mg per day of L-carnitine or cornstarch mixed with liquid at
    bedtime could prevent acute events leading to hospitalization or death. L-carnitine treatment has been
    recommended for the first three years of life for MCADD patients with confirmed diagnoses.
    Expected Outcome of the Newborn Screening Test: Given current estimates of incidence rates,
    screening all infants in the state could result in approximately 8-10 confirmed cases/year. An estimated
    30-50% of patients with MCADD die within their first two years; so about 4 lives are projected to be
    saved per year in the state.
    Approximate Costs of MCADD Screening
    Given the state’s annual birth rate of over 100,000, two tandem mass spectrometers will need to be
    purchased for the state lab at a total cost of about $700,000. Annual operating costs for the systems
    would be about $50,000. Two additional lab specialists would cost about $80,000. Additional nursing
    time for assessment of laboratory results, follow-up, and outreach programs would cost between
    $75,000, which would not be covered by insurance.
    A fee of $4.00/test would be added to the total cost of the current set of newborn screening tests, and
    would be billed to insurance carriers (this covers machine use cost, allowing for machine depreciation),
    for an additional annual screening cost of about $500,000. (This raises the annual cost of the state
    program to $3 million.)
    Module 8: Public Health Genetics: Screening Programs and Individual Testing/Counseling
    223
    Follow up confirmation testing for identified newborns will cost about $6,000 a year. Treatment for
    MCADD for the 8-10 patients a year would cost about $2,500 total, much of which would be covered
    by insurance.
    Without early detection of newborn screening and preventive treatment, approximately four MCADD
    patients in the state each year will be expected to experience acute episodes of undiagnosed MCADD
    resulting in hospitalization. Based on cost analysis from another state, the average acute episode results
    in a seven-day NICU stay and a seven-day pediatric ward stay, with a total cost of about $33,000 per
    episode. From a pure dollar outlay, adding this test will cost more to the state than the cost of treating
    those children with MCADD when they have acute events. This concludes Sally’s report.
    Jamison thanks Sally, and turns to the other three professionals at the meeting for their reactions. The
    health policy analyst quickly responds, “Sally’s cautious approach to this question is well-founded
    because the issue of newborn genetic screening is potentially explosive. We cannot be in a position to
    go against the tide of these powerful advocacy groups, because they could create a media circus and
    undermine our position and support in the legislature on a number of important public health
    initiatives. This could result in cuts to our budget on critical issues — on teen education for sexually
    transmitted diseases, for instance, and other public health programs that operate just below the public
    radar screen. As long as the newborn test is valid and preventive treatment is available, the health
    department must support the test and I think…”
    The Director of the Division of Maternal and Child Health interrupts, “I disagree. My programs are
    significantly underfunded, and my staff overworked. I would like to initiate numerous new programs,
    some requiring far less money than this screening program. This new test will mean that I will have to
    reassign one or two of my staff nurses to run this program, which will require assessing the laboratory
    test results and following up with patients and physicians. Better funding of current programs or new
    programs we are planning for would result in saving the lives of many more than four newborns a year
    and additionally would result in a significant reduction in child and mother morbidity. I believe the
    health department should not be pressured into supporting particular programs without careful analysis
    of other potential uses of the funds.”
    The epidemiologist concurred, “I believe we should do a study about this screening program, including
    assessing other uses for health department funds and also our own study of the intervention’s
    effectiveness, which is not clear to me. We might undertake a pilot test of the MCADD test and the
    preventive interventions. We could randomly screen a group of newborns in the state by sending their
    newborn blood samples to outside labs, and then divide positive babies into one of two groups: a
    treatment group who are given the L-carnitine for three years and a control group. This seems to me the
    only way to justify the program – with good science.” The health policy analysts shakes his head,
    “Would you tell the parents of the control group babies that their children might be at increased risk for
    a disease that kills? Would you get informed consent from parents in the pilot screening program?”
    Jamison holds up his hand. “There seem to be numerous ethical questions arising in our discussion.
    Let’s explicitly address them. What are the ethical issues in this case as you see them and what are your
    positions?”
    Module 8: Public Health Genetics: Screening Programs and Individual Testing/Counseling
    224
    Considering the Ethical Issues Involved in MCADD Screening
    Assessing the Public Health Problem
    ???? What is at stake in the current situation? Is public health department missing SIDS cases? How
    should the health department make decisions about the use of limited resources to benefit the
    public? Are there other concerns?
    ???? What role does the public have to play in this issue? Should there be public discussion? How
    could that discussion be elicited?
    ???? Are commercial interests at stake? Has the company that manufactures the TMS machine been
    involved in discussions to date? Should it be?
    ???? Who are all the stakeholders in this decision? Do any of the stakeholders have conflicts of
    interest? What are these? Do any have conflicts of obligation?
    ???? Are there issues of power involved in the ongoing debate? Where is the interface between
    public health and politics in this situation?
    ???? Is there money available to do the testing? What are the alternative uses to which it might be
    put? Are the MCADD advocates aware of those facts?
    Advocacy
    ???? Do the roles and duties of advocates of MCADD testing differ from the roles of health
    department staff? Should they be different?
    Ethical Issues
    ???? What specific ethical issues are involved in a decision to test (or not test) for MCADD?
    Specifically, what harms, risks and benefits may be involved for individual children, parents,
    other individuals and for the population at large?
    ???? If money is diverted from other possible lifesaving uses to MCADD testing, should the harms,
    risks and benefits of the other intervention not selected be taken into account?
    ???? What are the moral claims of the various stakeholders?
    ???? Are there any other ethical issues that might be involved?
    ???? Have any discussion of screening ethics occurred in the other states where MCADD testing is
    done? What were the considerations in those settings?
    Module 8: Public Health Genetics: Screening Programs and Individual Testing/Counseling
    225
    Case Study 2: Discussion
    Ethical Problems
    This case study presents John Jamison, Director of the State Health Department and Sally Scott, who
    directs that state’s Newborn Screening program, with several dilemmas about how to respond to
    requests to take a position on the inclusion of an additional test in the state’s current newborn
    screening program.
    Each is aware that three other states currently include MCADD screening for newborns, making the
    option of adding it a technically feasible one. They are aware of the test’s potential for saving the lives
    of several newborns in the state each year through use of the test. However, both are aware of other
    possible policy and ethical dilemmas.
    First, although data are available from which to conduct a cost-benefit analysis, available data do not
    include any information on false negative or false positive screening tests. What information about false
    positive and false negative MCADD screening tests should be included in the direct cost-benefit
    figures?
    Second, the source of funding for adding any new screening test is not obvious. While the actual costs
    of the laboratory tests will be covered by private insurance for those who have coverage, there still
    remains the significant costs for the health department to pay a staff nurse to interpret all of the
    laboratory results and do the followup, which insurance does not pay for. In addition, the state health
    department is responsible for the costs of the laboratory tests for the state’s uninsured population. If
    adding a new test required diversion of resources from other current state programs, resulting in fewer
    children benefiting from those other programs, should that lost benefit be included in the cost-benefit
    analysis?
    Third, state employees are being pressed to support legislation to further the goals of one advocacy
    group, the MCADD screening lobby. How should Jamison and Scott decide what position to take with
    the MCADD test?
    Relevant Values and Key Stakeholders in the Decision
    In addressing this issue, Jamison must address the concerns of multiple stakeholders. Jamison is aware
    that different values lie behind the positions taken by various stakeholders, including his own staff.
    Advocates for MCADD screening, including perhaps parents of affected children, would like to totally
    eliminate morbidity and mortality related to MCADD. Advocates’ position seems to give priority to
    beneficence. In the name of autonomy, some persons would like to limit newborn screening programs to
    tests done with parental consent. Manufacturers of testing equipment would like to increase the market
    for their product(s).
    Jamison is also aware that roles and duties of health department staff differ from the roles of MCADD
    advocates. State health department staff must be concerned with values of efficiency , e.g., cost per
    MCADD case detected, and utility. Health department staff, including Sally Scott, must also be
    concerned with non-maleficence and justice , since they have to balance the value of a new screening
    test with the opportunity costs of other programs that might have to be cut to allow inclusion of the
    MCADD test. Specifically, health department staff would appear to have a conflict of obligation
    Module 8: Public Health Genetics: Screening Programs and Individual Testing/Counseling
    226
    between children/parents who might benefit from MCADD testing and children/parents who are
    beneficiaries of current programs that might have to be cut to allow MCADD screening.
    Director Jamison has to include the concept of planning for an orderly decision process for this and
    future decisions. Finally, it is not yet clear what values might inform the responses of the state
    legislature, which will have to ultimately decide, based on Jamison’s recommendation and on lobbying
    pressure, whether the MCADD test should be included (and perhaps whether new funds to pay for it
    should be added.)
    Necessary Information
    In considering his decision, Jamison clearly needs objective information beyond the list of stakeholders
    and their values. The costs of MCADD screening (in equipment, staffing, etc.) and the benefits in terms
    of cases detected and lives saved are a starting point. In addition to the information already available,
    these data should include the frequency of false positive and false negative MCADD screening results.
    State health department staff is the best initial source for such information although information from
    manufacturers and from the coalition could also be reviewed. Similarly, if funds to pay for MCADD
    screening are not currently available, the opportunity costs of other programs to be cut must be
    included in the information. Specifically, what are the options for internal redirection of funds are what
    would be the program impacts of such redirection? Should the impact on other public health programs
    be made public, so that other stakeholders who may be adversely affected can take a position?
    Jamison is also interested in knowing the position of the American Academy of Pediatrics (and its state
    affiliate chapter) on MCADD screening. He would also like to know more about how MCADD decisions
    were made in the states where its use has been discussed. (These states include not only the three
    states where MCADD testing was included but also any states where decision were made to not include
    MCADD testing.)
    Finally, Jamison could consider discussing the MCADD screening issue with members of the legislature
    who ultimately would be making the key decisions about the testing program.
    Available Options
    In considering any recommendation to the legislature, Jamison must consider each of the several
    options available:
    ???? Do not add MCADD screening at this moment. Cost-benefit analysis may support this position
    in that costs for treating children with MCADD may be less than screening costs. (Note: This
    does not take into account the deaths.)
    ???? Defer a decision while collecting additional information through additional study of MCADD
    testing.
    ???? Add MCADD screening using current resources (Some other activity or program has to be cut
    to cover the health department’s costs of nursing staff assigned to this program.)
    ???? Add MCADD screening once new resources can be identified. This approach could perhaps
    include a form of partnership with the coalition.
    Module 8: Public Health Genetics: Screening Programs and Individual Testing/Counseling
    227
    ???? Consider a more comprehensive review of the state’s approach to newborn screening: Because
    of Sally Scott’s sense that more new screening tests and more advocacy will becoming in the
    near future, Jamison and Scott could also consider an option of asking for a review of state
    newborn screening policy. Outside experts in various fields could inform both the MCADD
    decision as well provide recommendations for how the state should approach the issue of
    considering other new newborn screening tests as the come along.
    Process for Arriving at a Decision
    In addition to discussions with his own staff, Jamison should be sure that he and his staff have heard
    from as many of the stakeholders as possible. Specifically, meeting with representative of the advocacy
    coalition can help inform his position. That discussion could include the issues and values at stake as
    well as options for moving toward consensus on an approach to adding a new test. During this meeting,
    in addition to hearing the coalition’s perspective, a process of compromise could be discussed.
    Jamison might also consider holding a public hearing on the MCADD issue either through the state
    health department or jointly with the state legislature.
    Questions about options
    ???? What ethical justifications support each of the options, i.e.,
    ???? to support MCADD now?
    ???? to not support MCADD but use funds elsewhere?
    ???? to study the issue further?
    ???? to partner with advocacy group to raise external funds for MCADD testing?
    ???? What is the appropriate role for the State Health Department in resolution of this issue?
    ???? What roles could the State Health Director play in the resolution of this issue?
    ???? Would a legal opinion from the department’s legal counsel be helpful in resolving this issue?
    ???? Would having the State Health Department proactively bring this issue to the legislature be
    helpful?
    ???? Would an external ethics consultation be helpful?
    Module 8: Public Health Genetics: Screening Programs and Individual Testing/Counseling
    228
    Case Study 3: PKU and Follow-Up
    Dr. Susan McManus, director of the Adamsville Tri-County Health Region, asked to make a
    presentation at the monthly meeting of the state health department executive committee, which includes
    Dr. John Jenkins, the commissioner of the state health department, and the directors of the major state
    health divisions, including epidemiology and surveillance, maternal and child health, laboratory
    services, public clinics, and health policy.
    Dr. McManus, herself a pediatrician by training, had been frustrated for a number of years about the
    continual cutback in preventive services available for maternal-child health care and had just become
    aware of yet another case of an infant born in her district with an easily preventable birth defect. The
    infant was born with microcephaly because her mother did not follow a special diet for Phenylketonuria
    (PKU) during pregnancy. This was the fourth such PKU-related case in her region in the past five years.
    Having done some research, Dr. McManus knew that her health district population could have an
    elevated risk for PKU because of the high population with Scot-Irish family backgrounds, and she was
    concerned that the state health professionals may not consider this problem significant from a state
    perspective.
    Recent national attention about the problem of dietary control among pregnant women with PKU
    published by the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, however, gave her the courage to institute
    a new policy in her health district, and she wanted both to notify the state health department heads and
    to enlist their support for her project.
    As head of the one of the largest health districts in the state for ten years, Dr. McManus enjoyed a good
    personal relationship with many leaders in the state health department and felt comfortable beginning
    her presentation with the story about the infant recently born with microcephaly.
    It was a heart-wrenching case. The mother was 21 years old, unmarried, and had discontinued formula
    use for PKU in early adulthood because of limited financial resources. She reported that she had not
    fully understood the importance to her infant’s health of following the PKU diet, and was devastated
    when she found out that she could have easily prevented her infant’s condition. While she expressed a
    strong willingness to adhere to the diet during pregnancy, her lack of transportation, financial
    constraints, and inability to take time off from work prohibited her from accessing care at the nearest
    metabolic clinic, which was 3 hours away. She did meet with local health department staff several
    months into the pregnancy to acquire formula, but it was too late. PKU was included in her prenatal
    medical records, and she was referred to a maternal-fetal specialist; however, her blood phe
    (phenylalanine) levels were not monitored and she was not referred to a metabolic clinic.
    Dr. McManus looked her colleagues in the eye and said, “I am determined to prevent future cases like
    this one and I have an idea. I have decided to begin an on-going tracking system of these young women
    until they reach child-bearing age in order to provide special education to them about the importance of
    maintaining a special diet during their pregnancies. One way is to have a nurse visit with the child and
    her family each year. Another way is to maintain a record of the child’s physicians or clinic, and send
    advisory letters to physicians to be included in the child’s health records. In addition, for those
    infants/children who do not remain in contact with the health agency, the program will begin an
    Module 8: Public Health Genetics: Screening Programs and Individual Testing/Counseling
    229
    aggressive outreach to locate the young women when they turn 16 in order to provide them with the
    educational information about their condition and an appropriate diet during pregnancy.”
    Dr. McManus looked at her colleagues: “Before you respond, I want to assure you that because I am
    initiating this program in my health district, the state will not be under pressure to adopt such a policy
    for all regions, since the population in my district is at greater risk of PKU because of their genetic
    backgrounds.
    I’m sure you all have some concerns about my program, such as questions about targeting the young
    women in my health region and about the confidentiality and consent for the use of newborn genetic
    information. I am essentially creating a PKU registry, based on the newborn screening data, and I
    understand the public’s great sensitivity to public health registries. But I believe for my county the
    registry is justified by the increased risk and gravity of the harm that can be prevented. I would like to
    end my presentation by summarizing a recent report from the Centers for Disease Control and
    Prevention.” She then summarized the following report.
    Excerpts from “Barriers to Dietary Control Among Pregnant Women with Phenylketonuria
    – United States, 1998-2000” MMWR 2/15/2002/51(06);117-120.
    “Newborns in the United States are screened for phenylketonuria (PKU), a metabolic disorder
    that when left untreated is characterized by elevated blood phenylalanine (phe) levels and
    severe mental retardation (MR). An estimated 3,000–4,000 U.S.-born women of reproductive
    age with PKU have not gotten severe MR because as newborns their diets were severely
    restricted in the intake of protein-containing foods and were supplemented with medical foods
    (e.g., amino acid-modified formula and modified low-protein foods) (1–4).
    When women with PKU do not adhere to their diet before and during pregnancy, infants born to
    them have a 93% risk for MR and a 72% risk for microcephaly (5–6). These risks result from the
    toxic effects of high maternal blood phe levels during pregnancy, not because the infant has
    PKU (5–6). The restricted diet, which should be maintained for life, often is discontinued
    during adolescence (5–10).
    This report describes the pregnancies of three women with PKU and underscores the
    importance of overcoming the barriers to maintaining the recommended dietary control of
    blood phe levels before and during pregnancy. For maternal PKU-associated MR to be
    prevented, studies are needed to determine effective approaches to overcoming barriers to
    dietary control.
    During the fall of 2000, CDC conducted an interview-based study of women with PKU who
    were aged >18 years and pregnant during 1998–2000 (index pregnancy), regardless of dietary
    management or pregnancy outcome. Women were recruited from three metabolic clinics that
    provided services funded by state and private sources and were interviewed using a structured
    questionnaire that was completed in person or by telephone. Medical records were requested to
    document timing of diet initiation, control of blood phe levels (defined as 2–6 mg/dL), and
    pregnancy outcome. The study protocol was approved by CDC’s Institutional Review Board, and
    informed consent was obtained from each respondent.
    Module 8: Public Health Genetics: Screening Programs and Individual Testing/Counseling
    230
    A total of 30 women met the interview criteria; two could not be contacted. Of the 28
    remaining women, 24 were interviewed (17 in person and seven by telephone). The median age
    was 28 years (range: 22–38 years); 75% were married, 96% were white, and 50% had a high
    school education or less. A total of 51 pregnancies had occurred among 24 women. Among the
    24 index pregnancies, 18 (75%) resulted in live-born infants; 11 (46%) pregnancies were
    intended.
    The use of formula-based medical foods before conception was reported more often among the
    11 women who were trying to conceive than among those who were not (risk ratio=3.5; 95%
    confidence interval=1.6–10.2). Use of modified, low-protein medical foods to diversify the diet
    was reported only among women trying to conceive. No difference was reported in avoiding
    high-protein foods between women who were and who were not trying to conceive. One woman
    remained on the restricted diet throughout adulthood; 23 women had been off the diet for 6–
    24 years (average: 16 years). At the time of the interview, 17 (71%) women were not using
    medical foods (65% because of the unpleasant taste). A total of 22 women had resumed the diet
    before or during their index pregnancy, eight (33%) women had contacted the metabolic clinic
    before conception, and 11 (46%) had contacted the metabolic clinic after conception but by
    week 10 of gestation. Of the 22 medical records available, 12 (55%) records indicated controlled
    blood phe levels before 10 weeks of gestation.
    All of the women expressed confidence in their metabolic clinic staff’s knowledge of a pherestricted
    diet and maternal PKU; eight (33%) perceived that their obstetricians were
    knowledgeable about maternal PKU. Approximately equal numbers of women used public
    assistance and private insurance to cover the costs associated with clinic visits (Table 1). Costs
    of medical foods were more often covered by public assistance than by private insurance (Table
    1). Among the 13 women who used public assistance, nine (69%) reported that proof of
    pregnancy was required to receive services. When the data were stratified by state of residence,
    women in state C had the lowest rate of live births resulting from their pregnancies, lowest use
    of formula before pregnancy, fewest women achieving metabolic control before 10 weeks’
    gestation, and longest commutes to a metabolic clinic (Table 2). These differences were not
    significant by Fisher exact test.”
    Dr. McManus looked around the table of state health professionals, and smiled. “What do you think of
    my idea?” she asked. The room was quiet.
    Dr. Jenkins shook his head, “Your idea raises many questions we have been struggling over and, quite
    frankly, avoiding. Should we keep identifiable genetic data from the newborn screening tests, or
    alternately, keep the blood samples as we do now in case they would be useful for surveillance in the
    future? And, as your program idea brings up: Should we allow, or perhaps are we ethically obligated to,
    follow-up on the test results years later, when the infants are able to understand the medical information
    themselves? Do we have a duty to these infants?”
    Dr. Jenkins looked around the room at his staff. “What do you each think? What are the ethical issues
    here?” Should we allow this program in one region, targeted at this one particular group, to go
    forward?
    Module 8: Public Health Genetics: Screening Programs and Individual Testing/Counseling
    231
    Case Study 3: Discussion
    Ethical Concerns
    Dr. McManus is clearly aware of the various ethical issues at play.
    First, acquiring and keeping information on individuals without their explicit consent could be perceived
    as a privacy (autonomy) threat to those persons. Part of this concern is the issue of contacting these
    phenylketonuria (PKU)-affected people who may be unaware that they have PKU and, more important,
    that their children are at grave risk.
    A different perspective on the same issue is whether the state has an obligation to be sure that PKUaffected
    persons, detected in a state-supported screening program as children, are aware of their
    condition as they enter adulthood and their childbearing years. This obligation could be construed as an
    obligation to the children of persons with PKU as much as to those identified persons themselves.
    One large generic ethical issue is regarding ownership of the information on individual citizens
    collected in a state-run or state-supported screening program.
    Another practical consideration is that of reliably identifying “at risk” pregnancies prior to the actual
    risk period. Some at risk women are likely to have changed their names when married and thus
    undetectable by name based screening during pregnancies.
    Another ethical issue involves the strength of the requirement to assure access to appropriate
    interventions once “at-risk” pregnancies have been identified.
    Another issue is that of justice. This program is to be implemented in only one part of a state. Although
    the program suggested by Dr. McManus for her health region could be viewed as a pilot program for
    the state that could be extended if judged successful in an evaluation, it is worth considering the justice
    issues of a limited access program.
    A final issue with ethical dimensions is that of the age for aggressive outreach (16 years). Is that age
    adequate to reach all females at risk before they become pregnant? What are the issues involved with
    choosing a younger age?
    Relevant Values and Stakeholders
    Dr. McManus and the various program directors have a number of values to incorporate into whatever
    decision they make. One issue is beneficence, in terms of the need to protect children from untreated
    PKU. Identifying high-risk pregnancies and preventing disease among children “at risk” is a socially
    useful goal that could also benefit individual children and parents.
    Another issue is that of risk to the affected women’s other relationships in various ways. For example, is
    there a risk involved in spouses or prospective spouses becoming aware that a woman has PKU? Is there
    a risk of discrimination from an insurance company’s becoming aware of PKU in a prospective
    customer?
    Module 8: Public Health Genetics: Screening Programs and Individual Testing/Counseling
    232
    Another issue is the state’s obligation to assure freedom from future PKU, having identified it in the
    maternal generation. Is the state permitted to retain these records and conduct follow-up activities? Is,
    in fact, the state not only permitted but obligated to carry out follow-up in order to provide education
    and warnings?
    From a societal standpoint, which health care professional or person should have a duty to warn? Who
    is in the best position to prevent harm?
    Necessary Information
    Having information about existing PKU follow-up programs or similar follow-up programs from other
    states could provide both a framework for discussion in this state as well as experience in dealing with
    ethical concerns raised.
    In addition, it could also be helpful to obtain new information as it becomes available from this state or
    elsewhere on adverse outcomes of potentially detectable but undetected PKU cases. Any new
    evaluations similar to that published by CDC would also be useful.
    One additional piece of information includes the numbers of affected children born each year and the
    length of time needed to reliably determine benefits, costs, and any other adverse effects from the
    program.
    Finally, a very clear description of the system used to protect the privacy and confidentiality of persons
    whose name is in this registry would be helpful. This should include information on confidentiality
    agreements signed by employees with access to the data as well as plans for follow-up of persons who
    move to known addresses in other health regions or states.
    What would be the response if the mother of an affected child refused follow-up? Would the girl herself
    be contacted at some point? At what age?
    Available Options
    In considering next steps, there may be several options:
    ???? Allow Dr. McManus to do exactly what she has suggested, testing the effectiveness of several
    ways to stay in touch with affected girls and their families. This could be done as a formal
    research study.
    ???? Conduct the program as suggested but have it done as a pilot program of the State Health
    Department.
    ???? Carry out the program state-wide. This step would considerably shorten the time required to
    know whether the program is effective at ensuring follow-up.
    ???? Tell Dr. McManus not to do the program.
    ???? Defer a decision until an external Committee can discuss and provide guidance.
    Module 8: Public Health Genetics: Screening Programs and Individual Testing/Counseling
    233
    Process for Arriving at a Decision
    Dr. McManus and the State Health Director were clearly hoping for a discussion by senior state health
    officials present at this meeting. Although necessary, is that discussion sufficient? Could there be any
    value in having a broader public discussion of this issue among health officials (e.g., professional
    groups) and among the public? Would that answer differ as a function of whether this program is
    conducted in a region vs. the entire State? What might be the issues raised by those particularly
    concerned with privacy and confidentiality issues? What information would be needed to reassure them?
    Is the successful implementation of confidentiality protections for other public health registries in the
    state evidence that supports this proposal?
    Module 8: Public Health Genetics: Screening Programs and Individual Testing/Counseling
    234
    Case Study 4: State Genetics Commission: Ethical Implications of
    Informed Consent in the State Newborn Screening Program
    As the health commissioner of the largest city (population 5 million) in the state, you have been
    appointed by the Governor to a Blue Ribbon Commission on Ethics and Human Genetic Technologies
    to study and report on genetics issues in state health policy, as well as related issues in genetic
    reproductive technologies. The 15-member Commission includes representatives from a range of
    governmental, for-profit, and public interest groups, a number of whom you are developing
    collaborative partnerships with, such as the state hospital association and the largest health insurer in
    the state.
    The Governor has asked the commission to explore the ethical issues and make recommendations on
    the major issue currently pending in the state legislature: should parental informed consent be required
    for the state newborn screening program?
    Given that the legislature is expected to hold hearings within the month, each member of the
    Commission was asked to bring a statement of ethical concerns and a short position statement to the
    first commission meeting.
    You have consulted the director of the city’s department of maternal and child health and your health
    policy analyst and learned the following:
    The current state law authorizes the state department of health to establish, maintain and carry out a
    newborn screening program to detect hypothyroidism, PKU, hemoglobinopathy, congenital adrenal
    hyperplasia (CAH), and maple syrup urine disease; and additionally to provide each infant determined
    to be at risk with a screening test for sickle cell diseases. The state legislature currently determines
    which tests will be administered under the newborn screening program, with consultation from an
    advisory board of the state health department.
    The newborn screening requirements do not apply to infants whose parents object for religious or
    personal reasons. However, parental consent for newborn screening currently is not required, and even
    though newborn testing may not be conducted over parental objection, virtually no parents raise the
    issue or object to testing.
    Currently only a few states require informed consent (that is, parental permission) for newborn
    screening, while about a dozen other states require that before testing is done, parents must be
    explicitly informed about newborn screening.
    Your health policy analyst provided the following background information about informed consent.
    ???? Analysis of informed consent generally focuses on five elements: competence, disclosure,
    understanding, voluntariness, and consent. Beauchamp and Childress include these
    elements, when they write: “One gives an informed consent to an intervention if (and
    perhaps only if) one is competent to act, receives a thorough disclosure, comprehends the
    disclosure, acts voluntarily, and consents to the intervention.” They also acknowledge that
    in some circumstances obtaining consent that satisfies these rigorous standards may be
    Module 8: Public Health Genetics: Screening Programs and Individual Testing/Counseling
    235
    excessive or impossible to implement and that an alternate framework based on social or
    institutional rules of consent may be appropriate. They explain: “We should evaluate
    institutional rules not only in terms of respect for autonomy but also in terms of the
    probable consequences of imposing burdensome requirements on institutions and on
    professionals. Policies may legitimately account for what is fair and reasonable to require of
    health care professionals and researchers, the effect of alternative consent requirements on
    efficiency and effectiveness in delivering health care and advancing science, and the effect
    of consent requirements on the welfare of patients.” ∗ In some circumstances, patients do
    not expect to be asked for or to give full and rigorous informed consent, for example, as
    with a routine battery of blood tests; consent in these circumstances is presumed or implied
    because testing is routine.
    ???? In the context of screening, Gostin describes five forms of screening and consent:∗∗
13. Compulsory Screening (with no informed consent), authorized by state legislation under
    its police powers, for specific circumstances, such as when a person is exposed to
    blood borne infections, or for certain class of persons, such as newborns, inmates or
    prostitutes.
14. Conditional Screening, which make benefits contingent upon screening, as in the case
    of requirements for a PPD tuberculin test in order to work in a school or nursing home.
15. Routine Screening with Advance Notification (Opt-In), which involves offering
    screening tests to a population, with patients not given the test until they have
    consented or “opted in.”
16. Routine Screening without Advance Notification (Opt-Out), which involves routinely or
    automatically screening individuals in a population (who may not be aware of or
    understand the purposes of the screening tests), unless patients explicitly refuse to have
    the test.
17. Voluntary Screening, which requires full and rigorous informed consent.
    ???? Regarding parental consent for newborn screening in particular, some commentators raise
    ethical arguments that focus on the role of the state to protect children from harm and
    suggest there are compelling arguments against a policy requiring parental consent or
    honoring parental refusals of screening for some conditions; others focus on the important
    role of parents as caretakers and highlight the clinical value of involving parents in newborn
    screening decision making; and still others focus on the potential value of more public
    participation in the policy-making process for newborn screening programs so that
    questions about parental consent will be addressed by parents and consumers in a public
    policy-making body.
    What position would you take on the issue now pending in the legislature? Why?
    ∗ Beauchamp, T. and Childress, J., Principles of Biomedical Ethics (5th Ed.), (Oxford and New York: Oxford University Press,
    2001) p.78-79.
    ∗∗ Gostin, L, Public Health Law, (Berkeley and Los Angeles: University of California Press, 2000) pp.193-195.
    Module 8: Public Health Genetics: Screening Programs and Individual Testing/Counseling
    236
    Case Study 4: Discussion
    Ethical Concerns
    This case study presents you, as a health commissioner and as a member of the Governor’s Blue Ribbon
    Commission, with an opportunity to elicit and express opinions about the informed consent process in
    the state’s current newborn screening program. You are aware that the focus in this case is on currently
    available and validated newborn screening tests rather than new or still experimental tests.
    You are aware of at least two large and partially overlapping ethical concerns in this situation.
    The first concern addresses balancing the autonomy or respect for autonomy of those involved as
    participants in the screening process with the obligation of the State (i.e., the government) to reduce
    preventable morbidity, i.e., society’s disease burden, by identifying disease risk among those not yet
    affected.
    A second ethical concern involves clarifying the potential beneficiary or beneficiaries of the newborn
    screening process and being sure that whatever consent process that is put in place protects the interest
    of all parties, including the pregnant woman or new mother, the fetus or infant, the father and the
    society at large.
    Relevant Values and Stakeholders
    In addressing this informed consent issue, the Commission must identify various stakeholders and
    address their concerns and interests. Advocates for women who are either tested themselves or whose
    newborns are being tested are appropriately concerned with respecting the autonomy of those women to
    consent to or refuse the screening process. They point out that the State’s interest in reducing disease
    among its citizens may not automatically override maternal autonomy. Advocates may be concerned
    about a coercive nature to the screening process, especially when children of ethnic minority or poor
    women are being tested.
    Others may raise opposite issues, concerned that the interests of children may not always be best
    represented by decisions of their mothers, especially when the information transmitted as part of the
    informed consent process is uncertain.
    A related value raised could be that of competence of women to give what is essentially surrogate
    consent for their children. For example, what are the issues involved in having a new mother who is
    herself a minor give or refuse consent for screening for her newborn child. Is a woman giving or
    refusing consent in this setting also consenting or refusing on behalf of the child’s father? Does the
    answer to that question vary when the parents are not married? Can a child damaged by a disease which
    might have been detected except for refused consent by his/her mother have a valid claim against her
    mother once the child becomes an adult. In a related question, what is the state’s obligation to provide
    support to a child or family if a child becomes ill in a setting of refused consent?
    Necessary Information
    In considering this issue, you, as a health director and as a member of the Blue Ribbon Commission,
    can be informed by several kinds of information.
    Module 8: Public Health Genetics: Screening Programs and Individual Testing/Counseling
    237
    In terms of objective information, information on the frequency and severity of conditions being
    screened for can help provide a context for consent discussions. Such information should include not
    only assessment of medical consequences but also information on treatment cost of disease in
    unscreened persons as well as costs among persons whose disease was detected earlier by screening.
    Information from your state and from other states on the frequency of refusal of consent—as well as the
    consequences of refusal—can provide additional perspective on the magnitude of the problem.
    Information from the State’s attorney general or other legal counsel can be helpful in understanding the
    boundaries of the Commission’s – or the State’s – decision-making ability. The State Constitution may
    provide guidance about the limitations of unconsented testing as well as guidance on the State
    government’s responsibility and authority to act on behalf of the community. That official can also
    provide opinions about options for considering justifications for religious or other refusals should
    mandated testing be recommended.
    Finally, opinions on informed consent can be solicited from parents providing – or refusing — consent
    as well as from persons affected by disease that might have been prevented had newborn screening been
    done.
    Arguments generally raised in public AGAINST requiring consent from parents focus on the fact that
    the benefits of screening are obvious and substantial, relative to potential harms; that no “reasonable”
    parent would refuse screening (perhaps raising questions of child neglect); that obtaining consent from
    each parent is difficult, costly and an unwarranted expenditure of time and money; and that the history
    of newborn screening has led to the current expectation that newborn screening is routine and that
    parental consent is appropriately “presumed.” Some of the arguments raised in public FOR requiring
    parental consent include: parental consent is necessary because refusal to newborn screening is not
    unreasonable, given that many conditions for which newborn testing is done are rare and that newborn
    screening does have adverse consequences, particularly psychological harms associated with false
    positive tests; that long-term parental care taking is enhanced when parents are included in all clinical
    decisions about their children; and that the process of obtaining consent does not have to be timeconsuming
    or burdensome for health care professionals but rather can be part of an educational process
    that enhances the health professional-patient relationship.
    Available Options
    In considering consented screening recommendations to the governor, you and the Commission must
    consider each of the options available, which include:
    ???? Mandatory screening without consent. This process could still allow for a refusal of conscience
    for religious or other reasons.
    ???? Presumed consent, which includes public awareness of the screening program and testing
    unless objection is raised.
    ???? Explicit consent, including a counseling and consent process with each new mother.
    Module 8: Public Health Genetics: Screening Programs and Individual Testing/Counseling
    238
    Within each of these options, a second set of options must be prepared to address procedures should
    there be a difference of consent opinion between the two parents.
    Process for Arriving at a Set of Recommendations
    In addition to collecting and discussing the objective information described earlier, you could
    encourage the Commission to hold open hearings where various opinions can be solicited and heard.
    The state’s legal counsel can be helpful in clarifying within the recommendations a set of procedures for
    deciding on the competence for consent of underage persons as well as options for including fathers in
    the consent process.
    1 Muin J. Khoury, Wylie Burke, and Elizabeth J. Thomson, “Genetics and public health: A framework for the integration of
    human genetics into public health practice,” in Genetics and Public Health in the 21st Century, ed. Muin J. Khoury, Wylie
    Burke, and Elizabeth J. Thomson, New York, Oxford University Press, 2000, p. 5.
    2 James F. Childress, Ruth R. Faden, and Ruth D. Gaare, et al. , “Public Health Ethics: Mapping the Terrain,” Journal of Law,
    Medicine, & Ethics, 30, no. 2 (Summer, 2002), p. 173.
    3 “Out of Eugenics,” in The Code of Codes, ed., Daniel J. Kevles and Leroy Hood, Massachusetts, Harvard University Press,
    1992, p. 9.
    4 Buck v. Bell, 274 U.S. 200 (1927)
    5 Association of State and Territorial Health Officers (ASTHO), “Public Health Genetics Policy Statement,” PHG-1.4.6, p. 49,
    ratified October, 2001, http://www.astho.org/pubs/consolidatedpolicy.html#PHG-1_PubHealthGenetics.
    6 Celeste M. Condit, Roxanne L. Parrott, and Beth O’Grady, “Principles and practices of communication processes for
    genetics in public health,” in Genetics and Public Health in the 21st Century, ed. Muin J. Khoury, Wylie Burke, and Elizabeth
    J. Thomson, New York, Oxford University Press, 2000, p. 550.
    7 Ibid. 555.
    8 Childress, Faden, and Gaare et al ., p. 174
    9 Norman Daniels, “Accountability for Reasonableness,” British Medical Journal, 321 (2000), p.1301.
    10 Muin J. Khoury, Wylie Burke, and Elizabeth J. Thomson, “Genetics and public health,” p. 9.
    11 Lorenzo D. Botto and Pierpaolo Mastroiacovo, “Surveillance for birth defects and genetic diseases,” in Genetics and Public
    Health in the 21st Century, ed. Muin J. Khoury, Wylie Burke, and Elizabeth J. Thomson, New York, Oxford University Press,
    2000, p. 125-126.
    12 Steven S. Coughlin and Wylie Burke, “Public health assessment of genetic predisposition to cancer,” in Genetics and
    Public Health in the 21st Century, ed. Muin J. Khoury, Wylie Burke, and Elizabeth J. Thomson, New York, Oxford University
    Press, 2000, pp. 151-165
    13 Muin J. Khoury, Wylie Burke, and Elizabeth J. Thomson, “Genetics and public health,” p. 7.
    14 Muin J. Khoury, Wylie Burke, and Elizabeth J. Thomson, “Genetics and public health,” p. 7, citing Rothman, KJ. Modern
    epidemiology. Boston: Little, Brown, 1986, p. 14.
    15 MJ Khoury, JF Thrasher, W Burke, EA Gettig, F Fridinger, R. Jackson, “Challenges in Communicating Genetics: A Public
    Health Approach. p.3. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention website.
    http://www.cdc.gov/genomics/info/reports/program/communicate.htm
    16Scott Burris, Lawrence O. Gostin, and Deborah Tress, “Public health surveillance of genetic information: Ethical and legal
    responses to social risk” in Genetics and Public Health in the 21st Century, ed. Muin J. Khoury, Wylie Burke, and Elizabeth J.
    Thomson, New York, Oxford University Press, 2000, p 539.
    17 Neil A. Holtzman and Michael S. Watson, eds., “Promoting Safe and Effective Genetic Testing in the United States: Final
    Report of the Task Force on Genetic Testing” (ELSI, September 1997). P. 6. http://www.nhgri.nih.gov/ELSI/TFGT_final/.
    18 Ibid., pp. 8-9.
    19 Tom L. Beauchamp and James F. Childress, Principles of Biomedical Ethics (Fifth Edition), New York, Oxford University
    Press, 2001, p.301.
    20 American Academy of Pediatrics Newborn Screening Task Force, “Newborn Screening: A Blueprint for the Future,”
    Module 8: Public Health Genetics: Screening Programs and Individual Testing/Counseling
    239
    Pediatrics 106, No. 2, August, 2000, p. 389-390. See also, Diane B. Paul, The Politics of Heredity, New York, State
    University of New York Press, 1998, pp.173-186
    21 Michael A. Stoto, Donna A. Almario, and Marie C. McCormick, editors, Reducing the Odds, Washington, D.C., National
    Academy Press, 1999, pp. 27-29.
    22 Ibid., p. 29.
    23 Holtzman and Watson, eds., “Promoting Safe and Effective Genetic Testing” p. 27-28.
    24 National Research Council, “Committee for the Study of Inborn Errors of Metabolism,” Genetic Screening: Programs,
    Principles and Research, Washington, D.C., National Academy of Sciences, 1975.
    25 L.B. Andrews, J.E. Fullarton, N.A. Holtzman, and A.G. Motulsky, eds., “Assessing Genetic Risks. Implications for Health
    and Social Policy, Washington, D.C., National Academy of Sciences, 1994, cited in American Academy of Pediatrics
    Newborn Screening Task Force, “Newborn Screening: A Blueprint for the Future,” Pediatrics 106, No. 2, August, 2000,
    p.391.
    26 American Academy of Pediatrics Newborn Screening Task Force, “Newborn Screening: A Blueprint for the Future.
    Executive Summary: Newborn Screening Task Force Report,” Pediatrics 106, No. 2, August, 2000, p. 387.
    27 Committee on Bioethics, American Academy of Pediatrics, “Ethical Issues with Genetic Testing in Pediatrics,” Pediatrics,
    107, No. 6, June, 2001, pp. 1451-1455, (Website, http://www.aap.org/policy/re9924.html )
    28 Ibid., p.1453
    29 Muin J. Khoury, Wylie Burke, and Elizabeth J. Thomson, “Genetics and public health,” p. 9
    30 Arno Motulsky and Ernest Beutler, “Population Screening in Hereditary Hemochromatosis,” Annual Review of Public
    Health, 2000. 21 (1): 65-79
    31 Ibid., p. 79.
    32 Michele Reyes and Muin Khoury, “Screening for Iron Overload due to Hereditary Hemochromatosis,” Centers for Disease
    Control and Prevention Website, http://www.cdc.gov/genomics/info/factshts/hemoscreen.htm , 4/13/02
    33 Lori B. Andrews, Future Perfect, New York, Columbia University Press, 2001, p. 42.
    34 Committee on Bioethics, American Academy of Pediatrics, “Ethical Issues with Genetic Testing in Pediatrics,” Pediatrics,
    107, No. 6, June, 2001, p.1451-1455, website citation, http://www.aap.org/policy/re9924.html, p. 6
    35 Judith Benkendorf, Beth Peshkin, Caryn Lerman, “Impact of genetic information and genetic counseling on public health,”
    in Genetics and Public Health in the 21st Century, ed. Muin J. Khoury, Wylie Burke, and Elizabeth J. Thomson, New York,
    Oxford University Press, 2000, p 365.
    36 Diane B. Paul, The Politics of Heredity, New York, State University of New York Press, 1998, p.149.
    37 Allen Buchanan, Dan W. Brock, Norman Daniels, and Daniel Wikler, From Chance to Choice, Genetics & Justice,
    Cambridge (UK), Cambridge University Press, 2000, p. 325.
    38 Jane S. Lin-Fu and Michele Lloyd-Puryear, “Access to genetic services in the United States: A challenge to genetics in
    public health,” in Genetics and Public Health in the 21st Century, ed. Muin J. Khoury, Wylie Burke, and Elizabeth J. Thomson,
    New York, Oxford University Press, 2000, p.286.
    39Ronald N. Green & Matthew Thomas, “DNA: Five Distinguishing Features for Policy Analysis, 11 Harvard J. L. & Tech. 571
    (1998) in Lori B. Andrews, Maxwell J. Mehlman and Mark A. Rothstein, Genetics: Ethics, Law and Policy, St. Paul, Minn.,
    West Group, 2002, p. 608 (note)
    40George J. Annas, “The Limits of State Laws to Protect Genetic Information,” New England Journal of Medicine, Vol. 345,
    No. 5, August 2, 2001, p. 385
    41 George J. Annas, “Genetic Privacy: There Ought to be a Law,” 4 Tex. Rev. L.& Politics 9, 9-13 (1999) in Lori B. Andrews,
    Maxwell J. Mehlman and Mark A. Rothstein, Genetics: Ethics, Law and Policy, St. Paul, Minn., West Group, 2002, p. 604,
    606.
    42Douglas H. Ginsburg, “Genetics and Privacy,” 4 Tex. Rev. L. & Politics 17, 22-23 (1999) in Lori B. Andrews, Maxwell J.
    Mehlman and Mark A. Rothstein, Genetics: Ethics, Law and Policy, St. Paul, Minn., West Group, 2002, pp. 606-607.
    43 Thomas H. Murray, “Genetic Exceptionalism and “Future Diaries’: Is Genetic Information Different fro Other Medical
    Information?” in Mark A. Rothstein, ed. 1997, Genetic Secrets: Protecting Privacy and Confidentiality in the Genetic Era,
    1997, in Lori B. Andrews, Maxwell J. Mehlman and Mark A. Rothstein, Genetics: Ethics, Law and Policy, St. Paul, Minn.,
    West Group, 2002, p. 608.
    44 Scott Burris, Lawrence O. Gostin, and Deborah Tress, “Public health surveillance of genetic information: Ethical and legal
    responses to social risk” in Genetics and Public Health in the 21st Century, ed. Muin J. Khoury, Wylie Burke, and Elizabeth J.
    Module 8: Public Health Genetics: Screening Programs and Individual Testing/Counseling
    240
    Thomson, New York, Oxford University Press, 2000, p. 538.
    45 Ibid.
    46 Lori B. Andrews, Future Perfect, New York, Columbia University Press, 2001, p. 27, 29.
    47 Ibid., at pp.176-177.
    48 Ibid., at p. 106.
    49 Allen Buchanan, Dan W. Brock, Norman Daniels, and Daniel Wikler, From Chance to Choice, Genetics & Justice,
    Cambridge (UK), Cambridge University Press, 2000, p.332.
    50 Ibid., pp. 332-333.
    51 Ibid., pp. 342
    52 Scott Burris, Lawrence O. Gostin, and Deborah Tress, “Public health surveillance of genetic information: Ethical and legal
    responses to social risk” in Genetics and Public Health in the 21st Century, ed. Muin J. Khoury, Wylie Burke, and Elizabeth J.
    Thomson, New York, Oxford University Press, 2000, p.540.
    53 Ellen Wright Clayton, “The Complex Relationship of Genetics, Groups, and Health: What It Means for Public Health,” The
    Journal of Law, Medicine & Ethics, 30:2, pp. 297, Summer, 2002.
    54 Dena S. Davis, “Groups, Communities, and Contested Identities in Genetic Research,” Hastings Center Report 30, no. 6
    (2000), p. 38-45
    55 David J. Doukas and Jessica W. Berg, “The Family Covenant and Genetic Testing,” American Journal of Bioethics 1, no. 3
    (2001), p. 2.
    56 Safer v. Pack, Superior Court of New Jersey, Appellate Division, 677 A.2d 1188, (N.J.Super.Ct.App.Div.1996)
    Module 9: Public Health and Health System Reform: Access, Priority Setting, and Allocation of Resources
    241
    MODULE 9
    Public Health and Health System Reform:
    Access, Priority Setting, and Allocation of Resources
    Michael Garland, D.Sc.Rel.
    Department of Public Health and Preventive Medicine
    Oregon Health & Science University
    John Stull, MD, MPH
    Department of Public Health and Preventive Medicine
    Oregon Health & Science University
    Humans live in a threatening world. Individually and collectively we respond to threats. We protect. We
    run. We fight. We repair. We build shields, weapons, and walls. Cultural, socio-political, and historical
    forces shape the social institutions that protect both individuals and groups from harms. The health
    system is an organized set of societal responses to the health problems that threaten human well being
    (Fields 1973).
    The object of interest in public health is protection from threats to health. The ethics questions explore
    our relationships in community and our obligations within community. Which protections from what
    harms should we expect as members of a community? How seriously does solidarity oblige us? What
    does it oblige us to assure to one another? How do we distribute both the benefits and the burdens of
    having an effective system for protecting health? How do we exercise our community responsibility
    politically?
    Individuals and communities as well as institutions and culture stand in dynamic relationship. Historical
    choices affecting these relationships are essential aspects of an adequate analysis of the ethics of access
    to health care and allocation of social resources for health (Walzer 1983, Starr 1982 and 1994). The
    concepts of social solidarity, wisdom, prudence, and fairness are central to our analysis. We note that
    access arguments tend to flow from assumptions about rights or common good or enlightened selfinterest.
    Allocation arguments tend to rest on assumptions about societal wisdom and affordability of
    programs. We argue that questions about health systems lead to political process questions about
    democratic participation and representation (Garland 1994). Because of the complex and technical
    nature of health policy, a partnership between experts and the general public is a desirable strategy for
    reasonable public participation in this process (Garland 1999).
    Protection against morbidity and mortality. The health system is a social mechanism devised to deal
    with morbidity and mortality as they affect the physiologic, psychological, institutional, and cultural
    domains of human activity (President’s Commission). Those components of well being comprise
    society’s notion of health and disease. All of these domains change over time under their own dynamics
    as well as under the influence of specific health related forces. Our central collective responses to
    morbidity and mortality have produced the social institutions of medicine and public health. In addition
    to these central activities, a host of community-based services and various forms of alternative and
    complementary medicine also serve important protective and rehabilitative functions. All of these
    Module 9: Public Health and Health System Reform: Access, Priority Setting, and Allocation of Resources
    242
    elements constitute the full health care system about
    which questions of the ethics of access and allocation
    arise. Throughout the essay we will us the expression
    “system of health protections” in an expansive sense to
    refer to all forms of societal response to morbidity and
    mortality in the community. We include in this meaning
    those responses that are simply compassionate without
    possibility of protection or cure (for example, providing
    palliative care to dying persons).
    The medical literature gives ample documentation of the
    genetic and environmental factors that act at the
    physiological and psychological levels to produce
    disease. From the time of Rudolph Virchow in the 19th
    Century, social factors have been recognized as
    contributing to the occurrence of illness, disability, and
    other threats to well being. Epidemiologists increasingly
    explore the complex interplay between biomedical
    individualism and a profusion of social factors.
    Contemporary researchers are elaborating the theoretical
    underpinnings of the web of causation model and
    exploring the thesis that social conditions are
    fundamental causes of disease. In this view, social,
    economic, and political factors profoundly affect the
    distribution of health-related conditions and the genetic
    and environmental factors associated with them.
    These same social, economic and political factors also affect the distribution of the organized responses
    to these health threats – both in terms of the distribution of goods and services and in terms of the
    ability of those in need to access those goods and services. Research into effective interventions to
    protect health and to counteract pathologic events points to the need to address both individual and
    social domains. In addition, the health services research literature documents the role of social and
    behavioral factors in determining the way individuals and groups seek and obtain health services. The
    challenges of social wisdom, prudence, and fairness require crafting health care access solutions in the
    context of social norms, structures, and practices (Garland 2001).
    Dynamic relationships and historical choices. The links between medicine and public health have not
    been strong over the past century. The growth of science and technology and the related increase in the
    power of diagnosis and treatment partly explain this phenomenon. The medical profession has moved
    toward a narrower focus on the individual both in its practice and in the ethical implications that come
    to bear on practitioners. Despite this, the perspectives and practices of medicine and public health
    complement one another.
    Medicine carries out its social function of protecting and improving health by focusing on providing
    care and services for individuals with health-related conditions. This tends to focus on the biologic and
    physiologic and on the psychological and behavioral domains, although medicine incorporates
    recognition of the importance of prevention and of social factors in both health and illness. Public
    Key Questions to Identify Frame of
    Reference
    We will highlight several key questions for
    exploring the ethics of access to health
    system benefits and the allocation of
    societal resources to maintain the system.
    We will introduce the questions in relation
    to specific aspects of the issues. The
    accompanying fact sheet for this module
    will gather all these questions in one place
    and connect them to the three cases for
    discussion. The first two key questions are
    useful for uncovering the general frame of
    reference that underlies thinking about
    problems in access to care and resource
    allocation.
18. Which of the many threats to human
    health and well being deserve
    organized response from the health
    system?
19. Which social factors that threaten
    health (e.g., poverty, risky behaviors,
    environmental degradation) should be
    countered with social interventions to
    limit their impact?
    Module 9: Public Health and Health System Reform: Access, Priority Setting, and Allocation of Resources
    243
    health carries out its social role by focusing on identifying and ameliorating environmental factors that
    prevent or allow disease and injury to affect the health of individuals and communities. It also focuses
    on the early identification of, and interventions for, health-related conditions at the community level.
    These complementarities and the origins of both medicine and public health in social practices make it
    imperative that they work together. It also makes health policy about access and allocation of resources
    more complex. It is hard to determine when one passes from health protection to economic policy or
    social policy.
    Practitioners and researchers in public health and medicine have unique and critically important
    perspectives on the core functions of public health (assessment, assurance, and policy development).
    Each of these functions has its complement in the practice of clinical medicine. The unique social
    position of these professionals within the formal institutions of health care especially equip them to
    advocate for systemic change as a means of improving the health of the communities in which they live
    and serve. Social responsibility imposes a moral obligation on health professionals to be engaged in
    addressing issues such as access to care, the just allocation of health resources, reduction in poverty
    and the effects of poverty, and education of the public about health risks.
    There is a tendency in American health policy discussions to reduce all of health policy to decisions
    about medical care. This recurrent conceptual problem leads to a distorted definition of the problems
    and an excessively narrow selection of policy alternatives. The discussion of “health insurance” is a vivid
    example of this conceptual problem. For the most part health insurance covers medical care for illness
    and injury. Debates focused on how to extend health insurance to all members of the American
    community hide an important fact. Access to insurance that pays for medical care is only part of the
    larger ethical problem of access to health protections. Similarly, questions about allocating resources
    for medical care are only part of the ethical problem of resource allocation in pursuit of the
    community’s health.
    During the 20th Century, most advanced industrial nations determined that all their citizens should have
    access to medical care. That expression of social solidarity is usually understood in terms of a
    guaranteed right to medical care possessed by every citizen. Some nations took the path of making
    medical care delivery a government function (for example, Great Britain or the Scandinavian countries).
    Others made health insurance the focus of government intervention (for example, Canada or Germany).
    The United States, however, determined that access to medical care would remain a private good for
    most citizens. The government assumes a collective responsibility for securing access for some citizens
    through programs such as Medicare, Medicaid, the Indian Health Service, the Veterans Administration
    System, the military, and prisons. For the rest of the citizenry, however, access to medical care (except
    for emergency care) is left to the market. People get medical care they can pay for and this payment is
    usually mediated by insurance plans or prepayment schemes.
    Although tax deductions encourage Americans to purchase health insurance, buyers and sellers in the
    marketplace primarily determine how health insurance is distributed in America. (Note: We deliberately
    use the misleading expression “health insurance” because it is the common name for this product. It is
    important to remember that health insurance is mostly for medical care and hospital services. “Health
    care” is a much larger frame that includes social, economic, and legal domains that have significant
    impact on human health.) Historically, America adopted the social practice of distributing health
    insurance through employment status, so that employers (not the employees who become insured) are
    Module 9: Public Health and Health System Reform: Access, Priority Setting, and Allocation of Resources
    244
    often viewed as the purchasers of health insurance. American employers manage the purchase of health
    insurance for their employees through a system of benefits that accompany salaries. A result of this
    market-based approach is that some 15 % of the American population makes a decision not to buy
    health insurance. Most often they simply do not consider health insurance as an expenditure option
    because they lack the financial resources to afford it (Schroeder 2001).
    Numerous public opinion polls taken during recent decades show that a solid majority of Americans
    want health care access to be universally guaranteed. This is evidence of the moral sentiment of the
    American citizenry regarding solidarity and health care as part of the security and welfare we expect as
    members of our society. Because America distributes health insurance mainly through employment, the
    extension of health insurance coverage functions as a surrogate for guaranteeing access. The majority of
    uninsured persons work in low-income jobs that do not include health insurance as part of the total
    compensation. These persons do not fit into the categories for which government sponsored coverage is
    available. Many states are experimenting with tax-supported subsidies to assist families with limited
    incomes to purchase private health insurance. Still, the United States has not yet produced a political
    solution that can accomplish universal coverage through employment driven health insurance or through
    the creation of new government programs.
    Central ethical concepts. What concepts help analyze the ethics of access to health care? On what
    basis and by what methods should we allocate collective resources for health care? What can guide us in
    setting priorities among needs for health care resources?
    We propose that social solidarity, social wisdom, rights,
    societal obligation, fairness, and justice are the most
    important ethical concepts to apply to this area.
    Solidarity. The first important concept for exploring the
    ethics of access to health care, social solidarity, comes
    from the meaning of membership in a community
    (Walzer 1983). Solidarity is both moral sentiment and
    norm. Solidarity arises from the sense of belonging. It
    expresses itself in loyalty and self sacrifice for those we
    acknowledge to be “one of us.” Security and mutual
    welfare are primary benefits of membership in a
    community. We rely on one another for these essential
    goods of human thriving. We come to human awareness
    in community. First we know family and gradually the circle enlarges to bring us awareness of many
    others with whom we share our lives. In community we find shelter, nourishment, attention to suffering,
    values, and knowledge. In society we live, build, reproduce, suffer, and die. Shared life builds social
    solidarity among members of the same community. In relation to threats to health, organized health
    care is the societal response to suffering and death.
    Key Questions About Social and
    Historical Context for Health Policy
20. How can we keep in mind medical
    care, public health, and other social
    factors that influence health while
    pursuing questions of social
    obligation regarding health
    protections?
21. How can we keep ideas of social
    obligation relevant to historical and
    cultural patterns of response to health
    threats?
    Module 9: Public Health and Health System Reform: Access, Priority Setting, and Allocation of Resources
    245
    How the response to suffering and death takes shape
    depends on social decisions made in government, in
    economic structures, in law, and in intimate familial
    choices. Over time a community’s responses take
    institutional form. Some widely available protections
    and services come to be seen as basic needs that the
    community feels obliged to meet. Through various
    social processes, a community determines who are its
    members and whose needs it must meet. Society
    determines how strong its commitment will be (Walzer
    1983). In contemporary parlance, society sets priorities
    to guide the use of its collective resources. The
    underlying justification for institutional policies derives
    from the shared health needs, common exposures to
    health risks, socially produced health benefits, and
    caring response to pathology. Health investment includes conducting research in an attempt to generate
    the information needed to demonstrate and improve the effectiveness of both preventive and treatment
    practices.
    Rights, Societal Obligation, and Self-Interest . Moral arguments about access to health care follow
    several pathways. Some invoke the concept of human rights. This argument asserts that basic human
    needs (such as food, shelter, education, justice) create an obligation on society to provide some level of
    common access to these fundamental goods. Access to these is a matter of right inherent in all human
    beings. Creating social mechanisms for the distribution of access to these goods (including health care)
    is a primary obligation of civil society (Mann 1999). Other approaches simply assert that the basic needs
    ground a generalized obligation on society to assure access to health care for all its members. This is
    an argument based on common good grounds. Access to health care is an element of the common good
    that improves the general well being of all members of society. It is a benefit of social life that ought to
    be pursued by society because it is achievable and possible. (President’s Commission, Walzer 1983.)
    Another line of argument appeals to self interest of members of society. A significant stable level of
    access to medical care makes human existence more secure for each member of society. In this
    argument, the pursuit of individual well being is the ground for the obligation to take social action
    (Churchill 1994). All three of these lines of reasoning are too often narrowly focused on medical care
    rather than the full frame of health care.
    Social Wisdom. Reflections on wisdom come after a prior societal determination to guarantee access
    for all to health care (whether as a matter of right, or common good, or individual self interest). Social
    wisdom directs us to shape our systems of health care so that we accomplish what we value. The scope
    of a mutual guarantee of health care has to be defined so we can commit sufficient collective resources
    to the system. For example, in the last twenty years, neonatologists have made remarkable strides in
    delivering effective care to endangered neonates. Yet during the same period, rates of prematurity and
    low birthweight have been rising. A narrow focus on medical care access and allocations prevents
    society from focusing on social and economic factors that lead to these birth conditions. As a matter of
    social wisdom, the public health frame will look for some way to reduce this increasing flow of patients
    to costly neonatal intensive care units (Lantos 2001).
    Key Questions About the Foundation of
    Health Security in Community
    Solidarity
22. What obligations arise from social
    solidarity among members of a
    community who face common threats
    to health and well being?
23. Who counts as a member of the
    community with respect to health
    protections?
24. What information does a community
    need about its health to design an
    effective health protection system?
    Module 9: Public Health and Health System Reform: Access, Priority Setting, and Allocation of Resources
    246
    A subset of wisdom is the challenge to our social prudence to build sustainable systems of protection
    and care. Prudence is the social virtue that looks ahead in time to determine what resources we need
    keep our system working. What portion of services available in the medical marketplace merit
    guaranteed access? What counts as the basic or adequate health care we want to guarantee? What is
    required to achieve our social goals and sustain them over time? For example, American health
    insurance plans have favored low deductibles and co-insurance arrangements, despite the fact that
    economic researchers have demonstrated that this approach fuels unnecessary use of health services
    and makes costs very difficult to control.
    Fairness. Given a determination that all members of society should have guaranteed access to adequate
    health care (the solidarity, wisdom, and prudence questions), how should we distribute the benefits of
    these systems equitably and share equitably the burdens of financing our mutual protection and aid?
    The problem of equitably distributing both benefits and burdens arises from our reciprocal
    commitments to one another in community.
    To resolve problems of fairness we always have to consider both the distribution of benefits and the
    distribution of burdens. For the distribution of health care benefits (guaranteed health care services)
    fairness calls for equitable access based on health care need. Equality among citizens follows on
    universal coverage. No citizen would be excluded (the solidarity question), although some needs (e.g.,
    experimental treatments, cosmetic surgeries) might be excluded from the guarantee (the wisdom
    question). The benefit side of the fairness puzzle must look carefully at the content of the adequate care
    package. Does the benefit package favor certain health problems over others on some basis other than
    the core values of the community for health care? Historically, mental health has been less well served
    than physical health. This may represent a professional and social prejudice unfairly affecting persons
    with mental health problems. The critique from the perspective of fairness needs to look for this
    problem.
    The fairness question also requires an examination of the delivery systems for health care. There may be
    geographic barriers experienced by some members of society. Examples might be rural health care
    where the need for transportation and relative thinness of health care resources can make care
    inaccessible for some members of society even though care is theoretically guaranteed. Unless carefully
    attended to, the delivery system might incidentally incorporate linguistic and other cultural barriers to
    adequate health care that will affect some but not all members of society.
    The other side of the fairness question focuses on the distribution of burden. Here income and health
    status are essential elements of the analysis. Income level is highly relevant to the problem of fairly
    sharing the burden of financing access for all. Tax based systems can achieve more or less fairness.
    Progressive taxation schemes (higher tax rates for higher income households) seek to achieve equality
    through inequality. By setting unequal levels of monetary contribution, progressive schemes approach
    equality of burden. Higher levels of contribution will be less burdensome for wealthier households. A
    straight proportional contribution (imposing the same percentage rate on all income levels) seeks
    equality of burden by a different form of unequal contributions. Equal contribution (the same absolute
    dollar amount irrespective of income level) starts with the goal of equality of burden, but easily results
    in significant inequality of burden across income levels.
    Module 9: Public Health and Health System Reform: Access, Priority Setting, and Allocation of Resources
    247
    Key Questions for Analyzing Ethical
    Reasoning About Access and Allocation
25. Which path of argument seems most
    persuasive in grounding the social
    obligation to provide for health
    protections (human rights, common
    good, enlightened self-interest)?
26. What does social wisdom indicate are
    the essential elements of an adequate
    health system?
27. What are the major indications of
    fairness in the distribution of the
    benefits of the system of health
    protections?
28. What are the major indications of
    fairness in the distribution of the
    burden of maintaining the system of
    protections?
    Government sponsored programs use tax based
    contribution schemes. For example, Medicare is
    federally financed through Social Security taxes and
    provides health insurance for the elderly, persons with
    disabilities, and persons with end-stage renal disease;
    Medicaid provides coverage for certain persons with low
    incomes and is financed by matching funds from various
    state and federal taxes and revenues. Fairness
    evaluations of tax based systems need to explore the
    degree of burden experienced across income levels
    (Reinhardt 1993). Most taxes that support health
    programs are progressive, although some regressive tax
    programs (e.g., tobacco taxes) are also in vogue.
    Insurance premiums use the equal contribution standard.
    Premiums often adjust for age, health status, gender,
    and geographic location. Recent legislation at federal
    and state levels has ruled out some of these ways of
    adjusting premiums as unfair. Deductible, co-insurance,
    and co-pay mechanisms redistribute contributions from
    premiums (all members of a specific group) or taxes (all
    taxpayers) to those who use the health care system. The
    more severe the need (acute or chronic) the heavier the redistribution burden these mechanisms
    produce. The social ethics evaluation of fairness needs to examine the effects of the initial distribution
    and redistribution methods built into various financing programs.
    Democratic process in health policy: participation and representation. It is essential to recognize
    that ethical solutions about access and allocation have to be joined to political solutions. Without this
    pragmatic link, ethical analysis and argument will not drive institutional arrangements. They may help us
    think more clearly about a problem but they remain hypothetical. They will not affect the life of the
    community in a material way unless joined to political process (Starr 1994, Garland 2001).
    The movement into political process makes the ethical question more complicated. The work of
    developing a balanced interpretation of ethical concepts becomes engaged with economic effects, social
    power, and political ideology. It is not merely a question of the more rational or more efficient path. In
    the political arena one has to search for the path that leads to an acceptable outcome, even when that
    outcome is not the preferred outcome from a philosophical point of view.
    In the context of American democracy (as practiced in local and regional communities), representation
    of the public interest in shaping and implementing health protections becomes a critical matter. In
    representative democracy, the elected officials are expected to act on behalf of their constituents but
    also on behalf of the whole community. How they form their conscience leaves considerable room for
    interpretation and persuasion. In the matter of access and allocation, the benefits and burdens of
    coverage and cost control make for contentious discussions.
    Module 9: Public Health and Health System Reform: Access, Priority Setting, and Allocation of Resources
    248
    Advocates of public participation argue that the citizenry
    should take on the responsibility of defining and
    promoting the common good. But the citizens are
    caught in the same conflicting currents of benefits and
    burdens that affect elected representatives.
    Theoretically, open dialogue about matters of shared
    interest (such as the system of health protections) can
    lead to finding better political solutions. The principle
    benefits hoped for from broad public participation are
    clarification of key values and commitment to pursue the
    common good ahead of private good.
    The Oregon Health Plan (see case study below) is an example of an organized approach to define
    adequate health care using public discourse to define core values. It has succeeded to some degree in
    moving toward a politically effective definition of adequate health care. Similarly, the unsuccessful
    Clinton health reform plan called for a high-level national committee process to define basic health care
    (Health Security , Starr, “Logic”).
    Experts and the general community. In 1983 the President’s Commission for the Study of Ethical
    Problems in Medicine and Biomedical and Behavioral Research (President’s Commission) proposed an
    ethical framework for pursuing the definition of adequate health care. For the Commission, a proper
    definition would reflect the kinds of services generally covered in market-driven health insurance, the
    informed opinion of clinical experts about efficacy of various services and standards of practice, and the
    relative value of health care in relation to other social benefits that rely on collective resources. This
    approach uses the market to help identify society’s values about health care. It calls on experts to
    evaluate efficacy of specific services and relative importance for health. In addition to the market
    information (average benefit levels), several forms of social discourse and input can help determine the
    underlying values that should set the standard for wise use of collective resources (Garland 1994). A
    related ethical question asks what is required to achieve our social goals and sustain them over time.
    Social prudence requires policy that acknowledges fiscal constraints and the importance of developing
    policies that can guide ongoing institutions.
    Moving from the ethics of access to the ethics of allocation of resources calls for careful attention to the
    data on which policy makers rely. Allocation of resources in pursuit of access requires the ability to
    achieve valued outcomes in sustainable systems. The systems have to distribute benefits and burdens
    fairly. To do this, society must have a way to determine the relative value of specific interventions in
    medical care and health protection efforts. Society also must be able to assess the relative value of
    various health-related institutions in the light of their effect on the general health status of the
    community and their contribution to the compassionate response to disease, trauma, and care for
    chronically ill or dying persons. To manage health care systems in pursuit of solidarity, wisdom, and
    fairness, leaders need data from quantitative epidemiology (knowledge of the distribution of disease and
    identification of probable causes). Quantitative data is useful but not enough to guide ethical discourse
    at the policy level. Complementary qualitative data from the stories of individuals living out health care
    relationships with one another and among various social institutions help policy makers understand the
    human value dimension of health care organizations. The capacity to care simultaneously for individuals
    and the community drives the assessment of needs and services. Knowledge of the values of the
    Key Questions About Politics and
    Community Responsibility
29. What are the central political
    concerns that need to be incorporated
    into modification and maintenance of
    the system of health protections?
30. How should community responsibility
    figure into political processes
    regarding health protections?
    Module 9: Public Health and Health System Reform: Access, Priority Setting, and Allocation of Resources
    249
    community related to health and illness should guide the social ethics of health care provision.
    Scientific knowledge and technical capacity determine how society can respond to health protection
    opportunities and threats.
    Allocation decisions affect which kind of protections or responses to pathology will be present and
    distributed in the community. Organizational preferences, individual choice, and social interests are in
    constant tension in the pursuit of fair allocations for health care. Social institutions suited to identifying
    the health interests of various parties or constituencies involve democratic and political process as well
    as judicial resolution of controversial claims. Emerging forms of deliberative process can enrich the
    function of political process in the pursuit of fairness, wisdom, and sustainability of the health system
    (Fleck 2002, Goold, Biddle, and Danis 2000, Lenaghan 1999, Garland 1999).
    Participatory or deliberative democracy is an exercise of social responsibility. Three major goals define
    this process: education of the public, transfer of information from the public to policy leaders, and
    enhancement of the sense of responsibility in the community. Each of these goals is variably present in
    public participation activities. Some emphasize the education of the public about significant issues (for
    example, the National Issues Forum). Other programs seek to develop input to policy makers on
    specific issues (for example, the Oregon Health Decisions program, or a public opinion survey
    concerning a specific issue). The Oregon program also sought to build a sense of community
    responsibility for the Oregon Health Plan.
    Several problems accompany the practice of deliberative democracy and public participation in health
    policy (Daniels 1992). The content of policy problems in the health arena are always very complex. Many
    critics say that the public is too ill-informed to have reliable input. They feel that legislators or other
    policy leaders should seek input from experts. Being elected or appointed by elected officials is enough
    input from the public to satisfy the conditions of democracy. In addition, most health legislation and
    policy activities have opportunities for public hearings or statements from the public during their work
    process. Finally, the legislative process is well attended by lobbyists who represent both special
    interests and public interest groups. These people, it is felt, are more informed and focused in their
    input, and therefore, more useful than general public input.
    We advocate general public involvement in health
    policy, but hold that it is important to structure it
    carefully to fit the circumstances of the general public.
    Leaders should not seek from the general public
    answers to questions better asked of experts. They
    should structure the encounters (community meetings,
    focus groups, surveys) to identify values relevant to
    the issue at hand. All members of the general public
    are able to give meaningful answers to questions
    about what makes health care important to them. This
    input helps the leaders specify the value-goals they
    should pursue. This information can help shape the questions leaders should ask of relevant experts
    (Garland 1999). Involving the public is a form of exercising community responsibility for the common
    good. This approach creates a partnership between the public and technical experts. The community
    Key Questions About Public
    Participation and Technical Expertise in
    Health Policy
31. What benefits and risks are associated
    with public participation in the design
    of health policy?
32. What benefits and risks are associated
    with the design of health policy by
    technical experts?
    Module 9: Public Health and Health System Reform: Access, Priority Setting, and Allocation of Resources
    250
    meetings and telephone survey used in the prioritization process for the Oregon Health Plan are an
    example of the partnership approach.
    Experts in economics, insurance, epidemiology, clinical care, and public health have specialized
    knowledge relevant to health policy design. Data and expert opinion from these sources are essential to
    rational policy choices. Providers of special expert information, however, do not constitute the
    appropriate source for the articulation of community values. As members of the community, these
    technical experts represent only a narrow segment of the population. They are not a representative
    group. They tend to define problems from their specialized field. This leads to putting the perspective
    of the special field ahead of the values of the community. Priority should be given to articulating the
    social goals valued by the community. With a clearer view of these values, the experts can help leaders
    find the most effective or efficient way to achieve society’s goals. The distinction between means and
    ends is an important one to bear in mind throughout the policy development process.
    Conclusion
    The ethics of access to health care in a community and of the allocation decisions required to maintain
    the system of health protections lead to fundamental questions about the meaning of life in community.
    Health systems are a social response to common threats to individuals in the community. The degree of
    social commitment to defending against these threats becomes a matter of social and political choice.
    Who is included in the community, what threats merit social defenses, how fairness will guide both
    benefits and burdens, and how the necessary political dimension of health policies, form a multidimensional
    frame for this examination. We derived a checklist of twelve questions that can guide the
    evaluation of a specific proposal for health protections reform (for example, the Oregon Health Plan or
    the Clinton Health Proposal). The same questions can easily be reformulated to guide an assessment of
    the status quo.
    References
    Churchill, Larry, Self-Interest and Universal Health Care , Harvard University Press, 1994.
    Daniels, Norman, “Justice and Health Care Rationing: Lessons from Oregon” in Martin A. Strosberg and
    others, Eds. Rationing America’s Medical Care: The Oregon Plan and Beyond, The Brookings
    Institution, 1992.
    Fields, Mark, “The Concept of the Health System at the Macrosociological Level” Social Science and
    Medicine 1973; 7:763-85.
    Fleck, Leonard, “Rationing: Don’t Give Up” Hastings Center Report 2002; 32(2):35-36.
    Garland, Michael, “Oregon’s Contribution to Defining Adequate Health Care” in Audrey R. Chapman,
    Ed. Health Care Reform: A Human Rights Approach, Georgetown University Press, 1994.
    Garland, Michael, “Experts and the Public: A Needed Partnership for Genetic Policy” Public
    Understanding of Science, vol. 8, no. 3, 241-54 (1999).
    Garland, Michael, “The Oregon Health Plan Ten Years Later: Ethical Questions and Political Answers”
    in Erich H. Loewy and Roberta Springer Loewy, Eds. Changing health Care Systems from Ethical,
    Economic, and Cross Cultural Perspectives , Plenum Publishers, 2001.
    Goold, S, Biddle, A, and Danis, M. “Choosing Healthplans All Together: A Game to Assess Consumer
    Values and Preferences for Health Insurance” Journal of General Internal Medicine 2000; 15: 68-69.
    Module 9: Public Health and Health System Reform: Access, Priority Setting, and Allocation of Resources
    251
    Lantos, John, “Hooked on Neonatology, A Pediatrician Wonders about NICUs’ Hidden Cost of Success”
    Health Affairs 2001; 20(5): 233-240.
    Lenaghan, J. “Involving the Public in Rationing Decisions. The Experience of Citizen Juries” Health
    Policy 1999; 49: 45-61.
    Mann, Jonathan M. “Medicine and Public Health, Ethics and Human Rights” in Dan E. Beauchamp and
    Bonnie Steinbock, New Ethics for the Public’s Health , Oxford University Press, 1999.
    President’s Commission for the Study of Ethical Problems in Medicine and Biomedical and Behavioral
    Research, Securing Access to Care, A Report on the Ethical Implications of Differences in Availability
    of Health Services, Volume One: Report, 1983.
    Reinhardt, Uwe, “Reorganizing the Financial Flows in American Health Care” Health Affairs 1993;
    Supplement: 172-193.
    Schroeder, Steven, “Prospects for Expanding Health Insurance Coverage” New England Journal of
    Medicine 2001; 344(11):847-852.
    Starr, Paul, The Social Transformation of American Medicine, Basic Books, 1982.
    Starr, Paul, The Logic of Health Care Reform, Penguin Books, 1994.
    Health Security, The President’s Report to the American People, The White House Domestic Policy
    Council, 1993.
    Walzer, Michael, Spheres of Justice , Basic Books, 1983; Chapter 3, “Security and Welfare.”
    Module 9: Public Health and Health System Reform: Access, Priority Setting, and Allocation of Resources
    252
    Fact Sheet: Access and Allocation
    A. National Health Expenditures
    America spends $4,637 per person on health — more than any other nation. Still 41.2 million, or 14.6%
    of the U.S. population in 2001 had no third party coverage for personal health services (private
    insurance or coverage under a governmental program).
    Source: U. S. Census bureau (http://www.census.gov/hhes/www/hlthin01.html)
    Total expenditures for health exceed one trillion dollars. The following table shows some of the
    categories of health spending. Personal health services account for 87% of the total. By contrast,
    government public health programs account for only 3% of the total health care pie. The table below
    shows information about US spending for health in 2000.
    National Health Expenditures
    (selected categories)
    Dollars
    (in millions)
    Percent of total
    (Items do not total 100%)
    Total $1299.5 100%
    Hospital Care 412.1 32%
    Physicians and Clinics 286.4 22%
    Dental care 60.0 5%
    Nursing Homes 92.2 7%
    Home Health Care 32.4 2%
    Prescription Drugs 121.8 9%
    Government Public Health 44.2 3%
    Source: Centers for Medicare and Medicaid Services (http://www.cms.hhs.gov/statistics/nhe/historical/t1.asp)
    Selected Web sources of information on allocation and access:
    Centers for Medicare and Medicaid Services – http://www.cms.hhs.gov/
    Kaiser Family Foundation – http://www.kff.org/
    Health Affairs – http://www.healthaffairs.org/
    Module 9: Public Health and Health System Reform: Access, Priority Setting, and Allocation of Resources
    253
    B. General Questions for Analyzing Access and Allocation Issues
    The following questions provide a general strategy for focusing discussion about specific cases. Use
    them to see if the discussion touches on all the points you think are important when considering access
    and allocation. Modify the list to fit your approach to ethical decision-making. A checklist allows you to
    keep track of important matters that are easy to forget in the course of working on a complex issue.
    Frame of reference questions
    ???? Which physiologic or psychological threats to health and well being are at issue in this
    proposed change?
    ???? On which social factors that affect health (e.g., poverty, risky behaviors, environmental
    degradation) does this proposal focus?
    Questions about scope of concern and historical context
    ???? How broadly does the problem case construe the social obligation to provide health protections
    (medical care, long term care, public health, social factors)? What part of the full range of
    health care does this case seek to change?
    ???? How does this proposal fit into its own historical and cultural contexts? What historical
    antecedents bring this case to critical status?
    Questions about how community solidarity functions in defining health policy issues
    ???? How seriously does this proposal take the obligation of social solidarity among members of the
    community (human right or some lesser obligation)?
    ???? Who counts as a member of the community this proposal seeks to protect (eligibility
    requirements)?
    ???? What information or assumptions about the community’s health is this proposal based on?
    Questions about ethical concepts and argumentation
    ???? What vision of an adequate system of health protections is at issue in this case? What view of
    social wisdom does the case problem assume? What kind of social obligation is at issue in this
    case (human rights, common good, enlightened self-interest)?
    ???? How does this case deal with problems of fairness in the distribution of benefits and of
    burdens?
    Questions about community responsibility, political ethics, and technical expertise
    ???? What are the central political concerns involved this case (power issues, status issues)? Which
    stakeholders have power? Which ones don’t?
    ???? What role should public participation play in this case (surveys, hearings, forums)
    ???? What role should technical experts play in this case?
    Module 9: Public Health and Health System Reform: Access, Priority Setting, and Allocation of Resources
    254
    C. Fact sheet for Case Study 1—The Oregon Health Plan
33. Goals of Oregon Health Plan (first legislation 1989)
    ???? Coverage for all Oregonians (17% of population uninsured in 1989)
    ???? Control costs of Medicaid
    ???? Establish priorities for health services (guarantee the most important services)
    ???? Prefer managed care delivery systems and administrative streamlining
    ???? Private insurance reforms
    ???? Mandatory coverage for employed persons
    ???? Employers contribute to premiums
    ???? Guaranteed insurance for persons unable to get private health insurance because of pre-existing
    conditions (High Risk Pool)
34. Target population: about 350,000 uninsured persons
    ???? Medicaid: anyone with income below the Federal Poverty Level
    ???? One third of the uninsured to be helped by Medicaid
    ???? Two thirds of the uninsured to be helped by private insurance reforms
35. Funding
    ???? Medicaid uses state and federal funds (40% state and 60% federal)
    ???? Employment-based insurance would require contributions by employer (at least 50% of premium
    for employee, nothing for dependents).
36. Responsibilities
    ???? Health Services Commission: creates and maintains prioritized list of health services
    ???? Legislature
    ???? Establishes Medicaid budget by “drawing a line” on the list
    ???? Needed to pass legislation to implement the mandatory insurance program*

• The mandatory insurance strategy was never implemented because of complex federal laws protecting employee benefits.
  This part of the strategy was eventually repealed and partially replaced with a program to offer subsidies for insurance
  premiums to low income families. Current reforms (2002) seek to expand that subsidy program and require further waivers
  from the federal government.
  Module 9: Public Health and Health System Reform: Access, Priority Setting, and Allocation of Resources
  255
  D. Fact Sheet for Case Study 2—Using Intravenous Immunoglobulin (IVIG)

1. Clinical Facts
   ???? The FDA lists 6 approved (“label”) indications for IVIG use for which reasonable supportive
   evidence exists.
   ???? Different institutions vary considerably in how IVIG is used even for these labeled indications
   (e.g. some provide routine initial prophylaxis for bone marrow transplant recipients, others limit
   use to prophylaxis for certain high risk recipients or treatment of specific clinical indications.
   ???? Anecdotal reports and small clinical studies have led to a profusion of “off-label” uses. There is
   little supportive evidence for most of these off-label uses, but for some there is good evidence
   of effectiveness (both published and by clinical experience)
   ???? For most indications (label and off-label) no data exist to support any particular treatment
   regimen.
   ???? Current rationing of product occurs implicitly by a first-come-first-serve basis coupled with the
   “squeaky wheel” phenomenon.
2. Administrative Facts
   ???? Several clinical units are frequent users of IVIG for quite distinct clinical indications (bone
   marrow transplants, neuro-muscular disease, infectious diseases, hematologic diseases, and
   immunologic diseases).
   ???? The pharmacy administration had exhausted all available resources for the supply of additional
   product.
   ???? Attempts to address the demand problem through provider education and by asking for
   provider justification for each prescription had failed to change IVIG use patterns.
   ???? Current policy is simply “first come, first served” until the supply of IVIG is exhausted.
   Module 9: Public Health and Health System Reform: Access, Priority Setting, and Allocation of Resources
   256
   E. Fact Sheet for Case Study 3—Cutting a State Health Department Budget
   The state public health agency is required to show the public health service consequences of a 15%
   reduction in its budget. The agency delivers its public health services through five service centers. Here
   is a summary statement of the services selected to feel the effect of the reductions. Other activities of
   each of the centers would remain unaffected by the proposed reductions.
   ???? Impact on Administration and Special Programs: reduce funding to county health departments
   to make flexible strategies for local priorities.
   ???? Impact on Center for Child and Family Health: eliminate teen health advice line and 4 high
   school based teen clinics; reduce support for maternity and well child care for families with low
   incomes.
   ???? Impact on Center for Disease Prevention and Epidemiology: stop paying for drugs used to treat
   Hepatitis A and TB; eliminate support to counties for STD, HIV and TB case management
   programs.
   ???? Impact on Center for Environment and Health Systems: eliminate some staff consultants on
   environmental issues; eliminate staff and subsidies for Emergency Medical Systems program;
   introduce fees for monitoring of public drinking water systems.
   ???? Impact on Public Health Laboratory: eliminate free tests for parasites, syphilis, flu and other
   respiratory viruses; cease participation in U.S. and WHO influenza surveillance program.
   Module 9: Public Health and Health System Reform: Access, Priority Setting, and Allocation of Resources
   257
   Case Study 1: The Oregon Health Plan
   For this case discussion, we will focus on the question of rationing health care that played a central role
   in the health care reform carried out in Oregon during the 1990s.
   In 1989 Oregon passed several pieces of legislation that formed the basis of the Oregon Health Plan
   (OHP). The program aimed at achieving access for all Oregonians to affordable medical care. At the
   time, it was estimated that 350,000 Oregonians (of a population of 1.2 million) lacked coverage. The
   vast majority of these persons had incomes below or near the Federal Poverty Line (FPL). Although the
   reform seeks primarily to expand access to health care, it achieved considerable notoriety as a program
   that “rations health care.”
   The Oregon legislature, led by Senate President John Kitzhaber, MD, crafted a two-part strategy to get
   to universal coverage. First, Oregon Medicaid was redesigned so that everyone below the Federal
   Poverty Line, for example, a family of three with an income of $14,628 (in 2001 dollars), would be
   eligible for coverage. Income only, with no additional categories would be the basis for eligibility. By
   contrast, traditional Medicaid is a program in which income plus some category, particularly families
   with dependent children, constitute eligibility. In 1989, eligibility for Oregon families had fallen to 58%
   of the FPL so that a family of three with an annual income above $ 8, 484 (in 2001 dollars) would not
   be poor enough to qualify for Medicaid.
   Medicaid is a federal-state partnership program in which federal dollars match state dollars based on a
   federal formula that factors in the relative wealth of the state. In 1989 Oregon received $60 for every
   $40 it put into Medicaid. A major part of the politics of the Oregon reform focused on satisfying the
   concerns of the federal government to maintain the matching federal dollars. The use of categories is a
   central feature of the federal Medicaid rules.
   The second strategy required all Oregon employers to participate in the purchase of health insurance
   for their workers. Initially the program would be voluntary, but if employers did not reach the target, the
   requirement would become a mandate. Employers who did not participate in the purchase of health
   insurance for their employees would pay a special tax that the state would use to purchase insurance for
   those left out.
   Based on population demographics, the Medicaid reform was expected to bring coverage to one third of
   the uninsured and the employer-sponsored insurance would bring coverage to the remaining two thirds.
   Three other goals of the OHP were definition of an adequate health care package, improved control of
   the Medicaid budget, and a fair distribution of the burden of paying for universal coverage. The
   adequate package goal was pursued through the formation of a prioritized list of health services. The
   use of the list to structure Medicaid required an agreement with federal Medicaid administrators to
   exempt Oregon from the usual Medicaid rules (called a “waiver”), since the federal rules considered
   some services mandatory and others optional. Oregon felt a prioritized list would better approximate an
   adequate health care package, since some optional items (like hospice care, organ transplants, and
   dental care) were more valuable than some mandatory services included in a general category of
   physician and hospital services. (Several states besides Oregon currently have waivers so they can test
   local experiments with their Medicaid programs.)
   Module 9: Public Health and Health System Reform: Access, Priority Setting, and Allocation of Resources
   258
   Improved control over Oregon’s Medicaid expenditures was expected to result as the legislature used
   the list to determine Medicaid budget (“drawing a funding line on the list”) and from administrative
   efficiencies carried out by the Medicaid Agency. In 1989 the legislators held high hopes for a cost
   control strategy of using managed care for Medicaid clients.
   A special committee, the Health Services Commission, was established to create the prioritized list. The
   list’s first use was to give the legislature a tool for budget allocations. The Commission’s role is to
   identify the relative value of various health services. The legislature’s role is to identify the relative value
   of health care among other uses of the state’s resources (for example, education, transportation,
   economic development, environmental protection, and non-clinical public health services).
   Its second use was to set a benchmark for those private insurance packages that would qualify as
   meeting the employer mandate requirement. The benchmark role was intended to prevent employers
   from fulfilling the letter of the mandate by selecting cheap plans that offered inadequate coverage (thus
   failing to meet the spirit of the law—health protections).
   The law required the Health Services Commission to hold public hearings and community meetings to
   identify the values that should guide the prioritization process. Two civic organizations, Oregon Health
   Decisions and the Oregon Health Action Campaign partnered with the Commission to design,
   publicize, and report the results of the community meetings. The Commission also held public hearings
   and commissioned a random sample telephone survey to complement the community meetings. All of
   these public involvement modalities focused on community values rather than specific services. The
   public was asked, “What makes health care important to us?”
   The Commission also recruited more than 50 teams of clinicians to provide input on the probability that
   specific treatments for specific conditions would achieve results matching the values of the community.
   Each item on the prioritized list consists of a diagnosis and treatment pair (or groups of such pairs). All
   services available in the medical marketplace were open to inclusion on the list. The Commission used
   the International Classification of Diseases and the Current Procedural Technology to establish the
   range of condition-treatment pairs. The task of clinical experts was to help identify what services were
   likely to pay-off in terms of the community’s values for health care.
   The Commission created its own methodology using mortality, morbidity, treatment effectiveness, and
   costs as primary points of reference. Values derived from the community meetings, survey, and hearings
   guided their interpretations. The list that finally received approval from the Federal government for a
   waiver from the usual Medicaid rules had the following logic. First, the lines would be ordered in terms
   of the probability of the treatment being life saving. Lines with higher probability of saving life come
   before those with lower probability. The Commission believed this ordering serves two values expressed
   by the public: life saving and effectiveness of treatments. Second, among those items with identical
   probability of saving life, the commission placed lower cost services ahead of higher cost services. This
   incorporates the community value of cost-effectiveness.
   The third ordering principle required the Commission to intuitively place items that served important
   values identified by the community that were not covered by the first tow principles. These values
   included the following. “Compassion” led to placing hospice and other palliative services high on the
   list. “Prevention” and “Effect on the community” led to placing maternity care, and many screening and
   Module 9: Public Health and Health System Reform: Access, Priority Setting, and Allocation of Resources
   259
   early intervention services high on the list. “Maintaining function” led to placing many mental health
   services and substance abuse rehabilitation services in secure positions.
   Post script: The Medicaid program began operation under federal waiver in February 1994. The list is
   revised every two years. The entire list currently consists of 743 lines and is funded through line 574
   (about 80% of the list). The employer mandate strategy failed politically in 1996 and has been replaced
   with a small subsidy program to aid families with incomes above federal poverty to purchase health
   insurance. Additional support for universal coverage comes from a federally stimulated program in 1998
   to secure health insurance for children.
   Questions for discussion
   ???? Critics have attacked the Oregon Health Plan for rationing health care “only to the poor.” They
   assert that the good idea of extending health coverage to more poor persons was corrupted by
   reducing benefits only for the poor (current Medicaid clients) and using those savings to fund
   care for other poor persons (new Medicaid clients). Fairness, they argue, would require that all
   citizens submit to the rationing of health services in order to extend coverage to more of the
   poor. Supporters of the Oregon Plan have responded that all the poor are better off because the
   extended income range will provide continuous coverage for current clients when their income
   improves. They argue further that the more rational benefit package (based on the list) is a
   better one than the traditional Medicaid package. What are your thoughts about the dangers of
   rationing medical care only among Medicaid eligible persons? How would you argue in favor of
   rationing medical care?
   ???? Critics have objected that the community meetings were not sufficiently representative of the
   people whose lives were affected by the Oregon Health Plan. They argue that meetings should
   have been exclusively for persons below the Federal Poverty Level. Instead, although the
   meetings did include people with incomes below the federal poverty level, most of the people at
   the meetings were from the middle class and therefore their values were not relevant guides for
   setting priorities. This, say the critics, makes the community values of little relevance to the
   Medicaid reform. Supporters have responded that values about access to health care are widely
   distributed so the values of the middle class participants are quite relevant to this issue. They
   also point out that the discussions did not ask people, “What services do you want?” Instead
   they asked “What makes health care important to us?” What do you think of this criticism and
   response? What do you think is an ideal solution to this question of representation in public
   participation efforts?
   ???? Some critics opposed the Oregon Health Plan because it is incremental rather than radical.
   “Being successful with a plan like this,” they argue, “only delays America achieving true
   universal coverage based on progressive financing through taxes. Efforts put into plans like
   Oregon’s distract America from the search for real solutions to the central problem of health
   care.” What is your position on whether incremental reform is a barrier to needed radical
   reform?
   ???? For several decades, public opinion polls have shown that Americans believe in the ideal of
   universal access. In recent years, opinion also supports significant reform of the system. Still,
   Module 9: Public Health and Health System Reform: Access, Priority Setting, and Allocation of Resources
   260
   America continues to have almost 20% of its population uninsured for health care. How do you
   interpret this contradiction between public opinion and public action?
   ???? Some people argue that getting universal coverage won’t do much to help the health status of
   the population. Health is more seriously affected by social causes (obesity, poor nutrition,
   poverty, stressful lifestyles, violence) than by access to medical care. What are your thoughts on
   this critique?
   Module 9: Public Health and Health System Reform: Access, Priority Setting, and Allocation of Resources
   261
   Case Study 2: Multiple Claims and Commitments in a Health Care
   Institution
   This case explores the organizational ethics of dealing with a scarce resource within the context of a
   single health care institution. Different clinical units had differing clinical reasons for using this scarce
   resource for their patients. How do you think about resolving conflicting moral claims?
   Intravenous immunoglobulin (IVIG) is a pooled and concentrated blood product. A single unit of
   human immune globulin comes from 100,000-300,000 units of donated blood. The FDA has identified
   six approved or “labeled” medical conditions for which IVIG is licensed and for which there is general
   agreement among clinicians and variable amounts of supporting evidence. Intravenous immunoglobulin
   has also been used and recommended for a host of “off-label” (i.e. non-approved) indications, for only a
   few of which is there good supporting evidence. Clinicians are free to use an approved substance for
   “off-label” indications, although they incur greater risks of malpractice action in the event of bad
   outcomes.
   A nation-wide shortage of IVIG developed in the mid-1990s resulting from problems with both supply
   and demand. Growing concern about the possible risks of transmitting Hepatitis C and human forms of
   spongiform encephalopathy (Creutzfield-Jacob Disease) by blood products was largely due to reports of
   either disease or positive tests for disease in individual donors whose donated blood was traced to
   pooled blood products. These reports were all the more compelling because they occurred in the wake
   of the HIV threat to blood products in the 1980s.
   Concerns about the safety of the nation’s blood supply led to a marked increase in regulatory activities
   by the FDA around IVIG and its production. Manufacturers were required to make major changes in
   production processes in order to correct deficiencies. This in turn required manufacturers to stop or
   slow production, which had a prolonged negative impact on the output of final product. Some
   manufacturers discontinued production altogether and substantial amounts of product were either
   recalled or withheld because of relatively conservative criteria for defining and increased risk of
   transmission, adding to problems with supply. These events contributed to the current critical shortage
   as well as decreased the long-term potential for recovery of supply.
   In addition to the constraints on supply, demand increased markedly in response to research studies
   and anecdotal reports of IVIG use that expanded the list of off-label indications for IVIG. These offlabel
   uses are not only numerous but often involve high dosage regimens that consume large quantities
   of product. The shortage of IVIG became an issue at the Kos University Memorial Hospital (KUMH) , a
   large academic health center, during the late 1990s when the pharmacy began to experience a marked
   increase in the cost of IVIG (from $15 to > $40-50 per gram) and then reached a point where minimal
   quantities could be obtained at any cost.
   The usual sources of IVIG began to dry up, requiring considerable ingenuity to keep KUMH supplied
   with enough IVIG to meet its ongoing need. By January 1998 the shortage had reached critical levels
   and the pharmacy looked to the administration for a solution.
   Module 9: Public Health and Health System Reform: Access, Priority Setting, and Allocation of Resources
   262
   Questions for Discussion
   ???? Suppose you were the responsible hospital administrator involved in this shortage problem.
   How would you organize your thinking about this dilemma? What are your ethical obligations
   and what process would you call on to serve those obligations?
   ???? Now suppose you were a clinician-leader in one of the specialties that regularly uses IVIG. How
   would you organize your thinking about this dilemma? What are your ethical obligations and
   what process would you call on to serve those obligations?
   ???? Who are all the stakeholders that need to be involved in dealing with this problem? How would
   you most effectively engage them? What rules of discourse do you think ought to guide the
   process of developing a new institutional policy about clinical uses of IVIG?
   ???? What are the ethical constraints faced by each of these stakeholders and how do you think each
   defines the ethical issues she/he faces? What are the ethical stories or central ethical metaphors
   (for example, healer, administrator, patient advocate) that each stakeholder uses to define the
   ethical context within which she/he works in thinks about that work?
   ???? What information do you need to factor into your solution?
   ???? What are the wider ethical implications of this problem? How do you think those implications
   are likely to be framed at different levels of the health care system? Do you think the treating
   physician should be concerned with shortages for other physicians and patients in KUMH? Or
   other hospitals served by the same regional blood supply system? Or the national supply
   system? Or the international supply system?
   ???? What strategies for discourse and decision should the administrative staff use in addressing this
   issue? What are the ethical implications of how one uses data at different levels of decision
   making?
   ???? What is the ethical justification for your recommended strategy?
   ???? What do you think is the nature of what one might call an “ethical perspective” on allocating
   scarce medical resources?
   Module 9: Public Health and Health System Reform: Access, Priority Setting, and Allocation of Resources
   263
   Case Study 3: Making Cuts in a Health Department Budget
   Frame of reference
   A public health agency budget is the locus of allocation decisions. Ethical reflection on allocation
   decisions enters reality by working out a practical resolution of conflict among public health values in
   the context of an agency’s budget. On a regular basis, state public health agencies set budgets and must
   deal with fiscal constraints on what they can do. This case explores the ethics of identifying places in a
   hypothetical state budget where administrators propose cuts to services that can produce an overall
   reduction in expenditures of 15%. In the aftermath of September 11, 2001 and the subsequent recession,
   most states across the country faced severe shortfalls. The 15% budget reduction imagined here is not
   an unusual scenario.
   The North Upland Public Health Budget
   North Upland has a state population of 4 million. Immigration from other states and foreign countries
   exceeds emigration from North Upland to other states and countries. In terms of per capita income it
   falls into the middle tier of states. The state has a lower percentage of persons without health insurance
   than the national average. In the past few years it has moved from one of the lowest rates of
   unemployment in the nation to one of the highest.
   The N.U. Health Department organizes its activities around five Centers: 1) Administration and Special
   Programs, 2) Child and Family Health, 3) Disease Prevention and Epidemiology, 4) Environment and
   Health Systems, and 5) the Public Health Laboratory.
   The North Upland State Health Department has proposed a two-year budget of $49,139,000 for 2002-
3. The total budget of the Health Department is composed of 62% state general funds ($30,447,000)
   and 38% federal funds ($18,661,000). Federal funds are tied to specific programs. The Governor of
   North Upland has asked all state agencies to construct a budget showing what they would cut if faced
   with a 15% reduction in state general funds. The list below shows more than $4.5 million in cuts
   proposed by the Health Department along with a narrative showing the anticipated consequences for
   the health of the population if these cuts are made.
   Proposed budget cuts and their consequences
4. From the Office of the Administrator and Program Services
   ($1,000,000 cut from a budget of $6,667,000)
   ???? Reduce general purpose public health support payments to counties
   Savings: $1,000,000
   Impact: This will reduce funds counties use to make flexible adjustments to various
   public health activities based on local priorities.
5. From the Center for Child and Family Health
   ($1,692,000 cut from $11,280,000)
   Module 9: Public Health and Health System Reform: Access, Priority Setting, and Allocation of Resources
   264
   ???? Eliminate Teen Health Information Line
   Savings: $97,000
   Impact: Would cut in half the capacity of the major metropolitan county health
   department to answer calls from an estimated 4000 teens on a variety of health issues.
   ???? Eliminate funding for 4 High School Based Clinics
   Savings: $415,000
   Impact: Would probably result in closure of these programs which will have to be fully
   funded by the School District which faces severe loss of revenue at this time.
   ???? Reduce support for Perinatal Clinical Services and case management
   Savings: $870,000
   Impact: Reduce support for counties to provide maternity and well baby services and
   case management for clients with complicated cases. Involves and estimated 10,400
   mothers and babies.
   ???? Abolish state funding portion of the Child Health Program
   Savings: $310,000
   Impact: Reducing payments to counties for this service affects a variety of well-child
   programs provided free of charge through county clinics. Examples: SIDS prevention,
   nutrition services, injury prevention, dental health education, adolescent health
   promotion. Counties would have to come up with the funds or eliminate services.
6. From the Center for Disease Prevention and Epidemiology
   ($1,035,000 cut from a budget of $6,900,000)
   ???? Eliminate provision of specific medical supplies and services.
   Savings: $425,000
   Impact: The state would no longer provide immune globulin used to prevent the
   spread of hepatitis A or drugs used to treat persons with active or latent TB. The state
   currently provides free treatment for 1570 persons with active or latent TB and 2900
   persons exposed to Hepatitis A. In the future, persons in need of these drugs will have
   to pay for them or receive them through some private charitable source.
   ???? Reduce special payments to Counties for HIV/TB/STD programs
   Savings: $610,000
   Impact: This will eliminate the HIV case management program for persons with HIV
   and TB. It will diminish the capacity to notify sexual partners of persons who have been
   diagnosed with a sexually transmitted disease.
7. From Environment and Health Systems
   ($495,000 cut from a budget of $3,300,000)
   ???? Eliminate staff in the Environmental Services and Consultation Office
   Savings: $165,000
   Impact: This will reduce the capacity of the office to enforce restaurant, pool, and
   Module 9: Public Health and Health System Reform: Access, Priority Setting, and Allocation of Resources
   265
   lodging standards throughout the state. It will also eliminate direct service for
   environmental health issues in twelve counties that now rely on the state office. This
   funding might be replaced by increasing licensing fees to restaurants, swimming pools
   and public lodging businesses.
   ???? Eliminate staff and subsidies in Emergency Medical Systems program.
   Savings: $165,000
   Impact: This will affect the ability of the program to oversee training certification,
   professional standards, investigation of complaints, and statewide system development
   and coordination. Subsidies (reduced licensure fees) will no longer be provided to
   small, primarily volunteer, ambulance services in rural areas.
   ???? Initiate fees for Public Drinking Water Systems
   Savings: $165,000
   Impact: Replaces state dollars with new fees on systems (requires new specific
   legislation). Federal matching dollars (1:1) will be lost if replacement money is not
   available. Reduces the ability of county water programs to monitor safe drinking water
   standards.
8. From the Public Health Laboratory
   ($ 344,000 cut from a budget of $2,300,000)
   ???? Eliminate free parasite testing.
   Savings: $114,000
   Impact: The lab would no longer provide at state expense testing for parasites such as
   Giardia (900 cases reported in 1998), Cryptosporidium, and many others. This will
   require local health departments to pay for tests needed to detect and control
   community outbreaks or identify the source (e.g., food handlers, day care centers).
   ???? Eliminate free syphilis testing.
   Savings: $115,000
   Impact: We will no longer provide screening and confirmatory tests for syphilis at
   state expense. Local health departments, charity clinics, family planning clinics, and
   correctional institutions will have to pay for tests needed to detect, monitor, and
   control syphilis. We anticipate an increase in the number of cases and severity of
   disease in those infected.
   ???? Eliminate free Influenza cultures and other respiratory infectious agents
   Savings: $115,000
   Impact: We will no longer test at state expense for influenza and other respiratory
   viruses. We will no longer participate in the U.S. and WHO influenza surveillance
   program. We will rely on others to detect a change in the flu strain that might affect
   citizens in North Upland.
   Module 9: Public Health and Health System Reform: Access, Priority Setting, and Allocation of Resources
   266
   Case Study 3: Discussion
   The ethical pattern involved in this case involves “least harm” decision-making, where harm is identified
   by loss of valued outcomes as a result of budget reductions. An agency typically projects its budget by
   assuming the continuation of the activities carried out with the resources of previous budget. The
   agency then makes the case for two potential steps. It may propose to discontinue or reduce a previous
   activity. It may propose to initiate some new activity. The situation we will consider raises questions
   involved in reducing and discontinuing activities.
   The case discussion should look at both the content (the reasons that support the choice) and the
   process by which the identification of reductions takes place. The content aspect considers ethical
   categories such as common good, fairness, justice, and rights. The process aspect considers democratic
   values such as participation, voice, representation, and sacrifice.
   Context
   Although the case provides little information about context (social, economic, political, historical) for
   these decisions, your discussion should explore what context issues your believe are essential for
   analyzing the case from the perspective of ethics.
   Are there population health factors (e.g., age, state wealth, endemic diseases, environmental threats,
   etc.) that would be important considerations in selecting which of the programs would be cut?
   (Remember, 85% of the budget is still funded.) Draw up a list of important population health factors
   you think must be considered in this decision.
   From a population perspective, what values do you want to use to guide the selection of budget cuts?
   The North Upland Health Department states that its mission is: “To protect, preserve, and promote the
   health of all the people of the state; to prevent unnecessary death and disability, improve the health
   status of all N.U. inhabitants, and to reduce the per-capita cost of illness care for all North Uplanders.”
   Does this capture all the values you want to bring to bear on allocation decision-making? Make a list of
   any values you don’t want to be left out of the consideration.
   Ethical content
   ???? What are the principles you would use to guide choices and evaluate the results of these budget
   choices? Try to articulate the rules or “guidelines” you think ought to be used to see that budget
   reductions deal with the following ethical concerns.
   ???? How should we make sure that the cuts are fair to all involved?
   (State the decision-rule you think should be followed to achieve a fair decision.)
   ???? What can we do to make sure that the cuts meet the requirements of justice ?
   (State the decision-rule you think should be followed to achieve a just decision.)
   ???? How can we be assured that the cuts serve the common good?
   (State the decision-rule you think should be followed to achieve a decision that promotes or
   Module 9: Public Health and Health System Reform: Access, Priority Setting, and Allocation of Resources
   267
   protects the common good.)
   ???? What other ethical norms do you believe are essential to making an ethical decision about
   reducing (or expanding) a public health budget?
   (State the decision-rule you think should be followed to achieve a decision that incorporates
   these other norms.)
   Ethical Process
   ???? This part of the discussion focuses on how the decision is made. Process ideas will focus on
   who should have a voice in the decision, how representation of stakeholders is achieved, what
   rules of discourse are followed, and how a conclusion is reached.
   ???? Who do you think should be consulted about these cuts? How should they be notified?
   ???? How should inputs be sought?
   ???? How should the decision maker use the inputs?
   ???? How should the input process (or debate) be brought to a conclusion so a decision can be
   made?

You can pick which model you’d like to work on.  Please follow the steps below.

Book:  Community and Public Health, Nina M. Bell and Robert H. Friis 2^nd Edition

Ethics in Public Health Case Study

[WLO: 3] [CLO: 6]

Prior to beginning work on this assignment, read Chapter 5 in your textbook, the Principles of the Ethical Practice of Public Health (Links to an external site.) article, and the appropriate pages from Ethics and Public Health: Model Curriculum according to the module you choose below.

For your assignment,

• Select one of the modules presented in the instructions below.
• Provide accurate and appropriate responses to the five worksheet questions associated with the module’s case study.
• Explain your answers using critical thinking and research.

Step 1: Select one of the following case studies located in Ethics and Public health: Model Curriculum for your paper and use the associated worksheet to complete the assignment.

Choose one of the following:

• Module 4: Community-Based Practice and Research: Collaboration and Sharing Power
  • Read the introductory information: pages 103 to 118 (15 pages)
  • Read Case Study 1: Providing Culturally Appropriate Services in a Changing Community: pages 119 through 122 (4 pages)
  • Use the worksheet: Module 4: Case Study 1: Providing Culturally Appropriate Services in a Changing Community
• Module 7: Ethical Issues in Environmental and Occupational Health.
  • Read the introductory information: pages 159 through 169 (10 pages)
  • Read Case Study 1: Environmental Injustice in Homer, Louisiana: pages 170 through 173 (4 pages)
  • Use worksheet: Module 7: Case Study 1: Environmental Injustice in Homer, Louisiana
• Module 9: Public Health and Health System Reform: Access, Priority Setting, and Allocation of Resources
  • Read the introductory information: pages 241 through 252 (12 pages)
  • Read Case Study 3: Making Cuts in a Health Department Budget, including the fact sheet on page 256 and pages 263 through 267 (6 pages)
  • Use the worksheet: Module 9: Case Study 3: Making Cuts in a Health Budget Department Budget

Step 2: Download the worksheet for your selected module and address the questions in the worksheet using complete sentences.

Please know that although this is not a formal written paper, you still need to use APA formatting.

Your completed worksheet

• Must use double-spacing with 1-inch margins
• Must include a separate title page with the following:
  • Title of paper
  • Student’s name
  • Course name and number
  • Instructor’s name
  • Date submitted
    For further assistance with the formatting and the title page, refer to APA Formatting for Word 2013 (Links to an external site.).
• Must document any information used from sources in APA style as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center’s Citing Within Your Paper (Links to an external site.)
• Must use at least two additional scholarly, peer-reviewed, or credible sources in addition to the course text and case study itself to support your answers to the case study questions. The Ashford University Library is a great place to find resources. Watch the Ashford University Library Quick ‘n’ Dirty (Links to an external site.) tutorial for research tips.
  • The Scholarly, Peer Reviewed, and Other Credible Sources (Links to an external site.) table offers additional guidance on appropriate source types. If you have questions about whether a specific source is appropriate for this assignment, please contact your instructor. Your instructor has the final say about the appropriateness of a specific source for a particular assignment.
• Must include a separate references page that is formatted according to APA style as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center. See the Formatting Your References List (Links to an external site.) resource in the Ashford Writing Center for specifications.